User manual | Norstar ul 824_dr5_

t t t t t t t t t t t t t t t t t t t t t t t t t t t t t t t t t t t t t t t t t
Modular DR5
Installer Guide
telemanuals.com
Networking with
The Big Picture
Bits and pieces
Loop start trunks
Configuration requirements
E&M trunks
DID trunks
Benefits
Security
Unified dialing plan
Call handling with target lines
Customer Use
In the public network
In the private network
In the
system
Installation
1
1
4
5
5
6
8
10
13
15
17
18
22
25
29
Module installation
Recommended layout
System hardware configuration
Mounting a module
installing the Feature Cartridge
Installing an Expansion Cartridge
Installing a Trunk Cartridge
Upgrading the Software Cartridge
Wiring
Cable routing in the cable trough
Connecting internal wiring
Connecting external lines
Connecting DS-30 cables
Emergency telephones
Connecting emergency telephones
Testing the emergency telephones
telephones
Installing
Telephones
Wall-mounting a telephone
31
34
36
38
41
42
44
46
48
48
49
50
52
53
53
54
55
55
56
Modular DR5 Installer Guide
telemanuals.com
ii Contents
Applying the button cap labels
default button assignments
Optional equipment
‘Auxiliary Ringer
External music source
Installing an external paging system
Power Bar installation
Power up the
system
Telephone relocation and replacement
Automatic Telephone Relocation
Telephone replacement
58
59
63
63
64
65
66
67
68
68
69
Regulations
71
Specifications and wiring charts
75
Port numbering
Port number coding on the wiring charts
system numbering plan
KSU wiring charts
Station Module wiring chart
Loop Start or Cl Trunk Cartridge wiring chart
E&M or
Trunk Cartridge wiring chart
Using the
wiring chart
DID Trunk Cartridge wiring chart
Using the DID wiring chart
Programming
Startup defaults
Configuration defaults
General administration defaults
Configuration overview
How programming is done
Reviewing programmed settings
Programming tools
Entering Configuration
Exiting Configuration
Configuration headings
Modular DR5 Installer Guide
79
79
79
82
85
86
87
87
91
91
95
97
97
102
108
108
108
110
111
111
112
telemanuals.com
Contents iii
114
115
Using the Overlay
The
display buttons
Programming details
Data
Trunk lines and Target lines
T r u n k s
Target lines
Remote system access
Copying Trunk and Line data
Trunk data
Line data
Line Access
Call Handling
Miscellaneous
System Data
Set copy
Applying Set copy
116
117
117
118
121
122
124
125
131
134
139
143
151
155
157
159
Maintenance
Beginning a Maintenance session
System Version
Status
Examining
Status
Module Status
Examining Module Status
Diagnostics
Running Diagnostics
System Test Log
Examining the System Test Log
System Administration Log
Examining the System Administration Log
Alarm codes
If you see an alarm code
Event messages
Dealing with event messages
Significant event messages
Complete list of event numbers
Maintenance records
Recording information
Modular
160
161
163
164
170
176
177
180
180
183
183
185
185
190
190
190
193
195
195
Installer Guide
telemanuals.com
iv Contents
Version number record
System Test Log
System Administration Log record
Troubleshooting
Getting ready
Other troubleshooting tools
Types of problems
General troubleshooting procedure
Installation check
Testing the
system
Checking the hardware
Problems with equipment
equipment trouble
Symptoms at the alarm telephone
Problems with lines
Auto-answer line rings at a
telephone
Prime telephone gets misdialed calls
Selected line shows Not in service
Selected line pool shows No free lines
Problems with features
Problem descriptions
Network telephone trouble for remote users
Calling directly to
Calling
through
Using
remote features
Calling through
to another system
Problems with optional equipment
Analog Terminal Adapter
Auxiliary ringer
Call Identification Interface
External paging
Glossary
Modular DR5 Installer Guide
196
197
198
199
199
199
200
201
202
202
204
207
207
211
213
216
216
217
218
219
219
222
222
226
2 2
230
234
234
235
236
237
239
9
can now be part of a corporate telecommunications
to an existing private network,
network. You can connect
or to other
systems to form a
network.
This chapter explains:
how
components behave in a network,
how they benefit your business, and
how you can configure
to achieve those benefits.
The Big Picture
uses enhanced trunking to join other
or customer
equipment in a private network. Authorized users can also
access tie-lines, Central Office lines, and
features from
system.
outside the
. . . Private network
Public network
as an OPX
can be used as an off premise extention (OPX) from a
PBX. In order to support this application, the OPX lines must be
engineered not to exceed 7
total loop loss from the serving
KSU.
central office to the demarcation point at the
Modular DR5 Installer Guide
2 Networking with
Bits and pieces
The trunks and lines that
uses make network access
possible. Target lines concentrate incoming calls on fewer trunks,
and three types of trunks provide the network access:
E&M trunks handle incoming and outgoing traffic between
system and the private network.
the
l
DID trunks route incoming calls from the public network
directly to telephones within
without an attendant.
loop start trunks handle incoming and outgoing calls between
and the public network.
l
Benefits
Security
provides the security that expanded access demands.
You can:
control remote access to tie-lines,
Office lines, and
system features by setting up a specific Class of Service for
each type of caller,
restrict outgoing calls to certain telephone numbers or area
codes by applying dialing filters to lines and telephones, and
l
screen remote callers by configuring trunks to answer with
DISA, a system response that requires callers to enter a valid
password.
Unified dialing plan
When you link a number of
systems into a network, you
can configure them so that the length of Directory Numbers
the line pools, and the line pool access codes are
consistent from one system to the next.
Call handling capabilities
In the
system, the concentrated environment supports
call handling features on up to 184 lines, of which 80 are physical
trunks and 104 are target (virtual) lines.
Modular
Installer Guide
Networking with Not-star 3
Customer use
Callers in the public network can:
call directly to one or more
telephones,
call into the
system and select outgoing tie-lines to
access the private network,
call into the
system and select outgoing Central
Office lines to access the public network, and
.
call into the
system and use remote features.
Callers in the private network can:
call directly to one or more
l
telephones,
call into the
system and select outgoing tie-lines to
access other nodes in the private network,
call into the
system and select outgoing Central
Office lines to access the public network, and
call into the
Callers in the
system and use remote features.
system can:
call directly to a specific
telephone,
select outgoing tie-lines to access the private network,
select outgoing tie-lines to access features that are available
on the private network,
select outgoing Central Office lines to access the public
network, and
use all of the
features.
Modular
Installer Guide
4 Bits and Pieces
Bits and pieces
To understand the capabilities that are described later in this
chapter, you need to know how the trunks and lines behave in
the
system.
system and
A trunk is a physical connection between the
the outside world. A line is a flexible communication path
between a
user and the outside world. This allows a
one-to-many relationship between trunks and lines.
What this means is that one trunk does not have to represent
one line, but can represent several lines. You achieve this in two
ways:
If you want one trunk to serve many
system
lines, you configure it as Auto-answer. The
answers calls and maps incoming digits onto numbers that
you define in programming. The numbers can access the
system, so that callers can then use selected features or call
out to another destination (calling through the system). The
numbers can also access target lines that appear on one or
telephones.
more
1. Auto-answer trunks
incoming calls on one trunk can map onto a
number of different target lines. These are virtual lines that
can appear on a
telephone like any other line. They
are incoming lines only, and cannot be selected for outgoing
calls. They are identified to the system by their number. Any
line with a number from 081 to 184 is a target line.
2. Target lines
Of course, you can still have a one-to-one relationship between a
trunk and a line. In this case, you configure the trunk as
manual-answer.
You can read more on target lines in the Programming chapter.
To learn more about the types of trunks and the important
differences between auto-answer and manual-answer trunks,
read on.
Modular DR5 Installer Guide
Bits and Pieces 5
Loop start trunks
Loop start trunks give you incoming and outgoing access to the
public network. However, you would typically configure your
system with loop start trunks for outgoing calls and DID trunks for
incoming calls. Loop start trunks can be configured as
manual-answer or auto-answer.
When a call comes in on a manual-answer loop start trunk, it
alerts at all telephones with that line appearance.
When a call comes in on an auto-answer loop start trunk, you
hear a stuttered dial tone if the trunk is configured to answer with
DISA. Then you must use a DTMF telephone to enter a
Class of Service password.
When a call comes in on an auto-answer loop start trunk, you
hear the system dial tone if the trunk does not have DISA, or if
the Class of Service password is valid. Use a DTMF telephone to
enter a target line number, the
DN, a line pool access
code, or a remote feature code.
To place an outgoing call, select a loop start line by dialing a line
pool access code, pressing a line button on the telephone, or
pressing a memory button that has been programmed with a line
pool access, code.
Configuration ‘requirements
You need one Loop Start Trunk Cartridge or Cl Trunk Cartridge
for every four trunks beyond the eight that come with the Key
Service Unit. If you wish to configure your loop start lines as
auto-answer, the lines must have disconnect supervision. You
will also need one
Trunk Cartridge for every two loop
start lines that you configure as auto-answer. An auto-answer
loop start trunk can give you the same kind of direct inward
dialing function as a DID trunk, but you will require
Trunk Cartridges to receive the incoming digits from the Central
Office.
Modular DR5 installer Guide
6 Bits and Pieces
You may configure a loop start line as the Prime line for a
telephone.
E&M trunks
An E&M trunk gives incoming and outgoing tie-line access from
other systems in the private network to the
system. E&M
trunks can be configured as manual-answer or auto-answer.
cartridges
..............................
.............................
When a call comes in on a manual-answer E&M trunk, it alerts at
all telephones with that line appearance.
Modular
Installer Guide
Bits and Pieces 7
When a call comes in on an auto-answer E&M trunk, you hear a
stuttered dial tone if the trunk is configured to answer with DISA.
Then you must use a DTMF telephone to enter a 6-digit Class of
Service password.
When a call that comes in on an auto-answer E&M Trunk, you
hear the system dial tone if the trunk does not have DISA, or if
the password is valid. Use a DTMF telephone to enter a target
line number, the
DN (the number that will call for a Class of
Service password), a line pool access code, or a remote feature
code.
When a call comes in on an auto-answer E&M trunk from an
intelligent network, the
system answers the call and
interprets the incoming digits:
l
If the digits map onto a target line,
routes the call to
devices with an appearance of that line.
all
If the digits map onto the
DN, you hear a stuttered dial
tone, and must use a DTMF telephone to enter a valid Class
of Service password to get the system dial tone.
If the digits map onto the Auto DN (the number for direct
system access), you hear the system dial tone, and can use
a DTMF telephone to enter a target line number, the
DN, a line pool access code, or a remote feature code.
To place an outgoing call, select an E&M trunk by dialing a line
pool access code, pressing a line button on the telephone, or
pressing a memory button that has been programmed with a line
pool access code.
Configuration requirements
In your configuration, one
Trunk Cartridge is required
for every two E&M trunks. One
Trunk Cartridge is
also required for every two DTMF receivers required for
on
loop start trunks.
You may configure an E&M trunk as the Prime line for a
telephone.
Modular DR5 Installer Guide
8
and Pieces
DID trunks
DID trunks give you direct inward dialing (DID) from the public
network to the
system. A typical application of these
trunks is to map incoming digits onto target line appearances
system. DID trunks can operate only as
within the
auto-answer trunks.
Target lines
084
I -
r
Central office
Modular DR5 Installer Guide
-
Bits and Pieces 9
When a call comes in on a DID trunk,
incoming digits:
interprets the
If the digits map onto a target line,
routes the call to
all
devices with an appearance of that line.
l
If the digits map onto the
DN, you hear a stuttered dial
tone, after which you must use a DTMF telephone to enter a
valid Class of Service password to get the system dial tone.
If the digits map onto the Auto DN, or if the Class of Service
password is valid, you hear the system dial tone. Then you
can use a DTMF telephone to enter a target line number, a
line pool access code, or a remote feature code.
Configuration requirements
You need one DID trunk cartridge for every four DID trunks. Each
DID Trunk Cartridge has four DID trunks and four DTMF
receivers dedicated to those trunks.
You cannot configure a DID trunk as the Prime line for a
telephone.
Modular DR5 installer Guide
10
Benefits
Benefits
Security
In the Capabilities section of Administration programming, there
are several ways of protecting your
system from
unauthorized access.
Class of Service
Class of Service refers to the capabilities that
provides to
users who access the system from the public or private network.
The Class of Service includes:
filters that restrict dialing on the line, and
l
an access package, which defines the set of line pools that
may be accessed and whether or not the user has access to
the paging feature.
The Class of Service that is applied to an incoming
remote-access call is determined by:
the filters that you apply to the incoming trunk, or by
the Class of Service password that the caller used to gain
access to the
system.
In cases where
is not applied to incoming calls, the remote
caller can change the Class of Service by dialing the
DN
and entering a Class of Service password.
To program Class of Service passwords, see Administration in
the Programming chapter.
Dialing filters
You can use dialing filters to restrict the numbers that may be
dialed on any external line within your
system. You may
specify up to 100 dialing filters for the system. A dialing filter
consists of up to 48 restrictions and their associated exceptions.
Modular
Installer Guide
Benefits 11
Dialing within the system
To restrict dialing within the system, you can apply dialing filters
to outgoing external lines (as line filters), to telephones (as set
filters), and to external lines on specific telephones (as line per
set filters).
Line
Filter
line 1
no long
distance
except area
codes 212.
718.214.713
Set
Filter
line 1
distance
1
no long
distance
line 5
Line per Set
Filter
line 5
no long
distance
except
area codes
Dialed digits must
both the line filter and the set filter. The
line per set filter overrides the line filter and set filter.
In this diagram, a caller using line 1 could only dial long-distance
numbers to area codes 212 and 718. A caller using line 3 could
not dial any long-distance numbers. A caller using line 5 could
dial long-distance numbers to area codes 212, 718, and 415.
Set filters have no effect on the numbers that are dialed
on an E&M trunk.
Modular DR5 Installer Guide
12 Benefits
Dialing outside the system
To restrict dialing outside the system (once a caller gains remote
access), you can apply dialing filters to incoming external lines
(as remote filters).
Line
Filter
Remote
caller
In this case, dialed digits must pass both the remote filter and the
line filter. A remote caller can override these filters by dialing the
DN and entering a Class of Service password.
For programming instructions, see the Programming chapter of
this Installer Guide.
Direct inward system access (DISA)
To control access from the public or private network, you can
configure auto-answer trunks to answer with DISA. Remote
callers hear a stuttered dial tone and must then enter a Class of
Service password that determines what they are allowed to do in
the system.
Auto-answer loop start and E&M trunks are configured to answer
with
by default.
Note;’ You must have one
Trunk Cartridge for every
two auto-answer loop start trunks.
Modular
Installer Guide
Benefits 13
DID trunks cannot be configured to answer with DISA. If you
want incoming DID calls to be answered with DISA, configure the
system with a
DN. incoming DID calls that map onto the
DN are then routed to a line that has DISA.
For programming instructions, see the Programming chapter of
this Installer Guide.
Unified dialing plan
The
system does not support a coordinated dialing plan
for other systems in the network. However, if you are configuring
more than one Nor-star system in your network, you can make
access between the systems much easier with a unified dialing
plan.
Directory Numbers
Make sure that the length of your
systems.
is the same for all the
Line pools
If the
systems are close to each other geographically,
you can conserve resources by not duplicating access. For
example, system A has a line pool to New York, System B has a
line pool to Los Angeles, and system C has a line pool to Dallas.
A
user in system A calls system C to get the line pool to
Dallas.
Line pool access codes
To simplify access between
systems, all line pools that
go to the same destination should have the same line pool
access code. For example, system A and system B both have a
line pool to London. You can configure both systems with the
same line pool access code for the Nashville line pool.
Modular
Installer Guide
14 Benefits
Unified dialing plan among four systems
A dialing plan similar to the one in the following figure will let you
create a company directory that includes the line pool access
codes.
Netwk #: 5234
Internal
Netwk
6334
234
System A
System
E&M
E&M
System C
System D
Netwk
Internal
8534
534
Internal
434
For instance, the person on System A at telephone 234 can
select an Intercom button and dial 7434.
This means that telephone 234 has dialed the line pool access
code of the trunk to System C, and will receive the dial tone of
System C. The digits 434 then map to the Received number 434,
and ring telephone 434 with an appearance of the associated
target line.
Modular DR5 Installer Guide
Benefits 15
Call handling with target lines
Having target lines with the
system means that call
coverage is extended. All call handling features that apply to
regular lines also apply to target lines.
Here are some brief descriptions of features that apply to any line
appearance on a
telephone. For complete information on
these features, see the Telephone features chapter of this
‘Installer Guide.
Auxiliary Ringing
If the
system has an auxiliary ringer (a bell that is not part
of a telephone), the target line can be administered so that the
auxiliary ringer alerts in addition to the telephone ringer.
Callback
When an external call on a target line is transferred to a busy
telephone or not answered after a specified number of rings, the
call automatically rings at the Prime telephone for that line. The
display shows that the telephone was busy or that the call was
not answered.
Camp on
Even when a telephone is busy, a call on a target line can be
routed to the telephone, where it waits in a queue until the
telephone is not busy.
Delayed Ring Transfer
Target line calls that go unanswered after a specified number of
rings can be routed to the Prime telephone if programmed to do
so in Configuration.
Held Line Reminder
When a target line call is placed on hold, the telephone gives two
reminder tones at periodic intervals until the call is taken off hold.
This happens only if Held reminder is activated during
Configuration programming.
Modular
Installer Guide
16 Benefits
Overflow Call Routing
If a call comes in for a target line that is busy,
routes the
call to the Prime telephone for that target line. If you don’t assign
a Prime telephone for the target line or if a call cannot be
mapped onto a target line, the call will go to the Prime telephone
for the incoming trunk.
Prime Telephone Call Capture features
See the Prime Telephone User Card for details.
Privacy
When a
user is on an external call and the Privacy
feature is turned on, no other
telephone with the same
target line can join in on the call. If Privacy is turned off, another
person with the same line can press the line button to join your
conversation, forming a conference.
Service Modes
When there are fewer people available to answer calls during
lunch hours, nights, or weekends, you can administer the system
so that target line calls ring at certain telephones.
Modular DR5 Installer Guide
Customer Use
17
Customer Use
This section shows sample configurations for different types of
network access. Each example has four parts:
A scenario explains the caller’s goal and what is required to
achieve it.
l
.
l
A diagram shows the network configuration that supports the
application.
A list shows the
configuration.
hardware required to support the
Tables show the Configuration and Administration
programming required. Only those settings that are important
to network access are described here.
Modular
Installer Guide
18 Customer Use
In the public network
Call one or more
telephones
Ms. Nelson is a bank customer who has a question for an
accountant. She dials the telephone number that maps onto
target line 083. All of the accountants’ telephones ring.
Target line
083
Ms. Nelson
Accountant
Accountant
(telephone 226)
Central office
Hardware: any version of KSU, one Trunk Module, one DID
Trunk Cartridge.
Heading
1.
Data
5. System Data
Modular
Parameter
Setting
Rec’d #
Line 009
4321 (for Line 083)
DID
Rec’d # length
4 (can be up to 7
digits, but must match
number of digits sent
by Central Office)
Installer Guide
Customer Use 19
Call
and select tie lines to a private network
A manager in Georgia wants to use the tie lines at headquarters
to call Washington. He dials a telephone number that maps onto
DN, enters a Class of Service (COS) password, then
the
dials a line pool access code to select a tie line to Washington.
Central office
Hardware: any version of KSU, one Trunk Module, one DID
Trunk Cartridge, two
Trunk Cartridges (for the three
trunks in the line pool to Washington).
Heading
Parameter
Setting
Incoming trunk:
Data
1.
Line 009
DID
4. Miscellaneous
DN
5. System Data
Outgoing trunk:
Data
1.
4. Miscellaneous
5. Capabilities
Rec’d
length
5321
4 (can be up to 7
digits, but must match
number of digits sent
by Central Office)
Line 013
Line type
E&M
Pool F
Line pool F
6 (up to 4 digits)
Define filters: Define
remote access pkgs.
Assign a dialing filter
to the line. Assign
COS passwords and
filters for each class
of service.
Modular DR5 Installer Guide
20 Customer Use
Call
and select lines to the public network
Gord wants to make a long-distance business call from home. To
avoid being charged, he dials the telephone number that maps
onto the Auto DN at work. After hearing the dial tone, Gord dials
a line pool access code to select a line to the public network. He
then dials the long-distance number.
r
Gord
at home
Business
client
DID
Central office
Line
Central office
Hardware: any version of KSU, one Trunk Module, one DID
Trunk Cartridge.
Modular
Installer Guide
Customer Use 21
Parameter
Setting
Data
Line 009
DID
4. Miscellaneous
Auto DN
4321
5. System Data
Rec’d # length
4 (can be up to 7
digits, but must match
number of digits sent
by Central Office)
Heading
Incoming trunk:
1.
Define dialing filters.
Define remote access
packages. Assign a
remote filter and
remote package to
the line.
5. Capabilities
Outgoing trunk:
1.
Data
4. Miscellaneous
5. Capabilities
Line 001
Line type
Loop
Pool A
Line pool A
1234
Assign a dialing filter
to the line.
Modular DR5 Installer Guide
22
Customer Use
In the private network
Call one or more
telephones
The production supervisor in Houston selects the less-expensive
company tie line to call the manager at the Administration office
in Dallas. Once the line is selected, the production supervisor
dials the digits that will map onto the target line of the manager in
Dallas.
target line
E&M
083
Manager
in Dallas
PBX in
Houston
Hardware : any version of KSU, one Trunk Module, one
Trunk Cartridge.
Heading
Parameter
Setting
Rec’d #
4321 (for target line
083)
E&M
Auto
incoming trunk:
1.
Data
Line 009
Ans Mode
5. System Data
Rec’d # length
4 (can be up to 7
digits, but must match
number of digits sent
by Central Off ice)
Call
and select tie lines to other nodes in the
private network
At a branch office, Joan selects a tie line to the government office
downtown. After hearing the dial tone, she dials a line pool
access code to select another tie line to a government office in
the next town.
Modular
Installer Guide
Customer Use 23
Key system
Hardware: any version of KSU, one Trunk Module, two
Trunk Cartridges (for the three lines in the line pool
and the one incoming line)
Heading
Incoming trunk:
Data
1.
Parameter
Setting
Line 009
Ans mode
E&M
Auto
Define dialing filters.
Define remote access
packages. Assign a
remote line filter and
remote package to
the trunk.
5. Capabilities
Outgoing trunk:
Data
1.
4. Miscellaneous
5. Capabilities
Call
Line 010
Line type
E&M
Pool D
Line pool D
71 (up to 4 digits)
Assign a dialing filter
to the trunk.
and select lines to the public network
Liz needs to call long-distance to a client in Toronto. She selects
a tie-line to the branch office in Toronto. After hearing the dial
.
tone, she dials a line pool access code to select a line to the
public network. Then, she dials the client’s number as a local call.
Modular DR5 Installer Guide
24 Customer Use
Client in
Toronto
Liz in
Memphis
Key system
Central office
Hardware: any version of KSU, one Trunk Module, one
Trunk Cartridge.
Heading
Incoming trunk:
Data
1.
Parameter
Setting
Line 009
Ans mode
E&M
Auto
Define dialing filters.
Define remote access
packages. Assign a
remote filter and
remote package to
the trunk.
5. Capabilities
Outgoing trunk:
Data
1.
4. Miscellaneous
Line 001
Line type
Loop
Pool B
Line pool B
73 (up to 4 digits)
5. Capabilities
Modular DR5 Installer Guide
Assign a dialing filter
to the line.
Customer Use 25
In the
system
Select tie trunks to the private network
. For a confidential call, the Montana sales manager presses the
line button for a private E&M trunk to the Oregon office. This
automatically alerts at the line appearance on the telephone of
the Oregon sales manager.
Montana
Sales Manager
Oregon
Sales Manager
E&M
Hardware: (for both systems) any version of KSU, one Trunk
Module, one
Trunk Cartridge
Modular DR5 Installer Guide
26
Customer Use
Parameter
Setting
Trunk Data
(Line 009)
Line
E&M
Line Data
(Line 009)
Line type
Private
Line
Ans mode
Line type
E&M
Manual
Private
Heading
Outgoing trunk
(Montana):
Incoming trunk
(Oregon):
Trunk Data
(Line 009)
Modular
installer Guide
Customer Use
A
27
System Feature
Line Redirection feature
I””
target line
092
line 3
Branch office
I
incoming call
,
I
redirected
call
The branch office is receiving more calls than it can handle, so it
redirects one of its lines to the main office. All calls that come in
on target line 092 will be routed out on line 003 to the
office.
Whenever a call is redirected, the target line and outgoing line
will be busy for the duration of the call.
Hardware : Version 2 or higher KSU, an
Trunk
Cartridge if the incoming trunk is E&M, or a DID Trunk Cartridge
if the incoming trunk is DID.
Note:
Any line appearance on a telephone can be
selected as the incoming line to be redirected. A
target line can not be selected as the outgoing
line for redirection.
The incoming trunk must have disconnect
supervision.
Modular DR5 Installer Guide
28
Customer Use
Program heading
Incoming trunk:
1.
Data
Line001
Trunk mode:Super
Ans mode:Auto
OR
Line 009:DID
OR
Line
Ans mode:Auto
Rec’d
1
(for target line 092)
5. System Data
Rec’d # length:4 (can be up to 7
digits, but must match number
of digits sent by Central Office)
Outgoing trunk:
1.
Data
Line 003: Loop
OR
Line01
Branch office set:
5. Capabilities
Modular DR5 Installer Guide
.
Allow redirect:\/
Check the location where the
system modules, the
telephones, and auxiliary equipment are to be installed. This
includes making sure sufficient space is available to install the
components.
Location requirements
Clean, dry, and well-ventilated
Temperature:
to 50°C (32°F to 122°F)
Humidity: 5% to
non-condensing
Location: at least 4 m (13.1 ft) from equipment such as
photocopiers, electrical motors, and other equipment that can
produce electromagnetic, radio frequency, and electrostatic
interference.
Electrical requirements
Non-switched outlet
ac outlet located not more than 1.5 m (4.9 ft) from the Key
Service Unit (KSU). The actual distance from the KSU to the
Power Bar may vary with additional Trunk and Station
Modules. Do not use an extension cord between the KSU
and the power bar.
For the 110 V system
Dedicated 110-V ac nominal,
service with third wire ground.
15-A minimum
the 220 V system
Dedicated
to 240-V ac nominal,
10-A minimum service with third wire ground.
WARNING
The ac outlet must be equipped with a third wire ground
to avoid electromagnetic interference.
Modular
Guide
30 installation
Internal wiring requirements
All new or existing wiring for
following specifications:
telephones must meet the
one twisted pair per telephone
a dc loop resistance less than 59
cable length (0.5 mm or 24 AWG) not to exceed 305 m
(1000 ft)
use of a
Station Auxiliary Power Supply (SAPS) to
extend the loop up to 790 m if the cable is longer than 305 m
(1000 ft)
no bridge taps
WARNING
Installers should also check the lightning protectors at
the cable entry point to the building with special attention
to the grounding. Any problems should be reported to
telephone
the telephone company in writing.
wiring should not leave the buildings as it is not
lightning-protected.
Mounting requirements
If a smooth surface is not available, cut a backboard large
enough to accommodate the system modules and the distribution
block. The system module physical dimensions are listed in this
chapter.
Equipment ‘for mounting the modules
screwdriver, diagonal cutters, pliers, connecting tool, pencil,
level (optional)
four 1
long wood screws for the KSU and four for
each of the expansion modules
(1 %-in) long screws for the cable troughs
thick wooden backboard (if necessary)
Modular DR5 Installer Guide
Module installation 31
Module installation
Key System Unit (KSU)
The Key Service Unit (KSU) is the hub of the Not-star System. It
can function on its own as a basic system (with up to 24
telephones and eight external lines). The system may also be
expanded with any combination of up to six Trunk Modules
and/or Station Modules.
LED
CO Lines
connector
Feature cartridge (2 parts)
Cable clips
Stations
connector
Expansion cartridge
cartridge shown)
Half-size
Cable trough
Modular DR5 Installer Guide
32
Module installation
Trunk Module (TM)
The Trunk Module allows additional Trunk Cartridge installation.
This in turn allows more external lines to be connected to the
system. The Trunk Module has three slots in front for
inserting Trunk Cartridges. Each Trunk Module can add a
maximum of 12 external lines (four external lines per Trunk
Cartridge). Different types of Trunk Cartridges can be mixed in
one Trunk Module. When mixing Trunk Cartridges, use a
separate distribution block for each type of Trunk Cartridge.
Slot for Trunk cartridge
(face plate removed)
Protective faceplates
covering unused slots
LED
DS-30 port
Cable clip
connector
Trunk cartridge
Half-size
Cable trough
Modular
Installer Guide
Module installation
33
Station Module (SM)
The Station Module allows up to 16 additional
telephones
to be connected to the system. A DS-30 cable connects each
Station Module to the KSU.
LED
DS-30 port
Cable clips
50-pin connector
Cable clips
Quarter-size
Cable trough
Modular DR5 Installer Guide
34 Module installation
Recommended layout
The Key Service Unit (KSU), Trunk Modules (TM), and Station
Modules (SM) can be mounted in any order. Allow suitable wall
space for installing future Trunk and Station Modules.
S
r
dimensions
TM
If possible, leave
enough room for
future expansion
SM
mm (15.5 in.)+
698 mm
Widths
L
Additional dimensions of
Dimension
KSU, TM
KSU
SM
TM
SM
4.3 Kg
2.4 Kg
(5.3 lb)
171 mm
(6.7 in)
Clearance
(front)
346 mm
(13.6 in)
7.5 Kg
(16.6 lb)
Modular DR5 Installer Guide
(9.5 lb)
Module installation 35
Remember
Leave about 15 centimetres (6 inches) of space above the screw
holes of the mounting bracket. This allows room to slide the KSU,
Trunk Module and Station Module on and off the bracket and
provides space for venting the heat from the modules.
Bottom
Ensure there is at least 10 centimetres (4 inches) of space
between the bottom of the cable trough and the floor, or any
object that may block the flow of air from the bottom for cooling.
CAUTION
All modules must be mounted well above the floor to
prevent water damage.
Sides
Mount the distribution block on the left side of the KSU. Leave
enough room to mount additional Trunk Modules and Station
Modules on the right side.
Front
Leave enough room to allow the doors of the modules to open
and the cabling to run on the side.
Between modules
The space between two modules hung on the mounting brackets
is approximately mm
in).
Note:
Refer to the illustration showing the system dimensions
for additional module clearance requirements.
CAUTION
Mount the KSU vertically to avoid overheating.
Modular DR5 Installer Guide
36 Module installation
System hardware configuration
This chart shows combinations of Trunk Modules, Trunk
Cartridges, and Station Modules for expanding the system.
Possible line and station configurations
Note:
Number of physical lines shown is for Loop Start, DID,
and Cl Trunk Cartridges only.
Trunk
Cartridges provide half the number of lines.
Modular DR5 Installer Guide
Module installation
37
How to read the hardware chart
To find the maximum number of lines and telephones for a
particular configuration of KSU, Trunk Module(s), and Station
Module(s):
1.
Find the number of Trunk Modules in the left column. The
column labeled “TC” gives the number of Trunk Cartridges.
2.
Find the number of Station Modules in the top row.
3.
Read across to the right from the Trunk Module column and
down from the Station Module row.
A pair of numbers indicates lines and telephones for that
combination of Trunk Modules and Station Modules. The left
number is the maximum number of external lines. The right
number is the maximum number of telephones.
Examples:
8-24
=
8 lines and 24 telephones (KSU without Trunk
Modules or Station Modules).
12-24
=
12 lines and 24 telephones (KSU lines and
telephones, plus one Trunk Module and one Trunk
Cartridge with 4 more lines, and no Station
Modules).
12-40
=
12 lines and 40 telephones (KSU lines and
telephones, plus one Trunk Module and one Trunk
Cartridge with 4 more lines, and one Station Module
with 16 more telephones).
Modular DR5 Installer Guide
38 Module installation
Mounting a module
1.
Position metal mounting bracket(s) on the wall or on the
in) screws.
backboard. Fasten the brackets with
Hint:
Before positioning the mounting brackets, draw a line
using a level and a pencil. This will help align the
modules.
2.
Slide the KSU, Trunk Module, or Station Module down onto
the mounting brackets. Line up with the notches on either
side of the mounting bracket as you slide the module onto
the mounting bracket(s). This facilitates accurate hanging.
3.
Slide the cable trough(s) up under the appropriate module(s).
The KSU requires two half-size cable troughs. A Trunk
Module uses one half-size cable trough, while an Station
Module uses a quarter-size cable trough.
Open each cable trough door and let the door swing open.
5.
Fasten the cable trough to the wall with
long screws.
Each cable trough requires two screws through the holes
provided in the lower tray of the cable trough.
6.
Close the doors of the cable troughs.
7.
Do not connect power at this point.
Installing the KSU mounting bracket
Modular
Installer Guide
Module installation
39
Installing the cable troughs
Modular DR5 Installer Guide
40 Module installation
Trunk Module. and Station Module installed
Key Service Unit (KSU)
Station
Module
Feature
Expansion
cartridge
shown)
Cable trough
(l/2-size)
Note:
Cable trough
For clarity, the illustration shows a KSU, a Trunk Module,
and an Station Module without doors. The doors should
not be removed during installation or operation. Also
shown are the Feature, Expansion, and Trunk Cartridges
which are installed later.
Modular DR5 Installer Guide
Module installation 41
Installing the Feature Cartridge
The Feature Cartridge is made up of a Software Cartridge and a
Data Cartridge. The Software Cartridge contains the system
programming. The Data Cartridge contains the data from
Configuration and Administration programming.
When there is a software upgrade, only the Software Cartridge,
and not the Data Cartridge, needs to be replaced.
CAUTION
Do not touch the printed circuit board inside the cartridge
casing. This is an electrostatic-sensitive device.
1.
Turn the KSU power OFF before installing or removing a
Feature Cartridge.
Make sure you are wearing a grounding strap when handling
cartridges.
3.
Insert the Software Cartridge into the Data Cartridge.
4.
Insert the Feature Cartridge assembly into the KSU.
Unassembled and
assembled Feature
Cartridges
Installing the Feature
Cartridge
Modular
Installer Guide
42 Module installation
Installing an Expansion Cartridge
The two-port Expansion Cartridge allows up to two additional
modules (Trunk Modules and/or Station Modules) to be
connected to the system. The six-port Expansion Cartridge
allows the connection of up to six additional Trunk or Station
Modules. This Cartridge fits into the right slot of the Key Service
Unit (KSU).
Two-port Expansion
cartridge
Modular
Installer Guide
Six-port Expansion
cartridge
Module installation
43
The procedures for installing the Two-port and Six-port
Expansion Cartridges are identical. (Refer to the Port Numbering
information in this Guide for changes to default internal number
length caused by installing an Expansion Cartridge.)
CAUTION
Do not touch the printed circuit board on the Expansion
Cartridge. This is an electrostatic-sensitive device.
,
1.
Make sure that the KSU power is OFF before installing or
removing an Expansion Cartridge.
2.
Remove the cover of the
Expansion Cartridge slot
in the KSU. Use a
screwdriver at the bottom
of the cartridge slot cover
to help detach the
cartridge slot cover from
the slot.
3.
Make sure you are wearing a grounding strap when handling
any cartridge.
4.
While holding the latches
open, insert the Expansion
Cartridge in the
appropriate slot and close
the latches at the same
time to align the cartridge
properly.
Modular
Installer Guide
44 Module installation
Installing a Trunk Cartridge
The Trunk Cartridge, when inserted in a Trunk Module, adds up
to four external lines to the
system. A maximum of three
Trunk Cartridges can be installed in each Trunk Module.
There are four types of Trunk Cartridges:
the Loop Start Trunk Cartridge (4 lines)
the
Trunk Cartridge (2 lines)
the DID Trunk Cartridge (4 lines)
l
the Cl Trunk Cartridge (4 lines)
The Loop Start Trunk Cartridge supports regular external lines.
The
Trunk Cartridge connects
to a private
network. The DID Trunk Cartridge supports direct inward dialing
on incoming external lines. The Cl Trunk Cartridge supports Call
Display features on external lines.
Trunk Cartridges
Loop Start
DID
Cl
Different Trunk Cartridges can be installed in one Trunk Module if
required for a particular installation. When mixing Trunk
Cartridges, use a separate distribution block for each type of
Trunk Cartridge.
Modular DR5 Installer Guide
Module installation
45
The procedures for installing the different Trunk Cartridges are
identical. See the wiring charts in this Guide for details.
I
1.
CAUTION
Do not touch the printed circuit board on the Trunk
Cartridge. This is an electrostatic-sensitive device.
Make sure that the Trunk Module power is OFF before
installing or removing a Trunk Cartridge.
2. Remove the appropriate
cartridge slot cover of an
unused Trunk Cartridge slot
on the Trunk Module. Use a
screwdriver at the bottom of
the cartridge slot cover to
detach the cover from a
Trunk Cartridge slot.
The numbers on the cartridge slots indicate the order
that the cartridges should be installed. If an
or a DID Trunk Cartridge is installed in
slot 1, Emergency telephones cannot be supported.
3.
Make sure you are wearing a grounding strap when handling
cartridges.
4.
While holding the latches open,
insert the Trunk Cartridge in the
appropriate slot and close the
latches at the same time to
align the cartridge properly.
Modular DR5 Installer Guide
46
Module installation
Upgrading the Software Cartridge
Before installing a Modular DR5 Cl Trunk Cartridge or Call
Identification Interface (CII), the KSU system Software Cartridge
must be upgraded to DR5.
There are two possible situations where a software upgrade is
necessary:
1 .
2.
upgrading from a DR2 Software Cartridge, or
upgrading from either a DR3 or a DR4 Software Cartridge.
Upgrading from DR2
If you are upgrading from a DR2 Software Cartridge, you must
first upgrade to DR3 software.
When a DR3 Feature Cartridge is plugged into a DR2 KSU, an
automatic upgrade takes place. In order to allow remote
programming of the NVRAM and prevent the automatic upgrade,
the following should be done:
Insert the
Cartridge into the Data Cartridge prior to
installing in the system.
2.
Place the new DR3 Feature Cartridge assembly into a
captive KSU with the appropriate Two-port or Six-port
Expansion Cartridge, and power up the system.
3.
Perform the Administration programming appropriate for the
customer’s site. This will maintain their DR2 programming.
4.
Change the Time and Date (either the hour or minutes, or
both). This sets a lock on the NVRAM data so that it cannot
be updated.
5.
Power down the captive KSU, remove the DR3 Feature
Cartridge and take it to the customer site. To return a DR3
Feature Cartridge to the state where an automatic upgrade
will occur, perform ** Startup on it while it is in the captive
KSU.
Modular DR5 Installer Guide
Module installation
47
Continue with the following procedure to install the DR3 Feature
Cartridge assembly in the customer’s KSU.
1.
Make sure that the KSU power is OFF before installing or
removing the DR3 Feature Cartridge assembly.
2.
Make sure you are wearing a grounding strap when handling
a cartridge.
3 .
Insert the DR3 Feature Cartridge assembly into the KSU.
Once you have completed the upgrade to DR3 you can continue
with the next procedure to upgrade from DR3 to DR5 software.
Upgrading from DR3 or DR4
1.
Ensure that there is no call activity by informing all
users that the system will briefly be out of operation.
2.
Turn OFF the KSU power (unplug the power cord).
3.
While wearing a grounding strap, remove the Feature
Cartridge from the KSU.
4.
Remove the Software Cartridge from the Data Cartridge.
5.
Insert the new Software Cartridge into the Data Cartridge.
6.
Insert the new Feature Cartridge into the KSU.
7.
Turn ON the KSU power (plug in the power cord)-.
Modular DR5 Installer Guide
48 Wiring
Wiring
Cable routing in the cable trough
Cable troughs beneath the
Trunk Module, and Station
Module hold the 25-pair cables, the DS-30 cables, the power
cord(s), and the Power Bar (if required).
The cable troughs have been designed to keep the ac power
cords and Power Bar separate from the connecting cables and to
allow ease of access. Place the cabling in the two shelves, as
described in the following chart and pages.
Upper shelf
All
cables and DS-30 cables:
Place
cables in the back.
Place the DS-30 cables in the front.
Lower shelf
All power cords and the Power Bar(s).
WARNING
To avoid electrical shock, hazard to personnel, or
equipment.damage, observe the following precautions
when installing telephone equipment:
l
l
l
Never install telephone wiring during a lightning storm.
Never install telephone jacks in wet locations unless
the jack is specifically designed for wet locations.
Never touch non-insulated telephone wires or terminals
unless the telephone line has been disconnected at the
network interface.
Modular DR5 Installer Guide
Wiring
49
Connecting internal wiring
To connect the internal telephones, each KSU and Station
Module requires one
(24-AWG) cable with a
female 50-pin connector at one end. Enough 50-pin distribution
blocks are required to accommodate the internal wiring.
1.
Plug the
co nnector of a
cable
into the station connector on the KSU or the
Station Module. (The connector is labeled
with an icon representing a telephone.)
2.
Route the cable(s) through the upper shelf of the cable
troughs to the distribution block.
Note:
Route the cables straight out to one side of the cable
trough in a bundle. Use cable ties to secure them to
the wall and to support their weight.
3.
Connect the wires to the appropriate pins on the distribution
block. (Refer to the wiring charts in this Guide.)
4.
Cross-connect the KSU and Station Module telephone wires
to the corresponding station pins on the distribution block.
(Refer to the wiring charts in this Guide.)
5.
Using a single pair of wires for each telephone, connect each
of the telephones according to the wiring charts.
Connecting to the KSU
Connecting to the Station
Module .
Modular DR5 Installer Guide
50 Wiring
Connecting external lines
To connect the external lines and auxiliary equipment, each KSU
and Trunk Module requires one
0.5mm (24-AWG) cable
terminated with a female 50-pin connector on one end. A
distribution block is required for each
cable.
1.
Plug the
connector of a
cable into the external
line connector on the KSU or the Trunk Module. (The
connector is labeled with an icon representing telephone
poles.)
2.
Route the cable(s) through the upper shelf of the cable
trough to the
block.
Note:
Route the cables straight out to one side of the cable
trough in a bundle. Use cable ties to secure them to
the wall and to support their weight.
3.
Cross-connect the external lines to the distribution block.
(Refer to the KSU and Trunk Module external line wiring
charts and wiring arrangement diagrams in this Guide.)
4.
Connect the auxiliary equipment lines to the distribution
block. (Refer to KSU and Trunk Module external line wiring
charts and wiring arrangement diagrams in this Guide.)
Note: Auxiliary equipment cannot be connected to the
RJ-21 interface.
Modular DR5 Installer Guide
Wiring 51
5.
Connect external lines to a standard RJ-21 interface:
Bring the external cable to the distribution block and use the
distribution block to cross-connect to the corresponding KSU
and Trunk Module external lines according to the KSU and
Trunk Module external line wiring charts and diagrams. Refer
to the following charts and illustrations in this Guide:
Wiring arrangement for
Wiring arrangement for
KSU
Trunk Module
KSU external lines and auxiliary equipment wiring
Loop Start/Cl Trunk Cartridge wiring chart
6.
Wire the auxiliary equipment lines separately. (Refer to the
KSU and Trunk Module external line wiring charts and
diagrams.)
Note:
For the Trunk Module, the auxiliary equipment line is
an Emergency Telephone (ET).
Connecting the KSU
external lines
Connecting the Trunk
Module external lines
as an OPX
can be used as an off premise extension (OPX) from a
PBX. In order to support this application, the OPX lines must be
engineered not to exceed 7
total loop loss from the serving
,
central office to the demarcation point at the
KSU.
Modular DR5 Installer Guide
52 Wiring
Connecting DS-30 cables
Plug one end of the DS-30 cable into the DS-30 port on the
front of a Trunk Module or Station Module.
2.
Route the cable through the cable clips on the right side of
the Trunk Module or Station Module.
3.
Route the cable through the upper shelf of the cable trough
to the KSU and up through the cable clip to the Expansion
Cartridge.
4.
TM DS-30 into
the
available
port and work DOWN.
Plug SM DS-30 into
the LOWEST available
port and work UP.
Plugging in a Trunk Module
DS-30 cable
Modular
Installer Guide
Plugging in a Station
Module DS-30 cable
Emergency telephones
53
Emergency telephones
Emergency telephones (ET) are standard
single-line
telephones that provide emergency service in case of power
failure or
power to the
system is disconnected.
The KSU has two emergency telephone connections. Each
Trunk Module has one emergency telephone connection.
Connecting emergency telephones
The procedure is the same for connecting emergency telephones
to the distribution block for a KSU or a Trunk Module.
Wire a modular jack or equivalent to each set of emergency
telephone pins on the
distribution block for KSU or
Trunk Module external lines.
The connections on the distribution block for emergency
telephones appear in the wiring charts in this Guide.
Note:
2.
The emergency telephone connections will not work
if there is an
or DID Trunk Cartridge in
the first slot of the Trunk Module.
Connect a single-line telephone to the modular jack.
Modular DR5 Installer Guide
.
54 Emergency telephones
Testing the emergency telephones
The emergency telephones must be tested with the power OFF
at the KSU and Trunk Module.
Pick up the receiver of the emergency telephone.
2.
Listen for the dial tone.
If you hear a dial tone, both the emergency telephone and
the line are functioning properly.
If you hear no dial tone:
Verify that power to the KSU and Trunk Module(s) is
OFF.
Check that the external line and emergency telephone
connections have been made correctly.
Ensure that the emergency telephone is not faulty, by
connecting it directly to the external line and listening for
dial tone.
Verify that there is dial tone on lines 1 and 2 of the KSU
and on line 1 of the Trunk Module.
3.
If all previous steps have been verified and there is still no
dial tone at the emergency telephone, replace the KSU if the
emergency telephone is connected to the KSU, or replace
the Trunk Module if the emergency telephone is connected to
the Trunk Module.
Modular DR5 Installer Guide
telephones 55
telephones
WARNING
telephones cannot be used as off-premise
extensions (OPX). For OPX applications, use the
Analog Terminal Adapter
and a single line
installation card for details.)
telephone. (See the
Installing
Telephones
1.
Connect the receiver cord to the telephone modular jack
indicated by the following symbol, then route the cord
through the appropriate cord guide in the base of the
telephone.
2.
Connect the line cord to the telephone jack indicated by the
following symbol, then route the cord through the appropriate
cord guide.
3.
Plug the other end of the line cord into the modular jack
wired from the distribution block.
4. When the telephone is connected to the KSU or Station
Module, the telephone display and indicators flash briefly
System is
while the telephone initializes (when the
powered up). The telephone is fully operational when the
display shows the default time and date.
For example: Jan 1 1:
Note:
If the telephone line is supported with auxiliary power,
the power source must be a Class 2 device that is UL
and CSA listed.
Modular
Installer Guide
56 Not-star telephones
Wall-mounting a telephone
telephones can be mounted on the wail.
1.
Remove the beveled wall-mounting base from the back of
the telephone. Grip the telephone, and with your thumbs,
push on the wide edge of the base to pop it out from the
telephone.
2.
Remove the receiver clip from the wall-mounting base. Install
the clip in the forward lip of the receiver rest.
3.
Use a screwdriver or similar tool to remove the center
knock-out panel in the wall-mounting base.
4.
Screw the base to the wall (thin end up) so that the wall jack
projects through the knock-out.
5.
Connect one end of the line cord to the telephone line jack
(indicated by the symbol below).
6.
Route the line cord through the appropriate cord guide in the
bottom of the telephone.
7.
Connect the other end of the line cord to the wall jack. Store
any spare cord neatly in the base of the telephone and
mount the telephone on the base.
Modular
Installer Guide
telephones 57
Removing the
wail-mounting base
Installing the receiver clip
Removing the knock-out
panel
Installing the
wall-mounting base
Connecting the line cord
Mounting the telephone
Modular DR5 Installer Guide
58
telephones
Applying the button cap labels
Before you apply button labels, activate the Button Inquiry
to verify the buttons’ programmed
feature
functions, and to avoid activating features as you put the labels
onto the buttons.
There are two types of button labels: printed and blank. Keep the
extra labels and button caps with each
telephone or
leave them with the System Coordinator.
Types of button caps
Unlabeled, clear button caps
with appropriate green or grey paper for typing in line
numbers, telephone numbers, and features
Pre-printed, colored button caps
in green or grey
Some example pre-printed button caps
Green caps
Grey caps
To make identification of line types easier, use preprinted
green button caps for lines that support incoming and
outgoing calls. Use clear button caps for target lines that
are incoming only.
Identifying the telephones
1.
Write the individual telephone numbers on the labels and
telephones.
attach them to the appropriate
2.
Write the telephone number and the internal number on the
appropriate
Receiver Card for each type and color of
telephone that is to be installed.
3.
Cover the
Receiver Card underneath the receiver of
each telephone with the plastic lens.
Modular DR5 Installer Guide
telephones
59
default button assignments
During Startup, the Installer chooses one of four default
templates: Square,
Hybrid, or PBX. Default features are
assigned automatically to the programmable buttons on
telephones, and vary with the template and the telephone. The
default features are listed in the tables in this chapter.
Note:
telephones are shipped from the factory with the
button caps‘in place for the Square template.
Rules of default button assignment
Line and Intercom buttons are assigned by default templates and
can be changed in Configuration programming. Handsfree/Mute
and Answer buttons are not assigned by default. If these features
are defined, however, they are automatically assigned to specific
buttons, as described on this and the following page. None of
these buttons can be assigned to
Telephones.
Handsfree/Mute
This feature appears on the bottom right-hand button (the bottom
button on the M7208 Telephone), moving the Intercom button(s)
up one position.
Intercom
Each telephone can have up to eight Intercom buttons. They
appear above the
button at the bottom
right-hand position on your telephone (the bottom button on the
M7208 Telephone).
Answer
Each telephone can have up to four Answer buttons. They
appear above Intercom buttons in the right column and continue
up from the bottom in the left column, replacing the features on
those buttons. (On the M7208 Telephone, Answer buttons
appear above Intercom buttons and below external line buttons
in a single column.)
Modular
Installer Guide
60
telephones
External line
External line buttons appear in ascending line order, starting at
the top button in the left column (the top button on the M7208
Telephone). If more than five external lines are assigned to an
M 7 3 1 0 Telephone, or more than 12 to an M7324 Telephone,
assignment continues down the buttons on the right column,
erasing the features on those buttons. Line buttons have priority
over feature access buttons but not Handsfree/Mute, Intercom, or
Answer buttons.
Telephone button defaults
Each column-Square,
Hybrid, and PBX-shows the
defaults specific to these templates.
M7100 Telephone
For Square,
Hybrid, and PBX templates, the one
programmable button on the
Telephone is
M7208 Telephone
The default button assignments for the M7208 Telephone
depend on the template applied.
Square
Hybrid
PBX
[Line]
(Line]
[Pick-Up]
[ N o . ]
[ L a s t ]
[ I i -
(Intercom]
[Last]
[Last No.
I
(Speed]
Dial
(Intercom]
[Intercom]
[Intercom]
I
Note:
The default Page button activates the External Page
option
Modular DR5 Installer Guide
telephones 61
Telephone
The default button assignments for the
Telephone
depend on the template applied. The exception is the default
numbering for the dual-memory buttons.
Dual-memory buttons
This example shows defaults for a system with three-digit internal
numbers.
These defaults do not actually exist on any telephone, as no
button for itself. The position that
telephone has an
would be taken by the
button for itself, is blank.
,
Template button assignments
Modular DR5 Installer Guide
62
telephones
M7324 Telephone
The default button assignments for the M7324 Telephone
depend on the template applied.
Square
[ C a l l ]
(Speed]
[ C a l l ]
blank
[Speed]
blank
blank
[ N o . ]
blank
blank
[ L i n k ]
blank
blank
blank
blank
blank
blank
blank
[Pick-Up]
blank
blank
[ C a l l ]
blank
blank
blank
(Pick-Up]
blank
(Intercom]
blank
blank
[Intercom]
blank
Hybrid
PBX
( L i n e ]
[Speed]
blank
blank
blank
blank
[Saved]
blank
blank
blank
blank
blank
[Transfer]
blank
blank
blank
blank
blank
blank
blank
blank
blank
blank
(Intercom]
[Intercom]
blank
Modular DR5 Installer Guide
[Transfer]
blank
[Intercom]
blank
(Intercom]
Optional equipment 63
Optional
Auxiliary ringer
(Customer Supplied)
KSU provides a control contact to operate an
The
external ringer. The auxiliary ringer can be activated by setting
auxiliary ring for specific external lines, and auxiliary ring for
specific telephones.
Refer to the chapters on programming for more details. Refer
specifically to the following headings in Administration and
Configuration.
Programmed in:
Heading
Data
Configuration
Capabilities
Administration
Service Modes
Administration
1.
Follow the manufacturer’s installation instructions.
2.
Connect the Auxiliary Ring Generator to the
distribution block as shown in the wiring charts in this Guide.
The pins in this chart provide a control contact. They do not
provide ring current or dc voltage. The ringer must not draw
more than 50
from a 40-V dc source.
Modular DR5 Installer Guide
64
Optional equipment
External
source (Customer Supplied)
Music for callers on Hold and for Background Music must be
enabled through programming. Refer to the Programming
chapter for more details. Refer specifically to the following
programming headings in Configuration and confirm that the
following settings are implemented:
Heading
Setting
Call Handling
On Hold: Music
Miscellaneous
Background Music: Yes
External music source programming
The music source can be any approved low-power device such
as a radio with a high-impedance earphone jack. The
recommended KSU input level is 1 V rms across an input
impedance of 3300
Connect the music source and ground to the
distribution block, as shown in the internal wiring charts in
this Guide.
‘CAUTION
To avoid damage to audio equipment, ensure that the
polarity of the audio input is correct according to the
KSU internal wiring connector chart.
2.
Adjust the volume of the music source to a comfortable level
by activating Music on Hold or Background Music and
adjusting the volume at the music source.
Background Music volume can also be adjusted at each
telephone.
Modular
Installer Guide
Optional equipment
65
Installing an external paging system
The paging system uses the speakers on
telephones and
can also be used with external loudspeakers provided by the
customer. The paging output from the
KSU is
775
rms across an input impedance of 600
1.
Follow the manufacturer’s installation instructions.
2.. Connect the paging system audio input to the
distribution block as shown in the internal wiring charts in this
Guide.
3.
Connect the pagingsystem relay to the
block as shown in the internal wiring charts.
distribution
system external paging does not support
talk-back paging equipment unless an external line port
is used.
Note:
In addition, the
KSU provides a relay contact that can be
used for other applications (for example, switching music ON or
OFF).
External paging contacts
idle
Yellow-Slate
(make)
active
l
Yellow-Slate
(make)
Slate-Yellow
(common)
Slate-Yellow
Violet-Blue
Violet-Blue
(break)
(break)
(common)
The
KSU provides both a “make” (normally open) and a
“break” (normally closed) set of contacts that operate in
conjunction with the External Page feature. These contacts can
be used to control various external devices. The external device
being connected through these contacts must not draw more
from a 40-V dc source.
than 50
Modular DR5 Installer Guide
66 Power Bar installation
Power Bar installation
CAUTION
For 110-V systems, use only a CSA certified and UL
listed Power Bar having a third wire ground.
For 220-V systems, use only an approved
Power Bar having a third wire ground.
1.
220-V
Slide the Power Bar into the lower shelf of the cable trough.
All power cords must go only in the lower shelf.
Where any combination of four or more Trunk or Station
Modules is present, use a second Power Bar to provide
additional plugs. On a 110-V system, the power cord from
the second Power Bar must be plugged into the first Power
Bar. On a 220-V system, the Power Bars are connected with
a separate power cord.
2.
Route the power cord from the KSU, Trunk Module, and
Station Module through the cable clips located in the lower
shelf of the cable trough.
3.
Plug the KSU, Trunk Module, and Station Module power
cords into the Power Bar(s).
4.
If you have a 220-V system, plug the ac power cord into the
Power Bar.
Modular DR5 Installer Guide
Power up the
Power up the
system 67
system
1.
Double check all wiring before turning the system power ON.
2.
Connect to the outlet (a non-switchable, third-wire ground
ac outlet):
For a 11 O-V system:
If a Power Bar is used, plug the Power Bar into the ac outlet.
plug the KSU power cord into the ac outlet.
For a 220-V system:
If a Power Bar is used, plug the Power Bar into the separate
ac power cord. This ac power cord plugs into the ac outlet.
Otherwise, plug the KSU power cord into the ac power cord.
This ac power cord plugs into the ac outlet.
3.
Check that the red power
are ON. (The KSU, Trunk
Module, and Station Module each have one LED.)
LED
TM LED
SM LED
4.
If none of the
are ON, check the power at the ac outlet.
If there is no power, check with building maintenance.
OR
If there is ac power at the outlet, replace the module(s)
that do not have a red LED ON.
Modular
Installer Guide
68 Telephone relocation and replacement
Telephone relocation and
replacement
Automatic Telephone Relocation and telephone replacement are
features associated with moving and replacing
telephones in the system. The basic difference is that relocation
allows a moved telephone to retain its programming, and
replacement re-assigns or removes programming.
Automatic Telephone Relocation
Automatic Telephone Relocation is disabled by default. For
Automatic Telephone Relocation to work, the system power must
be ON and the Automatic Telephone Relocation feature must be
activated in Configuration programming.
A telephone can be moved to a new location within the
system without losing its programmed settings. The internal
settings, and Personal Speed Dial codes
numbers,
remain with the telephone when it is unplugged. To move a
telephone, simply unplug it and plug it in again at another
location. Recognition of the telephone by the KSU may take up to
45 seconds.
Notes: All
telephones being moved should be relocated
before new telephones are plugged into their place. This
allows the moved telephones to retain their programmed
settings. If a new telephone is plugged into the
system before the old telephone is reconnected at a new
location,
will give the old telephone’s information
to the new telephone, and the old telephone will no
longer be recognized by the system. (Refer to Telephone
replacement, below.)
When changing a telephone’s internal number (in
Configuration programming), wait one minute after
Automatic Telephone Relocation.
Modular
Installer Guide
Telephone relocation and replacement 69
Telephone replacement
In a powered-up system, an existing
telephone can be
replaced by a new
telephone. A new
telephone is
one that was not previously in service within the system.
Replacing
telephones of the same type
If an existing
telephone is unplugged, and a new
#telephone of the same type is then plugged into the same jack
(for example, replacing an M7208 Telephone with another
M7208 Telephone), the new telephone acquires the
programming and the internal number of the old telephone. This
is normally done to replace a defective telephone.
Replacing
telephones of different types
If an existing
telephone is unplugged, and a new
telephone of a different type is plugged into the same jack (for
example, replacing an M7208 Telephone with an
Telephone), the new telephone keeps the old internal number.
The new telephone receives a default profile for a telephone of
its type. (Refer to the button defaults listed in the section on
telephones and system defaults listed in the
Programming chapter).
Note:
If the telephone being replaced has more lines than the
new telephone, automatic outgoing line selection may
not work with the Handsfree/Mute feature. A line must be
selected manually.
Status of a telephone that was replaced
The old
telephone that was unplugged, and replaced by
a new
telephone, loses its programming and internal
number. The old telephone’s internal number has been given to
the new telephone and the programming has either been
removed or given to the new telephone when it was plugged into
the old jack. The replaced telephone (if still functional) is now
treated by the system as a telephone not previously in service.
Modular DR5 Installer Guide
70 Telephone relocation and replacement
Modular DR5 Installer Guide
Radio Frequency
This equipment
uses, and can radiate radio
frequency energy. If not installed and used in
accordance with the instruction manual, it may cause
interference to radio communications. It has been tested
and found to comply with the limits for a Class A
computing device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules,
which are designed to provide reasonable protection
against such interference when operated in a
commercial environment. Operation of this equipment in
a residential area is likely to cause interference, in which
case the user, at his own expense, will be required to
take whatever measures may be required to correct the
interference. Each
Key Telephone System is
assigned an FCC Registration Number and a Ringer
Equivalence designation. The number and designation
are printed on the Key Service Unit (KSU) label on the
front of the unit inside the door.
Registration
The
Key Telephone System is registered with the FCC
based upon compliance with Part 68 of its rules. Connection of
the
Key Telephone System to the nationwide
telecommunications network is made through a standard network
interface jack that you can order from your telephone company.
Jacks for this type of customer-provided equipment will not be
provided on party lines or coin lines.
Interconnect
Modular equipment meets all applicable requirements of
both the Canadian Department of Communications CS-03 and
US Federal Commission FCC part 68 and has been registered
under files DOC 3322492A and FCC
(key system) and
(hybrid system).
Modular DR5 installer Guide
72 Regulations
Ringer Equivalence Number (REN)
The FCC Registration Label, on the inside of the door on the
front of the Key Service Unit (KSU), includes the Ringer
Equivalence Number (REN). This number shows the electrical
load that your
KSU requires from your telephone line. If
the KSU requires more electrical current than your telephone
company’s central office equipment can provide, your telephones
may not ring and you may have difficulty dialing telephone
numbers.
Call the telephone company to find out the total REN allowed for
your telephone line(s).
Hearing Aid Compatibility
telephones are Hearing Aid compatible, as defined in
Section 68.316 of Part 68 FCC Rules.
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)
Radiated emissions
Modular equipment meets all FCC part 15, class A
radiated emissions requirements.
Conducted emissions
Modular equipment meets all FCC part 15, class A
conducted emissions requirements.
Safety
Modular equipment meets all applicable requirements of
both the Canadian Standards Association C22.2 No. 234 Ml989
and US Underwriter’s Laboratory UL-1459, and UL-1950, and
has been registered under files CSA
and
UL El 15515
Modular
Installer Guide
Regulations 73
Telephone Company Registration
It is usually not necessary to call the telephone company with
Key
information on the equipment before connecting the
Telephone System Key Service Unit (KSU) to the telephone
network but, if the telephone company requires this information,
provide the following:
Telephone number(s) to which the Key Service Unit (KSU)
will be connected.
FCC Registration Number (on label affixed to KSU, inside the
door).
Ringer Equivalence Number (on label affixed to KSU, inside
the door).
USOC Jack
RJ-21 X
for
service)
Service Order Code (SOC) 9.0 F
Facility Interface Code
for
service)
Use of a Music source
In accordance with U.S. Copyright Law, a license may be
required from the American Society of Composers, Authors and
Publishers, or similar organization if Radio or TV broadcasts are
transmitted through the Music On Hold or Background Music
features of this telecommunication system.
Northern Telecom Inc. hereby disclaims any liability arising out of
the failure to obtain such a license.
This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class A limits for
radio noise emissions from digital apparatus set out in the Radio
Interference Regulations of the Canadian Department of
Communications.
Modular DR5 Installer Guide
74 Regulations
Rights of the Telephone Company
If the system is determined to be causing harm to the telephone
network, the telephone company may discontinue your service
temporarily. If possible, the telephone company will notify you in
advance. If advance notice is not practical, you will be notified as
soon as possible. You will be given the opportunity to correct the
situation and you will be informed of your right to file a complaint
to the FCC. Your telephone company may make changes in its
facilities, equipment, operations or procedures that could affect
the proper functioning of your system. If it does this, you will be
notified in advance to give you the opportunity to maintain
uninterrupted telephone service.
In the event of an equipment malfunction, all repairs will be
performed by Northern Telecom Inc. or by one of its authorized
dealers.
Address of a repair facility
USA
Canada
Northern Telecom Inc.
Product Service Center
640
Drive
Nashville, TN
37210
Attn..
Northern Telecom Canada Ltd.
Customer Service Dept. 914
12345 Boul Albert Hudon
Montreal-Nord,
Modular
Installer Guide
Service tone cadences
Tone
Cadence (seconds)
0.5 ON 0.5 OFF
Overflow
0.25 ON 0.25 OFF
2.0 ON 4.0 OFF
Confirmation tone
1 .O ON 1 .O OFF (3 bursts followed
by no tone)
Recall tone
1 .O ON 1 .O OFF (3 bursts followed
by steady tone)
Ring splash
0.2 ON (1 burst)
Power specifications for the 110 V system
Characteristic
KSU
TM
SM
Voltage V ac
92-127
92-l 27
92-l 27
Current A rms (max)
1.75
1.75
1.0
Frequency Hz
Crest factor
Power specifications for the 220 V system
Characteristic
KSU
TM
SM
Voltage V ac
170-264
170-264
170-264
Current A rms (max)
1 .O
1.0
0.5
Frequency Hz
45-63
45-63
45-63
Crest factor
Modular DR5 Installer Guide
76 Specifications and wiring charts
Telephone loop specifications
Value
Characteristic
Loop resistance
50 (295 m of 0.5 mm wire or
1000 ft of 24 AWG wire)
Loop length
150 per conductor between TC
and network interface for E, SG, M,
TC
and SB leads on an
Terminating impedance
600
Flash rate
(incoming alerting call)
1 Hz (50% duty cycle)
Minimum voltage at
telephone
Current at telephone
(idle)
45
nominal
Current at telephone
(active)
80
maximum
Electrical requirements
Characteristic
Electrostatic discharge
KSU and telephones
IEC 801-2 severity level 4
maximum of 12
with a
150
50
probe
Connectors
I EC 801-2 severity level 2
Radiated immunity
maximum of 5 V/m from 10
1
Conducted immunity
maximum of 2 V rms or 86
from 0.06 to 0.1 MHz
maximum of 92
30 MHz
Modular DR5 Installer Guide
to
from 0.011 to
Specifications and wiring charts 77
Mechanical requirements
Vibration operational
EC
Resonance search
I EC
Vibration endurance
transportation
I EC
IEC 68-2-55 A
Shock fragility
IEC
Unpacked drop
IEC 68-2-31
Packaged drop
NSTA Proj.
Environmental requirements
Characteristic
Operating temperature
range
Storage temperature
range
I.E.C. 68-2-l Tests Ad and Ab
0°C to
to 122°F)
I.E.C. 68-2-2 Test Bd
-55°C to 70°C (-67°F to 158°F)
I.E.C. 68-2-14 Test Na
Thermal shock
5% to 95% (non-condensing)
above
(93°F)
52 mbar of water vapor pressure
Humidity
Modular equipment can operate from
to
(32°F to 122°F) with relative humidities between 5% and
95% RH except that at temperatures above
(93°F) the relative humidity may be limited to 52 mbar of water
vapor pressure.
For the purpose of demonstration of compliance, the product
shall be exposed to
(104°F) at 90% to 95% RH for 3 days
followed by operational tests.
Modular DR5 Installer Guide
78
Specifications and wiring charts
In addition, the product (without its transportation package) shall
be able to withstand
days storage at
(104°F) at 90% to
95% RH as per I.E.C. 68-2-3, Test Ca, Severity A, without
evidence of corrosion, physical damage or degradation in
electrical performance.
Transportation methods
No special constraints need be applied to standard methods of
shipment (such as air freight, truck, and rail) except for the
(-67°F) storage limit..
Modular DR5 Installer Guide
Port numbering 79
Port numbering
Port number coding on the wiring charts
The code shown for “Ports” (as on the wiring charts for Trunk
Module external line wiring and Station Module internal wiring)
shows the link between particular port numbers and the wiring on
the distribution block. This is useful for example, in tracking down
faults during a Maintenance session where codes appear on a
telephone display indicating error messages (see the
Maintenance chapter).
The code shown on the charts (for example: “X12”) has two
components:
.
corresponds to the number which appears on the face of
the Expansion Cartridge port to which the Trunk Module or
Station Module is connected.
Numerical digits (for example “01” or
identify an
individual port number associated with that Expansion
Cartridge.
For example:
The code “812” appearing as part of an error message for a
Trunk Module indicates Expansion Cartridge port and internal
port “12”. The corresponding Trunk Module pins on the
distribution block are Pin 47 (Violet-Orange) and Pin 22
(Orange-Violet). These codes apply to both Trunk Modules and
Station Modules (up to “Xl 6” for Station Modules for up to 16
telephones; up to “X12” for Trunk Modules for up to 12 external
lines).
system numbering plan
The
system provides flexibility in the assignment of line
pool access codes and internal numbers (also called Directory
Numbers or
Modular
Installer Guide
80 Port numbering
The Numbering Plan follows specific rules such as:
Internal numbers can have up to seven digits.
All internal numbers must have the same number of digits.
Line pool access codes are one to four digits, and cannot
start with the same number as:
the first digit of any internal number
the first digit of any Received number
the Park prefix
the Direct-dial digit
The digit
may be assigned to a telephone. If this is the
case, no internal number or Call Park Retrieval code can
begin with “0”.
The same sequence of digits cannot be used for two internal
numbers, for two line pool access codes, or for both an
internal number and a line pool access code. All codes and
numbers must be unique.
Symbols such as an asterisk (*) or a pound sign
cannot
be used in internal numbers or line pool access codes.
Key Service Unit (KSU)
The Key Service Unit (KSU) has 8 lines and 24 telephones.
In the charts on the following page, notice that the KSU has two
KSU handles telephones.
internal ports, KSU and KSU
KSU handles lines.
Two-port Expansion Cartridge
One or two DS-30 cables for Trunk Modules and/or Station
Modules can be plugged into a Two-port Expansion Cartridge.
Six-port Expansion Cartridge
A combination of up to six Trunk Modules and/or Station Modules
can be plugged into a Six-port Expansion Cartridge.
Modular DR5 Installer Guide
Port numbering 81
and B2 Directory Numbers (DN)
The terms
and B2 correspond to channels on
for
transmitting voice and data. Each DN port number has a
DN
and a B2 DN. Devices such as the
M7100, M7208,
M7310, and M7324 Telephones use only the
DN. Other
devices may need both
and
channels, therefore requiring
and
Non-expanded system (KSU alone) numbering
Port #
External
lines
KSU
External
line ports
l-8
-
DN
-
-
-
-
-
-
21-44
DN
DN ports
-
-
45-68
-
101-124
Two-port Expansion Cartridge and KSU numbering
Expansion
port #
External
lines
KSU
9-20
21-32
l-8
-
-
External
line ports
401-412
. 301-312
201-208
-
-
DN
B2 DN
DN ports
261-276
245-260
- -
317-332
301-316
- -
401-416
301-316
- -
221-244
277-300
101-124
Six-port Expansion Cartridge and KSU numbering
Expansion
External
External
DN
B2 DN
DN ports
and
telephone numbers reflect the default
numbering scheme.
Port
is the bottom DS-30 cable port on both the
Two-port and the Six-port Expansion Cartridge.
Modular DR5 Installer Guide
82 KSU wiring charts
KSU wiring charts
Wiring arrangement for Not-star KSU
15.2 m (50 ft.)
Max. Length
KSU
External line
connections,
Auxiliary Services,
ET1 and ET2
External
Lines
RJ-21 connector
Connector
ET 1
Auxiliary
Services ET 2
See the wiring chart for the Key Service Unit (KSU) to external
lines and auxiliary equipment connecting arrangement.
Wiring arrangement for
TM
15.2 m (50 ft.)
Max. Length
Distribution
Block
KSU
External line
connections,
Auxiliary Services,
ET1 and ET2
External
Lines
I I
RJ-21 connector
Connector
ET 1
Auxiliary
Services ET 2
See the wiring chart for the Trunk Module (TM) to external lines
connecting arrangement.
Modular DR5 Installer Guide
KSU wiring charts 83
KSU external lines and auxiliary equipment wiring
KSU external lines connector
Wire color
Port
Pin
Service
T
White-Blue
201
26
1
Blue-White
201
27
White-Orange
202
T
2
Orange-White
202
28
White-Green
203
T
3
Green-White
203
29
White-Brown
204
T
4
Brown-White
204
30
White-Slate
205
T
5
Slate-White
205
31
Red-Blue
206
T
6
Blue-Red
206
32
Red-Orange
207
T
7
Orange-Red
207
33
Red-Green
208
T
8
Green-Red
208
Port number code: see the explanation page preceding the charts.
KSU external lines connector
Pin
Service
Wire color
34
9
35
10
36
11
37
12
38
13
39
14
40
15
41
16
42
17
43
18
44
19
45
20
46
21
47
22
48
23
49
24
50
25
Note:
Line
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
8
RJ-21 external line
connector
Pin
Wire color
26
27
2
28
3
29
4
30
5
31
6
32
7
33
8
White-Blue
Blue-White
White-Orange
Orange-White
White-Green
Green-White
White-Brown
Brown-White
White-Slate
Slate-White
Red-Blue
Blue-Red
Red-Orange
Orange-Red
Red-Green
Green-Red
Aux equipment
connections
Pin
Wire color
Line
No connection
Red-Brown
No connection
Brown-Red
Red-Slate
T
ET 1
ET 1
Slate-Red
Black-Blue
T
ET2
ET2
Blue-Black
Black-Orange
---No connection
No connection
Orange-Black
---No connection
Black-Green
---Green-Black
---No connection
Black-Brown
---No connection
Brown-Black
---No connection
No connection
Black-Slate
No connection
Slate-Black
No connection
Yellow-Blue
No connection
Blue-Yellow
No connection
Yellow-Orange ---No connection
Orange-Yellow ---T
Auxiliary Ring Make
Yellow-Green
Auxiliary Ring Common
Green-Yellow
T
Ring Break
Yellow-Brown
No connection
Brown-Yellow
T
Yellow-Slate
Page Relay Make
Slate-Yellow
Page Relay Common
T
Page Relay Break
Violet-Blue
No connection
Blue-Violet
T
Page Out Tip
Violet-Orange
Page Out Ring
Orange-Violet
No connection
Violet-Green
No connection
Green-Violet
---No connection
Violet-Brown
--Brown-Violet
---No connection
No connection
Violet-Slate
No connection
Slate-Violet
Auxiliary equipment can not be connected to the RJ-21 connector.
35
10
36
11
Red-State
Slate-Red
Black-Blue
Blue-Black
‘em-
____
____
---43
18
44
19
45
20
46
21
47
22
Yellow-Green
Green-Yellow
Yellow-Brown
Brown-Yellow
Yellow-Slate
Slate-Yellow
Violet-Blue
Blue-Violet
Violet-Orange
Orange-Violet
Modular DR5 Installer Guide
84 KSU wiring charts
KSU internal wiring
Pin
Wire color
Port
26
1
27
2
28
3
29
4
Service
Telephones
Default DN
101
T
1
Blue-White
101
1
White-Orange
102
T
2
Orange-White
102
2
22122212222
White-Green
103
T
3
Green-White
103
3
23122312223
White-Brown
104
T
4
Brown-White
104
4
24122412224
White-Slate
105
T
5
5
Slate-White
105
5
31
Red-Blue
106
T
6
6
Blue-Red
106
6
32
Red-Orange
107
T
7
7
Orange-Red
107
7
27122712227
33
Red-Green
106
T
6
6
Green-Red
108
28122812228
34
Red-Brown
109
T
9
9
Brown-Red
109
9
29122912229
35
Red-Slate
T
10
10
Slate-Red
110
10
36
Black-Blue
111
T
11
11
Blue-Black
111
11
31123112231
37
Black-Orange
112
T
12
12
Orange-Black
112
12
32123212232
38
Black-Green
113
T
13
13
Green-Black
113
13
39
Black-Brown
114
T
14
14
Brown-Black
114
14
40
Black-Slate
115
T
15
15
Slate-Black
115
15
35123512235
41
Yellow-Blue
116
T
16
16
Blue-Yellow
116
16
36123612236
42
Yellow-Orange
117
T
17
17
Orange-Yellow
117
17
43
.
Yellow-Green
116
T
16
18
Green-Yellow
118
18
44
Yellow-Brown
119
T
19
19
Brown-Yellow
119
19
45
Yellow-Slate
120
T
20
20
Slate-Yellow
120
20
46
Violet-Blue
121
T
21
21
Blue-Violet
121
21
47
Violet-Orange
122
T
22
22
Orange-Violet
122
22
48
Violet-Green
123
T
23
Green-Violet
123
23
23
T
24
124
Violet-Brown
49
124
Brown-Violet
24
24
Music-on-hold ground ---Violet-Slate
50
Slate-Violet
------Music-on-hold input ---25
Note: T and represent station connections and should not be confused with Tip and Ring on external lines.
Station connections are non-polarized.
CAUTION: For ‘Music -on-hold’. ensure that the polarity of the audio input is the same as identified above for pins
and
to avoid damage to audio equipment
Modular DR5 Installer Guide
Station Module wiring chart
85
Station Module wiring chart
Pin
Wire color
Port
Service
Telephones (SM)
26
1
27
2
28
3
29
4
30
White-Blue
Blue-White
White-Orange
x01
x01
T
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
8
9
9
10
10
11
31
6
32
7
33
8
34
9
35
10
36
11
37
12
38
13
39
14
40
15
41
16
42
17
43
18
44
19
45
20
46
21
White-Green
Green-White
White-Brown
Brown-White
White-Slate
Slate-White
Red-Blue
Blue-Red
Red-Orange
Orange-Red
Red-Green
Green-Red
Red-Brown
Brown-Red
Red-Slate
Slate- Red
Black-Blue
Blue-Black
Black-Orange
Orange-Black
Black-Green
Green-Black
Black-Brown
Brown-Black
Black-Slate
Slate-Black
Yellow-Blue
Blue-Yellow
Yellow-Orange
Orange-Yellow
Yellow-Green
Green-Yellow
Yellow-Brown
Brown-Yellow
Yellow-Slate
Slate-Yellow
Violet-Blue
Blue-Violet
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
x09
x09
x10
x10
T
T
T
x11
x12
x12
x13
x13
Xl4
x14
x15
x15
Xl6
Xl6
-------------------------
,
T
12
12
T
13
13
T
14
14
T
15
15
T
16
16
no connection
____
no connection
no connection
no connection
____
no connection
no connection
no connection
no connection
no connection
no connection
47
Violet-Orange
---no connection
22
Orange-Violet
---no connection
48
Violet-Green
---__-_
no connection
23
Green-Violet
---no connection
49
Violet-Brown
no connection
24
Brown-Violet
----__no connection
50
Violet-Slate
no connection
Slate-Violet
no connection
25
Note: T and represent station connections and should not be confused with Tip and Ring on external lines.
Station connections are non-polarized.
Note: Port number code: see the explanation page preceding the charts.
Modular DR5 Installer Guide
86 Loop Start or Cl Trunk Cartridge wiring chart
Loop Start or Cl Trunk Cartridge
wiring chart
TM
TC
Slat
Slot 2
Slot 3
connector arrangement
Pin
Wire color
Port
1
26
1
27
2
28
3
29
4
30
5
31
6
32
7
33
8
34
9
35
10
36
11
37
12
38
13
39
14
40
15
41
16
42
17
43
18
44
19
45
20
46
21
47
22
48
23
49
24
50
25
White-Blue
Blue-White
White-Orange
Orange-White
White-Green
---Green-White ---White-Brown
---Brown-White
---White-Slate
Slate-White
Red-Blue
Blue-Red
Red-Orange
---Orange-Red
---Red-Green
---Green-Red
---Red-Brown
Brown-Red
Red-Slate
Slate-Red
Black-Blue
---Blue-Black
---Black-Orange
------Orange-Black
Black-Green
Green-Black
Black-Brown
Brown-Black
X08
Black-Slate
---Slate-Black
--Yellow-Blue
---Blue-Yellow
---Yellow-Orange
x09
Orange-Yellow
x09
Yellow-Green
Green-Yellow
Yellow-Brown
---Brown-Yellow
---Yellow-Slate
---Slate-Yellow
---Violet-Blue
Blue-Violet
Violet-Orange
x12
Orange-Violet
x12
Violet-Green
---Green-Violet
---Violet-Brown
---Brown-Violet
---Violet-Slate
---Slate-Violet
----
Service
Line
Pin
connector
Wire color
T
1
1
2
2
---____
------3
3
4
4
26
1
27
2
---____
------28
3
29
4
White-Blue
Blue-White
White-Orange
Orange-White
---____
------White-Green
Green-White
White-Brown
Brown-White
T
No connection
No connection
No connection
T
T
____
No connection
No connection
T
T
No connection
No connection
No connection
No connection
T
T
------5
5
6
6
------------7
7
8
8
----
No connection
No
connection
---No
connection
------No connection
9
T
9
10
T
10
---No connection
---No connection
---No connection
---No connection
11
T
11
12
T
12
____
---No connection
---No connection
---No connection
ET
ET
------30
5
31
6
------------32
7
33
8
------------34
9
35
10
------------36
11
37
12
____
----------
Auxiliary equipment can not be connected to the RJ-21 connector.
For an explanation of Port codes, see the section called Port number coding on the wiring charts.
Modular DR5 Installer Guide
____
------White-Slate
Slate-White
Red-Blue
Blue-Red
------------Red-Orange
Orange-Red
Red-Green
Green-Red
------------Red-Brown
Brown-Red
Red-Slate
Slate-Red
------------Black-Blue
Blue-Black
Black-Orange
Orange-Black
____
---------No connection
No connection
or
Trunk Cartridge wiring chart 87
E&M or
Trunk Cartridge
wiring chart
Using the
wiring chart
Use the diagrams in this section when a
Trunk Module
(TM) contains
Trunk Cartridges (TC) or a mixture of
and DID or loop start
Chart: Trunk Module with
cartridges
shows the
connections on the TM.
shows the
cross-connections;
to be used where
To obtain the cross-connections for
across, the column headings.
alone are installed.
service, read
Example of how to read wiring charts for mixed service
to be used where there is a mixture of
DID, and
loop start
To obtain the cross-connections for mixed service, match Service
columns on the appropriate charts in the example.
Note:
When installing a mixture of
and DID or loop
start
it is important to cross-connect the wiring for
each type of TC to a separate distribution block.
In addition, the cross-connections to each distribution
block must always begin at pins 26 and 1. This allows
you to wire to the correct pins for an RJ-21 connection
and for an
connection.
Note:
To retain emergency telephone function, a loop start TC
88 E&M or
Trunk Cartridge wiring chart
cross connections
When you are required to connect two
distribution blocks together (connecting to another
or
Private Branch Exchange), you will need to make these cross
connections:
Back-to-back cross connections
1 st distribution block
Next distribution block
Modular
Installer Guide
T
SB
SG
M
SG
SB
E
E&M or
Trunk Module with
connections
Trunk Cartridges and
TM
TC
Slot
connector arrangement
Pin
Wire color
Port
Slot 1
26
1
27
2
3
29
4
30
5
31
6
32
7
33
Slot 2
Slot 3
34
9
35
10
36
11
37
12
38
13
39
14
40
15
41
16
42
17
43
18
44
19
45
20
46
21
47
22
23
49
24
50
25
White-Blue
Blue-White
White-Orange
Orange-White
White-Green
Green-White
White-Brown
Brown-White
While-Slate
Slate-White
Red-Blue
Blue-Red
Red-Orange
Orange-Red
Red-Green
Green-Red
Red-Brown
Brown-Red
Red-Slate
Slate-Red
Black-Blue
Blue-Black
Black-Orange
Orange-Black
Black-Green
Green-Black
Black-Brown
Brown-Black
Black-Slate
Yellow-Blue
Blue-Yellow
Yellow-Orange
Orange-Yellow
Yellow-Green
Green-Yellow
Yellow-Brown
Brown-Yellow
Yellow-Slate
Slate-Yellow
Violet-Blue
Blue-Violet
Violet-Orange
Orange-Violet
Violet-Green
Green-Violet
Violet-Brown
Brown-Violet
Violet-Slate
Slate-Violet
Trunk Cartridge wiring chart 89
x01
x01
x01
x01
x01
x01
Service
Line
connector
Pin
Wire color
T
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
3
3
‘3
3
3
3
3
3
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
26
1
27
2
28
3
29
4
30
5
31
6
32
7
33
8
34
9
35
10
36
11
37
12
38
13
39
14
40
15
41
16
42
17
43
18
44
19
45
20
46
21
47
22
48
23
49
24
E
SG
M
SB
T
E
SG
T
E
SG
M
SB
T
E
SG
T
E
SG
M
T
-------
wiring
E
SG
M
SB
ET
ET
White-Blue
Blue-White
White-Orange
Orange-White
White-Green
Green-White
White-Brown
Brown-White
White-Slate
Slate-White
Red-Blue
Blue-Red
Red-Orange
Orange-Red
Red-Green ,
Green-Red
Red-Brown
Brown-Red
Red-Slate
Slate-Red
Black-Blue
Blue-Black
Black-Orange
Orange-Black
Black-Green
Green-Black
Black-Brown
Brown-Black
Black-Slate
Slate-Black
Yellow-Blue
Blue-Yellow
Yellow-Orange
Orange-Yellow
Yellow-Green
Green-Yellow
Yellow-Brown
Brown-Yellow
Yellow-Slate
Slate-Yellow
Violet-Blue
Blue-Violet
Violet-Orange
Orange-Violet
Violet-Green
Green-Violet
Violet-Brown
Brown-Violet
No connection
No connection
Note:
Auxiliary equipment can not be connected to the
connector.
codes, see the section called Port number coding on the charts.
For an explanation of
Modular
Installer Guide
90 E&M or
Trunk Cartridge wiring chart
xample of how to read the
wiring chart
wiring connections
Pin Win
Wiring charts for mixed service
Shown here is an installation with two Loop Start
in Slots 1 and 2 and one EBMIDISA TC in Slot 3.
Slots 1 and 2: Only the T and leads are
connected.
Slot 3: All leads are connected.
Note that the
connections (on the
chart) begin on a new distribution block.
tine numbers begin at pins 26 and 1 to indicate the
first
line.
Modular DR5 Installer Guide
DID Trunk Cartridge wiring chart 91
DID Trunk Cartridge wiring chart
Using the DID wiring chart
Use the diagrams in this section when a
Trunk Module
(TM) contains DID Trunk Cartridges (TC) or a mixture of DID and
or loop start
Chart: Trunk Module with DID cartridges
shows the
connections on the TM.
shows the RJ-21 cross-connections;
to be used where DID
alone are installed.
To obtain the cross-connections for DID service, read across the
column headings.
Example of how to read wiring charts for mixed service,
to be used where there is a mixture of DID and
loop start
or
To obtain the cross-connections for mixed service, match Service
columns on the appropriate charts in the example.
Note: When installing a mixture of DID and
or loop
start
it is important to cross-connect the wiring for
each type of TC to a separate distribution block.
In addition, the cross-connections to each distribution
block must always begin at pins 26 and 1. This allows
you to wire to the correct pins for an RJ-21 connection
connection.
and for an
To retain Emergency Telephone function with mixed
service, a loop start TC should go in the first slot of the
TM.
Modular DR5 Installer Guide
92 DID Trunk Cartridge wiring chart
DID supervisory signaling
Allowing this equipment to be operated in a manner that does not
provide for proper answer supervision signaling, as outlined
below, is in violation of FCC Part 68 Rules, and may be in
violation of local tariffs.
This equipment is designed to return supervisory signals to the
Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) when the DID calls
are:
answered, by the called station
answered by the attendant
routed to a customer controlled recorded announcement
routed to a dial prompt
This equipment is designed to return supervisory signals on all
DID calls forwarded through the system back to the PSTN within
20 s of the call forwarding sequence being initiated.
Emergency transfer conditions
Every DID Trunk Cartridge has a Control Circuit Interface
which should be connected directly to the Central Office for
monitoring purposes.
If the
system loses power or the microcontroller on the
DID Trunk Cartridge malfunctions, the CCI signals the Central
Office that it can no longer handle DID calls. The Central Office,
by pre-arrangement, can then forward the DID lines to other
numbers.
The CCI signaling to report power loss or malfunction of
the DID Trunk Cartridge is not supported by all carriers.
For carriers or installations which do not use CCI
signaling, the CCI and ET connections should be treated
as “No connection”.
Modular
Installer Guide
DID Trunk Cartridge wiring chart 93
Trunk Module with DID Trunk Cartridges and RJ-21 wiring connections
TM
TC
Slot
Slot
Slot 2
Slot 3
connector arrangement
Port
Wire color
Pin
1
26
1
27
2
28
3
White-Blue
Blue-White
White-Orange
Orange-White
White-Green
Green-White
29
4
30
5
31
6
32
7
33
8
White-Brown
Brown-White
White-Slate
Slate-White
Red-Blue
Blue-Red
Red-Orange
Orange-Red
Red-Green
Green-Red
34
9
35
10
36
11
Red-Brown
Brown-Red
Red-Slate
Slate-Red
Black-Blue
Blue-Black
37
12
38
13
39
14
40
15
41
16
42
17
43
18
44
19
Service
Line
T
1
x01
-------
No connection
No connection
-------
CCI NC1
CCI Corn 1
T
T
-------------
No connection
No connection
No connection
No connection
T
T
-------
No connection
No connection
Black-Orange
Orange-Black
Black-Green
Green-Black
Black-Brown
Brown-Black
Black-Slate
Slate-Black
Yellow-Blue
Blue-Yellow
-------
CCI NC1
CCI
T
Yellow-Orange
Orange-Yellow
Yellow-Green
Green-Yellow
Yellow-Brown
Brown-Yellow
x09
x09
x10
x10
-------
T
X08
-------------
2
2
-------
26
1
27
2
-------
White-Blue
Blue-White
White-Orange
Orange-White
---3
3
4
4
-------------
28
3
29
4
30
5
-------------
White-Green
Green-White
White-Brown
Brown-White
White-Slate
Slate-White
---
5
5
6
6
-------
31
6
32
7
-------
Red-Blue
Blue-Red
Red-Oranae
Orange-Red
---7
7
8
8
-------------
33
8
34
9
35
10
-------------
Red-Green
Green-Red
Red-Brown
Brown-Red
Red-Slate
Slate-Red
9
9
10
10
-------
36
11
37
12
-------
Black-Blue
Blue-Black
Black-Orange
Orange-Black
1
T
No connection
No connection
No connection
No connection
T
T
No connection
No connection
RJ-21 connector
Pin
Wire color
---
45
Yellow-Slate
---CCI NC1
38
Black-Green
20
Slate-Yellow
---CCI
---13
Green-Black
46
Violet-Blue
x11
T
11
39
Black-Brown
21
Blue-Violet
x11
11
14
Brown-Black
47
Violet-Orange
x12
T
12
40
Black-Slate
22
Orange-Violet
x12
12
15
Slate-Black
48
Violet-Green
---No connection
------23
Green-Violet
---No connection
------49
Violet-Brown
---No connection
------24
Brown-Violet
---No connection
------50
Violet-Slate
---ET
No connection
Slate-Violet
---ET
No connection
25
Note: Auxiliary equipment can not be connected to the RJ-21 connector.
Port codes are explained in the section Port number coding on the wiring charts.
Note: For CCI connections in Service column: NC1 stands for the normally closed relay and
the common
relay.
Note: CCI signaling is not supported by all carriers. For carriers or installations which do not use CCI signaling,
the CCI and ET connections should be treated as “No connection”.
CCI wiring is a non-standard wiring arrangement which has been submitted to the DOC.
Modular
Installer Guide
94
DID Trunk Cartridge wiring chart
how
read the
chart
connections (DID)
Trunk module with DID and
cartridges
Pm-l
2
3
4
no
33
35
37
12
13
--
39
14
42
17
18
46
21
--E
49
---.
.
ET
Wiring charts for mixed service
Shown
installation
with twoTCDIDin Slot 3. .
in Slotshere
andis 2anand
one
Slots 1 and 2: Only the T,
connected.
and CCI leads are
Slot 3: All leads are connected.
Note that the
connections (on the
chart) begin on a new distribution block.
tine numbers be in at pins 26 and 1 to indicate the
first
(
line.
--
Modular DR5 installer Guide
telemanuals.com
After the hardware has been installed and powered up, use
Startup to initialize the system, and select one of the four system
templates.
CAUTION
Startup erases any existing programmed data, and
resets the system to factory defaults.
Performing Startup
1.
Enter the Startup access code from a
telephone dial pad, by pressing
M7324 or
which is the same as
To be accepted, the Startup code must be entered no later
than 15 minutes after the
system has been powered
up. (If 15 minutes have elapsed since you powered up the
system, turn system power OFF and ON, to prepare for the
Startup process.)
2.
Enter the Installer password:
which is the same as
The Installer password is not shown on the display.
Note: The Installer password shown is the default normally
used for Startup. For a system which has already
been programmed, the Installer password might
have been changed in Configuration and recorded
below.
Modular DR5 installer Guide
telemanuals.com
96 Programming
CAUTION
Wait at least two minutes after Startup before you .
attempt Maintenance diagnostic tests or the
disabling/enabling of a module. If you do not wait two
minutes, ports may be disabled.
Changing the default template
. After entering the Startup access code and Installer password
the display shows
1. To select a default template, press
The display shows
Square.
OR
To exit without choosing a template, press
2.
Press
to choose one of four templates (Square,
Hybrid or PBX).
3.
Press [Next] to store the programming.
The display shows
ate appl icd.
The indicators begin to flash after a few moments.
The display shows Jan 1 1:
am.
If power fails
All Configuration and Administration programming is retained for
system is powered
three days if the power fails or if the
OFF. After three days without power, it may be necessary to
perform Startup.
Modular
Installer Guide
telemanuals.com
Startup defaults
97
Startup defaults
The four templates available in the
system are Square,
Hybrid, and PBX. The following charts show the default
settings for each template.
Hybrid and PBX
Square defaults are listed in full.
defaults are listed only when they differ from Square defaults.
Where a DN is specified, it is the three-digit DN that is the default
on an expanded system. (Two-digit
are the default on
non-expanded systems.)
Configuration defaults
Data
Trunk data
Parameter
Square
Line
(Trunk type)
Loop
Trunk mode
Unsupervised
Ans mode
Manual
Ans with
(presented if Ans
mode is Auto)
Y
e
Hybrid
PBX
s
Signal
(presented if Line
is E&M)
Gain
(presented if Line
is E&M)
Normal
Dial mode
Pulse
on
Full
idle line
(presented if Line
is Loop)
No
Modular
Installer Guide
telemanuals.com
98
Startup defaults
Received number (target lines only)
Square
Parameter
Rec’d
i
Hybrid
PBX
Hybrid
PBX
None
Line data (physical and target lines)
Parameter
Square
Line type
Public
Prime Telephone
for each line
DN 221
Auxiliary ringer
for each line
Yes
Auto privacy
Yes
Public
Lines
001 to 008:
009 to 012:
013 to 016:
017 to 020:
021 to 024:
025 to 028:
029 to 032:
033 to 036:
037 to 040:
041 to 044:
045 to 048:
049 to 052:
053 to 056:
057 to 060:
061 to 064:
Target lines cannot be placed into line pools.
Modular DR5 Installer Guide
Pool t
Pool A
Pool B
Pool C
Pool D
Pool E
Pool F
Pool G
Pool H
Pool I
Pool J
Pool K
Pool L
Pool M
Pool N
Pool 0
telemanuals.com
Startup defaults 99
Line Access
Parameter
Square
Line assignment
Line 001
Line 002
Answer
None
Ringing lines
Hybrid
Line
Line 001
No lines
assigned
Ring for all
Ring for
all
assigned
lines.
Ring for
DN 221.
No ring
other
No lines
assigned.
Any lines
added
Ring.
Any lines
added
Ring.
Any lines
added
Ring.
Any lines
added
Ring.
Ringing lines for
target lines
No target lines are assigned automatically, but
any lines added will be Ring
Line Pool access
No
Intercom keys
2
Prime line
None
No
Yes (Pool A)
Line
Intercom
Intercom
is a three digit line number. The
template
automatically performs a sequential assignment of lines to
It assigns Line 001 to DN 221, Line 002 to DN 222, and so on,
until all lines in the system have been assigned to
These
lines are automatically made the Prime Lines for the
Modular
Installer Guide
100 Startup defaults
Call Handling
Parameter
Square
Held line
reminder
No
Remind delay (s)
(presented if
Held line
reminder is
changed to Yes)
60
DRT to Prime
Telephone
Yes
DRT delay (rings)
3
Transfer callback 3
(rings)
Park prefix
1
Park timeout (s)
45
Camp timeout (s)
45
Directed pickup
Yes
On hold
Tones
(s) is seconds.
Modular DR5 installer Guide
Hybrid
PBX
Startup defaults 101
Miscellaneous
Parameter
Square
Background
music
No
Direct-dial
0
DN
None
, Auto DN
None
Hybrid
PBX
Alarm Telephone
DN 221
CAP assignment
None
Link time (ms)
600
Telephone
relocation
No
Host Delay (ms)
1000
Supervision (ms)
460
External code
9
9
None
None
Line pool codes
None
None
9 for
Pool A
9 for
Pool A
None
for
Pools B
to 0
None
for
Pools B
to 0
Hybrid
PBX
Installer
password
(ms) is milliseconds.
Svstem data
Parameter
Square
Individual
Individual
DN length
2 (non-expanded system) 3 (expanded
system)
Rec’d # length
3 (Received numbers are used only on
expanded systems.)
may be changed.
Modular DR5 Installer Guide
102
Startup defaults
General administration defaults
System Speed Dial
Parameter
Square
Speed dial
(no defaults assigned)
Line or Pool
Use Prime line
Display digits
Yes
Name
(presented if
Display digits is
changed to No)
Sys Spd Dial
Bypass
restriction
No
Hybrid
PBX
is a two-digit System Speed Dial code
for example).
Names
Parameter
Set names
Line names
Square
Hybrid
PBX
DN (221, for example)
Line number (Line 001, for example)
Time and date
The default time and date is: 1:00 a.m., January
1992
Direct-Dial
Parameter
Square
DN 221
Set2, Set3, Set4,
Set5
None
Modular DR5 Installer Guide
Hybrid
PBX
Startup defaults
103
Capabilities
Dialing filters
Parameter
Square
Filter 00
No restrictions (cannot be changed)
Filter 01
Restriction 01
0
Hybrid
1
Restriction 03
Exceptions
911
911
9911
9911
Restriction 04
411
9411
Restriction 05
976
9976
Filter 02 to 99
Hybrid and PBX
settings are the
same as those
for the Square
template
90
Restriction 02
Exceptions
91
91800
91555
1800
1555
1l 1
PBX
No restrictions
Remote access packages
Hybrid
PBX
Parameter
Square
Package 00
Prohibits access to line pools and Remote
Page. Cannot be changed.
Package 01
Line pool access
Y for Pool A
N for Pools B to 0
Remote Page No
Packages 02 15
Line pool access
N for Pools A to 0
Remote Page No
Modular
installer Guide
104 Startup defaults
Set abilities (Capabilities cont’d)
Parameter
Square
Set filter
02
Line/set filter
None
Telephone lock
None
Full handsfree
No
Automatic
handsf ree
(presented if Full
handsfree is Yes)
No
Handsfree
Answerback
Yes
Pickup group
No
Paging
Y
Page zone
1
Auxiliary Ringer
No
Direct-Dial
Forward on busy
None
Forward no
answer
None
Forward delay
of rings
presented if
Forward no
. answer is ON)
3
Allow redirect
No
Redirect ring
Yes
Hotline
None
Use Prime line
(presented for
external Hotline)
Yes
Priority call
No
Modular DR5 installer Guide
Hybrid
PBX
Startup defaults
105
Line abilities (Capabilities cont’d)
Parameter
Square
Line filter
03
Remote filter
I 04
Remote pkg
00
Hybrid
PBX
Class of Service (COS) passwords (Capabilities cont’d)
Parameter
Square
COS passwords
None
User filter
Deflt
Line filter
Deflt
Remote pkg
Hybrid
PBX
Deflt
‘Deflt’ setting means that no COS filter is programmed by
default. Any filters programmed elsewhere to apply to the
telephone, the line or the user’s COS password are still in effect.
Modular
Installer Guide
106
Startup defaults
Service Modes
Hybrid
PBX
Parameter
Square
Control
Telephones
DN 221
Name1
Night
(if Setting is changed from Manual to Auto:
Stop =
Start =
Name2
Evening
(if Setting is changed from Manual to Auto:
Start =
Stop = 23:00)
N a m e 3
Lunch
(if Setting is changed from Manual to Auto:
Start =
Stop =
i
Trunk answer
Yes
Extra-dial
Telephone
221
Ringing
Telephone
221
Auxiliary Ringer
Yes
Password
Parameter
Administration
password
Default
q oaaa
Log Defaults
Parameter
Default
Space/Log
0
Modular
Installer Guide
Startup defaults 107
Call Services
Parameter
Auto Call info
None
Vmsg
Logging set
Show Extl Vmsg
N
N
Log space
Pool
0
600
Log password
None
1 st display
Name
Vmsg center
Center 1 to 5
Vmsg center
lines
. None
1
Modular
Installer Guide
108 Configuration overview
Configuration overview
Configuration programming performed by the Installer or the
Customer Service representative, and lets you change settings
for the entire
system, as well as settings for individual
telephones and external lines. Configuration programming is the
first programming done after system installation.
This chapter contains information for programming Configuration
settings. If you are new to programming, you may want to
practice using the detailed Administration programming
procedures in the System Coordinator Guide before attempting
other procedures.
For information on Administration programming, and Personal
programming, see the System Coordinator Guide.
How programming is done
Programming is done at an M7324 or
Telephone. Use the
buttons on the telephone to program a setting or to request a
specific programming action.
guides you step by step on the telephone display while
you access programming, select and change programmable
settings, and exit programming.
Reviewing programmed settings
Set Profile and Line Profile features help you to check your
programming by allowing you to review the settings. For more
information, see the System Coordinator Guide.
Modular DR5 Installer Guide
Configuration overview
109
Vogramming overview
B. General admin
D.Maintenance
Uersion
Status]
3. Nodule Status
6. Service Modes
7. Password
8.
Defaults
9. Call Services
Modular DR5 Installer Guide
110 Configuration overview
Programming tools
A
telephone
System programming can only be performed on an M7310 or
M7324 Telephone.
The
Overlay
The
Programming Overlay is a paper cutout that labels
four telephone buttons used during. programming. This makes it
easier for you to identify the button that you want. The
Programming Overlay is provided at the end of this book.
Programming Overlay
The
Modular DR5 Programming Record
The
Modular DR5 Programming Record provides a
convenient way to record what you have programmed. It also
helps you to plan your programming. Settings are grouped
according to their function.
Pages from the Record may be photocopied as necessary for
programming many telephones or lines.
The
Telephone User Cards
Each
telephone has a
Telephone User Card that
lists the most commonly used features.
The
Modular
Telephone Feature Card
The
Modular DR5 Telephone Feature Card lists the
button.
features that can be accessed with the
Modular DR5 Installer Guide
Configuration overview
111
Entering Configuration
,
1.
Release all calls on your telephone.
2.
Enter the Configuration access code:
which is the same as
3. The display shows Password:.
Enter the Configuration password (the password does not
appear on the display as you enter it). The default Password
is
(266344).
If the password is correct, the display shows
and three triangular indicators
on the vertical display between the rows of buttons.
appear
If the password is incorrect, the display does not change.
Check the password. Press
and re-enter the
password.
4.
Place the
Programming Overlay over the buttons
pointed to by the indicators . .
Exiting Configuration
stores your changes automatically as soon as you alter
any settings; you do not need to “save” your changes.
1. Press
The display briefly shows End of session.
Modular
Installer Guide
112 Configuration overview
Configuration headings
Headings and subheadings in Configuration programming help
you to keep track of where you are. An example of a heading is
for programming trunks and lines. Under that
heading, one of the subheadings is Dial
for programming
the dial mode of a line.
Configuration programming has five headings:
CONFIGURATION CODE
[Password:
Data
Data lets you assign settings
to each trunk, external line and
incoming target line.
Line Access lets you assign settings to
each telephone.
Line
Call Hand1
Call Handling lets you assign
system-wide settings associated with
various call features.
Miscellaneous lets you assign various
system-wide settings.
4.
Data
Modular DR5 Installer Guide
System Data lets you change a
telephone’s internal number, the length
of all internal numbers, and the number
of digits received by auto-answer
trunks.
Configuration overview
113
Moving through Configuration
To program a setting, you must first locate the correct heading.
To do this, scan through the headings of Configuration using the
and [Back] buttons.
To move through Configuration headings:
Begin with the display showing
Press
The display shows
Data.
2.
Press [Next].
The display shows 2. Line
3.
Press
The display shows 3. Cal 1 Hand1
4.
Press
The display shows 4.
5.
Press [Next].
The display shows 5.
6.
Press
The disolav shows 1.
Data.
Data.
Modular DR5 Installer Guide
114
Configuration overview
Using the Overlay
The indicators show which buttons can be used at that
programming step. The functions on these buttons allow you to
move through the headings and subheadings of
programming.
[Heading]
moves up in the hierarchy of headings and
subheadings.
moves down in the hierarchy of headings and
subheadings, or to begin programming for a
heading or subheading.
moves to the next heading, subheading, or
setting.
moves to the previous heading, subheading, or
setting.
The
Programming Overlay is located inside the back
cover of this Guide.
M7310 Telephone with
a
Programming
Overlay
Modular
Installer Guide
M7324 Telephone with
Programming
a
Overlay
Configuration overview 115
The
display buttons
Display buttons perform many functions. Depending on where
you are in programming, one, two, or three display buttons may
be available at any one time. You press one of the display
buttons to select the function that you want.
Display message
Display button message
--
--
--
Display button
The most common display button labels are:
changes a programmable setting.
moves the cursor one space to the left (backspace)
and delete a character, allowing you to re-enter a
number or letter.
copies line or telephone programming.
views the last part of a displayed message longer
than 16 characters.
views the first part of a displayed message longer
than 16 characters.
- - -
moves the cursor one position to the right when
programming a name.
moves the cursor one position to the left when
programming a name.
Modular DR5 Installer Guide
116 Configuration overview
Programming details
Entering numbers
Numbers are entered from the
telephone dial pad. The
backspace display button may be used to edit the number.
A line number must always be entered as a three-digit number.
Line numbers from to 99 must be entered with a leading zero
(line 020, for example). Similarly, line numbers less than 10 must
be entered with two leading zeros (line 002, for example).
Internal telephone numbers, also referred to as Directory
Numbers
can be two- to seven-digits long on a
non-expanded system, and three- to seven-digits long on an
expanded system. The default DN length is two on a
non-expanded system and three on an expanded system. The
DN length can be changed in Configuration programming.
Viewing long telephone numbers
External telephone numbers can be up to 24 digits, but the
telephone display is only 16 character spaces long. If you wish to
see a previously programmed number that is longer than 16
digits, you must do the following:
Begin, for example, with 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 8 1 2 3 4 5 .
The display shows only the first 15 digits. The three dots
at
the end of the display indicate th’at more digits remain to the
external number.
1. To see the remaining digits, press
2. To see the first 15 digits again, press
Modular
Installer Guide
Data 117
Data
3. Call Handling
Trunk lines and Target lines
In order to configure a
system, you need to distinguish
between trunks and target lines.
A trunk is a physical line numbered from 001 to
fully expanded system).
(in a
A target line is a ‘virtual’ communication path between an
telephone (or other
external caller and a
device). This path is established on the basis of digits
received from an incoming trunk. Target lines number from
081 to 184 (in a fully expanded
system).
Having target lines, independent of the physical lines, makes it
possible to have many target lines for a few physical trunks.
Telephones can be configured to have an appearance of any
type of line (including target lines). Calls may be placed on all
lines except target lines.
See the description of Line Pool programming under the
Line
setting (in 1.
Data, Line data)
for the recommended assignments to line pools.
Modular DR5 Installer Guide
118
Data
Line numbers for Trunks and Target lines
Type of system
KSU trunks
(loop start)
Trunk
Module
trunks
Target lines
Non-expanded
system
001
008
none
none
Expansion
Cartridge
001
008
009
032
081
6-port Expansion
Cartridge
001
008
009
080
081 - 1 8 4
120
Trunks
A trunk provides the physical connection between a
system and other systems
or otherwise) in a private or
public network.
uses three types of trunks:
loop start trunks
Direct Inward Dial (DID) trunks
Loop start and E&M trunks can be used for both incoming and
outgoing calls. DID trunks, however, are used for incoming calls
exclusively.
Loop start and E&M trunks operate in one of two modes for
incoming calls: manual-answer or auto-answer. DID trunks
operate only in auto-answer mode.
Manual-answer trunks
Incoming calls on trunks configured for manual-answer alert in
the usual manner at all associated line appearances.
Auto-answer trunks
Trunks configured for auto-answer provide remote access to the
system. Any line appearance of such a trunk is normally used
only to monitor the incoming call status of the trunk, not to
answer calls.
Modular DR5 Installer Guide
Data 119
Incoming calls on auto-answer trunks are answered by the
system. Typically, digits received from the far end are used to
route the call to a specific target line.
If they are idle, auto-answer loop start and
used to make outgoing calls.
can be
Disconnect supervision
Supervision is a feature available on a CO line. You should only
use the disconnect supervision setting for lines that have the
Supervision feature.
Disconnect supervision is required for auto-answer trunks, but
not for manual-answer trunks. Note, however, that use of
unsupervised trunks (or trunks with disconnect supervision
inactive) for incoming calls results in the inconsistent operation of
the Line Redirection feature, the ability to tandem through the
system to other systems in the network, and the ability to
disconnect from a conference that involves two external callers.
If a
trunk without disconnect supervision is
programmed for auto-answer mode, the trunk operates in
manual-answer mode.
Loop start trunks
Both manual-answer and auto-answer trunks can be used for
making outgoing calls or receiving incoming calls. The answer
mode (manual-answer and auto-answer) determines how the
system handles incoming calls.
By default, auto-answer Loop start trunks are answered by the
(Direct Inward System Access) capability, and are
system
system’s
used to provide controlled access to a
resources from the public network.
A user makes or receives calls on a manual-answer Loop start
trunk by having a line appearance of the trunk, or by selecting a
line pool containing the trunk to make a call.
KSU trunk lines (001 to 008) are Loop start lines.
Modular DR5 Installer Guide
120
Data
E&M trunks
E&M trunks connect two or more systems directly in a private
network.
An E&M Trunk Cartridge provides two E&M trunks and two
DTMF receivers. These are given consecutive line numbers. For
example, an E&M TC in slot 1 of a Trunk Module plugged into
the highest numbered DS-30 port shows the E&M trunks as lines
009 and 010, and shows the DTMF receivers as line numbers
011 and 012.
E&M trunks can operate in manual-answer mode, or in
auto-answer mode with disconnect supervision. Manual-answer
E&M trunks alert directly at any telephone with a line appearance
associated with the trunk. By default, auto-answer E&M trunks
are answered by the system
(Direct inward System
Access) capability, and are used to provide controlled access to
a
system’s resources from elsewhere in a private
network.
Capabilities available to a remote user are determined by a Class
of Service associated with the trunk or by the remote user’s
password,
Direct Inward
(DID) trunks
DID trunks handle only incoming external calls. The digits
received from the Central Office are used typically to route calls
to a target line. The DID call appears at every telephone
configured with an appearance of that target line.
DN or the Auto DN, if the last
Calls can also be made to the
digits of the DID number are the same as one of these
Any appearance of a DID trunk can be used only to monitor
activity of the trunk, not to answer an incoming call.
Modular
Installer Guide
Data 121
Note: The digits provided by the CO need not match the
numbering plan. You can use the Configuration
heading to specify the digits that make a
DN
target line ring. You can use the Configuration
or Auto DN settings to specify the numbers that make the
system answer a remote call automatically.
Target lines
‘A target line is a specific communication path reached by means
of digits received from an incoming trunk. Target lines are used
to answer incoming calls but cannot be used to make outgoing
calls.
Auto-answer loop start and E&M trunks, and DID trunks, provide
automated routing of calls to different destinations depending on
the digits dialed. The destination is usually a target line (a virtual
line) that can be assigned to telephones in the same way as a
physical line. Target lines provide for attendant by-pass (calling
directly to a specific department or individual) and line
concentration (one trunk can fan out into many target lines).
The digits received on an incoming trunk may be:
received from a Central Office (in the case of DID)
received from a PBX (in the case of E&M)
dialed by a remote user after having received system dial
tone (in the case of auto-answer loop start, auto-answer E&M
trunks or DID trunks).
By default, no target lines are assigned. However, if auto-answer
trunks are used in the system, you can assign target lines to sets
in the same way that other lines are assigned (in
2. Line
of Configuration).
Target lines are referred to by line numbers in the same way as
physical lines.
Modular DR5 Installer Guide
122
Data
Remote system access
The remote access feature allows callers elsewhere on a private
network, or on the public network, to get access to a
system by dialing directly without going through an attendant.
Once on the system, the remote user can use some of the
system’s resources.
systems with at least one Trunk Module support remote
system access on the following trunk types which may require
the remote caller to enter a password for Direct Inward System
Access (DISA):
auto-answer loop start trunks
auto-answer E&M trunks
DID trunks (by means of the
DN).
The system resources (dialing capabilities, Line Pool access and
feature access) that a remote user may access depends on the
Class of Service assigned to them. You can refer to the
description of Class of Service in the Administration chapter for
more details.
Remote access on loop start and E&M trunks
Loop start trunks provide remote access to
from the
public network; E&M trunks provide remote access from a private
network. Each must be configured to be auto-answer (in
Trunk
programming) to provide remote system access.
A loop start trunk must have disconnect supervision if it is to
operate in auto-answer mode. E&M trunks always operate in
disconnect supervised mode.
Auto-answer with
When a caller dials in, the system answers with stuttered dial
tone. This is the prompt to enter a Class of Service (COS)
password which determines which system capabilities are
available to the caller.
Modular
Installer Guide
Data 123
Auto-answer without
When a caller dials into the system, the system answers with
system dial tone and no COS password is required. In this case,
control over the system capabilities available to the caller is
provided only by the Class of Service assigned to the incoming
line.
Remote access on E&M trunks connected to a
network
Nodes on the private network deliver the last dialed digits to the
node, for interpretation by the destination
destination
node. The destination
node either matches the
digits to a target line or interprets the digits as a remote feature
request. The call is eitherrouted to the specified target line, or
the remote feature is activated.
Auto-answer E&M trunks connected to a private network
By default, E&M trunks are set to answer with DISA. For.
auto-answer E&M trunks connected to a private network, change
the default so that the trunks are not answered with DISA.
If an auto-answer E&M trunk is configured to answer with DISA,
the system tries to interpret any received digits as a COS
password.
Auto-answer with the
DN and the Auto DN
The
DN and the Auto DN allow auto-answer private
network and auto-answer DID calls, in the same way that calls on
auto-answer loop start and auto-answer E&M trunks can be
are described in
answered, with or without DISA. These
4.
programming.
Remote access on Direct Inward Dial (DID) trunks
Remote system access on DID trunks is similar to that’of E&M
trunks connected to a private network. The main differences are:
a remote caller is on the public network dialing standard local
or long-distance telephone numbers
the digits received are delivered by the Central Office (CO)
cannot be administered to a DID trunk.
Modular
Installer Guide
124
Data
As with a private network, the dialed digits may be programmed
to match those of a specific target line DN or Remote Feature
(the
DN and the Auto DN).
Copying Trunk and Line data
button appears. This
At the Show 1 ine: prompt a
allows you to copy programming from one line to other lines.
Copying data from different types of Trunk
Cartridges (TC)
Copying lines between different trunk types (for example, from a
Loop Start TC to an E&M TC) triggers the prompt
Reset
along with the display buttons
and
This is because all trunks on a given TC must be of the same
type. Changing the trunk type for one line on a TC changes all
lines on the same TC.
Note:
“nnn-mmm” is the number range for the lines in the Trunk
Cartridge to which the data is to be copied.
Copying limitations
when copying data for an E&M line to a loop start line or a
DID line, if you reset the new line to E&M (in response to the
prompt), the first two lines in the changed TC are E&M and
the last two lines DTMF (see the description of E&M Trunks).
in copying data from a physical trunk to a target line (or the
other way around), only the data in common is copied. For
example, copying a target line to an E&M trunk copies only
the Line data settings because there are no Trunk data
settings for a target line.
,
the Received number
d
) of a target line is a unique
number and cannot be copied.
the two lines on E&M
reserved for DTMF receivers
cannot be copied to another line type (see the section on
E&M
for a description of E&M and DTMF lines).
You can copy data to KSU lines 001 to 008 only from loop
start lines.
Modular DR5 Installer Guide
Data 125
Trunk Data settings apply to physical lines (001 to
and not
to target lines (081 to 184). Some Trunk Data settings may not
appear on the display during programming depending on the
type of trunk. Those that appear for a given Trunk type are
indicated in the table below.
Note:
Target lines do not have any Trunk data settings. For
target lines, the physical connection information consists
of the received digit string
d
) used to access the
target line.
Trunk data prompts that appear for a given Trunk type
Prompt
Loop
start
E&M
DID
DTMF
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Trunk mode:
Yes
Ans mode:
Yes
Ye8
Ans with DISA:
Yes
Yes
Signal:
Yes
Gain:
Yes
Dial mode:
Yes
Full
Yes
Yes
Yes
Modular DR5 Installer Guide
126
Data
The Line setting specifies the trunk type for a line. Use the
display button to select the setting: Loop, E&M (or
DTMF) and DID.
Loop is the default setting used for loop start trunks (for
Loop Start and Cl Trunk Cartridges), and for KSU loop start
lines (001 to 008).
E&M is for the first two line numbers on an E&M Trunk
Cartridge.
DTMF is for the two last lines on an E&M cartridge. You must
not assign DTMF receiver line numbers to telephones. If you
do, the lines appear at the telephone as out of service.
DID is for a Direct Inward Dialing (DID) Trunk Cartridge.
Programming hints
E&M Trunk Cartridges have two E&M lines and two DTMF
receivers (instead of four lines as in a loop start cartridge).
For example, if an E&M Trunk Cartridge has the range of line
numbers 009 to 012, numbers 009 and 010 are E&M lines,
and numbers 011 and 012 are the DTMF receivers. The
display prompt for line 010 appears as
E&M and
for line 011 appears as
1: DTMF.
After you change a Trunk type setting (or after you use the
COPY display button to copy Line programming) you are
prompted to confirm that you want to reset the Trunk type for
all trunks supplied by the TC, since all trunks on the same
TC must be of the same type. You must press the
display button for a changed or copied Trunk setting take
effect.
Note; Changing the settings for Trunk Cartridge type (that
is, loop start, E&M or DID) on a system in use, may
cause lines to be disabled and calls to be dropped.
Modular DR5 Installer Guide
Data 127
mode
Trunk mode lets you specify one of two modes of operation for
each line: disconnect supervision or unsupervised. Disconnect
supervision, also referred to as loop supervision, releases an
external line when an Open Switch Interval (OSI) is detected
during a call on that line. This prevents the line from remaining
unavailable for other
users.
Use the
display button to select the setting: Super or
Unspr.
Super assigns supervised mode, if supported by the
hardware; otherwise, unsupervised mode is assigned.
Unspr (the default) turns disconnect supervision OFF for the
line.
Programming hints
The Trunk mode setting is used only for loop start lines on a
Trunk Cartridge or in the KSU.
The duration of an OSI before
disconnects a call is
programmed in the Supervision setting of Miscellaneous
programming.
For loop start trunks to operate in auto-answer mode,
disconnect supervision is required.
Answer mode
The Answer mode prompt appears on the display during
programming for loop start lines if the Trunk mode setting was
Super, and for E&M lines. The prompt is suppressed for DID
display button to select the
programming. Use the
setting: Manual or Auto.
Modular
Installer Guide
128
Data
Programming hints
Remember that disconnect supervision is required if loop
start trunks are to operate in auto-answer mode.
You should change the Answer with
setting to N, for
E&M trunks in a private network operating in auto-answer
mode. The default
causes the system
to expect a Class of Service password after it automatically
answers a trunk.
Answer with
When activated, the Answer with
setting specifies that a
trunk is answered with stutter dial tone. Use the
display
button to select the setting: Y (Yes) or N (No).
Programming hints
This setting is displayed during the programming of loop start
and E&M lines if Answer mode was set to Auto. The prompt
is suppressed during DID programming.
Signal
Use the
display button to select the setting:
Immediate and
Programming hints
The Signal setting appears on the display only for E&M or
DID programming.
Make sure that this matches the signal type programmed for
the trunk at the other switch.
Modular DR5 Installer Guide
Data 129
Gain
Use the
display button to select the setting: Normal or
High. The default value Normal induces zero loss. Use it when
the E&M trunks are connected to facilities that present 0
at
the interface, for both the transmit and receive paths.
Facility or
Receive
Transmit
E&M Gain set to NORMAL
The value High induces 7db of loss in the receive path and
of loss in the transmit path. Use it when the E&M trunks are
connected to facilities that.present
in the receive path,
and -16
in the transmit path, at the interface.
Facility
Receive
Transmit
E&M Gain set to HIGH
Programming hints
Control over the gain (transmission levels) can be set for
E&M trunk programming only.
Dial mode
The Dial mode setting appears on the display only for loop start
and E&M trunk programming. Dial mode lets you specify whether
Dual Tone Multi-Frequency (DTMF) or Pulse signalling is used
on the trunk. Use the
display button to select the
setting: Pulse or Tone.
Modular DR5 Installer Guide
Data
130
Full
on idle line
Full
on idle line is a variation of the Automatic Hold
feature. If you select an idle line, but do not dial any digits, that
line is automatically placed on hold if you then select another
line. Use the
display button to select the setting: N (No)
or Y (Yes).
The line you first selected is held until you press its button, The
line is not available for use by anyone else.
Programming hints
A prompt for Full
appears only during loop start
is always in place for E&M
trunk programming. Full
trunks; it has no meaning for incoming-only DID trunks.
The default setting should be changed only if Full
required for a specific application.
is
Received number
The Received number setting applies only to target lines (line
numbers 081 and higher). It allows you to specify the digits which
make a specific target line ring. The default value is no digits
specified.
display button, and the
Use the [Show] button, the
dial pad to program the digit string for each target line.
Programming hints
The length of a
can be one to seven digits
(programmed in System Data); the default is three digits.
Received numbers must be unique among target lines, the
DN and the Line Pool access codes.
Auto DN, the
Modular
Installer Guide
Data 131
Line data
Line data programming can be applied to all lines, trunks and
target lines:
lines 001 to 032 (trunks) and 081 to 120 (target line) for a
Two-port Expansion Cartridge.
001 to 080 (trunks) and 081 to 184 (target lines) for a
Six-port Expansion Cartridge.
Line type
This setting specifies how the line is to be used in relation to
other lines in the system. Use the
display button to
select the setting: Public, Private to:, or Pool (A to 0,
representing 15 line pools).
A Public line can be accessed by more than. one telephone.
A Private line can be assigned only to one telephone and the
Prime Telephone for that line. Use the
display
button and the dial pad to enter the internal number of the
telephone.
Pool assigns the line to one of the fifteen line pools. If a line
is assigned to a line pool, but is not assigned to any
telephone, that line is available only for outgoing calls.
Modular DR5 Installer Guide
Data
132
Programming hints
Line pools must NEVER contain a mixture of loop start lines
and E&M lines.
All lines in a given line pool should always go to the same
location.
There are two more programming settings that must be
assigned before a line pool can be used:
l
l
You must assign Line Pool access to telephones in the
Line Access section of Configuration programming.
You must assign system-wide Line Pool access codes in
the Miscellaneous section of Configuration programming.
A telephone can be administered to search automatically for
an idle line from several lines appearing on the telephone.
Assign a line pool as the Prime line (in 2. Line
Prime 1
and all the lines in the line pool must appear on
that telephone. When the user lifts the receiver, or presses
handsfree, any one of the lines, if idle, can be selected by
Automatic Outgoing Line selection.
Develop a unified dialing plan for line pools where
systems are networked together. It may be appropriate to
provide a single line pool with E&M lines for use by all callers
on the network.
If you plan to program the Prime line to the Intercom (l/C)
setting, you may wish to assign loop start lines to the first line
pools. Remember that when the system searches for an
outgoing line, it begins at Line Pool A and chooses the first
available line.
Assigning a single E&M trunk to a line pool allows features
like Ring Again on Busy Line Pool to help manage access to
a shared resource.
Target lines cannot be assigned to a line pool.
Modular DR5 Installer Guide
Data 133
Prime Telephone
This feature allows you to assign a telephone to provide backup
answering for calls on the line. Unanswered calls are redirected
to the Prime telephone. Use the
display button and the
dial pad to enter the internal number of the Prime telephone.
Programming hints
For auto-answer trunks, calls ring only at the Prime
telephone for a trunk, and only when overflow call routing is
active.
Each line can be assigned only one Prime telephone.
Auxiliary Ringer
This setting allows you to turn the Auxiliary Ringer ON or OFF.
When turned ON, the Auxiliary Ringer ring for any incoming calls
that ring on the line. The Auxiliary Ringer is an optional device
that must be connected by the Installer. Use the
display
button to select the setting: Y (Yes) and N (No).
Programming hints
For auto-answer trunks, calls ring only at the Prime
telephone for a trunk, and only when overflow call routing is
active.
An Auxiliary Ringer can be programmed, in the Service
Modes section of Administration programming, to ring for a
line placed into a Service Mode. An Auxiliary Ringer can also
be programmed to ring for calls to a telephone. See the
System Coordinator Guide for more information.
Privacy
This feature controls whether one
user can select a line
in use at another telephone to join an existing call. The default
setting is Privacy ON, so that nobody with a
telephone
can press a line appearance on their telephone to join a call in
progress at another telephone. Use the
display button
to select the setting: Y (ON) and N (OFF).
Programming hints
Privacy can also be turned ON and OFF during a call with
the Privacy feature code.
Modular
Installer Guide
134 Line Access
Line Access
When you are finished programming Line Access settings for one
telephone, you can copy those settings to other telephones.
Line assignment
Answer
Ringing
Line pool access
intercom buttons
Prime line
Line assignment
This setting allows you to assign physical trunk lines and target
lines to each telephone. Target lines are assigned and removed
in the same manner as other lines. Use the b u t t o n ,
the
display button, and the dial pad to program the line
numbers each telephone can access.
Modular
Installer Guide
Line Access 135
Programming hints
The default line assignments depend on the system template
assigned during System Startup. The line assignment
defaults for the default template (Square) are lines 001 and
002 to all telephones.
In general, auto-answer loop start trunks, auto-answer E&M
trunks and DID trunks are not assigned to telephones. If
assigned, they are used for monitoring incoming call usage,
or for making outgoing calls (auto-answer loop start and E&M
trunks).
You cannot add a line that is private to another telephone.
Each line assigned to a telephone must appear at a button
with an indicator on that telephone. The maximum number of
line buttons are:
8 for the M7208 Telephone
l
l
for the
Telephone
24 for the M7324 Telephone
The
Telephone is an exception; it has no line buttons
and can be assigned any number of lines.
A Central Answering Position (CAP), with one or two CAP
modules, can provide extra line buttons if more than 12 lines
are assigned to the M7324 Telephone. The remaining lines
appear at buttons on the first CAP module.
Answer
Calls for other
telephones can appear and be answered
of the other
at the telephone being programmed. The
One to four Answer
telephones are referred to as Answer
may be assigned to the telephone being programmed. Use
the
button, the
display button, and the dial pad
to program the line numbers each telephone can access on an
Answer button.
Modular
Installer Guide
136 Line Access
Programming hints
Every Answer DN assigned to the telephone automatically
assigns an Answer button with an indicator to the telephone.
These buttons should be labeled accordingly, identifying the
telephone with its name or DN.
More than one telephone can have an Answer button for the
same DN. In this way, more than one telephone can provide
call alerting and call answering for any calls directed to that
DN.
A Private line does not generate alerting at an Answer
button.
Ringing
This setting allows you to choose:
which lines (including target lines), on the telephone being
programmed, rings for an incoming call.
which Answer
on the telephone being programmed,
rings for an incoming call.
If auto-answer loop start trunks, auto-answer E&M trunks or DID
trunks are assigned to a telephone, the ringing preference has an
effect only when overflow call routing or callbacks associated
with overflow call routing occur. The ring/no ring setting has no
effect on incoming calls on the trunks that are being routed to
target lines.
Use the button to display the line you want to
display button
program ringing for. Use the
setting: Ring and No ring.
the
Programming hints
Refer to Startup for default line ringing assignments in the
the Square,
Hybrid and PBX system templates.
Ensure that lines assigned to an
Telephone Ring;
otherwise incoming calls on the lines cannot alert at the
telephone.
You cannot program Ringing if there are no lines or Answer
assigned to the telephone.
Modular DR5 Installer Guide
Line Access 137
Line Pool access
This setting allows a telephone to access one or more of the
fifteen line pools available (A to 0). When you assign “yes” for a,
given line pool, the telephone being programmed can access any
lines in that line pool.
Use thebutton
[Show]to display the line pool you want to
display button to select the
program access to. Use the
setting: N (No) and Y (Yes).
intercom buttons
This setting assigns the number of Intercom buttons to a
telephone. Intercom buttons provide a telephone with access to
internal lines. Use the CHANGE display button to select the
setting: 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, or 8.
Programming hints
Each Intercom button assigned during programming
automatically appears on the telephone. The buttons start
with the lower right-hand button, or one button above if the
feature was assigned to the telephone.
Two Intercom buttons are required for establishing a
conference call with two other
telephones.
Only one Intercom button is required if internal calls are to be
made or received on the telephone, and line pools are to be
accessed.
The M7100 Telephone default assignment of two Intercom
buttons cannot be changed. These buttons do not appear on
the telephone.
Modular
Installer Guide
138 Line Access
Prime line
This setting assigns a Prime line to the telephone. A Prime line is
the first line that is automatically selected when a call is made
from a
telephone. Use the
display button to
select the setting: None, a line number, Pool (A to 0), and
(Only assigned lines and line pools appear.)
Programming hints
An assigned Prime line is not associated with the assignment
of a Prime telephone.
An external line must be assigned to the telephone in Line
assignment before it can be assigned as the Prime line to the
telephone.
A line pool must be assigned to the telephone in Line Pool
access before a line pool can be assigned as the Prime line
to the telephone.
A target line cannot be a Prime line for a telephone because
it is incoming-only.
A DID line should not be assigned as the Prime line for a
telephone. If assigned, it is treated as if no Prime line has
been assigned. The message
a1
appears
when the receiver is lifted.
Remember that if you set Prime line to Intercom (l/C), you
may wish to assign loop start lines to the first line pools.
Remember that when the system searches for an outgoing
line, it begins at Line Pool A and chooses the first available
line.
By assigning a line pool as a Prime line, a telephone can be
made to search automatically for an idle line in a pool. This is
described in the section on programming Line type
(1.
Modular
Data, Line data).
Installer Guide
Call Handling 139
Call Handling
Call Handling allows you to program system-wide characteristics.
These characteristics are not associated with any specific line or
telephone.
1.
Data
2. Line
Held line reminder
(3. Call
DRT to Prime
Miscellaneous1
5.
Data
Transfer callback
Park prefix
Park timeout
Camp timeout
Directed pickup
Music on hold
Held Line Reminder
When active, Held Line Reminder reminds you that a call at your
telephone is still on hold. You periodically hear two tones from
your telephone until you return to the call on hold. Use the
display button to select the setting: N (No) or Y (Yes).
Held Line Reminder delay
Held Line Reminder delay allows you to choose the number of
seconds before the Held Line Reminder feature begins at a
telephone that has an external call on hold. Use the
display button to select the setting: 30, 60, 90, 120, 150, or
180 seconds.
Programming hints
The Held Line Reminder delay can be programmed only if
Held Line Reminder is activated.
Modular
Installer Guide
140 Call Handling
Delayed Ring Transfer
Delayed Ring Transfer automatically forwards unanswered
external calls to a Prime telephone, after a certain period of time.
This helps ensure that no external call goes unanswered. Use
the CHRNQE display button to select the setting: Y (Yes) or
N (No).
, Programming hints
An operational Prime Telephone must be assigned before
this feature can operate. A Prime Telephone is assigned to
one or more external lines in the Line Data section of
Configuration programming.
Delayed Ring Transfer delay
Delayed Ring Transfer delay allows you to specify the number of
rings before Delayed Ring Transfer transfers a call to a Prime
telephone. Use the
display button to select the setting:
1, 2, 3, 4, 6, or 10 rings.
Programming hints
The Delayed Ring Transfer delay can be programmed only if
Delayed Ring Transfer is activated.
You can estimate the delay in seconds if you multiply the
number of rings by six.
Transfer Callback delay
Transfer Callback delay allows you to specify the number of rings
before a Callback occurs on a transferred call. Use the
display button to select the setting: 3, 4, 5, 6, or 12 rings.
Programming hints
You can estimate the delay in seconds if you multiply the
number of rings by six.
Park prefix
The Park prefix is the first digit of the call park retrieval code that
must be entered to retrieve a parked call. If the Park prefix is set
to None, calls cannot be parked. Use the
display button
to select the setting: 1 to 9, N (None), or 0.
Modular DR5 Installer Guide
Call Handling 141
Programming hints
The Park prefix cannot be the same as:
the Direct-dial digit
the External Line access code
l
the first digit of a DN
the first digit of a Line Pool access code.
Other programmable settings may affect which numbers
appear on the display during programming . Although the
numbers 0 to 9 are valid Park prefix settings, some may have
been already assigned elsewhere by default or by
programming changes. (To avoid a conflict, refer to the table
of default settings in the description of External code.)
If DN length is changed, and the changed
the Park prefix, the setting changes to N o n e .
conflict with
Park timeout delay
Park timeout delay allows you to assign the number of seconds
before a parked call on an external line returns to the originating
telephone. Use the
display button to select the setting:
150, 180,300, or 600 seconds.
Camp timeout delay
Camp timeout delay allows you to assign the number of seconds
before an unanswered camped call is returned to the telephone
display button to select
which camped the call. Use the
the setting: 30, 45, 60, 90, 120, 150, or 180 seconds.
pickup
Directed pickup allows you to answer any calls by specifying the
ringing telephone’s internal number. Use the
display
button to select the setting: Y (Yes) or N (No).
Modular
installer Guide
142 Call Handling
Programming hints
Directed pickup is not to be confused with the Call Pickup
“Group feature in Administration programming, which allows
you to answer a call at any telephone within’a specific group
without specifying the internal number of the ringing
telephone.
.
Like Call Pickup Group, Directed pickup is useful when not
all the telephones, have been assigned the same lines, but
you still want to allow your co-workers to answer a call on
any external line from their telephones.
On hold
On hold allows you to choose what a caller hears on an external
display
line when the line has, been put on hold. Use the
button to select the setting: Tones, Music, or Silence.
Tones provides a periodic tone.
Music provides any signal from a source such as a radio
connected to the KSU.
Silence provides no audio feedback.
Modular
Installer Guide
Miscellaneous 143
Miscellaneous
Miscellaneous allows you to program system-wide
characteristics. These characteristics are not associated with any
specific line or telephone.
CONFIGURATION CODE
Password:
I
Data
2. Line
3. Call Handling
4.
aneous
5.
Data
Background Music
Direct-Dial number
DN
Auto DN
Alarm telephone
CAP assignment
Link time
Set relocation
Host delay
Supervision
External code
Line pool codes
Installer password
Background Music
Background Music allows you to listen to music through your
telephone speaker. A music source must be connected to the
Key Service Unit. Use the
display button to select the
setting: N (No) or Y (Yes).
Modular DR5 Installer Guide
144
Miscellaneous
Direct-dial digit
Direct-dial digit allows you to dial a single system-wide digit that
can be used to call a specific telephone, called a Direct-dial
telephone. Use the
display button to select the setting: 0
to 9, or N (None).
,
Programming hints
There can be as many as five Direct-dial telephones in a
system. The Direct-dial telephone to which specific
telephones connect is assigned in Administration
(4. Direct-Dial and 5.
People with common interests should be in the same
Direct-dial group. For instance, the secretary who can best
handle calls or questions for a group could have a telephone
assigned as the
telephone for that group.
Another Direct-dial telephone, an Extra-dial telephone, can
be assigned for each Service Mode in Service Modes
programming.
The Direct-dial digit cannot be the same as:
l
the first digit of a DN
the first digit of a Line Pool access code
l
the External Line Access code
the Park prefix
To avoid a conflict, refer to the table of default settings in the
description of External code.
If DN length is changed, and the changed
conflict with
the Direct-dial digit, the setting changes to N.
Direct Inward System Access Directory Number
(DISA DN)
For calls answered with DISA, the system presents a stuttered
dial tone to prompt a caller to enter a valid password. The Class
of Service (COS) that applies to the call is determined by this
COS password.
Modular
Installer Guide
Rliscellaneous 145
____
_ 0:
be
remote user is on the
change the existing
--
DN can
Use the - display button and the dial pad to enter the
digits to
received from the auto-answer trunk. Use the
button to set the
DN to
hints
The length of the
DN is the same as the
1 ensth specified in 5.
Data. The
DN is cleared if the Received number length is changed.
The
DN cannot conflict with any target line
and
cannot have a first digit that conflicts with the first digit of a
Line Pool access code or with the External Line access code.
Auto Directory Number (Auto DN)
For calls answered without
no password is required to
access the
system. The Class of Service (COS) that
applies to the call is determined by the COS for the trunk on
which the user is calling.
Use the
display button and the dial pad to enter the
digits to be received from the auto-answer trunk. Use the
button to set the Auto DN to None.
Programming hints
The length of the Auto DN is the same as the
1
specified in 5.
Data. The Auto
DN is cleared if the Received number length is changed.
The Auto DN cannot conflict with any target line
and
cannot have a first digit that conflicts with the first digit of a
Line Pool access code or with the External Line access code.
Modular DR5 Installer Guide
146
Miscellaneous
Alarm telephone
Alarm telephone allows you to assign a telephone on
Alarm messages appear when a problem has been
in
the system. Use the
display button and
pad to
the
enter the internal number of the Alarm telephone.
button to set the Alarm telephone to
The
default setting is 221.
CAP (Central Answering Position) assignment
This setting designates a telephone as a CAP. The CAP must be
an M7324 Telephone, and may have one or two CAP modules
attached. A maximum of five
can be installed in a
system.
The CAP may be used to:
monitor the busy/not busy and Do Not Disturb status of
telephones
answer external calls on up to 120 lines, and extend calls to
other
telephones
send up to 30 messages to other
telephones
provide up to 96 extra memory buttons for the M7324
Telephone.
Use the
button, the
display button and the
dial pad to enter the internal number of the M7324 Telephone to
be designated a CAP.
Programming hints
If CAP modules are attached to an M7324 Telephone that
has not been programmed as a CAP, then no CAP settings
are assigned.
If a CAP module (or modules) is relocated with the M7324
Telephone, the settings are retained.
Modular
installer Guide
Miscellaneous 147
Link Time
Link Time allows you to specify the duration of a signal required
to access a feature through a remote system. Use the
display button to select the setting: 100, 200, 300, 400, 500, 600,
700, 800, 900, or 1000 milliseconds.
For example
External dialing must reach through a
system. The
system requires a Link Time of 400 ms. Program a Link
Time of 400.
Programming hints
The Link Time required depends on the requirements of the
host switching system that must be accessed.
Link is another name for recall or flash.
Telephone Relocation
Telephone Relocation allows you to move any telephone to a
system without losing Personal
new location within the
programming, and any Configuration and Administration
programming for that telephone. Use the
display button
to select the setting: N (No) and Y (Yes).
Programming hints
It is advisable to activate Telephone Relocation after the
telephone installation and programming has been done. This
provides you with more flexibility in testing equipment.
If this feature is deactivated while a telephone is moved, that
telephone’s internal number and Administration data remain
with the physical port on the KSU, and the telephone does
not receive the original programming when it is reconnected
elsewhere.
Modular DR5 Installer Guide
148
Miscellaneous
Host delay
Host delay lets you assign the delay between the moment an
outgoing line is selected to make an external call (by lifting the
receiver off the telephone, for example) and the moment that
sends dialed digits or codes on the line. Use the
display button to select the setting: 200, 400, 600, 800, 1000,
1200, 1400, 1600, 1800, or 2000 milliseconds.
Programming hints
Host delay is provided to ensure that a dial tone is present
before the dialing sequence is sent. Minimizing this delay
provides faster access to the requested features.
Disconnect Supervision delay
Disconnect Supervision delay allows you to specify the duration
of an Open Switch Interval (OSI) before the Disconnect (or loop)
Supervision feature disconnects a call on a supervised external
line. Use the
display button to select the setting: 60,
100, 260,460, or 600 milliseconds.
Programming hints
Disconnect Supervision is assigned to each line with the
Trunk mode setting in the Line Data section of Configuration
programming.
External code
External code allows you to assign the External Line access
code. This code is used to allow
Telephones and Analog
Terminal Adapters
to access external lines.
Use the
display button and the dial pad to program the
single digit access code. The default access code is 9.
Modular DR5 Installer Guide
Miscellaneous 149
Programming hints
The External Line access code cannot conflict with:
the Park prefix
the Direct-dial digit
the first digit of a Line Pool access code
the first digit of a DN
If DN length is changed, and the changed
conflict with
the External Line access code, the setting changes to None.
Digits assigned by default to Configuration settings
Digit
Use
Heading
0
Direct-dial #
4. Miscellaneous
1
Park prefix
3. Call handling
2
the first digit of
5. System Data
3
the first digit of
expanded system
9
-
External Line access code
4. Miscellaneous
Line Pool access code
4. Miscellaneous
-
in an
5. System Data
(Not assigned by default, but
takes precedence over the
External Line access code if
there is a conflict.)
Line Pool access codes
This setting allows you to assign a Line Pool access code for
each of the fifteen line pools (A to 0). These codes are used to
specify the line pool you wish to use for making an outgoing
external call.
Use the [Show] button, the
display button, the dial
pad, and the
display button to program the access code. The
default access code is blank.
Modular
Installer Guide
150 Miscellaneous
Programming hints
The code can be one to four digits in length. Line Pool
access codes starting with the same digit must be the same
length.
A Line Pool access code can be the same as an external line
access code. In this case, the Line Pool access code takes
priority over the external line access code, and a line from
the line pool is selected.
A Line Pool access code cannot conflict with:
l
the Park prefix
the Direct-dial digit
the first digit of any Received number
the first digit of any DN (including the Auto DN or the
DN).
To avoid a conflict, refer to the table of default settings in the
description of External code.
Installer password
This setting allows you to change the Installer password that
allows access to Configuration programming.
Use the
display button, the dial pad, and the
button to program the Installer password.
display
Programming hints
You can choose any combination of one to six digits. It is
easier to remember the password if the digits spell a word.
Provide this password only to selected personnel to prevent
unauthorized access to Configuration programming. The
implications of such access may include the rearrangement
of line assignments, which could affect the operation of the
system.
The default Installer password is 266344 (CONFIG).
Modular DR5 Installer Guide
System Data 151
System Data
System Data allows you to specify system-wide settings.
Configuration
1.
Data
2. Line
3. Call Handling
Individual
Individual
you to change the Directory Number (DN)
or internal number of a telephone.
CAUTION
Changing an individual DN locks the Configuration
session into the System Data programming mode. When
the System Data session ends, re-enter the
Configuration access code and the Installer password to
continue with other Configuration or General
Administration programming.
Do not perform Startup again, or all previous
programming will be erased.
Modular DR5 Installer Guide
152 System Data
Use the [Show) button, the dial pad, and the
display
button to identify the DN you want to change. Then, use the dial
display button to enter the new DN.
pad, and the
Programming hints
No DN changes occur until the Configuration session ends.
If the “new DN” already exists for another telephone, that
other telephone is given the “old DN”.
All
must be the same length.
The first digit of a new DN cannot be the same as the first
digit of:
. an External Line access code
a Line Pool access code
the Park prefix
the Direct-dial digit
To avoid a conflict, refer to the table of default settings in the
description of External code.
The lowest default DN for a non-expanded system is 21, and
the lowest default DN for an expanded system is 221.
DN length
This feature allows you to change the number of digits for all
internal
The maximum length is seven. The default and
minimum length is three for an expanded (with Expansion
Cartridge)
system, and two for a non-expanded
system.
Use the
display button to select the setting: 2, 3, 4, 5, 6,
or 7 for a non-expanded system; or
5, 6, or 7 for an
expanded system (‘2’ is not available for an expanded system).
Modular DR5 Installer Guide
System Data
153
Programming hints
A non-expanded system (with a default DN length of 2) is
automatically changed to a DN length of 3 after an expansion
cartridge is installed and power is restored to the KSU.
If any future expansion is planned, the DN length should be
set to three, even on non-expanded systems.
A DN length change, if required, should be the first
programming change on a newly installed
system.
Each increase in length places the digit 2 in front of any
existing DN. For example, if DN 3444 was increased to a
length of 6, the new DN would be 223444.
If the DN length is changed so that a conflict is created with
the Park prefix, External Line access code, Direct-dial digit,
or any Line Pool access code, the setting for the prefix or
code is changed to None, and the corresponding feature is
disabled.
CAUTION
You must wait for at least two minutes after a system
startup before you change the DN length.
Data devices drop calls when the DN length is changed.
(Data devices use the B2 channel. The M7100, M7208,
M7310, and M7324 Telephones use the
channel.
Calls are not dropped for these telephones.)
The DN length change is completed within two minutes,
depending on the size of the installed
system.
System response may briefly slow down during this time.
You cannot re-enter Configuration programming during
this time. If you enter the Configuration access code, the
message In USC:
appears on the display.
Modular DR5 Installer Guide
154 System Data
Received number length
The Received number length setting allows you to change the
number of digits received on auto-answer trunks. These digits
are used to identify target lines, Auto
and
Use
the
display button to select the setting: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6,
or 7. The default for a non-expanded system is 2. The default for
an expanded system is 3. Then, use the
button to
enter the new Received number length.
Programming hints
The target line number (for example, line 081) and the
Received number for the target line (for example,
1234 for line 081) are two different numbers.
The Received number length may be the same as the
system DN length, or may, because of network or CO
constraints, be set to some other value.
A received number may be one to seven digits in length. The
default length is three.
Target lines are supported only on expanded
systems. The
prompt does not appear when
programming non-expanded
systems.
Changing the Received number length causes all
programmed received digits to be cleared.
Modular DR5 Installer Guide
Set Copy 155
Set copy
Set copy allows you to copy programmed data from one
telephone to another. You have two choices when deciding
which data to copy:
you can copy System data only;
you can copy System data and Personal programming data.
System data is programmed in Configuration and Administration.
Personal programming data is programmed by people at their
own telephones, in order to customize their telephones to their
own needs.
Remember:
Set copy operates only from the
Telephones.
or M7324
Do not confuse Set copy with the
display button. COPY
is more selective than Set copy. It allows you to copy specific
groups of data from one telephone to another telephone or
from one external line to another external line. You can copy
more selective groups of System data listed in the table
below by pressing COPY when it appears.
If you are copying both System data and Personal
programming data, the source and destination
telephones must each be the same
model. If you
are copying System data only, the telephones can be
models.
different
Copying data to a telephone overrides any of that
telephone’s previous programming.
Know which data can and cannot be copied. These are
shown in the following two charts.
Modular DR5 Installer Guide
156
Set Copy
System data
System data which
CANNOT be copied
System data which CAN be copied
Alarm Telephone
designation
Answer button
assignments
CAP assignment
Automatic Handsfree
Direct-dial Telephone
#designation
Directory Number
Extra-dial Telephone
designation
Log space
Service Modes
Control Telephone
designation for a line
Service Modes
Ringing Telephone
designation for a line
Prime Telephone
designation for a line
Private line
appearances
Line Pool access
Vmsg
Auxiliary ringer
Call Forward No
Answer
Call Forward No
Answer Delay
Call Forward On Busy
Direct-dial Group
First Display
Full Handsfree
Handsf
ree
Answerback
Line Telephone
Filter
Number of intercom
buttons
Paging
Page Zone
Pickup Group
Prime line
designation
Priority Call
permission
Redirect Ring
Ringing line
preference
Telephone
Administration Lock
Hotline
Line assignment
Telephone Filter
Telephone Name
Personal programming data
Personal programming data
which CANNOT be copied
options
CAP module memory button
assignments
Personal programming data
which CAN be copied
Dialing modes (Automatic Dial,
Pre-Dial, Standard Dial)
Language Choice .
Line button positions
Contrast Adjustment
Personal Speed Dial entries
Log password
Telephone memory button
assignments (Internal Autodial,
External Autodial, and feature
access)
Ring Type
Rina Volume
Modular DR5 Installer Guide
Set Copy 157
Applying Set copy
1. Access Configuration programming.
The display shows
2.
Press
twice.
The display shows
COPY.
3.
Press ( S h o w ] .
4.
If you want to copy System data only, go to step 5.
OR
If you want to copy both System data and Personal
programming data, press
5.
Press (Next].
6.
Enter the internal number of the telephone from which you
want to copy data.
7.
Enter the internal number of the telephone to which you wish
to copy data.
8.
If you wish to copy the same data to another telephone,
repeat step 7.
OR
To return to Set C O P Y , press
OR
To end the session, press
Modular
Installer Guide
158
Set Copy
telemanuals.com
A Maintenance session is a
software feature that helps
you quickly diagnose problems that may occasionally arise within
system.
the
A Maintenance session has six headings.
System Version displays the version
numbers of the two processors in your
system.
2.
Status
Status allows you to check
and change the status of ports in your
system.
3. Nodul
Status
Module Status allows you to check and
change the status of modules in your
system.
Diagnostics allows you to run a
diagnostic test on ports in your system.
Test Los
Los
System Test Log displays a list of
diagnostic test results, audits, event
messages and alarm codes.
System Administration Log displays a
list of system initializations,
Configuration sessions, invalid
password attempts and password
changes.
You may run a Maintenance session from any working
or M7324 Telephone. Only one person at a time can
access a Maintenance session. Keep a pencil’ handy to record
important information on photocopies of the Maintenance
records. The Maintenance records are found at the end of this
chapter.
Modular DR5 Installer Guide
telemanuals.com
160 Maintenance
Beginning a Maintenance session
1.
Release all calls on your telephone.
2.
Enter the Configuration access code:
which is the same as
(Feature)
The display shows Password:.
3.
Enter the Installer password (the password does not appear
on the display as you enter it). The default Password is
(266344).
If the password is correct, the display shows
and three triangular indicators
on the vertical display between the rows of buttons.
appear
If the password is incorrect, the display does not change.
Check the password. Press RETRY and re-enter the
password.
4.
Place the
Programming Overlay over the buttons
pointed to by the indicators
5.
Press (Next] three times until the display shows
Maintenance.
Modular DR5 Installer Guide
telemanuals.com
System Version 161
System Version
System Version allows you to note the version numbers of the
software in the two processors in your
system:
System Processor (SP) software, residing
Cartridge, and
l
the Feature
Real Time Processor (RTP) software, residing in the Key
Service Unit (KSU).
l
Version numbers can be used to determine whether you have
the latest software release, and to trace a software fault if one
occurs. For instance:
l
SP and RTP version numbers can indicate a Software
Cartridge incompatibility.
Trunk Cartridge and RTP version numbers can indicate a
Trunk Cartridge incompatibility.
l
l
SP and telephone version numbers can indicate a telephone
version incompatibility.
SP and functional terminal version numbers can indicate a
functional terminal incompatibility.
Modular
Installer Guide
telemanuals.com
162 System Version
To check the version number, start with the display showing
Maintenance:
1. Press [Show].
The display shows 1.
Version.
2. Press
The display shows the version number of the SP.
3.
Write the SP version number on the appropriate
Maintenance record.
4. Press
The display shows the version number of the RTP.
5.
Write the RTP version number on the appropriate
Maintenance record.
6. Press
The display returns to
Modular
Installer Guide
Version.
telemanuals.com
Status 163
Status
Status allows you to:
l
.
identify any device or line connected to the system,
check the version number of a device (an Analog Terminal
Adapter, for example) for compatibility with the system,
check the state of a device or line (for example, idle or busy),
and
l
disable or enable a device or line.
You can use
Status to:
l
determine which port number corresponds to each DN,
l
determine the port number of a malfunctioning device,
l
l
determine if a malfunctioning device is incompatible with the
system,
disable a device before replacing it. This generates
telephone display messages informing device users of what
you are doing, and
clear a hung line by disabling and enabling a line port.
Remember
You cannot disable the
telephone from which you are
accessing the Maintenance session. If you try to do this, a
message appears on the d/splay and you hear an error tone.
Therefore, if you wish to disable that particular telephone, you will
have to conduct the Maintenance session from another
telephone.
CAUTION
You should not disable devices or lines when many
system. Wait until after
people are using the
regular office hours.
Modular
Installer Guide
164
Status
Do not enable or disable ports at the following times:
during the first two minutes after a System Startup, and
l
before DS-30 cables are connected.
If you do so, incorrect ports may be enabled or disabled. To
recover from this, disable then enable the affected modules using
Module Status.
Examining
Status
Status allows you to check lines and devices on
the system. Although the following procedures describe
how to check devices, you can use the same procedures
to check lines.
Identifying any device connected to the system
Start with the display showing 1.
1. Press
The display shows 2.
Status.
2. Press [Show].
The display shows Show
3. On the dial pad, enter the port number of the device.
OR
Press
then enter the directory number of the device.
Device information appears (see the sample device
identification display in the figure on the following page). This
identifies the device connected to the Bl channel.
4.
If there is an add-on device attached to a
telephone
such as a Central Answering Position (CAP) module or a
Busy Lamp Field (BLF):
Press
to view the add-on devices.
OR
If you want to identify the device connected to the
channel:
Press
5.
Press
2.
Modular
twice to return to the display
Status.
Installer Guide
Status 165
device identification display
Port number
Device
Directory number (DN)
7324 2224
This sample display associates DN 2224 with port 104.
The following table lists some of the device types that may
appear on the
device identification display.
Explanation of device type
Display
Explanation
7100
Telephone
7208
M7208 Telephone
7310
Telephone
7324
M7324 Telephone
1: MODULE1
First add-on CAP module attached to an M7324
2: MODULE2
Second add-on CAP module attached to an
M7324
Analog Terminal Adapter
BLF
Busy Lamp Field
Call Identification Interface
Modular
installer Guide
166
Status
Checking the version number of the device
From the
device identification display:
Press
(if it is available).
The display shows the version number of the device.
OR
The display briefly shows Not avail abl
and then the
previous display re-appears. In this case, you cannot record
the version number.
2.
If the display showed a device version number, write down
this number on the appropriate Maintenance record.
To return to the
device identification display from the
display showing the version number:
1.
If you want to retain the same port number:
Press
OR
If you want to see information about the next higher port
number (or DN if that is how you entered):
Press [Next].
If you want to see information about the next lower port
number (or DN if that is how you entered):
Press
Checking the state of the device
From the
device identification display:
Press
The display shows one of the states listed in the table on the
following page.
2.
If you want, you can disable or enable the device (see the
procedures in this chapter).
OR
If you want to return to the device identification display, press
Modular DR5 Installer Guide
Status 167
How the device state is shown on the display
Display
State of device
The device is in use.
The device is being disabled.
The device is being enabled.
The device is not in use.
The device will be disabled as soon as
it becomes idle.
There is no device connected to that
port.
The device has been disabled by
someone running a Maintenance
session.
The device has been disabled by the
system because it is faulty or because a
test is running.
There is no state available.
Disabling the device when it becomes idle
When the display shows you that the device is busy:
1. Press
The display shows Disabl
at
2. Press
The device is disabled immediately after the user hangs up.
Note:
If you disable a line on a Trunk Cartridge, the remaining
three lines on that Trunk Cartridge are also disabled.
Note:
If you choose the Disabl at
option, but the
device remains in use, you can disable the device
immediately.
Modular
installer Guide
168
Status
Disabling the device immediately
CAUTION
Make sure you inform people that you are going to
disable their devices (or lines).
A device becomes disabled one minute after you press
from Disable at
The next two tables show examples of
the sequence of messages that might appear on a telephone that
you are disabling.
Examples of display messages
Disabling a line
Disabling a device
Before disabling
To disable immediately when the display shows you that the
device is busy:
1. Press
The display shows Disable at
2. Press
The display changes to Disable at once?
3. Press
The device prompts its user (described previously) and is
disabled in one minute (or immediately, if the device is idle).
Modular DR5 Installer Guide
Status 169
Enabling the device
When the display shows you that the device is disabled:
1. Press
The display briefly shows Enabl
. . . The device is
immediately enabled and the display shows
The display may briefly show Enabl ins., . , then
either Disabled
or Disabled
In this case, the system is waiting to disable the
module. This may occur after someone has run a
Maintenance session and used either Module Status
or Diagnostics. You cannot enable the device until its
module has been disabled.
Returning to the beginning
From the display showing the state of the device:
1. Press
2. Press [Heading].
3. Press
again.
The display shows 2.
Modular DR5 Installer Guide
170
Module Status
Module Status
Module Status allows you to:
.
look at the inventory of Station Modules
Trunk
Modules
and modules inside the Key Service Unit
l
check the number of Trunk Cartridges
each Trunk Module,
attached to
check the state of the module or its cartridges, and
l
disable or enable the module or its cartridges.
You may use Module Status to:
isolate any malfunctioning modules,’ and
l
disable a module before replacing it.
Module numbering schemes for Two-port and Six-port Expansion
Plug TM DS-30 into
the HIGHEST available
port and work DOWN.
Plug SM DS-30 into
the LOWEST available
port and work UP.
Modules 1 and 2 are located inside the KSU.
Modular
Installer Guide
Module Status 1 7 1
Examining
Status
Looking at the module inventory
Start with the display showing 2.
Status:
1. Press
The display shows 3. Module Status.
2. Press [Show].
The display shows
3.
module:
Enter the module number. Modules 1 and 2 are located
inside the KSU. Refer to the figures on the previous page for
the module numbering scheme.
OR
If you want to check the first module, press [ S h o w ] .
The display that you see is called the module inventory
display.
If you choose module 1 or 2, the display shows how many
telephones or lines are connected to the KSU.
If you are checking a Trunk or Station Module, the display
shows either how many Trunk Cartridges are connected to
the Trunk Module or how many devices are connected to the
Station Module.
Note:
devices may occupy both the
and
channels. This may increase the number of devices
indicated on the module inventory display.
Modular DR5 Installer Guide
172 Module Status
Checking the number of Trunk Cartridges attached
Start from the module inventory display, which shows the number
of Trunk Cartridges connected to the module you chose (for
example, 3
TM 4).
1. Press
If there is no Trunk Cartridge in a slot, the display shows that
zero lines are connected. If there is a Trunk Cartridge in a
slot, the display shows that four lines are connected (for
example, 4 l i n e s o n T C 1 ) .
Note:
If there is no Trunk Cartridge in slot number one (the
left-most slot), the display shows that the module is
empty.
2.
If you want to check for Trunk Cartridges in the other two
slots:
Press [Next] or
3.
Press MODULE to return to the module inventory display.
Checking the state of a TM
Start from the module inventory display, which shows the number
of Trunk Cartridges connected to the module you chose (for
example, 3
on TM 4).
1.
Press
The state of the module is shown on the display. Some
examples of’this display are shown on the following page.
2.
If you want, you can disable or enable the module. (See the
procedures in this chapter.)
OR
If you want to return to the module inventory display:
Press
Modular DR5 Installer Guide
Module Status
How the module or cartridge state is shown on the display
Example display
State of module or cartridge
There are three devices in use that
are connected to the module or
cartridge.
There are two ports in use that are
connected to the module or cartridge.
There are four lines in use that are
connected to the module or cartridge.
The module or cartridge is being
disabled.
The module or cartridge is being
enabled.
The module or cartridge will be
disabled as soon as it becomes idle.
There is no module or cartridge
connected to that DS-30 port.
The module or cartridge has been
disabled from a Maintenance session.
The module or cartridge has been
disabled by the system because it is
faulty or because there is a test
running.
173
174 Module Status
Checking the state of a cartridge
Start from the display that shows the number of lines connected
to the Trunk Cartridge you chose (for example,
4 1
on TC 1).
1. Press
The state of the cartridge is shown on the display. Some
examples of this display are shown on the previous page.
2 . To check the state of a Trunk Cartridge present in, one of the
other two slots:
Press
or [Back).
3.
Disable or enable the cartridge. (See the procedures in the
following two sections.)
OR
To return to the display showing how many lines are
connected to the Trunk Cartridge:
Press
Disabling the module or its cartridges
CAUTION
Use the Page feature to inform people using
that
you are about to disable a module. Mention that they
may experience delays in the performance of their
devices.
From the display showing the state of the module or cartridge:
1. Press,
2.
If the module or cartridge is not idle and you want to disable
it when it becomes idle:
Press
OR
To disable the module or cartridge immediately:
Press
thenpress
Modular DR5 Installer Guide
Module Status 175
Enabling
module or its cartridges
From the display showing the state of the module or cartridge:
1. Press
The display briefly shows Enabl ins. . . . The module or
cartridge is immediately enabled. The display then shows the
state of the module or cartridge.
Returning to the beginning
From any display showing the state of the module or cartridge:
1. Press
2. Press [Heading] twice.
The display shows 3. Module Status.
Modular DR5 Installer Guide
176 Diagnostics
Diagnostics
Diagnostics allows you to:
select the connectivity test (test
l
identify which ports you wish to test,
begin the test, and
check the test results.
If you suspect that a voice connection may be broken, you can
use Diagnostics to run the connectivity test. This test runs in
three stages, stopping when any stage fails.
Stage 1 initializes any apparently empty ports and runs a sanity
test to any device on that port.
Stage 2 disables the specified port and runs a write and read
test.
Stage 3 disables both modules associated with the specified port
and runs a write and read test.
Remember
Do not run the connectivity test:
l
while ports or modules are being disabled, or
l
during the first two minutes after a System Startup.
If you do so, the test may stop running with ports still disabled.
To recover from this, power down, then power up the KSU.
CAUTION
The connectivity test may disrupt service as modules are
disabled. Do not run this test when many people are
using the
system.
Modular DR5 Installer Guide
Diagnostics 177
Running Diagnostics
Selecting the connectivity test
If you want to run the connectivity test while others are using the
system, you should first inform them using the Page
feature. Mention that they may experience delays in the
performance of their devices.
Start with the display showing 3.
Status:
1. Press
The display shows 4. Diagnostics.
2. Press [Show].
The display shows
3.
Enter
from the dial pad.
The display shows Test
Identifying which ports you want to test
You can perform the connectivity test on a maximum of 16 ports.
Start with the display showing Test port: -:
1.
Enter all the port numbers from the dial pad, pressing
after each entry.
2. Press
The display shows you how many modules may be disabled
when you run the test. The display then changes to
test
Beginning the connectivity test
Start with the display showing Begin test
1. Press
The display shows
results?
Modular DR5 Installer Guide
178 Diagnostics
Checking the test results
Start with the display showing
results?
If you want to see the test results from the display:
1.
Press
Thedisplayshows R u n n i n g t e s t 1 8 8 .
When the test is finished, the display shows the test results,
for example,
In this case, port number 110
was the first port tested, and
is the result code of test
100. The result codes are explained in the table on the next
2.
Press M O R E if it appears as a display button. The test results
for the next port number are shown.
3.
Repeat step 2, if applicable.
4.
Press E X I T
You
to the display showing 4 .
If your
telephone is connected to the module
you test, it will be disabled. Run a new Maintenance
session to see the results.
If you do not want to see the test results from the display:
1. Press
The display briefly shows:
For results see
Test
Modular
Installer Guide
Diagnostics
179
Connectivity test results
Result
code
Test results
00
You entered an invalid port number.
01
Stage 1 passed:
The KSU device port is receiving signals properly. If the
device has no voice connection, the problem is with the
device.
02
Stage 1 passed:
The KSU trunk port is receiving signals properly. If the trunk
has no voice connection, the problem is likely with the
external line, the
cable or the cross-connect.
03
Stage 1 passed:
The Trunk Cartridge is receiving signals properly. If the trunk
has no voice connection, the problem is likely with the TC,
the external line, the
cable, or the cross-connect.
04
Stage 1 failed:
There is no signaling to this
device, but other
devices on the KSU work. The problem is likely with the TCM
line, the device, the 25-pair cable to the KSU, or the
cross-connect.
05
Stage 1 failed:
There is no signaling to this SM-based device, but other
devices on this SM work. The problem is likely in the TCM
cable to the SM, the
line, the device, the
cross-connect, or the SM.
06
Stage 1 failed:
There is no signaling to any
device. The problem
is likely with the 25-pair cable to the KSU or with the
cross-connect.
07
Stage 1 failed:
There is no signaling to any device on this
bus. The
problem is likely with the 25-pair cable to the module, the
module, the DS-30 cable, or the Expansion Cartridge.
08
Stage 3 failed:
A KSU-based fault was detected. Replace the KSU.
09
Stage 3 failed:
A fault was detected in the Expansion Cartridge. Replace the
Expansion Cartridge.
Modular DR5 installer Guide
System Test Log
180
System Test Log
The System Test Log shows you a list of diagnostic test results,
audits, event messages, and alarm codes. By using this feature
you can:
.
check the items in the log,
check the current alarm (if there is one),
.
check when each item in the log occurred,
check the number of consecutive occurrences of an event or
an alarm, and
erase the log.
l
The System Test Log holds a maximum of 20 items.
You should check and record these items at regular
intervals. Erase the log after dealing with all the
items.
Examining the System Test Log
Checking the items in the log
Start with the display showing 4 . D i a g n o s t i c s :
1. Press
The display shows
Test Los.
2. Press [Show].
The display shows S t a r t o f n e w 1
Start of
or
109.
3. Press
or
The display shows a log item.
4.
Write down the item on the System Test Log record.
5.
If the log item is an event message or an alarm code, refer to
the Event messages section or the Alarm codes section in
this chapter.
6.
Repeat steps
items.
and 5 until you have recorded all the
Modular DR5 Installer Guide
System Test Log 181
Checking the current alarm
If you want to quickly check the highest severity alarm before
viewing all the log items, start with the display showing
Start
new
or Start of
1. Press
The display shows an alarm code if there is a current alarm.
Press EXIT to return to the display Start
OR
The display shows
current al arm and then shows
Start of
or Start of
Note:
All alarms are recorded as items in the System Test
Log.
Checking when each item in the log occurred
Start with any display showing a log item:
1. Press TIME
The
2.
shows the date and time.
Write the date and time on the System Test Log record.
Checking the number of consecutive repetitions of
an event or alarm
If
appears under a display showing a log item:
1. Press
The display shows the number of consecutive times the
event or alarm occurred.
Modular DR5 Installer Guide
182 System Test Log
Erasing the log
If you want to erase the System Test Log, start with the display
showing Start of new
or Start of 1
1. Press
The display shows Erase log?
2. Press
If no new items have been added since the list was entered,
the log is erased and the display shows Los is
OR
If
items have been added since the list was entered, the
display shows Los has changed.
3.
If the display shows Los has changed:
To show the new log, press [Show].
OR
To return to
Test Los, press EXIT.
Modular
Installer Guide
System Administration Log
183
System Administration Log
The System Administration Log keeps a record of administrative
events such as system initializations, Configuration sessions in
which a change was made, invalid password attempts, and
password changes. By using this feature you can:
check the items in the log,
l
erase the log, and
l
check when each item in the log occurred.
Note:
The System Administration Log holds a maximum of
ten items. Erase the log after dealing with all the
items.
Examining the System Administration Log
Checking the items in the log
Start with the display showing 5
Test
1. Press [Next].
The display snows
Los.
2. P r e s s
The display shows
Start
of new 1
or
109.
3. Press [Next] or
The display shows a log item.
4.
Write down the item on the System Administration Log
record.
5.
Repeat steps 3 and 4 until you have recorded all the items.
Modular DR5 Installer Guide
184
System Administration Log
Checking the current alarm
Start with the display showing Start
Start. of
new 1
or
1. Press
The display shows an alarm code if there is a current alarm.
2.
To return to the display showing Start
1
Press EXIT
O R - The display shows NO current al
and then shows
Start of
Erasing the log
if you want to erase the System Administration Log, start with the
display showing Start
log:
1. Press
The display shows
1 os?.
2. Press
If no new items have been added since the list was entered,
The display shows
is
OR
If new items have been added since the list was entered, the
display shows Los has changed.
3.
If the display shows Los has changed, to show the new log,
press (Show].
OR
To return to
Los, press EXIT.
Checking when each item in the log occurred
Start with any display showing a log item:
1. Press TIME
The
2.
the date and time.
Write down the date and time on the System Administration
Log record.
Modular DR5 Installer Guide
Alarm codes
185
Alarm codes
The
KSU generates alarm codes after system
disconnections or after certain anomalies in system operation. All
alarm codes appear at the Alarm Telephone and in the System
Test Log of a Maintenance session. The following figure shows
alarm code appearing on a
Alarm Telephone display.
Display message
Display button labels
Display buttons
Note:
Alarms have a higher severity than events. Attend to
alarm codes before event messages.
If you see an alarm code
1.
Write the alarm code on the System Test Log record.
2.
Determine the cause of the alarm from the following table.
3.
Follow Alarm troubleshooting procedures in this chapter.
4.
Press T I M E to see when the alarm occurred.
5.
Press
to clear the alarm.
An alarm code may not be displayed until two minutes after it has
been triggered. If the KSU is powered OFF when the alarm is
triggered, the alarm code is not displayed until two minutes after
the KSU is powered ON.
Modular DR5 Installer Guide
186 Alarm codes
Causes of alarm codes
Example
display
arm: 10
Meaning
Possible causes
All KSU devices
disconnected.
The last device on
bus 1 (port numbers
101-124) has been
removed.
The 25-pair cable was
disconnected from the KSU.
There is an internal KSU
fault.
11
arm: 50-X
Internal KSU
failure.
The KSU is defective.
All devices on
SM
disconnected.
The last device on
bus X (port numbers
has been
removed.
The 25-pair cable was
disconnected from the SM.
The DS-30 cable from the
SM to the KSU has been
disconnected.
The SM was powered
down.
.
Trunk Module
disconnected.
arm: 51-X
All Trunk Cartridges have
been disconnected from the
TM on DS-30 port X.
The TM was powered
down.
The DS-30 cable from the
TM to the KSU has been
disconnected.
arm: 52-X-V
TC disconnected
from TM
Trunk Cartridge Y on DS-30
port X has been
disconnected from the TM.
= DS-30 port number (l-8)
= Trunk Cartridge number (numbered from left to right)
Modular
Installer Guide
Alarm codes 187
Causes of alarm codes (continued)
Meaning
Possible causes
arm: 61-X-V
Incompatible
Trunk Cartridge
Trunk Cartridge Y on DS-30
port X cannot operate with
the Trunk type assigned to
it in Configuration.
arm: 62-V-Z
Unsupported
Auto-answer
setting (loop start
Trunk Cartridge Y on Trunk
port Z does not support the
auto-answer setting.
arm:
No available
DTMF receivers
DTMF receivers are busy,
not working properly, or
have not been installed.
Example
display
= DS-30 port number (l-8)
= Trunk Cartridge number (numbered from left to right)
= Trunk port number
Alarm troubleshooting
Note:
1.
Refer to the previous table before following these
procedures.
0
Check to see if there is a device connected to the KSU (that
has a port number beginning with the number “1
2.
If there are no devices connected to the KSU, connect one
and then press
3.
If there are any devices connected to the KSU, check all the
wiring associated with the devices.
4.
Refer to the section in the Troubleshooting chapter entitled
KSU down.
Alarm: 11
1. Power down the KSU and then power it up.
2.
If the alarm persists, replace the KSU.
Modular DR5 Installer Guide
188 Alarm codes
1.
Check that there is a device connected to the Station Module
(that has a port number beginning with a number from three
to eight).
2.
If there are no devices connected to the Station Module,
connect one and then press
3.
If there are any devices connected to the Station Module,
check all the wiring associated with the devices.
4.
Refer to the section in the Troubleshooting chapter entitled
Station Module down.
Alarm:51
1.
Check the wiring from the KSU to the TM.
2.
In the Troubleshooting chapter, follow the procedure for
checking the Trunk Cartridge .
3.
Refer to the section in the Troubleshooting chapter entitled
Trunk Module down.
Follow the procedure in the Troubleshooting chapter, in the
section entitled Checking the Trunk Cartridge.
2.
If the problem persists, replace Trunk Cartridge on DS-30
port X. (Refer to the previous table for the definition of
and
I.
Check that the proper Trunk Cartridges are inserted in the
proper slots of the Trunk Module.
2.
Enter Configuration programming and look under the
heading. Check that the Trunk type and
Trunk mode settings are the same for every loop start line
connected to Trunk Cartridge Y.
Modular DR5 Installer Guide
Alarm codes 189
1.
Check that the proper Trunk Cartridges are inserted in the
proper slots of the Trunk Module.
2.
Enter Configuration programming and look under the
Data heading. Check that the Trunk mode and
Answer mode settings do not conflict for every line
connected to Trunk Cartridge Y. If Trunk mode is set to
unsupervised, Answer mode must be set to manual.
1.
Check that you have the required
Trunk
Cartridges (one for every two auto-answer loop start lines).
2.
Enter Configuration programming and look under the
Data heading. Check that the Answer mode is
correct for all the loop start lines.
3.
If the problem persists, an
Trunk Cartridge may
be malfunctioning. Replace one
Trunk Cartridge
at a time until the problem is resolved.
Modular DR5 Installer Guide
190 Event messages
Event messages
Event messages appear as items in the System Administration
Log or the System Test Log of the Maintenance session. Most of
these event messages can only be caused by an unusual
combination of events, and should rarely occur.
Each event is assigned a severity number. An
preceding this
number,
for example, may appear in the event message.
is the most severe. If the Log is full, new event messages
with a higher severity number replace existing event messages of
a lower severity. For this reason, you should check event
messages at regular intervals. You can then deal with all
messages before they are replaced.
Dealing with event messages
For every event message that you see, do the following:
1.
Record the event on the appropriate Maintenance record.
2.
Consult the next section entitled Significant event messages.
3.
To see if the event caused the
system to
automatically restart, consult the subsequent section entitled
Complete list of event numbers.
Significant event messages
The table on the next page lists event messages that are
relevant to Maintenance activities. The time that the message is
recorded is also provided.
Modular DR5 Installer Guide
Event messages
Event message
191
The event message is recorded when. . .
diagnostic test number 100 starts
diagnostic test number 100 has been
completed
Passed
diagnostic test number 100 has been
completed
Test
the System Administration Log has been
cleared by the DN (3546 in this case)
221-3546 54
the System Test Log has been cleared by
the DN (3546 in this case)
222-3546
the DN (3546 in this case) enters the
debugging facility that is password protected
I
L
263-302
the KSU takes the E&M line on port 302 out
of service because the far end did not
respond to a disconnect signal
264-302
the E&M line on port 302 is returned to
service after the far end finally responded to
a disconnect signal (see
263)
Eut: 265-302
the E&M line on port 302 did not receive an
expected wink signal or delay dial signal
from the far end
268-07
Dialing filter 07 has lost data due to a fault in
the system memory
269-3546
the Line/set filter for the DN (3546 in this
case) has lost data due to a fault in the
system memory
299
the system powers up after a power failure
Eut: 400
a System Startup is performed using the dial
pad digits
Modular
Installer Guide
192 Event messages
Significant event messages (continued)
Event message
The event message is recorded when.. .
there are no more codes for Speed Dial
numbers
there is no more memory for Speed Dial
codes
the Installer password has been changed by
the DN (3546 in this case)
the Administration password has been
changed by the DN (3546 in this case)
an invalid Installer password has been
entered by the DN (3546 in this case)
an invalid customer password has been
entered by the DN (3546 in this case)
system Configuration is performed using the
dial pad digits
system Administration is performed using
the dial pad digits
a DN change is successful
the time setting has been changed
a DN change failed
a length change by the DN (3546 in this
case) has been requested
an individual DN change has been
requested by the DN (3546 in this case)
Alarm code 63 is sent because there are no
DTMF receivers for an incoming call
Modular DR5 Installer Guide
Event messages
193
Complete list of event numbers
You should rarely see any event messages that are not
described in the section entitled Significant event messages. If
you do see one of these event messages, the
system
has followed its normal recovery from an unusual combination of
system events. Although the problem is not a serious one,
repeated occurrences of the event number should be reported to
the Central Support Center as soon as possible.
As a result of some events, the
system automatically
restarts itself. The table on the next two pages lists all the event
numbers and tells you which of these events are associated with
system restarts
Most of these events are recorded in the System Test Log. The
few exceptions to this are recorded in the System Administration
Log, as indicated.
Modular DR5 Installer Guide
194
Event messages
Event
Number(s)
System
Restart
101-106
107
N
108-112
113
117
N
N
285-298
299
N
401-403
N
405-411
N
412-419 (Adminlog)
N
N
N
137
151
N
600-602
603-613
N
N
432
433
N
N
426-430
431
133-134
138-150
N
424-425
130
131-132
280-283
N
124-125
126-129
System
Restart
N
118-120
121-123
Event
Number(s)
N
614
615-629
N
152
N
630
160-164
N
631-646
N
170-173
N
800-802
N
200-211
N
803
N
804-807
N
808
221-222
809
N
810
224
225-228
N
N
811-820
N
823
230-235
N
824-825
N
245-248
N
900
N
250-256
N
940-943
N
260-271
N
950-989
N
Modular
Installer Guide
Maintenance records
195
Maintenance records
Maintenance records are tables on which you can record
information you have obtained while running a Maintenance
session.
Before you begin, photocopy the three tables in this section.
Recording information on the Maintenance
records
To use the following records, do the following:
1.
Write on your photocopied tables information that you obtain
while running a Maintenance session.
2.
Return the completed tables to your
Modular
distributor.
Installer Guide
196
Maintenance records
Version number record
The Maintenance session tells you the software versions of the
Real Time Processor (RTP), the System Processor (SP), and
devices connected to the
system. Use the following table
to record these version numbers when you run a Maintenance
session. You can check the RTP and SP version numbers under
the heading System Version. Device version numbers are found
under the heading
Status.
Version Numbers
Status
Version
Deuice:
Deuice:
RTP:
Deuice:
Deuice:
Deuice:
Deuice:
Deuice:
Deuice:
Deuice:
Deuice:
Deuice:
Deuice:
Deuice:
Note;
Modular
Photocopy this page before recording items in the table.
Installer Guide
Maintenance records
197
System Test Log record
You can check under the Sys Test Log heading to find a list of
diagnostic test results, audits, event messages, and alarm codes.
Use the following table to record these log items when you run a
Maintenance session.
System Test Log
Test
Time of log item
Log item
Number of repetitions
Time and date that log
was checked
Note:
Photocopy this page before recording items in the table.
Modular DR5 Installer Guide
198
Maintenance records
System Administration Log record
You can check under the Sys Admin Log heading to find a list of
administrative events performed on
Use this table to
record these log items when you run a Maintenance session.
System Administration Log
Admin Log
Lqg Item
Time of log item
Number of repetitions
Time and date that log
was checked
Photocopy this page before recording items in the table.
Modular
Installer Guide
These troubleshooting procedures allow you to solve many
problems in the
system. Follow these procedures before
replacing any components.
WARNING
Only qualified personnel are to replace components and
service hardware.
Where more than one procedure is given, the procedures
represent different options from which you should select just one.
Getting ready
Before you begin troubleshooting, gather all the information that
is relevant to your network configuration:
l
the
Record,
.
records from people who use the network, and
l
information about other hardware and non-Norstar features
within the public or private network.
Other troubleshooting tools
Remember that you can check many of the system parameters
without having to go into a Configuration or Administration
session.
From an
or M7324 Telephone, check line data by
entering the feature code for Line profile:
From an
or M7324 Telephone, check telephone data
by entering the feature code for Set profile:
l
To check the buttons on a particular telephone, use the
feature code for Button inquiry:
Modular DR5 Installer Guide
telemanuals.com
200
Troubleshooting
Types of problems
The problems you encounter will likely fall into one of the
following categories:
Misunderstanding of a feature
A problem may be reported because a
user is unfamiliar
with the operation of a given feature. You may be able to solve
the problem simply by demonstrating how to use the feature
correctly.
Programming errors
You may encounter problems caused by errors in programming.
A feature may have been programmed incorrectly or may not
have been programmed at all.
Wiring connections
Wiring problems are caused by loose, unconnected, or
incorrectly connected wires. Use the procedures in the section on
Checking the hardware as a guide.
Equipment defects
You may encounter problems caused by
equipment
defects. See the Problems with equipment section later in this
chapter for problems related to the system hardware.
Modular DR5 Installer Guide
telemanuals.com
Troubleshooting 201
General troubleshooting procedure
1. Diagnose the trouble:
Ask the users for information regarding:
l
the types of problems they have experienced ,
how frequently the problems have occurred, and
how many telephones are affected.
Test system features and functions.
Use the tests described throughout this chapter.
2.
Check how a feature is being used. A problem may have
been reported because of a misunderstanding about how a
feature works. You should confirm that the person who
reported a problem understands the intended use and
operation of any feature in question.
3.
Check for programming errors. Check that the programming
recorded in the Programming Record is correct for the
intended operation of the system, and verify that this
Configuration and Administration programming has been
correctly entered.
4.
Check wiring or hardware connections. Check the wiring and
hardware connections. Refer to procedures in the next
section, Installation check.
5.
Run a Maintenance session. If the problem persists, run a
Maintenance session as described in the Maintenance
chapter of this Installer Guide.
6. Check equipment defects:
If hardware is shown to be defective, replace it.
l
If the trouble requires expert advice, follow your
company’s procedure for obtaining assistance.
Modular DR5 Installer Guide
telemanuals.com
202
installation check
Installation check
It is important to establish that both your
system and your
hardware are operating normally. To be sure of this, follow the
procedures in this chapter.
Testing the
system
Verify
system functions and programming options by
working through the user cards for
telephones and
optional equipment, as described in the following procedures.
Test the
telephone operations
1.
Make and receive calls.
2.
Make notes on any problems.
3.
Check calls that have been put on hold.
Check the programmable buttons
Use the following feature code to check what is programmed on
the programmable buttons:
Button Inquiry code
Test Line and Telephone programming,
You can use the Line and Telephone profile inquiry features
to
verify the programming applied to a specific line or telephone.
Refer to the Programming chapter in this Installer Guide for a
description of how the Line and Telephone profile features
operate.
Modular
Installer Guide
telemanuals.com
Installation check
203
Test the optional equipment
1.
Follow the procedures in the user cards or installation
documentation for the following equipment:
Analog Terminal Adapter
Auxiliary ringer (customer-supplied)
Busy Lamp Field (BLF)
Central Answering Position (CAP) modules
Call Identification Interface (CII)
Headset (customer-supplied)
Music source (customer-supplied)
Paging (customer-supplied)
Station Auxiliary Power Supply (SAPS)
Test the
1.
system programming features
Try out some of the features such as System Speed Dial,
Telephone/Line filters, and Class of Service.
Test Automatic Telephone Relocation
1.
Check that Telephone Relocation is set to for yes in the
Miscellaneous section of Configuration programming.
2.
Move the telephone to another location to verify that a
telephone can be re-located without re-wiring or
re-programming.
Modular DR5 Installer Guide
telemanuals.com
204 Installation check
Checking the hardware
WARNING
To avoid electrical shock, do the following:
Unplug the power to any module before servicing.
1.
2.
Do not remove the covers of a module.
Refer to the Installation chapter when re-installing
3.
components.
Use the following procedures (in sequence) to check apparent
hardware faults.
KSU and module ac power cords
1.
Check if the LED on the KSU or module (if included in the
installation) is ON.
2.
If the LED is OFF, check that the ac power cords for the KSU
and module are plugged into the ac Power Bar.
Power Bar ac power cords
1.
Check that the ac power cord from the Power Bar is plugged
into a working ac outlet.
Note: Two Power Bars are required if there are four or
more modules. Make sure that the power cord from
the second Power Bar is plugged into the first Power
Bar.
Feature Cartridge
CAUTION
Always power down before removing or inserting the
Feature Cartridge.
I.
Make sure that the Feature Cartridge is firmly seated in its
slot.
Modular DR5 Installer Guide
installation check
205
Expansion Cartridge
CAUTION
Always power down before removing or inserting an
Expansion Cartridge.
If the installation requires an Expansion Cartridge in the
KSU, make sure it is inserted properly.
Note:
If power is re-applied when the cartridge has been
removed, the system programming returns to default
settings.
Trunk Cartridge
I
I
1.
CAUTION
Always power down the Trunk Module before removing
or inserting a Trunk Cartridge.
If the installation requires a Trunk Module, make sure the
Trunk Cartridge (TC) is inserted properly.
DS-30 cables
1.
Make sure that both ends of the DS-30 cables (if included in
the installation) are plugged into the KSU Expansion
Cartridge and the module connectors.
connectors
1.
.
Make sure that the
connectors for the external lines
and for the internal wiring are plugged in and fastened
securely. Refer to the chapter on Specifications and wiring
charts.
wiring
1.
Make sure that the wires are terminated on the distribution
block and connected to the correct pins. See the chapter on
Specifications and wiring charts.
Modular
Installer Guide
206
Installation check
Internal wiring
Check that the station loop resistance does not exceed 59
on 0.5 mm or 24-American wire gauge.
2.
If the loop length is greater than 305 m (1000 ft), ensure that
Station Auxiliary Power Supply (SAPS) is in
the
place and functional. Follow the
Station Auxiliary
Power Supply Installation Card for instructions.
Cross-connections
Check that both ends of cross-connect wires are attached.
Modular
Installer Guide
Problems with equipment
207
Problems with equipment
Before proceeding, make sure that you have followed the
procedures in the Troubleshooting overview and the Installation
check sections.
equipment trouble
This section concerns
system equipment faults. Check
first for user problems, then wiring and programming errors
before replacing
equipment.
Telephone dead
1.
If more than one telephone is affected, refer to the section in
this chapter entitled Station Module down.
2.
Check for the dial tone.
3.
Check the display.
4.
If the problem persists, replace the telephone with a known
working
telephone of the same type (so that the
programming is retained).
5.
Check the internal wiring at both the modular jack and the
distribution cross-connect.
6.
Check the line cord.
Note:
A TCM port should have between 15 and 20 V dc
across the Tip and Ring when the telephone is
disconnected.
Modular DR5 Installer Guide
208
Problems with equipment
Running a Maintenance session to test a dead telephone
Run a Maintenance session to ensure that the telephone is
Status in the Maintenance
not disabled. (See
chapter.)
2.
While you are in the Maintenance session, run a connectivity
test on the port connected to the telephone. This should be
done after business hours to avoid losing calls.
3.
Disable the port connected to the telephone using the
subheading:
Status.
4.
Enable the port connected to the telephone using the
subheading:
Status.
KSU down
1
If ac power is present and the LED indicator on the KSU is
OFF, replace the KSU. (The location of the LED indicators is
described in the Installation chapter.)
telephone display unreadable
If the trouble is with an M7310 Telephone or an M7324
Telephone:
1. Press [Feature]
2.
Press the Up or
the desired level.
3. Press the
display button to adjust the display to
display button.
If the trouble is with an M7100 Telephone or M7208
Telephone:
1. Press
.
2.
Press a number on the dial pad to adjust the display to the
desired level.
3.
Press
If the display is still unreadable:
1. Disable the problem telephone.
2.
Replace the problem telephone with a known working one.
3.
Enable the working telephone.
Modular DR5 Installer Guide
Problems with equipment
209
Trunk Cartridge trouble
1.
Check that the cartridge is properly inserted in the Trunk
Module.
2.
Run a Maintenance session to ensure that the cartridge is
not disabled.
3.
While you are in the Maintenance session, run a connectivity
test on the appropriate ports.
If the problem persists, follow as many of the next steps as
required to solve the problem:
1. If ac power is present and the LED indicator on the Trunk
Module is OFF, replace the Trunk Module.
2.
Replace the DS-30 cable.
Note:
Refer to the Installation chapter for information on
replacing components.
3.
Replace the Trunk Cartridge.
4.
Replace the Expansion Cartridge.
5. Replace the KSU.
Trunk Module down
1.
2.
Run a Maintenance session to ensure that the Trunk Module
is not disabled. (See the Maintenance chapter.)
Disable the module using the Maintenance subheading
3.
3.
Status.
Enable the module using the Maintenance subheading
3. Module Status.
4.
While you are in the Maintenance session, run a connectivity
test on the appropriate ports.
5.
Check the external line by terminating a single line telephone
directly on the distribution block, or equivalent, which
connects to the Trunk Module.
Modular
Installer Guide
210
Problems with equipment
If the problem persists, follow only as many of the next
steps as required to solve the problem:
1. If ac power is present and the LED indicator on the Trunk
Module is OFF, replace the Trunk Module.
2.
Replace the DS-30 cable.
Note:
Refer to the Installation chapter for information on
replacing components.
3.
Replace the Trunk Cartridge.
4.
Replace the Expansion Cartridge.
5. Replace the KSU.
Station Module down
1.
Run a Maintenance session to ensure that the module is not
disabled. (See Module Status in the Maintenance chapter.)
2.
Disable the Station Module using the subheading
Status.
3.
Enable the Station Module using the subheading
Status.
4.
If the Station Module is still down, power down, then power
up the KSU.
If the problem persists, follow as many of the next steps as
required to solve the problem:
1. If ac power is present and the LED indicator on the Station
Module is OFF, replace the Station Module.
2.
Replace the DS-30 cable.
Note:
3.
Refer to the Installation chapter for information on
replacing components.
Replace the Expansion Cartridge.
4. Replace the KSU.
Modular
installer Guide
Problems with equipment
211
Symptoms at the alarm telephone
The following troubleshooting procedures focus on alarm codes
specific to network configuration.
Alarm telephone shows
arm:
Possible problem
You have configured one or more
one trunk type, but the
Trunk Cartridge in slot Y of Trunk Module X is not that type.
Solution
1. Reconfigure the Trunk type to match the type of Trunk
Cartridge that has been installed in slot Y of Trunk Module X.
OR
Install a Trunk Cartridge in slot Y that matches the type of
Trunk you have configured.
Alarm telephone shows
Possible problem
You have configured one or more loop start trunks as
auto-answer, but the hardware on trunk port does not provide
disconnect supervision.
Solution
1. Reconfigure your auto-answer loop start trunk or trunks as
manual-answer.
OR
If the line number of your auto-answer loop start trunk is 009
or greater, install a loop start Trunk Cartridge with disconnect
supervision in slot Y, trunk port Z.
OR
If the line number of your auto-answer loop start trunk is
between 001 and 008, install a Version 2 or higher KSU.
Modular
Installer Guide
212
Problems with equipment
Alarm telephone shows
Possible problem
The trunk of port Z has tried, unsuccessfully, to access a DTMF
receiver. You have configured more auto-answer loop start
trunks than you have DTMF receivers.
Solution
Increase your ratio of
Trunk Cartridges to loop
start trunks. The maximum is, one
Trunk Cartridge
for every two loop start trunks that you have configured as
auto-answer.
2.
Make sure that all of your
trunks are configured
as E&M or DTMF (whichever applies) so that the system
knows the receivers are there.
Possible problem
The DTMF receivers are not working properly.
Solution
1. Check the DTMF receivers on every
Cartridge.
Modular
Installer Guide
Trunk
Problems with lines 213
Problems with lines
The troubleshooting problems listed here focus on trouble with
making calls or using lines. Follow the procedures in the
Troubleshooting overview and the Installation check sections
before proceeding with this section.
Calls cannot be made (but can be received)
1.
Press [Feature]
2.
Press a line button.
3.
If an incorrect line number or name appears (or if neither
appears) on the
telephone display, check the
Configuration settings.
OR
If the correct line number or name appears on the
telephone display, make sure the external lines are properly
cross-connected.
4.
If Trunk Modules or Trunk Cartridges are installed, refer to
Trunk Cartridges and Trunk Module down, in the section on
Problems with equipment (earlier in this chapter).
5.
Check external lines by attaching a test telephone directly on
the distribution block, which connects to the Trunk Module.
6.
Ensure that the
modules or the KSU.
7.
If you still cannot make an external call, perform a
Maintenance session to check the external line.
cable is properly connected.to the
Modular
Installer Guide
214
Problems with lines
Running a Maintenance session to check the external line
1. Run a Maintenance session to ensure that the line (and the
Trunk Cartridge) is not disabled or unequipped. (See
Status in the Maintenance chapter.)
2.
Disable the appropriate ports using the subheading
2.
Status.
Note:
For charts showing external line port number
defaults, refer to the chapter on Specifications and
wiring charts.
3.
Enable the appropriate ports using the subheading
2.
4.
If you still cannot make external calls, power down, then
power up the KSU. This should be done after business hours
to avoid losing calls.
Note:
To check the line, contact the telephone company.
Dial tone absent (on external lines)
1.
Use Button Inquiry, [Feature]
the external line you are testing.
2.
Check for a dial tone by using a test telephone at the
connections for the external line on the distribution block.
3.
If applicable, make sure that a Trunk Cartridge for the line is
properly installed in the Trunk Module.
4.
Make sure that the Trunk Module DS-30 cable is properly
connected to the Expansion Cartridge on the KSU.
5.
Refer to the sections Trunk Cartridges and Trunk Module
down, in this chapter.
6.
Run a Maintenance session to ensure that the line is not
disabled. (See
Status in the Maintenance chapter.)
7.
While you are in the Maintenance session, run a connectivity
test on the external line that has no dial tone. This should be
done after business hours to avoid losing calls.
Modular DR5 Installer Guide
to display the number of
Problems with lines
215
Hung lines at a telephone
Line indicators that have been solid for a long time are the only
visible indication that lines are hung.
A line that has been redirected using Line Redirection may,
under some circumstances, remain busy after a call is over. If
this happens, the outgoing line for the redirection also remains
You can clear this kind of hung line only at the telephone
that was used to redirect the line.
q
1.
Select Button Inquiry
was used to redirect the line.
2.
Press the button of the redirected line.
) at the telephone that
Press SHOW or
4.
Press DROP or q
.
Both the redirected line and the outgoing line for the redirection
should now be cleared.
For lines that are hung for any other reason you will have to run a
Maintenance session.
Run a Maintenance session and go to the subheading
2.
2.
If the hung line is on the KSU, disable and enable Module 2.
OR
If the hung line is on a Trunk Cartridge, disable and enable
only that Trunk Cartridge.
Follow the procedures in the Troubleshooting overview and the
Installation check sections before proceeding.
Modular DR5 Installer Guide
216 Problems with lines
Auto-answer line rings at a
telephone
Possible problem
You configured a loop start trunk as auto-answer but the installed
hardware does not support disconnect supervision. (In this case,
the symptom would be accompanied by the Alarm 62 code
symptom.)
Solution
1. Reconfigure the trunk as manual-answer.
OR
If the line number of your auto-answer loop start trunk is 009
or greater, install a loop start Trunk Cartridge with disconnect
supervision in slot Y, trunk port Z.
OR
If the line number of your auto-answer loop start trunk is
between 001 and 008, install a Version 2 or higher KSU.
Possible problem
You configured the line as auto-answer and supervised, and then
reconfigured the line as unsupervised.
Solution
1. Reconfigure the line as manual-answer.
OR
Reconfigure the line as. supervised.
Prime telephone gets misdialed calls
Possible problem
The digits sent by a switch at a Central Office or in the private
network did not match any Received number, the Auto DN, or the
DN. The call has been routed to the Prime telephone for
the incoming trunk.
Solution
Verify that the switch is sending the correct number of digits
for the Received number length defined in your system.
2.
Verify all the digit strings that the switch should be sending.
3.
Check that you have defined the corresponding Received
number for every target line in your system.
4.
Make sure that the published telephone numbers for your
network are correct.
Modular DR5 Installer Guide
Problems with lines 217
selected
shows
Possible problem
You have configured a DTMF line to appear at the telephone.
Solution
1. Reconfigure the line so that it does not appear at any
telephone and configure another line to replace it at the
telephone.
OR
Reconfigure the line as a different type and install trunk
hardware to support the new type of line.
Possible problem
The
system has taken an E&M line out of service
because the far end did not respond to a disconnect signal from
the
system. The symptom would be accompanied by
Event code 263 in the System Test Log.
Solution
1. Check with the operators of the system at the far end and
find out if’their system is operating.
2.
Check that your system hardware is receiving signals
properly.
3.
Check the trunk between your system and the far end
system for a break.
Possible problem
The
system has detected no response on an E&M line
from the system at the far end. The symptom will be
accompanied by Event code.265 in the System Test Log.
Solution
1. Check with the operators of the system at the far end and get
them to troubleshoot their system.
Modular DR5 Installer Guide
lines
Possible problem
The line has been disabled for maintenance purposes.
Solution
1. Enable the line.
OR
If the line will be out of service for some time, configure
another line to
on the telephone.
line pool shows
NO
Possible problem
If this happens often, there are not enough lines in the line pool
to serve the number of line pool users.
Solution
1. If the line pool contains loop start trunks, enter Configuration
and move under-used loop start trunks from other line pools
into the deficient line pool.
OR
If the line pool contains E&M trunks, order more trunks from
the telephone company or private network vendor. Install
additional Trunk Cartridges of the appropriate type. In
Configuration programming, add the new trunks to the
deficient line pool.
Modular DR5 Installer Guide
Problems with features
219
Problems with features
In general, when you try to use a
feature and it does not
work, test ‘your lines first to ensure that other feature codes are
working.
Follow the procedures in the Troubleshooting overview and the
Installation check sections before proceeding.
Problem descriptions
The following is a list of common feature problems that may
occur in a
system.
button cannot be programmed
1.
Refer to the Telephone features chapter.
2.
If the display shows
for
buttons.
3.
If the display shows
denied, someone may be
programming changes. Wait five minutes, then try again to
program the buttons.
4.
Run a Maintenance session and look at the events shown
under
Test.
full , there is no memory left
Remote feature code gets no response
Possible problem
A
user has called into another
system and is
trying to activate a remote feature but gets no response after
dialing the feature code. The
user may have pressed the
Feature button to activate the remote feature.
Solution
1. Make sure that remote callers are dialing the feature code
correctly. Only the asterisk (*) character, followed by the
feature code, can activate a remote feature.
Modular DR5 Installer Guide
220
Problems with features
Dialed number shows
Restricted
Possible problem
If this happens often, the
telephone or user has an
inappropriate set of dialing restrictions.
Solution
1.
Modular
In Administration programming, check the Set filter and the
Line/set filter for the telephone. Assign restrictions and
exceptions that will permit access to the required
destinations.
OR
Give the
user a Line Pool access code to a line pool
that permits access to the required destinations.
OR
If this happens to a number of people who share a line,
check the Line filter. Assign restrictions and exceptions that
will permit access to the required destinations.
OR
If the caller used the changed Class of Service, check the
User filter for the Class of Service. Make sure that the
restrictions and exceptions are appropriate for the user.
Installer Guide
Problems with features
221
Music on Hold/Background Music trouble
Although Music on Hold and Background Music are separate
features, they share the same wiring and customer-supplied
music source.
1.
2 .
Ensure that the proper feature access code
is turned ON. Adjust the volume using the
volume control bar.
Use the Button inquiry feature
q to verify the feature on a programmable
memory button.
3.
If there is trouble with Music on Hold, check
Call Handling in Configuration.
OR
If there is trouble with Background Music, check
Miscellaneous in Configuration.
4.
Check the wiring between the music source and the
connector. Pay special attention to the polarity of the
connections. See the wiring charts in the Technical data
chapter.
5.
Ensure that the music source is turned ON, is operational,
and the volume control is set properly.
Note;
Any music source with a low-output impedance (for
example, less than 3,300 ohms) can be connected.
Nominal output level should be less than one volt.
Personal Speed Dial cannot be programmed
1.
See the troubleshooting procedure for
buttons
cannot be programmed, described earlier in this section.
Modular DR5 Installer Guide
222 Network telephone trouble for remote users
Network telephone trouble for
remote users
Symptoms described in this section are those that appear to a
remote caller attempting to use
system resources. The
remote caller may be calling from the public network or the
private network.
Follow the procedures in the Troubleshooting overview and the
Installation check sections before proceeding.
Calling directly to
The following troubleshooting procedures focus on a remote
caller trying to reach a
telephone or device.
Dialed number gets
and the wrong person
Possible problem
The digits sent by a switch at a Central Office or in the private
network did not match any Received number, the Auto DN, or the
DN. The call has been routed to the Prime telephone for
the incoming trunk.
Solution
1. Verify that the switch is sending the correct number of digits
for the Received number length defined in your system.
2. Verify all the digit strings that the switch should be sending.
3. Check that you have defined the corresponding Received
number for every target line in your system.
4.
Modular
Make sure that the published telephone numbers for your
network are correct.
Installer Guide
Network telephone trouble for remote users
223
Dialed number gets stuttered dial tone instead of
Possible problem
The remote caller has tried to reach a
target line, but has
instead. Alternatively, the
reached a trunk with
system has mapped incoming digits onto the
DN.
Solution
Verify all the digit strings that the switch should be sending.
2.
Check that you have defined a corresponding Received
number for every target line in your system.
3.
Check that you have defined the correct
system.
4.
Make sure that the published telephone numbers for your
network are correct.
DN for your
Dialed number gets dial tone instead of
Possible problem
The remote caller has tried to reach a
reached the
system instead.
incoming digits onto the Auto DN.
target line, but has
has mapped the
Solution
1. Verify all the digit strings that the switch should be sending.
2.
Check that you have defined the corresponding Received
number for every target line in your system.
3.
Check that you have defined the correct Auto DN for your
system.
4.
Make sure that the published telephone numbers for your
network are correct.
Dialed number gets busy tone
Possible problem
224
Network telephone trouble for remote users
Dialed number does not get through
Possible problem
The digits sent by a switch at a Central Office or in the private
network did. not match any Received number, the Auto DN, or the
DN. There is also no Prime telephone assigned for the
incoming trunk. In this case, the caller may hear overflow tone
from the
system or a recorded message from the
originating switch.
Solution
1. Configure a Prime telephone for every incoming trunk.
2.
Verify that the switch is sending the correct number of digits
for the Received number length defined in your system.
3.
Verify all the digit strings that the switch should be sending.
4.
Check that you have defined a Received number for every
target line in your system.
5.
Make sure that the published telephone numbers for your
network are correct.
Possible problem
The
system did not receive some or all of the incoming
digits.
Solution
1. Check that the system hardware is receiving signals
properly.
2.
Verify that the switch is sending the correct number of digits
for the Received number length defined in your system.
3.
If the switch at the far end is sending pulse signals, make
sure they are being sent at the proper rate. (Pulse digits must
be 300 ms or more apart for
to receive them.)
Modular
Installer Guide
Network telephone trouble for remote users
225
Possible problem
If remote callers are having difficulty getting through from the
public network, there may be a problem with your DID TC.
Solution
1. Connect a single-line telephone with DTMF tones to a DID
trunk input on the DID TC.
2.
Use the single-line telephone to enter a Received number
that has been programmed for a target line in your system.
Listen for ringback.
3.
If you do not hear ringback, check that the target line is
assigned to a telephone and that there is a Prime telephone
assigned for the DID trunk.
4.
If you now hear ringback, but you also hear the noise of your
unanswered call ringing, check the cross-connections. If all
the cross-connections are correct replace the Trunk
Cartridge.
Possible problem
If remote callers are having difficulty getting through from the
private network, there may be a problem with your E&M TC.
Solution
Check the cross-connections for the
TC.
2.
.
If the E&M trunks are connected to another
system,
make sure that connections have been made as indicated in
the Technical data chapter in this Installer Guide.
3.
Use the following table to check for correct voltage on the
leads:
Voltages on E&M leads
Leads
T-R
Voltage: active
Voltage:
inactive
125
ac on steady dial tone
0 V ac
125
ac on steady dial tone
0 V ac
E-SG
0 V dc to -5 V dc
-48 V dc
M-SB
0 V dc to + 2 V dc
-48 V dc
Modular
Installer Guide
226
Network telephone trouble for remote users
Calling
through
A remote caller expects to hear two different kinds of tones when
number. A stuttered dial tone indicates that the
calling a
system is ready for a COS password. Once the password is
entered, the dial tone is presented.
Dialed number gets
dial tone
instead of stuttered
Possible problem
The remote caller has dialed a
number, but has instead
reached a target line, or has been routed to the Prime telephone
for the auto-answer trunk. The
system has mapped the
incoming digits from switch onto a target line, or has been
unable to map the digits anywhere.
Solution
1. Verify that the switch is sending the correct number of digits
for the Received number length defined in your system.
2.
Verify all the digit strings that the switch should be sending.
3.
Check that you have defined the correct
system.
4.
Make sure that the published telephone numbers for your
network are correct.
Modular DR5 Installer Guide
DN for your
Network telephone trouble for remote users 227
Dialed number gets dial tone instead of stuttered
dial tone
Possible problem
The remote caller has dialed a
number, but has reached
the
system instead. The
system has mapped the
incoming digits from a switch onto the Auto DN.
Solution
1 . Verify that the switch is sending the correct number of digits
for the Received number length defined in your system.
2.
Verify all the digit strings that the switch should be sending.
3.
Check that you have defined the correct
system.
4.
Make sure that the
DN and Auto DN are different
enough to prevent misdialing.
5.
Make sure that the published telephone numbers for your
network are correct.
DN for your
COS password gets overflow tone
Possible problem
The remote caller may have entered an invalid password.
Solution
1. Check the Administration programming under COS
passwords and verify that the caller has a valid password.
Note:
Make sure that all users are informed of password
changes.
Possible problem
The remote caller may have entered an asterisk (*) as one of the
6 digits.
Solution
Instruct remote callers to enter their COS password correctly:
enter 6 digits that are numeric characters.
Modular
Installer Guide
228
Network telephone trouble for remote users
Possible problem
The remote caller may have entered a number sign (#) as one of
the 6 digits.
Solution
1. Instruct remote callers to enter their COS password correctly:
enter 6 digits that are numeric characters. The number sign
(#) may be entered after the 6th digit, but is not required.
Possible problem
The remote caller may have waited more than 15 seconds
between entering digits.
Solution
1. Instruct remote callers to enter their COS password correctly:
enter 6 digits that are numeric characters. and do not pause
too long between digits
Possible problem
The caller may be dialing from a rotary-dial telephone or from a
push-button telephone that has the dial-mode set to “pulse”.
Solution
1. Inform remote callers that they must dial from a push-button
telephone that has the dial-mode set to “tone”.
Modular DR5 Installer Guide
Network telephone trouble for remote users 229
Using
remote features
The following troubleshooting procedures focus on a remote
caller who has received dial tone for the
system but then
encounters a problem when trying to enter the remote feature
code.
Dialed feature code gets overflow tone
problem
The remote caller does not have access to that feature.
Solution
1. If the call came in on a trunk with DISA, check the Class of
Service that is associated with the remote caller’s COS
password. If it is too restrictive, assign another COS
password that is more suitable.
2.
If the call came in on a trunk without DISA, check the Class
of Service that you assigned to the incoming trunk. Make
sure that it gives the appropriate access to the remote caller.
Possible problem
The feature code is not valid.
Solution
Make sure that remote callers have a correct listing of the
features that are programmed for remote access.
2.
Ensure that remote callers are dialing the feature code
correctly. Press q
, followed by the feature code to activate a
remote feature.
Possible problem
The caller may be dialing on a rotary-dial telephone or on a
push-button telephone that has the dial-mode set to “pulse”.
Solution
1. Inform remote callers that they must dial from a push-button
telephone that has the dial-mode set to “tone”.
Modular
Installer Guide
230 Network telephone trouble for remote users
Dialed feature code gets busy tone
Possible problem
A resource that the remote feature uses may currently be in use.
For example, a remote caller trying to use the paging feature
would get a busy tone if the auxiliary speaker were being used at
the time.
Solution
1. If repeated attempts to use the remote feature get busy tone,
there may be a malfunction in a resource that the feature
uses. Check that the remote feature hardware is functioning
normally.
Calling through
to another system
The following troubleshooting procedures focus on a remote
caller trying to use your
trunks to reach another system.
Line Pool access code gets overflow tone
Possible problem
If the published Line Pool access code is valid, the remote caller
does not have access to that line pool.
Solution
1. If the incoming trunk answers with DISA, give the remote
caller a COS password that permits access to that line pool.
OR
change the Class of Service for the incoming trunk so that it
permits access to that line pool.
OR
give the remote caller a Line Pool access code that is
permitted within the Class of Service on the incoming trunk.
Modular DR5 Installer Guide
Network telephone trouble for remote users
231
Possible problem
If the published Line Pool access code is invalid, the system has
attempted, without success, to match the invalid code to a
target line DN, and there is no Prime telephone for the
auto-answer trunk.
Solution
1. Make sure that the published Line Pool access codes are
correct.
2.
Check that the Line Pool access codes have been entered
correctly under 4.
1
in Configuration
programming.
Possible problem
The caller may be dialing from the network on a rotary-dial
telephone or on a push-button telephone that has the dial-mode
set to “pulse”.
Solution
1. Inform remote callers in the public network that they must
dial from a push-button telephone that has the dial-mode set
to “tone”.
Line Pool access code gets
Possible problem
The published Line Pool access code is invalid, and the system
has routed the call to the Prime telephone for the incoming trunk.
Solution
1. Make sure that the published Line Pool access codes are
correct.
2.
Check that the Line Pool codes have been entered correctly
under 4.
in Configuration programming.
Modular DR5 Installer Guide
232 Network telephone trouble for remote users
Line pool access code gets busy tone
Possible problem
There are not enough lines in the line pool to serve the number
of users.
Solution
1. If the line pool contains loop start trunks, enter Configuration
and move under-used loop start trunks from other line pools
into the deficient line pool.
OR
If the line pool contains E&M trunks, order more trunks from
the telephone company or private network vendor. Install
additional E&M Trunk Cartridges. In Configuration
programming, add the new trunks to the deficient line pool.
OR
Create a separate line pool for remote users only.
Possible problem
There are DID lines in the line pool.
Solution
1. In Configuration programming, make sure that there are no
DID lines in any of the line pools.
Modular DR5 Installer Guide
Network telephone trouble for remote users 233
Dialed number gets no response
Possible problem
The remote caller, after accessing a line in a line pool, may have
started dialing before the far end was ready to receive digits.
Solution
1. instruct remote callers to wait until they hear feedback before
entering any digits.
Possible problem
There may be a malfunction in the line that the remote caller
accessed.
Solution
If the problem is persistent, check that all lines in the affected
line pool are functioning normally.
Possible problem
There may be a malfunction in the system that the caller is trying
to reach.
Solution
1. Inform the operators of the system at the far end that the
dialed number is not getting through.
Modular
Installer Guide
234
Problems with optional equipment
Problems with optional
equipment
Analog Terminal Adapter
1.
Check the single line telephone by using a known working
telephone.
test
2.
Check the connections to the jack.
3.
Check the connections to the
4.
Disconnect the
and replace it with a working
telephone. If the telephone still works properly, the KSU
and/or the SM are operating properly.
5.
Verify that the programming has been done as described in
Modular
Programming Record and the
the
Analog Terminal Adapter Installation Card.
6.
If the trouble seems to be in the KSU or SM, double-check all
wiring and programming options. If this does not help, refer
to the sections on KSU down or Station Module down.
OR
If the trouble seems to be with the
disable the
and
replace it with a known working one.
Running a Maintenance session to test an
1. Run a Maintenance session to ensure that the
is not
Status in the Maintenance chapter.)
disabled. (See
2.
While you are in the Maintenance session, run a connectivity
test on the port connected to the telephone. This should be
done after business hours to avoid losing calls.
3.
Disable the port connected to the
Status.
2.
using the subheading:
4.
Enable the port connected to the
2.
Status.
using the subheading:
Modular
Installer Guide
Problems with optional equipment
235
Auxiliary ringer
1.
If the auxiliary ringer is used for Service Modes (Night,
Evening, or Lunch service), ensure that Service Modes is
activated from the Control Telephone.
2.
Check the wiring between the auxiliary ringer generator and
the ringing device. Refer to the auxiliary ringer wiring chart.
3.
Check the wiring between the auxiliary ringer generator and
the distribution block:
Auxiliary ringer wiring
Feature
Pin
Auxiliary ring (Make)
43 (Yellow-Green)
Auxiliary ring (Common)
18 (Green-Yellow)
4.
Ensure that the auxiliary ringer contacts are operating
properly by checking for contact operation with an ohmmeter
across the auxiliary ringer pin contacts listed above.
5.
Check that the auxiliary ringer pin contacts are programmed
to operate in conjunction with any or all of the features in the
auxiliary ringer programming chart.
Auxiliary ringer programming
Feature
Programmed in
Auxiliary ringer: Lines
Configuration:
Line Data
Auxiliary ringer: Sets
Administration:
Telephone
abilities
Service Modes (Night,
Evening, Lunch)
Administration:
Service
Modes
The current capacity of the
relay contacts is
50
dc. They are designed to operate with the
auxiliary ringer generator, or equivalent.
Modular DR5 Installer Guide
236 Problems with optional equipment
Call Identification Interface
1.
Use the Call Information feature on an incoming call to verify
the operation of the
2
Check the connections to the
Refer to the
Card for installation details.
3.
Verify that the programming has been done as described in
the
Modular
Programming Record and the
Modular
System Coordinator Guide.
4.
Run a Maintenance session to test the
5.
Verify that you are subscribing to visual Call Display services
from your local telephone company.
6.
Replace the
Running a Maintenance session to test a
1. Run a Maintenance session to ensure that the
is not
disabled. (See
Status in the Maintenance chapter.)
2.
While you are in the Maintenance session, run a connectivity
test on the port connected to the
3.
Disable the port connected to the
2.
4.
Status.
Enable the port connected to the
2.
using the subheading:
Status.
Modular DR5 Installer Guide
using the subheading:
Problems with optional equipment
237
External paging
1.
Use the Button Inquiry feature (Feature]
q
feature of a programmable memory button.
2.
Check the wiring between the
connector and the
paging amplifier or between the connections shown in the
external paging wiring chart.
to verify the
External paging wiring
3.
Feature
Pin
Page out (Tip)
47 (Violet-Orange)
Page out (Ring)
22 (Orange-Violet)
Test external paging [Feature]
to ensure that it is
working. The output signal from the
KSU is 775
across 600
Modular DR5 Installer Guide
238
Problems with optional equipment
Modular DR5 Installer Guide
A
Access code: A sequence of
characters used to gain entry
into any type of
system
programming.
Administration: A program that
lets one person in your office
(the System Coordinator) assign
and maintain certain settings on
the
system.
Administration access
code:To access Administration
Administration password.
Administration password: A
one-to six-digit password which
is used to prevent unauthorized
access to Administration
programming. The
Administration password can be
assigned and changed in
Administration programming.
Alarm code: A number which
appears on the Alarm
Telephone’s display, informing
you that the KSU has detected
a fault in the system.
Alarm Set (Alarm Telephone):
A telephone which is designated
to receive reports of
system problems. This function
is usually assigned to a Prime
Telephone, but this can be
changed in Configuration
programming.
Allow Redirect: A sub-heading
in Administration programming
that allows you to set whether
Line Redirection can be used
from that telephone.
Alternate language:
When your system is first
installed, all telephone displays
will be in English.
systems are available with
either French or Spanish as the
alternate language. To select
the alternate language, enter
To reselect English, enter
Analog Terminal Adapter
A device which permits
the connection of analog
telecommunication devices
such as FAX machines,
answering machines, and single
line telephones to the
system. Programmed defaults
for the
are automatically
assigned by the
system.
Answer button: A telephone
button with an indicator which is
used to monitor another
telephone. The Answer button
indicates incoming calls
destined for the other
telephone. Someone working at
a telephone with Answer
buttons (a receptionist, for
example) can receive all ringing
and visual indication of
incoming calls for other
telephones, and answer those
calls when necessary.
Modular DR5 Installer Guide
telemanuals.com
240 Glossary
One telephone can have up to
buttons. An Answer
button is automatically assigned
to a telephone when that
telephone is assigned an
Answer DN.
Answer DN: The Directory
Number (DN) of a telephone
that is monitored by an Answer
button. Up to four Answer
can be assigned to a telephone.
This is done in Configuration
programming.
A feature that determines what
the system does with new Call
Log items when your Call Log is
full. When Autobumping is ON,
a new log entry causes the
oldest entry to be deleted. If
Autobumping is OFF, your
system does not log
calls when your log is full.
button: A memory
button which, if programmed,
provides one-touch dialing of
external or internal numbers.
A feature that allows vou to
select the type of calls that are
stored in your Call Log. You can
choose to log calls that were not
answered by anyone within the
system, to log calls that were
unanswered at this telephone
but answered elsewhere in the
system, to log all calls answered
and not answered at this
telephone, or to not have calls
automatically logged.
Modular
Installer Guide
Automatic Dial: A feature that
allows you to dial without having
to pick up the receiver or select
a line. You must have a prime
line to use Automatic Dial.
Automatic Handsfree: A
feature which automatically
activates Handsfree operation
when you make or answer a
call. Automatic Handsfree is
assigned in Administration
programming.
Automatic Hold: A feature
which automatically places an
active call on hold when you
select another line. Automatic
Hold is programmed in
Configuration programming.
Automatic Privacy: See
Privacy.
Automatic Telephone
Relocation: A feature which
lets a telephone retain its
personal and system
programming when it is plugged
into a different
modular
jack. Automatic telephone
relocation is enabled in
Configuration programming.
Auxiliary ringer: A separate
external telephone ringer or bell
which can be programmed to
ring when a line or a telephone
rings. An auxiliary ringer may be
programmed to ring only when
the system is in a particular
service mode. Programming of
an auxiliary ringer is done in
Administration programming
after the feature has been
enabled in Configuration
programming.
telemanuals.com
Glossary 241
B
C
Background Music: A feature
which lets you hear music from
the speaker of your Nor-star
telephone. It is available only if
a music source has been
attached to the KSU and the
feature has been enabled in
Configuration programming.
Call Duration timer:
(Feature]
A feature that lets you see how
long you spent on your last call
or how long you have been on
your present call.
Busy Lamp Field (BLF): A
device with a
crystal
display (LCD) panel of
indicators that shows the status
of up to 24 telephones in the
system. The BLF will
show a telephone as busy if it is
active on a call, has Do Not
Disturb turned ON, or is being
used for programming. The BLF
attaches to the M7310
Telephone.
A feature that forwards all the
calls arriving at your telephone,
to another telephone in your
system. To have calls
forwarded outside the system,
use Line Redirection. To cancel
Call Forward, enter
Button caps: Interchangeable
plastic caps which fit over the
buttons of
telephones.
They are used to indicate the
features programmed onto each
programmable memory button.
Button caps are either
pre-printed or have clear
windows which allow you to
insert labels.
With this feature you can check
the function of each
programmable button on your
telephone.
Call Forward:
Call Forward No Answer: A
feature which forwards all calls
arriving at your telephone to
another designated telephone in
your
system after a
specific number of rings. Call
Forward No Answer is assigned
in Administration programming.
Call Forward On Busy: A
feature which forwards all calls
at your telephone to another
designated telephone if your
telephone is busy. This feature
is assigned in Administration
programming.
Call Forward Override:
Call Forward Override lets you
call someone and ask them to
stop forwarding their
to
you.
Bypass Restrictions:
Overrides any Call Restrictions
applied to specific System
Speed Dial numbers. Bypass
Restrictions can be turned on in
Administration programming.
Modular DR5 Installer Guide
telemanuals.com
242
Glossary
Call information:
Call Information allows
to
display information about
incoming calls. For external
calls, you can display the
caller’s name, telephone
number and the line name. For
an internal call, you can display
the, name of the caller and their
internal number. You can
obtain information about ringing,
answered, or held calls.
Call Log: A feature that
accesses a record of incoming
calls. The log could contain the
following information for each
call: sequence number in the
Call Log, name and number of
caller, long distance indication,
indication if the call was
answered, time and date of the
call, number of repeated calls
from the same source, and
name of the line that the call
came in on. See Autobumping,
options, Enter Call Log,
and
for further information.
With this feature you can place
a call on hold so that someone
can retrieve it from any other
telephone in the
system
by selecting an internal line and
entering a retrieval code. The
retrieval code appears on the
display of your telephone when
you park the call. You can park
up to nine calls on the system at
one time.
Call Park Callback: See
Callback.
Modular DR5 Installer Guide
Call Park prefix: The first digit
of the retrieval code of a parked
call. This digit cannot conflict
with the first digit of any existing
Line Pool access codes,
the Direct-dial digit, or the
external line access code. The
default Call Park prefix digit is
It may be set to none, in
which case Call Park is
disabled. Call Park prefix is
assigned in Configuration
programming.
A feature which lets you answer
a call ringing at any
telephone by entering the
internal number of that
telephone before taking the call.
Call Pickup Directed is enabled
in Configuration programming.
Call Pickup Group: See Pickup
Group.
Call Queuing:
If you have several calls waiting
at your telephone, you can
invoke the Call Queuing feature
to answer them in order of
priority. Priority is given to .
incoming calls, followed by
callback and camped calls.
Callback: If you park, camp, or
transfer a call to another
telephone and it is not
answered there, it will ring again
at your telephone. How long the
system will wait before Callback
occurs is set in Configuration
programming.
telemanuals.com
Glossary 243
Cam -On:
A feature which lets you
re-route a call to a telephone
even if all the lines on that
telephone are busy. To answer
a camped call, use Call
Queuing or select a line if the
camped call appears on your
telephone. Priority is given to
queued calls over camped calls.
Camp timeout: The length of a
delay before a camped call is
returned to the telephone which
camped the call. The length of
delay is set in Configuration
programming.
Capabilities: A section in
Administration programming,
that covers dialing filters,
remote access packages, set
abilities, and line abilities which
can be assigned to
lines, telephones, or Class of
Service passwords.
Central Answering
Position(CAP): An M7324
Telephone which has been
designated a CAP in
Configuration programming.
The CAP provides backup
answering and can be used to
monitor the telephones within a
system. One or two
CAP modules can be attached
to a CAP to increase the
number of lines it can handle.
Central Answering Position
(CAP) module: A CAP module
is connected to an M7324
Telephone and provides 48
additional buttons which can be
used as
buttons or
Feature buttons. A maximum of
two CAP modules can be
connected to a single M7324
Telephone.
Class of Service (COS):
The set of
features and
lines available to the user for a
call. The Class of Service for a
call is determined by the Dialing
Filters and Remote Access
Packages assigned to the
telephone in Administration
programming. Class of Service
for a call can be changed by
entering a six digit Class of
Service password. (Internal
users cannot change their
access to features with a COS
password, only their dialing
filters.) Class of Service and
Class of Service passwords are
assigned in Administration
programming. See Remote
Access.
Class of Service password:
A Class of Service password is
a six digit code that lets you
switch from your current Class
of Service to one that lets you
dial numbers prohibited by your
current Class of Service.
Conference:
(Feature
The Conference feature allows
you to establish a three-person
call at your
telephone.
Modular
Installer Guide
244
Glossary
Conference using privacy:
Normally your calls are private;
no one else can pick up your
line and join in. You can turn
privacy off for a call, allowing
another person with the same
line to press the line button and
join in your conversation.
Contrast Adjustment:
[Feature]
Allows you to set the contrast
level of your telephone display.
Control Telephone: A Control
Telephone can place the lines
for which it has responsibility in
or out of a Service Mode. The
Direct-dial Telephone is a
Control Telephone for directing
calls to the Extra Direct-dial
Telephone. A telephone is
made a Control telephone and
has lines assigned to it in
Administration programming.
COS: See Class of Service.
Cursor: A short horizontal line
which appears on the
telephone display to indicate
that characters can be entered
using the dial pad.
D
Data Communications
Interface (DCI): A
device which lets you attach an
RS-232 data device to the
system.
Modular DR5 Installer Guide
Data terminal: A device such
as a modem which can be used
to transfer data instead of sound
over a telephone network. You
cannot use
programming to set up such
devices. See the documentation
that accompanies the device.
Date: See Show Time or Time
and Date.
Defaults: The settings for all
features when the
system is first installed. Settings
are changed from their defaults
in Administration programming
and Configuration programming.
In this manual, default settings
are shown in bold text.
Delayed Ring Transfer (DRT)
to Prime: After a specified
number of rings, this feature
transfers an unanswered call on
an external line, to the Prime
Telephone associated with that
line. This feature is activated in
Configuration programming.
Dialing filter: Through a
combination of restrictions and
exceptions, dialing filters
prevent certain telephone
numbers from being dialed.
Dialing filters can be applied to
lines (line filters, remote filters),
to sets (set filters), to specific
lines on a set (line/set filters),
and to Class of Service
passwords (user filters, remote
filters). The
system can
handle up to 100 dialing filters.
Glossary
This feature allows you to set
the dialing mode of your
telephone.
supports
three dialing modes; Automatic
Dial, Pre-Dial, and Standard
Dial. All three modes support
on-hook dialing (meaning you
can dial a call without picking up
the receiver). The special
features of the Automatic and
Pre-Dial modes are available
only when you dial on-hook.
Direct-dial: A feature which lets
you dial a designated telephone
in your
system with a
single digit. As many as five
direct dial sets can be
established. Each telephone in
the system is assigned to one
Direct-dial telephone. There is a
single, system wide digit for
calling the assigned Direct-dial
telephone of any telephone.
Direct-dial telephones are
established in Administration
programming. Telephones are
assigned to a Direct-dial
telephone in Administration
programming.
Direct-dial #: A digit used
system wide to call a direct dial
telephone. The digit is assigned
in Configuration programming.
Direct-dial number: The digit
used to call the Direct-dial
telephone.
245
Direct inward System Access
(DISA): The feature which lets
remote users dial directly into
the
system and use
features. Callers will
hear stuttered dial tone and will
be required to enter a Class of
Service password to gain
access to the system. See
Remote Access.
Directed Pickup: See Call
Pickup Directed.
Directory
A
unique number which is
automatically assigned to each
telephone or data terminal. The
DN, also referred to as an
internal number, is often used to
identify a telephone when
settings are assigned during
programming. Default DN
assignments start at 21 in a
two-digit (non-expanded)
system and
in a three-digit
(expanded) system.
DN: The received number
assigned to the
Direct
Inward System Access facility. If
a caller dials a number which is
assigned to the
DN, the
caller hears stuttered dial tone
and must enter a Class of
Service Password. Once the
password is accepted, the caller
hears system dial tone and can
use Remote Access features.
See Remote Access.
Modular DR5 installer Guide
246
Glossary
Disconnect Supervision: A
setting which enables the
system to detect if an
external caller hangs up. Once
an external caller hangs up, the
system can disconnect
its line. Disconnect Supervision
is enabled in Configuration
programming.
Display: A liquid crystal display
(LCD) on the
telephone
that guides you through feature
operation and programming.
Display button: The
Telephone and M7324
Telephone are each equipped
with three buttons located
directly beneath the display.
During feature operation or
programming, some or all of
these buttons may be used to
provide further options. If an
option is available, it is shown in
the bottom row of the two row
display, directly above the
corresponding display button.
Display buttons are represented
in this manual as underlined
capital, e.g.
Display digits: In
Administration programming,
this subheading lets you set
whether an assigned name or
the actual number will be
displayed when someone uses
a system speed dial code.
DN: See Directory Number.
Do Not Disturb:
A feature that stops calls from
ringing at your telephone. Only
Priority Calls will ring at your
telephone. A line button will
flash when you receive a call,
but the call will not ring. To
cancel Do Not Disturb, enter
DRT delay: The number of
rings before a Delayed Ring
Transfer occurs. This is
assigned in Configuration
programming.
DRT to Prime: See Delayed
Ring Transfer to Prime.
E
Emergency Telephone: A
single line telephone (also
referred to as a
telephone) that becomes active
when there is no power to the
Key Service Unit.
Enter your Call Log to view
stored information:
Event message: Event
messages are stored in the
system log and displayed during
a Maintenance session. They
record a variety of events and
activities in the
system.
Exceptions: One component of
a Dialing filter. Exceptions are
numbers you can dial even if
they are forbidden by a
general Restriction. See
Restrictions.
Modular DR5 installer Guide
Glossary
External call: A call to a
destination outside
system.
External Call Forward: See
Line Redirection.
External code: The number
you dial to get an external line.
By default it is 9, but this can be
changed in Configuration
programming. You do not
always need an external code. It
is primarily to support the
Telephone and single
line telephones using an Analog
Terminal Adapter.
External line: A line on your
telephone used for
making calls to destinations
outside the
system.
F
Feature button: Many
features are invoked by
pressing the Feature button
followed by a Feature code. The
feature button is also used to
exit a feature.
Feature Cartridge: A
replaceable cartridge containing
the
features. The
Feature Cartridge, a
combination of a Data Cartridge
and a Software Cartridge, is
inserted into the Key Service
Unit.
Feature code: A number that is
used to activate a particular
feature.
Feature rogramming:
External music source: See
Music source.
External paging: A feature you
can use to make voice
announcements over an
externally-mounted loudspeaker
connected to the Key Service
Unit. The external speaker is
not a
component and
must be supplied by the
customer.
Extra-Dial set: In
Administration programming,
this heading lets you assign an
extra Direct-dial set when a
service mode is active. You can
have one Extra-Dial set for each
of the three service modes.
Allows you to program a feature
code onto a memory button. To
erase a memory button, enter
Forward: See Call Forward.
Forward delay: The number of
rings before an unanswered call
is forwarded to another
telephone when the Call
Forward No Answer feature is
ON. Forward delay is assigned
in Administration programming.
Forward No Answer: See Call
Forward No Answer.
Forward On Busy: See Call
Forward On Busy.
Modular
Installer Guide
248 Glossary
Full
(on idle line):
When this feature is ON, if you
select an available line, and
then do something which
selects another line, the first line
is put on hold. Full
is
enabled in Configuration
programming.
Handsfree (HF) Answerback:
When activated, this feature
automatically turns ON the
microphone at a telephone
receiving a Voice Call so that
the person receiving the call can
respond without lifting the
receiver. It is activated in
Administration programming.
Full Handsfree: See
Handsfree.
button: See
Handsfree.
G
A feature which allows you to
have others in your office hear a
caller through your phone’s
speaker. The caller hears you
only when you speak into the
receiver and cannot hear other
people in the office. You can
cancel Group Listen for the
current call. Group Listen is
cancelled automatically when
you hang up the Group Listen
call. To cancel, enter
H
Handsfree:
A feature you can use to make
calls without using the
telephone receiver. Full
Handsfree is activated in
Administration programming.
When it is activated, a
button is
automatically assigned to the
telephone.
Headset: A head-mounted or
ear-mounted telephone receiver
that is used instead of the handheld receiver. Headsets are not
components and must
be supplied by the customer.
Held (Line) Reminder: A
telephone rings and
displays the message
d call when an external
call has been placed on hold for
a certain period of time. The
Held Line Reminder feature and
Remind delay are set in
Configuration programming.
HF Answerback: See
Handsfree Answerback.
Hold button:
(Hold]
This button is used to suspend
calls so that the person using
the telephone can perform
another task without
disconnecting the caller.
To place a call on Exclusive
Hold so that it can be retrieved
onlv at vour
enter
Hookswitch Flash: See Link
time.
Modular DR5 Installer Guide
Glossary
249
Host System Signaling: (Also
referred to as End-to-End
telephones
Signaling.)
can access a remote system or
dial a number on an alternate
carrier by means of Host feature
activation, such as Link, Pause
and Run/Stop.
Internal number: A number
(also referred to as a Directory
Number or DN) that identifies a
telephone or device.
This feature
automatically calls a preassigned number when the
telephone’s receiver is lifted or
the
button is
pressed. A Hotline number can
be an internal or external
number. Hotline is assigned in
Administration programming.
K
I
An abbreviation of Intercom
button.
Intercom button: A button
which provides access to
internal lines used for calls
within a
system and
access to external lines through
a Line Pool or external code. A
telephone may be assigned
zero to eight Intercom buttons.
This is done in Configuration
programming.
intercom keys: See Intercom
button.
Internal line: A line on your
telephone dedicated to making
calls to destinations inside your
system. An internal line
may still connect you with an
external caller if you use it to
access a line pool or to pick up
a call using
call
handling features such as Call
Park or Call Pickup Directed.
Internal user: Someone using a
telephone within a
system.
Key Service Unit (KSU): The
central hardware component in
system. The KSU
the
has its own processor and
memory, and provides a
physical point of connection for
the various types of devices,
telephones, and expansion
modules used in
The
KSU can function on its own as
a basic system (with 24
telephones and 8 external
lines), or with the addition of a
Trunk Module (TM) which
supports more external lines, or
a Station Module (SM) which
supports more
telephones.
L
Last Number Redial:
[Feature]
A feature that allows you to
redial the last external number
you dialed.
Line: The complete path of a
voice or data connection
between one telephone (or
other device) and another.
Modular DR5 Installer Guide
250
Glossary
Line abilities: In Administration
programming, the heading
under which you assign Line
Filters, Remote Filters, and
Remote Access Packages to
lines.
Line filter: See Dialing filter.
Lihe names: In Administration
programming, this sub-heading
allows you to assign names to
external lines.
Line number: A number which
identifies an external line. The
total number of lines depends
on how many Trunk Modules
are installed.
A group of lines used for making
external calls. Line Pools
provide an efficient way of
giving a telephone access to
external lines without taking up
many line buttons. A line is
assigned to be a member of a
Line Pool in Configuration
programming.
Line Profile: A feature you can
use to review the settings that
have been programmed to lines
in Configuration and
Administration programming.
The settings cannot be changed
with this feature. Line profile is
available only on the
and M7324 telephones.
Modular
Installer Guide
Line Redirection:
A feature which allows you to
redirect all calls on an incoming
line to a destination outside the
system. Once a line is
redirected it cannot be
answered within the
system. The system may be set
up to give a brief ring when a
call comes in on a redirected
line. This feature differs from
Call Forward in two ways. It
redirects only external calls (not
internal calls) and it redirects
calls to destinations outside the
system. Call forward redirects
calls only to destinations inside
the
system. See Call
Forward and Redirect Ring. To
cancel Line Redirection. enter
If your
system is
connected to a Private Branch
Exchange (PBX), you can use a
Link signal to access special
features. The Link signal can
also be included as part of a
longer stored sequence on an
External
button or in a
Speed Dial code. The Link
symbol
uses two of the 24
spaces in a dialing sequence.
Loait:
lets you manually log call
information when you
connected to a call.
Glossary 251
Lon Tones:
A feature that lets you control
the length of a tone so that you
can signal devices such as fax
or answering machines which
require tones longer than the
standard 120 milliseconds.
M
M7100 Telephone: A telephone
with a single line display and
one programmable memory
button without an indicator.
M7208 Telephone: A telephone
with a single line display and
eight programmable memory
buttons with indicators.
M7310 Telephone: A telephone
which has a two line display,
three display buttons,
programmable memory buttons
with indicators, and 12 dual
memory programmable buttons
without indicators. An M7310
can be equipped with a Busy
Lamp Field.
M7324 Telephone: A telephone
with a two line display, three
display buttons, and 24
programmable memory buttons
with indicators. An M7324
telephone can be equipped with
a CAP module.
M7900 Telephone: A telephone
with a touch screen display
which replaces the display and
memory buttons of other
telephones. It provides
simplified access to
Features and an interface to
computer driven applications.
Maintenance: A type of
programming that is used to
diagnose and repair problems in
the
system.
Maintenance requires no
programmable settings.
Memory buttons: Buttons
which can be programmed to
dial frequently used features or
numbers automatically. See
M7100, M7208,
M7324
and M7900 telephone entries
for their exact memory button
configurations.
Message:
A feature that allows you to
send a message to another
user. The Message
feature also lets you know if you
have any messages waiting,
and it maintains a Message
Waiting List to keep a record of
your internal messages and
your (external) voice mail
messages.
To leave a message on the
display of another telephone in
your
system, enter
[Feature]
a telephone
with a two-line display, this code
will also allow you to show and
scan the messages you have
sent. To cancel a message that
you have sent, enter
To erase an item in your
Messge Waiting List, enter
Move Line buttons:
A feature that allows you to
move external lines to different
buttons on your telephone.
Modular
Installer Guide
252 Glossary
Music source: A radio or other
source of music can be
connected to the Key Service
Unit to provide music for the
Music on Hold and Background
Music features. A music source
is not part of the
system
and must be supplied by the
customer.
On hold: A setting,
programmed in Configuration
programming, that controls
whether external callers hear
music, periodic tones, or silence
when they are placed on hold.
Overlay: See
Programming Overlay.
N
Names: Names can be
assigned to System Speed Dial
numbers, external lines,
telephones, and Service Modes.
This is done in Administration
programming. You can use up
to sixteen characters to name a
System Speed Dial number,
and seven characters to name a
telephone, line, or Service
Mode.
If a Name has not been
assigned, the line number or DN
will appear on the display
instead of a Name.
Night Service: See Service
Modes.
Programming
Overlay: A paper template
which is placed over the top four
memory buttons with indicators
on the M7310 or M7324
Telephone during programming.
The overlay labels indicate the
special function that each of the
four buttons takes on in
programming.
Modular
0
Installer Guide
P
.
Page Zone: An area in the
office that receives internal
Page announcements
independently of the rest of the
office. Each Page Zone is
identified by a number.
Telephones are assigned to
Page Zones in Administration
programming.
A feature you can use to make
announcements over the
system. To choose
Internal Page (announce over
the telephone speakers), enter
after the Paging code. To
choose External Page
(announce over a customer
supplied loudspeaker) enter
after the Paging code. For both
Internal and External Page,
enter
after the Paging code.
Park prefix: See Call park
prefix.
Glossary 253
Park timeout: The time before
an unanswered parked call is
routed back to the telephone
which parked it. Park timeout is
in Configuration programming.
See Call Park.
Password: A password is a
specific sequence of digits that
you enter to gain access to
programming, to
override dialing restrictions, or
to use Remote Access with
DISA. Passwords are also
required for System Startup and
Administration programming.
See Class of Service password.
Pause:
A feature that enters a 1.5
second delay in a dialing
sequence on an external line.
This is often required for
signaling remote devices, such
as answering machines, or
when reaching through to PBX
features or Host systems. The
Pause symbol
uses one of
the 24 spaces in a dialing
sequence. For Pulse Dialing,
inserts a 1.5 second pause into
the dialing sequence.
D
i
a
l
:
Two-digit codes (71-94) can be
programmed to dial external
telephone numbers. Personal
Speed Dial numbers are
programmed for each
telephone, and can be used
only at the telephone on which
they are programmed.
A telephone can be placed into
one of nine Call Pickup Groups.
A call ringing at a telephone
within a Pickup Group can be
picked up at any other
telephone within the same
Pickup Group. A telephone is
assigned to a Pickup Group in
Administration programming.
Pool: See Line Pool.
Pre-dial: A feature that allows
you to enter a number and
check it on your telephone
display before it is actually
dialed. If the number is
incorrect, you can edit it. The
number is dialed only when you
pick up the receiver or select a
line.
Prime line: The line on your
telephone which is automatically
selected when you lift the
receiver, press the
Handsfree/Mute button or use
an external dialing feature. A
Prime Line is assigned to a
telephone in Configuration
programming.
Prime Set (Prime Telephone):
A telephone which provides
backup answering for incoming
calls on external lines. The
Prime Telephone for
will
ring for any unanswered calls
on that line. A Prime Telephone
is assigned to a line in
Configuration programming.
Modular DR5 Installer Guide
254
Glossary
Call:
If you get a busy signal when
you call someone in your office,
you can interrupt them for an
urgent call. This feature is
enabled for a telephone in
Administration programming.
Privacy: This feature
determines whether a
user may select a line in use at
another telephone and join an
established call. Privacy is
enabled in Configuration
programming, but can be turned
ON and OFF by users during
individual calls.
Private line: See Private to.
Private network: A telephone
network consisting of owned or
leased telephone lines used to
connect different offices of an
organization independently of
the public network.
Private to: A line can be
assigned, in Configuration
programming, to one telephone
as a Private line. The line
cannot appear on any other
telephone, except the Prime
Telephone for that line. Private
lines cannot be placed into Line
Pools.
Proarammed release:
A feature that performs the
function of
button in a
programmed dialing sequence.
Programming: Setting the way
the
system will work.
Programming includes
wide settings and individual
telephone and line settings.
Programming Overlay: See
Programming Overlay.
Programming reminders:
Charts on which you can record
some commonly-used settings
from Administration
programming to keep the
system’s records
date.
Public line: An external line
which can be assigned to any
telephone and to many
telephones. A line is assigned
as Public in Configuration
programming.
Public network: The regular
telephone network which
connects most homes and
businesses.
Pulse/Tone Dialing:
An external line setting for pulse
or tone dialing. Pulse is the
traditional method of dialing
used by rotary dial or push
button single-line telephones.
Tone dialing allows telephones
to communicate with other
devices such as answering
machines. Tone dialing is
required to access the features
that PBX systems may offer or
to use another
system
remotely.
R
Recall: See Link time.
Modular
Installer Guide
Glossary 255
Receiver The handset of a
telephone.
Redirect ring: In Administration
programming, this subheading
allows you to set whether a line
that has been redirected
through Line Redirection will
give a short ring on those sets
on ‘which the line appears.
Remind delay: When a call has
been on hold for a set period,
the telephone beeps and
displays the message
d call . This period is the
Remind delay. It is set in
Configuration programming.
Remote access: The ability to
dial into a
system from
outside the system and make
use of selected
features. The lines, features,
and dialing capabilities available
to a remote user are determined
by the Class of Service. If the
remote access fine is answered
with DISA, the user must enter
a Class of Service password to
gain access to the
system’s features.
Remote access dial filter: See
Remote filter.
Remote access package: In
Administration programming,
this subheading lets you set up
access to Paging and Line
Pools for remote users.
Remote capability: A subset of
features that are
available to users connected
through remote access.
Remote filter: A dialing filter
applied to a line in order to
control which digits can be
dialed during an incoming
remote access call. It is the
equivalent of a set filter for a
remote user.
Remote paging: This feature
allows remote users to use the
paging feature. Access
to this feature is governed by
the Class of Service for the call.
See Remote Access and Class
of Service.
Remote User: Someone who
system from
calls into a
a telephone outside that system
and uses
features or
lines. See Remote Access.
Restrictions: One component
of a Dialing filter. Restrictions
are numbers you cannot dial
when that dialing filter is in
effect. See Exceptions.
Rin A
A feature that can be used
when you can’t get through to
someone on your
system because their telephone
is busy or there is no answer.
Ring Again instructs the
system to inform you when they
hang up or next use their
telephone. You can cancel your
Ring Again request by entering
Rin T e:
A feature that allows you to
select one of four distinctive
rings for your telephone.
Modular DR5 Installer Guide
256
Glossary
Rin Volume:
S
A feature that allows you to set
the volume at which your
telephone rings.
SAPS: See Station Auxiliary
Power Supply.
Ringing: A setting which
assigns a line to ring or not ring
at a telephone. a line has
been assigned as “No ring”, an
incoming call is shown by a
flashing indicator only. Ringing
is set in Configuration
programming.
Ringing Sets (Ringing
Telephones): Those
telephones which have been
assigned to ring when a line has
been placed into a Service
Mode. Ringing Telephones are
assigned in Administration
programming.
button: The Release button
ends a call in the same way that
hanging up the receiver does. It
may also be used to end
Startup, Configuration
programming, Administration
programming, Maintenance
sessions and feature
operations.
a
breakpoint in a programmed
external dialing sequence.
When you press a programmed
key, the system dials the
number up to the run/stop.
When you press it again, the
system dials the digits following
the run/stop.
Modular
Installer Guide
Saved Number Redial:
A feature that allows you to
save the number of the external
call you are on (providing you
dialed the call) so that you can
call it again later.
Selective line redirection:
Line Redirection.
Service Modes:
A feature that places one or
more lines into a Service Mode.
This is usually done to provide
special ringing and telephone
access after normal off ice
hours, or when there are few
people available to answer
calls. Service Modes settings
are assigned in Administration
programming. To return to
normal operation or cancel the
manual override of an automatic
mode, enter
You cannot cancel an automatic
mode with this code.
Set: A telephone.
Set ability: In Administration
programming, the subheading
under which set filters, line/set
filters, and a variety of system
features are assigned to
individual telephones.
Glossary 257
Set Copy: A programming
section that allows you to copy
programmable settings from
one telephone to another of the
same type. Set Copy provides
two options: duplicating System
Data and User Data, or
duplicating System Data only.
Set Copy does not provide the
same copy capability as the
display button, which is
more selective of the settings
that can be duplicated.
Shift button: A small triangular
button beside the dual memory
buttons on the upper half of the
Telephone. You press
the shift button to store or
access features on the top half
of the dual memory buttons.
Show Time:
While on a call, accessing this
feature lets you see the current
date and time on the
telephone display.
Set filter: See Dialing filter.
Set lock (Telephone lock):
This feature allows you to limit
the number of features that may
be used or programmed at a
telephone. Full set lock allows
very few changes or features,
Partial set lock allows some
changes and features, and No
set lock allows
change to
be made and any feature to be
used. Set lock is assigned in
Administration programming.
Set Names: In Administration
programming, this sub-heading
allows you to assign Names of
up to seven characters to
telephones.
Set Profile: A feature you can
use to review the settings that
have been assigned in
Configuration programming and
Administration programming.
The settings cannot be changed
with this feature. Set profile is
available only on the
and M7324 telephones.
Station: An individual telephone
or other
device.
System Coordinator: The
person responsible for
customizing the
system
through Administration
programming and for helping
co-workers use the
system.
System Data: An option in the
Set Copy function. System Data
refers to the system settings
which apply to all telephones
and lines. System Data consists
of the programmable settings
from System Startup and
Administration programming. It
also includes the settings
programmed in Configuration
programming.
System Speed Dial: In
Administration programming, a
heading under which you can
assign up to 70 numbers as
System Speed Dial numbers.
Set Relocation: See Automatic
Telephone Relocation.
Modular DR5 Installer Guide
258 Glossary
System Speed Dial code: A
Two-digit code (01 to 70) that
can be programmed to dial a
telephone number up to 24
digits long. System Speed Dial
codes are programmed for the
entire
system in
Administration programming.
System Speed Dial Name: In
Administration programming, a
subheading under which you
can assign a name to a System
Speed Dial number.
System Startup: When a
system is first installed
and powered up, System
Startup must be performed
before any programming can be
done. Startup initializes the
system programming to
defaults.
System Startup access code:
To beain Svstem Startuo. enter
An Installer password is
required before System Startup
can begin.
T
Tandem call: A call established
when a remote user dials into
the
system and uses
the system to place an outgoing
call. The combination of the
incoming and outgoing calls
forms a tandem call. See
Remote Access.
Time and Date: The current
Time and Date appear on the
display of idle
telephones. Time and Date can
be changed in Administration
programming.
Modular DR5
Guide
Timed release:
a 1 .5
second pause into a sequence.
You can use it in a dialing
sequence for accessing a
remote system such as a PBX.
You can also dial it if you wish
to release a call from your line
but keep the line for another
call.
Transfer:
A feature which lets you redirect
a call to another telephone in
your
system, over a
network or outside your
system. There are four types of
Transfer; Transfer using Hold,
Transfer with Announcement,
Transfer without
Announcement, and transfer
using Unsupervised
Conference.
Transfer Callback: If a
transferred call is not answered
after a specific number of rings,
the call will return to the
telephone which made the
transfer. The number of rings is
assigned in Configuration
programming. Transfer Callback
does not apply to calls
transferred externally.
Trunk: The physical connection
between the
system
and the outside world using
either the public telephone
system or a private network.
Glossary 259
Trunk Answer:
A feature you can use to answer
a call on any line that has an
active Service Mode, even if
that line does not appear on
your telephone. Trunk Answer is
enabled in Administration
programming.
U
Unsupervised line: A line for
which disconnect supervision is
disabled. If an external caller
hangs up, the
system
does not detect the
disconnection and does not
hang up its line. See Disconnect
Supervision.
User Data: User Data is an
option in the Set Copy feature.
User Data refers to the personal
settings which are unique to an
individual telephone, and are
not programmed in
Configuration or Administration
programming. User Data is
programmed at each telephone.
These settings, for example,
include Personal Speed Dial
and the assignment of
programmable memory buttons.
User Filter: See Dialing filter.
Voice Call:
[Feature]
A feature you can use to make
an announcement or begin a
conversation through the
speaker of another telephone in
the
system. The
telephone you call will not ring.
Instead, the person you call will
hear a beep and then your
voice. Their telephone will beep
periodically to remind them that
their microphone is open.
Voice Call deny:
A feature that prevents your
telephone from receiving Voice
Calls. To cancel Voice Call
deny, press
Voice Message Center: If you
have subscribed to Call Display
services you can receive visual
Voice Message Waiting
Indication, providing your
telephone has a display. If you
have Voice Message Waiting
Indication, you can program the
telephone numbers required to
access
five different Voice
Message Centers. You can
also program which of the five
Centers is to be accessed by
each specific line.
Modular DR5 installer Guide
260
Glossary
Modular DR5 Installer Guide
A
Access code
Line pool 149
Startup 95
Access codes
Line pool in a network 13
Administration
defaults 102
Alarm Codes
in System Administration
Log 184
in System Test Log 181
Overview 185
table of 186
Alarm telephone 145, 185
Answer buttons 135
Answer DN 135
Ringing 136
Answer mode 119
programming 127
Answer with
programming 128
troubleshooting 203
Attendant by-pass 121
Auto DN 123
characteristics 145
deleting 145
length 145
Auto-answer
AUTO DN 123
122
DN 123
Network Troubleshooting
211
trunks 118
Auto-answer trunk
definition 4
cannot be
programmed 207,219,
130
Auxiliary Equipment
Wiring chart 83
Auxiliary ringer
Installation 63
programming 63,133
troubleshooting 203, 235
Auxiliary ringing
on target lines 15
B
Directory Numbers 81
B2 Directory Numbers 81
Background Music 143
Installation 63
troubleshooting 221
BLF
troubleshooting 203
Bounce 77
Bridge taps 30
Busy tone
Cadence 75,
Buttons
Answer 59
Handsfree/Mute button 59
External line 60
C
Cable
length 30
Cable routing 48
Cadences 75
Modular DR5 Installer Guide
telemanuals.com
262 Index
Call Forward
Delayed Ring Transfer 140
Call Identification Interface
(see Cll)
Call Handling 139
capacity 2
defaults 100
Call Park
changed
141
Park prefix 140
Timeout delay 141
Callback
delay 140
on target lines 15
Camp on
on target lines 15
Camp timeout delay 141
CAP
Assigning to system 146
relocating 146
CAP modules
line assignment 135
troubleshooting 203
Cartridge
troubleshooting 204
Central Answering Position
(See CAP)
troubleshooting 236
Class of Service
defaults 105
Password
123
Codes
in System Administration
Log 184
Configuration
Answer mode 127
Answer with
128
Call Handling 139
Modular DR5 Installer Guide
Copying data 124
130
Full
Gain 129
Line Data 131
Miscellaneous
hardware 36
Password
changing 150
programming 111
Received number 130
Signal type 128, 129, 130
System Data 151
Trunk mode 127
Trunk type 126
Confirmation tone
Cadence 75
Connectivity Test 176
procedures 177
Result Codes 179
results 178
Control Circuit Interface 92
copy 155
System Data 155
User Administration data
155
Copying data 124
COS (See Class of Service)
Cross Connections
Trunk Cartridge
E
87
D
Data Cartridge 41
Delay
Camp timeout 141
Delayed Ring Transfer 140
Disconnect Supervision 148
Held Line Reminder 139
Host 148
OSI 148
telemanuals.com
Index 263
Park timeout 141
Transfer Callback 140
Delay Dial 128, 129, 130
Delayed Ring Transfer 140
Delay 140
on target lines 15
Device
State 166
Version number ‘166
Device type 165
Diagnostics
overview 176
Dial mode
programming 129
Dial tone
122
Host delay 148
troubleshooting 214
Dialing filters 2
defaults 103
Dialing plan 2, 13
DID lines
as Prime line 138
in line pools 232
DID trunk cartridge
Emergency telephone 92
troubleshooting 209
Wiring chart 93
DID trunks 120
as Prime line 9
Configuration requirements
9
incoming calls 9
Remote access 123
Signal setting 128, 129, 130
Direct Inward Dial (See DID)
Direct Inward System Access
(See DISA)
Direct-dial
DN length 144
programming 144
Directed pickup
programming 141
Directory numbering
with six-port Expansion
Cartridge 80
with two-port Expansion
Cartridge 80
Directory numbers 79
and B2 81
in a network 13
2, 7, 19, 122
with 226
Calling
dial tone 122
DN 123
DN
characteristics 145, 146
deleting 145, 146
length 145, 146
programming 144
Disabling 163, 167
modules 172
Disconnect supervision 119,
127
troubleshooting 211
DN
Changing 151
length 152
cautions 153
changing 153
DS-30 cables
Installation 52
DTMF
on E M trunks 124
receiver inaccessible
DTMF signaling
programming 129
Modular DR5 Installer Guide
telemanuals.com
264 Index
E
E&M
Configuration requirements
7
E M Trunk Cartridge
Cross connections 87
troubleshooting 209
Wiring charts 89
as Prime line 7
Answer mode 127
definition 5
Full
130
Gain 129
incoming calls 7
Private Network 123
pulse signaling 129
Remote access 122, 123
Signal setting 128, 129, 130
voltages on leads 225
Electromagnetic compatibility
72
‘Electromagnetic interference
29
Electrostatic interference 29
Emergency Telephone
connecting to KSU 53
on DID trunk cartridge 92
testing 54
wiring 53
with E
Trunk
Cartridge 87
Emissions
Radiated 72
Enabling 175
Enabling the device 169
Environmental requirements
30
Modular DR5 Installer Guide
Environmental specifications
Event messages
Complete list of 193
overview 190
Severity 190
Expansion Cartridge
installation 43
module numbering 170
Port numbering 80
troubleshooting 205
Extenal lines 60, 118
line numbers 117
Wiring chart 83
External paging
troubleshooting 237
F
Feature Cartridge 41, 204
troubleshooting 204
Features
troubleshooting 203
Filters 10
130
Full
G
Gain
programming 129
General Administration
defaults 102
H
Handsfree/Mute 59
Headset
troubleshooting 203
Hearing Aid Compatibility 72
Held Line Reminder 139
delay 139
on target lines 15
Hold
telemanuals.com
Index 265
programming music 142
Host delay 148
Host System Signaling 249
Humidity 29
requirements 77
Hung lines
troubleshooting 215
I
Impedance
External music source 63
Installation
Auxiliary Ringer 63
brackets 38
DS-30 cables 52
Emergency Telephone 53
Environmental requirements
30
External paging system 65
Internal 30
mounting brackets 38
music 63
telephones 55
power bar 66
powering up 67
turning system ON 67
Wall-mounted telephone 56
Installer password (See also
Configuration
password)
changing 150
Intercom buttons
default assignment 59
programming 137
Interconnect 72
Interference 29
K
KSU
Connecting an Emergency
Telephone 53
Directory numbers 80
disabling 172
enabling 175
External lines
Wiring chart 83
hanging on mounting
brackets 35
Internal lines
Wiring chart 84
physical dimensions
Port numbers 80
Power source 29
Relay contacts 65
Status 171
204, 207
turning ON 67
L
Line Access 134
Line assignment
programming 135
Line buttons
maximum number of 135
Line Data
Copying 124
defaults 98
programming1
Line filters 10
Line per set filters
Line pools1 31
Access
Access code
priority over External line
access code 150
length 150
Modular DR5 Installer Guide
telemanuals.com
266 Index
DID lines 232
in a dialing plan 13
programming 149
as Prime line 138
programming
Line Profile
troubleshooting a network
199
Line redirection 27
Hung lines 215
Lines
disabling 167
enabling 169
External 118
line numbers 117
pools 131
Prime 138
Private 131
Public 131
Ringing
Programming 136
search for idle 132
Target
117, 121
Tie 1
troubleshooting when hung
215
Link Time 146
Logs
System Administration 183
System Test 180
Loop resistance 30
Loop Start Trunk Cartridge
troubleshooting 209
Loop start trunks 1, 119
as Prime line 5
Configuration requirements
5
dial mode 129
Full
130
Incoming calls 5
Modular DR5 Installer Guide
Remote access 122
Loop Supervision 127
M
telephone
Intercom buttons 137
M7324 telephone
as CAP 146
Maintenance
Alarm codes 185
Diagnostics 176
Emergency Telephone 54
Event Messages 190
Records 195
System Test Log 180
Maintenance session
beginning 160
Manual-answer
trunks 118
Miscellaneous 143
defaults 101
Modular Telephone Feature
Card 110
Module Status
overview 170
procedure 171
Mounting brackets 35
Music
background 143
installation 63
License for 73
on Hold 142
troubleshooting 221
N
Names
defaults 102
Network
Configurations 17
Private 22
telemanuals.com
Index 267
Public 18
Security 2, 10
unified dialing plan 13
Network Troubleshooting
far-end disconnecting 217
Networking 1
Call handling capabilities 15
getting wrong 227
getting wrong tone 226
not getting through 224
Remote features 229
No free lines 218
Not in
DTMF misconfiguration 217
Numbering
Directory Numbers 79
Ports 79
Numbers
entering
viewing 116
0
Off premise extension 51
Open Switch Interval 127
programming 148
Optional Equipment
troubleshooting 202
OPX (see off premise
extension)
OSI (See Open Switch
Interval)
Overflow Call Routing
on target lines 16
Overflow tone
Cadence 75
P
Paging
installation 65
troubleshooting 236, 237
Park prefix
programming 140
Park timeout delay 141
Passwords
Configuration 150
cos 7
defaults 106
Pickup
Directed 141
Port Numbering
default KSU 80
with six-port Expansion
Cartridge 80
with two-port Expansion
Cartridge 80
Status
Device type 165
overview 163
procedures 164
State 166
Version Number 166
Ports
Connectivity test 177
Power bar
110 V Installation 66
with 4 or more modules 66
Prime line
on DID trunks 9
on Loop Start trunks 5
programming 138
Prime Telephone
misdialed 216
misdialed calls 222
Modular
Installer Guide
...
268 Index
programming 133
Privacy
on target lines 16
programming 133
Private iines 131, 136
Private network 22
Programming
Alarm telephone 145
Answer mode 127
Answer with
128
Auto DN 145
Auxiliary ringer 133
Background music 143
Camp timeout delay 141
CAP 146’
copying data 155
Delay Ring 140
Dial mode 129
Direct-dial digit 144
Directed pickup 141
DN
M trunk
Signal setting 129
Full
130
Held Line Reminder 139
delay 139
Host delay 148
Intercom buttons 137
Line Access1 34
Line pool access 137
Line pool access code 149
Link time 146
music on hold 142
On hold 142
OSI 148
Park prefix 140
Park timeout 141
Prime line 138
Prime telephone 133
Privacy 133
Modular DR5 Installer Guide
Received number 130
Received number length
154
ringing 136
saving changes 111, 160
Signal type 128, 129, 130
System Data 151
110
Transfer Callback delay 140
Transfer delay 140
Trunk Data 125
Trunk mode 127
Trunk type 126
using display buttons 115
Programming Record 110
Public line 131
Public network 2, 3, 18
Pulse signaling
programming 129
Radiated emissions 72
Radio frequency interference
29
Real Time Processor 161, 196
Recall tone
Cadence 75
Received number 130
length 130
changing 153
Mismatching 216, 222
programming 130
uniqueness 130
Relay contacts 65
Remote access 122
busy tone 223
cos 10
getting wrong tone 227
dialing fillters 10
12, 226
Index 269
getting wrong tone 226
misdialed calls 222
not getting through 224
Remote features
getting wrong tone 229
Security 10
troubleshooting 223
Remote Access Packages
programming 152,154
Remote feature access
Link time 146
Remote feature code
no response to 219
Remote filters 11
Repair
addresses 74
Replacing a device 163
Reset memory 96
Resonance 77
Restricted call 220
Result Codes 179
Ring back tone
Cadence 75
Ring splash
Cadence 75
Ringer (See Auxiliary Ringer)
Ringing 136
Electrical load required 72
RJ-21 interface 51
Interface
Wiring chart 83
Interface
wiring charts 89
S
SAPS 30
Security 2, 10
cos 10
Dialing filters 10
Service Modes
defaults 106
on target lines 16
Set abilities
defaults 104
Set Copy 155
Set filters 10
Set Profile
troubleshooting a network
199
Shock fragility 77
Signal
programming 128, 129, 130
Software Cartridge 41
Software incompatibility 161
Specifications
Environmental 76, 77
Loop power 76
Speed dial
Cannot be programmed 221
defaults 102
Startup
access code 95
Station. Module
disabling 172
Enabling 175
Hanging on mounting
brackets 35
Internal lines
wiring chart 85
number required 36
Physical dimensions 37
Status 170
troubleshooting 210
Status
Module 170
163
System Administration Log
190,198
Erasing 184
Modular
installer Guide
270 Index
:
overview 183
procedures 183
time of occurrence 184
‘System Administration Log
Alarm 184
System Data 151
copying 155
defaults 101
System Processor
196
System Speed Dial
defaults 102
System Test Log 190
Alarms 181
erasing 182
overview 180
procedures 180
time of occurrence 181
System Version
procedures 162
T
Target lines 117, 121
as Prime line 138
definition 4
line numbers 117
on non-expanded systems
153
reaching
instead 222
instead
reaching
223
received number 130
troubleshooting 222
Telephone
Alarm 145
changing DN 69
disabling 167
display unreadable 208
enabling 169
installation 55
Modular
Installer Guide
moving 68
no dial tone 214
prime 133
replacing 68
state 166
technical specifications 76
troubleshooting 207
User Cards 110
Version Number 166
wall-mounted 56
Temperature 29
Templates
changing 96
Test 100 (See Connectivity
test)
Tie lines 1, 19
Tones
cadences75
On Hold 142
Transfer Callback delay 140
Transporting a system 78
Troubleshooting
**Line 199
**Set 199
Alarm codes 185
Auxiliary ringer 235
236
Connectivity test result code
179
Diagnostics 176
Event messages 190
Expansion Cartridge 205
Feature Cartridge 204
Features 202
Hung lines 215
KSU 204
Module Status 170
Music 221
no dial tone 214
Optional Equipment 202
Index 271
Paging 237
163
Station Module 210
System Administration Log
183
System Test Log 180
Telephone 207
Trunk Cartridge 205
Trunk Module 209
Trunk Cartridges
1
disabling 167
E&Ml
Loop start 1
number required 36
troubleshooting 205
Trunk data
copying 124
programming 125
Trunk Module
disabling 172
enabling 175
hanging on mounting
brackets 35
number required 36
physical dimensions 37
Status 170
troubleshooting 209
Trunk type 126
programming options 126
Trunks
Auto-answer 4, 118
definition 4
DID 8, 120
120
line numbers 117
Loop Start 5, 119
manual-answer 118
U
Upgrading software 46
User Administration data
copying 155
Version number 166
Voltages
on E M leads 225
W
Wink Start 128, 129, 130
Wiring
Auxiliary ringer 63
Charts 82
Wiring chart
internal lines 84
Station Module Internal lines
85
Trunk Module with DID
Trunk 93
Trunk Module with
E
Trunk 89
Wiring requirements 30
Modular
Installer Guide
l
o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o a o o o o a o o a
Modular
System Coordinator Guide
telemanuals.com
1
Welcome to
1
2
2
2
3
3
6
11
System Coordinators role
Assisting your co-workers
Your Service Representative
Enhanced Transfer
Call Display services
Call Display Information
Call Log
Message Waiting
13
Programming
How to’do programming
Reviewing programmed settings
Planning
Programming tools
Administration overview
Administration headings
Entering Administration
Exiting Administration
Moving through Administration
Using the Overlay
The Nor-star display buttons
Programming details
System Speed Dial
Names
Time and date
Direct-Dial
Capabilities
Dialing Filters
Remote access packages
Telephone (Set) abilities
Line abilities
Class of Service (COS) passwords
Service Modes
Password
Log Defaults
Modular
I3
13
14
15
16
I6
I8
I8
19
20
21
22
24
28
31
34
35
35
39
40
47
48
51
55
56
System Coordinator Guide
ii Contents
Call Services
Auto Call info
Telephone (Set) Services
Voice Message Center telephone numbers
Voice Message Center lines
Copying settings
Line programming
Telephone programmin
Capabilities programming
Set Profile and Line Profile
Programming you can review
Using Set Profile
Using Line Profile
Programming reminders
telephones
Prime telephones
Central Answering Position
Page zones
Line Pools
Miscellaneous programming
Call Pickup Groups
Service Modes
Telephone features
Using
features
Answering the telephone
Related features
What line indicators mean
Rings you may hear
Displays
Prime telephone displays
Displays
Call Forward
Related features
Displays
Call Information
Related features
Displays
Modular DR5 System Coordinator Guide
telemanuals.com
58
58
59
60
60
61
61
61
61
62
63
65
66
67
68
69
69
70
70
70
72
73
74
77
78
79
79
80
82
85
85
88
88
89
91
92
92
telemanuals.com
Contents iii
93
98
98
102
Call Log
Related features
Displays
Call Park
Displays
Call Pickup
Displays
Call Queuing
Camp On
Related features
Displays
Conference
Related features
Displays
COS Password
Displays
Customizing your telephone
Related features
Dialing
Related features
Displays
Do Not Disturb
Displays
Feature Programming
Displays
Group Listen
Displays
102
104
104
107
108
108
108
110
112
112
115
115
116
122
123
124
125
128
128
129
Hold
Host System Signaling
Host system signaling codes
Displays
Line Pools
Displays
Line Redirection
Related features
Displays while redirecting lines
Displays while canceling redirection
Long Tones
Displays
Modular
132
132
133
135
137
137
139
140
140
142
142
142
145
147
System Coordinator Guide
.
telemanuals.com
iv Contents
Messages
Related features
Displays
Telephones
Buttons
Headset
Hearing Aid Compatibility
Wall Mounting
Page
Related features
Displays
Priority Call
Displays
Service Modes
Displays
Special Telephones
Speed Dial
Displays
System features
System Speed Dial
Time features
Displays
Transfer
Displays
Using
remotely
Examples
Accessing
remotely
remotely
Using
Tones you may hear
Controlling access to your
Voice Call
Displays
User cards
G l o s s a r y
Index
Modular DR5 System Coordinator Guide
148
150
system
154
154
156
157
157
158
158
158
160
160
162
162
164
168
169
172
176
177
177
178
179
182
182
182
183
184
185
187
188
189
In addition to basic telephone service, your
digital key
system has many extra features that will greatly improve your
off ice communications.
Please take the time to read this guide. It will help you to learn
the various tasks which a System Coordinator should perform.
This guide also serves as a reference when you assist
co-workers to become familiar with
features.
When a telephone system is first installed, it takes a bit of time to
minimizes this
settle into using new equipment.
orientation by providing straightforward features and simple
instructions.
System Coordinator’s role
The System Coordinator plays an important role in customizing
to suit the organization and updating information as the
office grows and changes.
can be customized at three levels:
Personal programming
Personal programming is done by individual telephone users
telephones by
who wish to personalize their
programming features and telephone numbers onto specific
memory buttons.
Administration programming
Administration programming is done by the System Coordinator,
when you want to change various system-wide settings, as well
as some specific settings for each line or telephone.
Configuration programming
Configuration programming is usually done for you by the
Installer or Service Representative when
is being
installed. Specific system-wide parameters are set up in
Configuration.
Modular DR5 System Coordinator Guide
2 Welcome to
Assisting your co-workers
It is human nature to ask someone how to do something rather
than read a user guide. The System Coordinator may be asked
to demonstrate to co-workers how to select and use
features. To help you prepare for that possibility:
Familiarize yourself with the procedures for using
system,
features. Examine the components of your
identifying the buttons on the different types of
telephones. Read the Telephone User Cards chapter of this
Guide for more information on each telephone.
Familiarize yourself with the various programming reminders
provided at the end of the Programming chapter of this
Guide. Distribute copies of these reminders to your
co-workers after filling in information such as System Speed
Dial numbers and names.
It is important for everyone in the office to know that you are the
System Coordinator and to know when you are available for
consultation. You may wish to schedule sessions for small
groups or provide individual assistance to co-workers for
programming features on their
telephones.
Your Service Representative
Ask your Service Representative for the service department’s
telephone number, and write it down. If you have problems with
equipment, telephone your Service Representative.
your
If you have problems with programming or using any of the
features, first read the appropriate section of this Guide and try
Representative.
again before calling your
Enhanced Transfer
There is a new procedure for using the Transfer feature in this
Modular system, be sure
system. If you are upgrading a
to familiarize yourself with the new procedure.
Modular DR5 System Coordinator Guide
Call Display services 3
Call Display services
Most public telephone companies offer Call Display services
which provide information about an incoming call. The caller’s
name, telephone number and in some cases, long distance
indication, can be shown on a telephone with a display. Your
DR5 system allows you to:
view incoming call information as well as the
name that receives the call,
line
keep a log of incoming call information and,
view an integrated display that appears when you have
received a message from either an internal
user or a
Voice Mail message from an external caller.
Note:
You can access Call Display information only if you
subscribe to the services offered by your public
telephone company, and if you have the appropriate
hardware installed. Contact your Service Representative
for more information.
Call Display Information
Call Display information may be shown on your telephone
display when you
incoming call. In addition to the
caller’s name, telephone number and long distance indicator, if
available, your
system can display the line name that
received the call.
In the case where several users share a line, only one telephone
can be designated to automatically receive Call Display
information when a call is alerting on that line. If the call is
transferred or camped to another telephone, the Call Display
information is automatically available to that telephone.
If a line is not administered to automatically deliver Call Display
information to a telephone, the user can invoke the Call
Information feature (see Telephone Features section) or answer
the call to view the information.
Modular DR5 System Coordinator Guide
4 Call Display services
Depending on your requirements, Call Display information
presents several convenient options.
When a caller is identified before the call is answered, you
can answer using a personal greeting. You can also prepare
yourself prior to answering the call by retrieving any relevant
documents, or otherwise orienting yourself to the expected
discussion.
The Long Distance indicator alerts you that an incoming call
is long distance and may therefore have higher priority.
If you are unable to immediately attend to an incoming call,
you can use the calling information to make a quick note.
You can shorten the interruption time of a call from a
recognized person. For
can quickly answer
the call and let the party know that you are busy but will
return the call soon.
A telephone can be programmed to first
the
caller’s name or number or line name. For example, an
attendant might wish to see the calling number and area
code first in order to transfer the call according to sales
region. The salesperson’s telephone could display the
caller’s name first so they can answer with a personal
greeting.
Call Display services 5
Call Display information allows you to answer calls on a
priority basis. For example:
. If several calls are alerting at your telephone at the same
time, you can request information about the calls to
decide which one may be more important.
If you are already on a call, information about a second
call starting to alert at your telephone can help you to
decide whether to answer the second call or remain
connected to the first call.
If you are in a meeting, the information associated with
an incoming call can help you determine if the call is
important enough to interrupt the meeting.
If you have several calls on hold and wish to identify the
callers, you can view the Call Display information .
associated with each of the calls to help you determine
which one you will respond to first.
Programming tips
In order for the designated telephone to automatically receive
Call Display information, it must be programmed to ring for
incoming calls on that line.
Before programming Call Display information you may wish to
consider the following:
which individual would benefit the most from automatically
receiving Call Display information on an alerting line?
how are calls routed and what information is the most
important to know before a call is answered? For instance, if
certain lines are private to individuals, an attendant might
wish to first view the line name to determine who the
incoming call is for.
Modular
System Coordinator Guide
6 Call Display services
Call Log
The
Call Log feature uses incoming Call Display
information to make a record of call details for follow-up. Call
Log also records several other useful facts such as the time and
date of the log entry, the number of repeated calls by the same
caller and which telephone answered the call if it was
subsequently rerouted and handled by someone else in the
system.
When the volume of incoming calls exceeds the ability of
employees to handle all calls, or when staff are unavailable to
answer calls, Call Log provides a convenient means of capturing
information about missed calls.
When connected to a call that has Call Display information, the
feature of Call Log can be used to provide a quick and
accurate means of recording the caller’s information for future
use (see Telephone Features for more information).
Programming tips
Call Log space can be assigned to individual telephones
according to how much space you wish to allocate to each user.
You can also assign all or most Call Log space to a central
answering position. For example:
In order to maximize the value of Call Logs and avoid confusion
for the end user and their customers, it is important to consider
the following when configuring Call Log:
Application of Call Log
Does the user want to return customer calls, track the
numbers of calls unanswered, keep a record of most
commonly called numbers, etc.?
Who is most interested in logging calls on a particular line?
For instance, dentists working in a clinic may have an
individual line assigned to them but prefer that the
receptionist handle all of the calls logged on their line.
Modular DR5 System Coordinator Guide
Call Display services 7
We strongly recommend that you limit the number of users
logging calls for the same line, as this would be confusing. For
example, if two users are logging calls for the same line, they do
not know who the call was originally intended for nor are both
Call Logs updated when one of the users returns a customer’s
call. Potentially a customer could be called back twice.
There are few situations where the same call needs to be logged
at more than one set.
Recommended configuration 1
The Central Answering Position (CAP) has all lines appearing at
the CAP set. Incoming calls are first answered on the CAP set
and then transferred to the required destination.
The Attendant wants to track all calls unanswered on the system,
during working hours and after hours. The users want to capture
in their Call Log, any calls which they did not answer at their set
and be able to return those calls from the log.
The CAP position logs No
answered on all lines and the
users log calls Unanswered
In this configuration the
user will log calls transferred to them via intercom (l/C) from the
attendant or another user, even though the administration setting
is
N). Thus the entries in their Call Log are
specifically meant for them.
Modular
System Coordinator Guide
8 Call Display services
Call Logs with a Central Answering Position
Programming:
CAP Position
Configuration:
Line Access
Line Assignment
(all lines to appear
at the CAP)
Ringing
Administration:
Log Defaults
(assign log space
to all sets for example, 25.)
Set Services
Set: Y
Set Programming:
[Feature] q
(No one answered)
Set Users
Administration:
Set Services
N (no lines assigned)
Set Programming:
Modular
System Coordinator Guide
Call Display services 9
Recommended configuration 2
Each
user has a unique line appearing at their set. The
users have a variety of requirements in terms of logging calls.
Using
q the users can program logging
capabilities specifically for their sets.
Call Logs with dedicated lines
Programming:
Configuration:
Line Access
Line Assignment
Ringing
Administration:
Log Defaults
Set Services
Set:
Set Programming:
(No one
No
Unanswered
me, Lo9 all Calls,
Modular DR5 System Coordinator Guide
Call Display services
Recommended configuration 3
The
system has lines 1 and 2 appearing on all sets. The
supervisor wants to log all calls for lines 1 and 2 at his/her set in
order to analyze call traffic. Two users have been selected to
return unanswered customer calls. To avoid confusion when
logging and sharing lines, one user logs No
answered
calls on line 1 and a second user logs No
a n s w e r e d calls
on line 2. This clearly identifies who is responsible for returning
calls for each line and ensures that only one person calls the
customer back.
Call Logs with shared lines
Programming:
Configuration:
Line Access
Line assignment
Ringing
Administration:
Log Defaults
Set Services
S h o w Set: 21 (supervisor’s set)
Lines
Show
Y
22
Set: Line
Show Set: 23
Set: Line
Modular DR5 System Coordinator Guide
Y
Y
Call Display services 11
Set programming:
Set21 (Feature]
Set 22 and 23
Los
Call5
No
answered
Note: For more information, see the Call Log Feature Card.
Message Waiting
Message feature allows you to send and receive internal
messages as well as maintain a record of your messages. If you
have subscribed to Voice Mail Messaging (provided by your
public telephone company), and visual message waiting
indication is defined at your set, Message Waiting also informs
you if you have messages at your Voice Message Center and
allows you to:
receive a visual indication that you have messages waiting,
call your Voice Message Center to hear your messages and,
clear the message waiting indication from your display.
Programming tips
In order for a telephone to use this feature, it must have a line
appearance and Message Waiting must be activated for that line
by your public telephone company.
It is possible for two or more telephones to share a line
appearance. You must determine if one, some or all of the users
sharing a line will receive Message Waiting notification. If it is a
sub-group, such as a sales team within a company, it may be
appropriate to share the feature providing that the users have an
agreed upon procedure for retrieving and deleting messages.
For further information on Call Information, Call Log and
Messages, see the Telephone features section. Programming
actions are described in further detail in the Programming
section.
Modular DR5 System Coordinator Guide
12 Call Display services
Modular
System Coordinator Guide
The system comes programmed with default settings that may be
sufficient initially. Administration programming is performed by
the System Coordinator, and lets you change settings that
probably have to be updated regularly because of staff turnover
or new business contacts. You can also assign some features to
individual lines and telephones. This provides you with real
flexibility in making your telephones work together.
This chapter contains detailed procedures for programming
System Speed Dial codes, Names for lines and telephones, and
Time and Date information. If you are new to Administration
programming, you may want to get comfortable with these three
procedures before attempting other procedures.
Personal programming does not follow the same procedures as
Administration programming. Personal programming allows you
to assign a particular function to some of the keys, and is unique
to each telephone.
more information on Personal
programming, see the Feature programming description in the
Telephone features chapter.
How to do programming
The system is programmed using a M7324 or M7310 Telephone.
Use the buttons on the telephone to program a setting or to
request a specific programming action.
guides you step by step on the telephone display while
you enter programming, select and change what you want, and
exit programming.
Reviewing programmed settings
The Set Profile and Line Profile features help you to check your
programming by allowing you to review the settings. For more
information, see the Telephone features chapter.
Modular DR5 System Coordinator Guide
telemanuals.com
14 Programming
Planning
Only one
telephone can access Administration
programming at a time. While programming a telephone, you
cannot use it to make or receive calls. While you are
programming, other users of the
system may use their
telephones, but cannot program any memory keys.
Determine programming requirements
Read about the available programming settings in this chapter,
then determine how your co-workers would like the features
programmed.
Get the following information:
the numbers of the installed lines
the internal telephone numbers of installed
telephones
the telephone numbers to be programmed into System
Speed Dial
the names for lines and telephones
the lines and internal numbers that are subject to Line
abilities and Set abilities programming
the required Filters and Remote access packages
the Set Abilities to be assigned to individual telephones
how the system should be programmed to optimize the
Service Modes feature
whether a new Administration password is required
whether Class of Service passwords are required.
Modular
System Coordinator Guide
Programming 15
Programming tools
A
telephone
System. programming can only be performed on an M7310 or
M7324 Telephone.
The
Programming Overlay
The
Programming Overlay is a paper cutout that labels
telephone buttons used during programming. This makes it
easier for you to recognize the button that you want. The
Programming Overlay is provided at the end of this book.
Programming Overlay
The
Modular DR5 Programming Record
The
Modular
Programming Record provides a
convenient way to record what you have programmed. It also
helps you to plan your programming. Settings are grouped
according to their function.
Pages from the Record may be photocopied as necessary for
programming many telephones or lines.
The
Telephone User Cards
Each
telephone has a
Telephone User Card that
lists the most commonly used features.
The
Modular DR5 Telephone Feature Card
The
Modular DR5 Telephone Feature Card lists the
features that can be accessed with the
button.
Modular
System Coordinator Guide
telemanuals.com
telemanuals.com
16 Administration overview
Administration overview
Administration programming lets you change settings for the
system, as well as settings for individual
entire
telephones and external lines.
Pre-programmed default settings may initially be sufficient for
your needs. You can use Administration programming to
customize your
system by changing these default
settings. In this section, default options are shown in bold type.
The defaults correspond to those assigned during
installation. The option you see while programming may be
different if that setting has been changed. If the display shows a
line number or internal number during programming, an example
is shown in the Administration procedures.
The default
installed
internal numbers may vary depending on the
system. The defaults are:
two-digit internal numbers (beginning at 21) for
non-expanded
systems
three-digit internal numbers (beginning at 221) for expanded
systems.
Administration headings
Headings and subheadings in Administration programming help
you to keep track of where you are. An example of a heading is
dial for programming System Speed Dial. When
digits is
you program a System Speed Dial number,
displayed as a subheading.
Modular DR5 System Coordinator Guide
telemanuals.com
Administration overview 17
Administration programming has nine headings:
ADMINISTRATION CODE
dial
System Speed Dial assigns a two-digit
code (01-70) for fast dialing of up to 70
telephone numbers from any
telephone.
Names
Names identifies external lines and
telephones by name.
Time and date
Time and Date adjusts the time and
date displayed on each
.
telephone.
Direct-Dial
Direct-Dial designates the telephones
that can be reached by dialing a single
digit.
Capabilities
Capabilities defines dialing filters,
remote access packages, line abilities
and telephone abilities. It assigns
restrictions and capabilities to Class of
Service (COS) passwords, to
telephones, to lines and to
line/telephone combinations.
Modes
Password
Service Modes controls how the
system responds to calls,
depending on the time of day.
Password changes the password that
controls access to Administration
programming.
(8. Los Defaults
Log Defaults reallocates the Call Log
space for all telephones in the system.
9. Call Services
Call Services customizes the use of
Call Display information at your
telephone.
Modular
System Coordinator Guide
telemanuals.com
18 Administration overview
Entering Administration
When your system is first installed, there is no password stored
system. You are not prompted to enter a password
in the
as you enter Administration for the first time unless your
Customer Service representative has already programmed one
for your system.
To Enter Administration:
1.
Release all calls on your telephone.
2.
Enter the Administration access code:
[Feature]
which is also
3.
If the display changes to Password: , enter the
Administration password. (The password is not shown on the
display as you enter it.)
If the password is correct, the display shows
dial, and three triangular indicators
shown on the vertical display.
are
If the password is incorrect, the display does not change.
Check the password. Press
and re-enter the
password.
4.
Place the
Overlay over the buttons
pointed to by the three triangular indicators,
Exiting Administration
stores your changes automatically as soon as you alter
any settings; you do not need to “save” your changes.
1. Press
The display briefly shows End of
Modular DR5 System Coordinator Guide
Administration overview 19
Moving through Administration
To program a setting, you must first locate the correct heading.
To do this, scan through the headings of Administration using the
and (Back] buttons.
To move through Administration headings:
After entering Administration, the display shows
dial.
1. Press
The display shows
Names.
2. P r e s s ( N e x t ] .
The display shows
Time and
3. Press
The display shows 4.
4. Press
The display shows 5. Capabilities.
5. Press
The display shows
Service
6. Press
The display shows 7. Password.
7. P r e s s ( N e x t ] .
The display shows 8. Lo9 Defaults.
8. Press
The display shows 9. Call Services.
9. Press
The display shows
dial.
Modular DR5 System Coordinator Guide
20 Administration overview
Using the Overlay
The indicators show which buttons can be used at that
programming step.. The functions on these buttons allow you to
move through the headings and subheadings of
programming.
moves up in the hierarchy of headings and
subheadings.
moves down in the hierarchy of headings and
subheadings, or to begin programming settings
under a heading or subheading.
moves to the next heading, subheading, or
programmable setting.
moves to the previous heading, subheading, or
programmable setting.
The
Programming Overlay is located inside the back
cover of this Guide.
M7310 Telephone with
a
Programming
Overlay
Modular
M7324 Telephone with
a
Programming
Overlav
System Coordinator Guide
Administration overview 21
The
display buttons
Display buttons perform many functions. Depending on where
you are in programming, one, two, or three display buttons may
be available at any one time. Press one of the display buttons to
select the function that you want.
Display button
The most common display button labels are:
changes a programmable setting.
BKSP
moves the cursor one space backward (backspace)
and delete a character, allowing you to re-enter a
number or letter.
.
copies
or telephone programming.
shows the last part of a displayed message longer
than 16 characters.
shows the first part of a displayed message longer
than 16 characters.
moves the cursor one position to the right when
programming a name.
- -
moves the cursor one position to the left when
programming a name.
22 Administration overview
Programming details
Entering numbers
Numbers are entered from the
telephone dial pad. The
display button may be used to edit the number.
Line numbers must always be entered as a three-digit number.
Line numbers from 10 to 99 must be entered with a leading zero
(line 020, for example). Similarly, line numbers less than 10 must
be entered with two leading zeros (line 002, for example).
Internal telephone numbers, also referred to as Directory
Numbers
can be two- to seven-digits long on a
non-expanded system, and three- to seven-digits long on an
expanded system. The default DN length is two on a
non-expanded system and three on an expanded system. The
DN length can be changed by your Customer Service
representative.
Viewing long telephone numbers
External telephone numbers can be up to 24 digits, but the
telephone display is only 16 character spaces long. If you wish to
see a previously programmed number that is longer than 16
digits, you must do the following:
Begin, for example, with
The display shows only the first 15 digits. The three dots
at
the end of the display indicate that more digits remain to be
displayed for the external number.
1. To see the remaining digits, press
2. To see the first 15 digits again, press
Modular
System Coordinator Guide
Administration overview 23
Entering names
Letters and numbers can be entered as part of a name for
various settings. The method of entering a name is always the
same.
Begin with a setting that prompts you to enter a name. The
display shows a cursor ( ) to indicate where you can enter the
next character. To enter a name:
1.
Press the button on the dial pad with the printed letter or
number that you want.
Each time that you press the button, a new character is
shown on the display. For example, the button for the
number 3 has the letters D, E, and F, where:
D is shown after the first press
E is shown after the second press
F is shown after the third press
3 is shown after the fourth press
D is shown again after the fifth press.
(Letters are always shown in upper case.)
2.
When the character that you want is displayed,
or to
the cursor to the next character
press
position.
OR
If you want to correct a character entered by mistake,
press
or
until the cursor is positioned beneath the
character that you want to correct.
OR
If you want to move the cursor back and delete a character,
press
3.
Repeat step 1 for the remaining characters.
Modular DR5 System Coordinator Guide
24 System Speed Dial
System Speed Dial
The System Speed Dial programming section allows you to set
the Speed Dial codes for external telephone numbers which the
people in your office use most often. Use the Personal Speed
Dial feature to program numbers used by only one or two people.
ADMINISTRATIONCODE
speed dial
Speed Dial number
Line selection
Display digits
3. Time and date
Speed Dial name
Bypass restriction
Direct-Dial
Capabilities
Defaults
Call
You can program 70 System Speed Dial codes ranging from
to
Modular DR5 System Coordinator Guide
System Speed Dial 25
System Speed Dial Number
System Speed Dial Number lets you assign a System Speed Dial
telephone number to a two-digit code. The System Speed Dial
Number may contain 24 digits.
Begin with the display showing 1.
1. Press
The display shows
2.
dial .
dial
Select the Speed Dial code you want to program:
Press until the display shows the correct code.
OR
Enter the Speed Dial code on the dial pad.
3. Press (Show].
Note:
To assign default settings, press
and then
to go to the next Speed Dial code.
press
4. Press
For example, the display may show
5 . Enter the new telephone number from the dial pad , including
or an area code that must be
all digits such as an initial
dialed to call the number manually. If you need to backspace
the cursor, press the
display button.
For example, press
(5
The display shows 5551234,.
6.
Press
to store the System Speed Dial number.
Programming hints
A Host System Signaling feature code may be inserted into the
System Speed Dial number. Pause and Run/Stop each use one
character position; and Link, Timed Release, and Programmed
Release each use two positions.
For more information on using the features in System Speed Dial
programming, see the Host System Signaling section in
Telephone features.
Modular DR5 System Coordinator Guide
26 System Speed Dial
Line Selection
Line Selection allows you to specify the external line that is used
for a System Speed Dial number. The options are the Prime
line, an external line, or a line pool.
After you have programmed a System Speed Dial number, press
and the display shows:
Use Prime 1
OR
Use 1
882, for example, if a line is already assigned
OR
code: 42, for example, if a line pool access code is
already assigned.
1. To change the setting, press
the option to be programmed.
2.
until the display shows
If you select a line number or a line pool access code, enter
the digits from the dial pad. A line pool access code can be
from one to four digits long.
Display Digits
Display Digits determines whether the telephone number is
displayed when a System Speed Dial number is used, or whether
a name associated with that number is displayed.
After you have programmed a line selection for a System Speed
Dial number, press
and the display shows
1.
Modular
Press
and N (No).
to change the setting. Options are Y (Yes)
System Coordinator Guide
System Speed Dial 27
System Speed Dial Name
System Speed Dial Name allows you to assign a name to the
stored System Speed Dial number. When the Display Digits
setting is “No”, the programmed name is shown on the
display when the System Speed Dial feature is used.
The name can be up to 16 characters long. The default name is
the System Speed Dial number; for example,
Dial
System Speed Dial code 02.
After programming Display Digits to “No”, press
the display shows Name.
1.
and
Press
The display shows the assigned or default name.
2. Press
3.
Enter the first character of the name by pressing the
appropriate dial pad button one, two, three, or four times. For
more information, see the section in this chapter entitled
Entering names.
4. To move the cursor to the next position, press
Continue entering characters.
Programming hints
You can program System Speed Dial Name only if Display Digits
is set to No.
Bypass Restrictions
Bypass Restrictions allows the System Speed Dial number to
bypass any restrictions in applied Dialing filters. Dialing filters are
programmed in the Capabilities section of Administration
programming.
After programming the System Speed Dial Name, press
and the display shows
N.
1.
Press
to change the setting. Options are N (No),
and Y (Yes).
Modular DR5 System Coordinator Guide
28 Names
Names
You can assign names to identify external lines, target lines and
your co-workers’ telephones. During a call, the name (if
programmed) is shown on the telephone display instead of the
external line number or internal telephone number of the caller.
Password:
speed dial
2. Names
Telephone names
Line names
14. Direct-Dial
5. Capabilities
8 .
9. Call Seruices
Programming hints
Telephone names and line names can contain both letters and
numbers, but cannot be longer than seven characters. The # and
* symbols cannot be used.
You can give the same name to two or more telephones, or to a
telephone and a line in your system. To avoid confusion, you
should avoid such duplication. Use initials, abbreviations, or even
nicknames to give each telephone a unique name.
Two lines cannot have the same name. If you enter a line name
which has already been used, you hear an error tone, and the
display shows Use unique name.
Modular DR5 System Coordinator Guide
Names 29
Telephone Names
Personalize your office communication by assigning names to
the telephones in the
system. A telephone’s default name
is its internal number, for example, 227.
Begin with the display showing 1.
dial.
1. Press [Next].
The display shows 2. Names.
2.
Press (Show] twice.
The display shows Show
3.
Enter the internal number of the telephone.
OR
Press
for the name of the telephone with the first
internal number.
4. Press CHRNQE.
The name is removed from the display, and a cursor is
shown.
5.
the first character of the name by pressing the
appropriate dial pad button one, two, three, or four times. For
more information, see the section in this chapter entitled
Entering names.
Note:
Press
to restore the default name and go
to the next internal number.
to move the cursor to the next position.
Continue entering characters.
6. P r e s s
Programming hints
If Automatic Telephone Relocation is turned ON, the name and
internal number of a telephone are saved if the telephone is
moved within your system.
Modular DR5 System Coordinator Guide
30 Names
Line Names
Line Names allows you to assign a name to an external line. The
default name is the line number, for example,
Begin with the display showing
dial .
1. Press
The display shows 2. Names.
2. Press
The display shows
3. Press [Next].
The display shows Line
4.
Press [Show].
The display shows Show 1
5.
Enter the line number from the dial pad.
OR
Press [Next] to program the name of line 001.
6. Press
The name is removed from the display, and a cursor is
shown.
7.
Enter the first character of the name by pressing the
dial pad button one, two, three, or four times. For
more information, see the section in this chapter entitled
Entering names.
Press
to restore the default name and go
to the next external line.
to move the cursor to the next position.
Continue entering characters.
8. Press
Modular DR5 System Coordinator Guide
Time and date 31
Time and date
Time and date programming allows you to set the time and date
which is shown on the display when a telephone is not in use. As
with any clock, this needs to be done every time that your office
has a power failure.
ADMINISTRATION CODE
Changing the time and date is easy, but there are a couple of
things to remember:
All times and dates must be entered using numerals. For
example, February would be entered as “2”.
The time may be entered in either 12 or
format. If the
display is in English, and the hour entered is less than
thirteen, the display prompts you to specify “am” or
The year is not shown on the telephone display, but make
sure that it is set correctly.
is programmed to allow
for leap years.
Modular
System Coordinator Guide
32 Time and date
English language displays always show the time in
format, while the alternate language displays always use the
24-hour format.
Setting the time
Begin with the display showing
1. Press
twice.
The display shows
dial .
and date.
2. Press [Show].
The display shows the time, for example, Time
3. Press
The display shows the hour, for example, Hour:
4. Set the hour.
a. Press
A cursor replaces the number on the display.
b.
Enter the hour using the dial pad.
For example, press
c. Press
The display shows the minutes, for example,
Minutes:
5. Set the minutes.
a. Press
A cursor replaces the number on the display.
b.
Enter the minutes using the dial pad.
For example, press
c. Press
If the hour entered in step 5 is less than thirteen, the
display shows .
6. To switch the message to
press
To switch it back to , press
Modular DR5 System Coordinator Guide
again.
Time and date
Setting the date
Begin with the display showing 1.
33
dial.
1.
Press [Next] twice.
3. Time and date.
The display
2.
Press [ S h o w ] .
The display shows the time, for example, Time 81:
3.
Press
.
The display shows the date, for example, Date 31 Mar 91.
4.
Press
5.
Set the year.
The display shows Year: 88.
a. Press
A cursor replaces the number on the display.
b.
Enter the year using the dial pad.
For example, press
to enter the year 1990.
c. Press (Next].
The display shows the month, for example
6.
81.
Set the month.
a. Press
A cursor replaces the number on the display.
b.
Enter the month using the dial pad.
For example, press
(2 to enter February.
c. Press [Next].
The display shows the day, for example Dar: 61.
7.
Set the date.
a. Press
A cursor replaces the number on the display.
b.
Enter the date using the dial pad.
For example, press
Modular
System Coordinator Guide
34
Direct-Dial
Direct-Dial
Direct-Dial programming allows you to call the Direct-Dial
telephone assigned to your telephone by dialing a single digit. Up
to five Direct-Dial telephones can be designated to handle calls
from five groups of telephones. Use this Administration heading
to specify which telephone directory numbers
are
designated as Direct-Dial telephones.
Lo9 D
efaults
9. Call Services
Use the
button, the
display button and the
dial pad to enter the internal number of the telephone to be
designated as the Direct-Dial telephone.
Programming hints
To complete Direct-Dial telephone programming, assign a
Direct-Dial telephone to each telephone in the system using the
Capabilities section of Administration programming.
The digit you dial in order to get the Direct-Dial telephone to ring
can be programmed by your Customer Service representative.
Modular DR5 System Coordinator Guide
Capabilities 35
Capabilities
Capabilities programming assigns restrictions, exceptions, and
remote access capabilities to Class of Service (COS) passwords,
telephones, and lines.
ADMINISTRATIONCODE
t
Password:
t
speed dial
2. Names
3. Tine and date
t
4. Direct-Dial
5. Capabilities
Remote access
t
6.
Dialing filters
Bodes
7. Password
t
Telephone abilities
Line abilities
Class of Service
t
9. Call Services
Dialing Filters
A dialing filter is made up of restrictions and exceptions. These
specify the external numbers which can or cannot be dialed from
a telephone or on a line.
After dialing filters are defined, they may be used as telephone
(set) filters, line filters and line/set filters to manage outgoing
calls, and as remote filters applied to lines. Remote access
packages control the numbers that can be dialed by remote
users when they are calling into
to use a
line for
placing calls.
Modular
System Coordinator Guide
36 Capabilities
Use the
button, the
display button, the dial pad,
and the display button to program the restrictions and
exceptions for each dialing filter.
For example
You may need filters for three different, types of users:
Managers may require unrestricted dialing.
Secretaries may need to be limited to calls on line 003 to the
West coast office only.
Clerks may need to be limited to calling specific area codes
and the West coast office.
Internal users
Dialing filters are most commonly used to prevent unauthorized
long-distance calls, without restricting local calls. Dialing filters
restrict the numbers that an internal user can dial on external
lines.
If a line/set filter has been defined for the line selected at the
user’s telephone, it overrides any line filters or telephone filters
which might otherwise apply.
If no line/set filters have been defined, dialed digits are filtered
through (and may be rejected by either of) the telephone filter (if
defined) and the line filter (if defined).
External users
For a remote user,.who has dialed into
on an
auto-answer line (or a DID line), and passed through any
security, there are no restrictions on the numbers the user can
dial.
For remote users trying to tandem through the
system,
the Line filters and Remote filters assigned in Line abilities apply.
For a remote user entering the system through DISA, the filters
and Remote access packages associated with their COS
password replace the Remote filter, the Line filter, and the
Remote access package assigned to the incoming line.
Modular DR5 System Coordinator Guide
Capabilities 37
Programming hints
can have up to 100 dialing filters (00 to 99).
Filter 00 cannot be changed.
Each programmable filter can have up to 48 restrictions;
there is no limit on the number of exceptions that can be
allocated to any restriction.
There is a maximum of 600 restrictions and exceptions
allocated to the 99 programmable filters. For example, notice
the reduction in the number of available restrictions and
exceptions after each filter has been programmed.
User
Filter
Remaining
Rest’s
00
manager
-
01
secretary
5
5
590
02
clerk
7
12
571
12
17
(600-12-17
Total
-
-
-
600
.
The maximum iength for a restriction is 15 digits; for an
exception, the maximum is 16 digits.
The asterisk * is a “wild card” that stands for any digit.
Any restriction or exception can be used in any number of
filters. Each time it is used, it counts as one entry. For
example, if restriction 411 exists in filters 01, 02 and 03 it
uses up three entries of the 600 entries available.
Removing a restriction also removes the exceptions
associated with it, and changes the identifying number of the
restriction. For example, removal of restriction 01 renumbers
restrictions 01 to 48 as 01 to 47.
The removal of a restriction from one dialing filter
has no effect on the contents of other filters into
which the restriction was copied.
Modular
System Coordinator Guide
38 Capabilities
You cannot delete a filter. Removing the restrictions
programmed on a filter makes it an unrestricted filter but the
filter is not removed.
Filter descriptions
Filter 00 permits unrestricted dialing, and cannot be changed.
Filter 01 is pre-programmed with five restrictions and some
associated exceptions.
Template
Square, Hybrid, PBX
Filter
Restrict’s
00
Unrestricted dialing
01
0
02-99
Except’s
Restrict’s
Except’s
90
1
1800
1555
91
91800
91555
911
911
9911
9911
411
9411
976
9976
None
Filters 02, 03, and 04, although not
with restrictions
and exceptions, are the default filter settings used later in
programming:
Filter
Where the filter is programmed as a default
setting in Capabilities programming
02
Set abilities
Set filter:
03
Line abil
Line filter:
04
Line abilities
Modular DR5 System Coordinator Guide
filter:
Capabilities 39
Remote access packages
Remote access packages allow you to control the remote use of
line pools and the Remote Page feature.
Remote access packages are associated with COS passwords
and the auto-answer lines used by remote users.
Remote access packages default template
Parameter
Square
Hybrid
PBX
Prohibits access to line pools and Remote
Page. Cannot be changed.
Package 01
Line Pool access
Y for Pool A
N for Pools to 0
Remote Page
No
Packages 02 15
Line Pool access
N for Pools A to 0
Remote Page
No
Remote package 00 is the default setting for the Remote
package setting.
Use the
button and the dial pad to select the Remote
Access package you want to program. Then, use the
display button to select the line pool access setting: N (No) or
Y (Yes). .
Note: The Line Pool access display shows an alphabetic line
pool identifier, followed by a numeric line
code in brackets, for example, Pool
N. If no
access code has been identified, there is nothing
between the brackets, for example
N. The
line pool access code can be programmed by your
Customer Service representative.
Use the
display button to select the Remote Page
setting: N (No) or Y (Yes).
Modular DR5 System Coordinator Guide
40 Capabilities
Programming hints
systems can have up to 16 Remote access packages (00
‘to 15). The limitations are:
Package 00 permits no access to line pools or to remote
paging. Unlike packages 01 to 15, package 00 cannot be
changed.
For remote users calling into the
system’to use
lines for calling out, the Remote dialing filters and the
outgoing Line dialing filters (in Line abil
still apply.
Telephone (Set) abilities
Telephone (Set) abilities programming applies dialing filters and
permissions to telephones. Telephone abilities include:
Telephone (set) filters
Auxiliary Ringer .
Line/telephone filters
Direct-dial telephones
Telephone Administration Lock
Call Forward On Busy
Full Handsfree
Call Forward No Answer
Automatic Handsfree
Allow Redirect
Handsfree Answerback
Redirect ring
Call Pickup Group
Hotline
Paging
Priority Call
Page zone
Telephone (Set) filter
A Telephone filter is a collection of restrictions and exceptions
defined in Dialing filters. These filters are applied to telephones
through Set filter programming.
Telephone filters do not apply to calls dialed out on E&M trunks.
Capabilities 41
Use the
button, the
display button and the
dial pad to enter the number of the Dialing filter to be assigned as
the Telephone filter. The default telephone filter is 02.
Line/telephone (Line/set) filter
A Line/telephone dialing filter is applied to the appearance of a
line at a specific telephone. This type of filter replaces any Line
or Telephone filters which might otherwise apply.
Line/set filters control the numbers that may be dialed on specific
external lines from specific telephones.
For example, a Line/set filter can permit a call to a specific
long-distance number on line 003 from a specific telephone, but
no other long-distance numbers, and on no other line.
Use the
button, the
display button and the
dial pad to enter the number of the Dialing filter to be assigned as
the Line/telephone filter.
Programming hints
Up to 100 filters may be defined in the system (filters 00 to
99). Line/set filters fall under this limitation.
A maximum of 255 Line/set dialing filters may be applied to
lines at telephones.
Modular
System Coordinator Guide
42
Capabilities
Telephone Administration Lock
Telephone Administration Lock limits the types of features that
may be used or programmed at a telephone. Use the
display button to select one of the three options: None, Partial
and Full.
None allows you to access any feature on your telephone.
Partial prevents:
programming
buttons
programming Personal Speed
l
l
l
changing Dialing Modes
(Automatic Dial, Pre-Dial, and
Standard Dial)
Dial numbers
l
l
l
programming feature buttons
moving line buttons
changing the display
language
using Voice Call Deny
l
using Administration
programming
l
saving a number with Saved
Number Redial
l
Full, in addition to the restrictions outlined for Partial lock,
prevents:
l
l
l
changing Background Music
changing Privacy
changing Do Not Disturb
. using Ring Again
using Call Forward all calls
l
l
using Send Message
l
using Trunk Answer
l
activating Service Modes
Full Handsfree
Full Handsfree allows you to make or receive calls without
picking up the receiver, and allows a headset to be used with the
telephone. Use the
display button to select the
setting: N (No) or Y (Yes).
Programming hints
A
button is automatically assigned to a telephone that
is programmed with Full Handsfree. Full Handsfree is always
disabled for an
Telephone.
Modular DR5 System Coordinator Guide
Capabilities 43
Automatic Handsfree
Automatic Handsfree activates the Handsfree microphone and
speaker when you make or receive calls by pressing a line
button. Use the
display button to select the setting:
N (No) or Y (Yes).
Programming hints
You can program Automatic Handsfree only if the telephone has
Full Handsfree set to Yes.
Handsfree Answerback
Handsfree Answerback allows you to answer a Voice Call without
lifting the receiver. Use the
display button to select the
setting: Y (Yes) or N (No).
Programming hints
Handsfree Answerback is always disabled for an
Telephone.
Call Pickup (Group)
Each telephone can be assigned to one of up to nine Call Pickup
groups. Members of a Call Pickup group can answer any calls
ringing at a telephone in the group. Use the
display
button to select the setting: NO, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, or 9.
Programming hints
You cannot pick up a call that is on a Private line, or a call that is
ringing only the Auxiliary Ringer.
Paging
This setting determines whether a telephone has access to the
Page feature. Use the
display button to select the
setting: Y (Yes) or N (No).
Page zone
Each telephone can be assigned to one of six zones for receiving
Page messages. A zone is any selection of
telephones
of location. Use the
you want to group together,
display button to select the setting: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6,
or NO.
Modular
System Coordinator Guide
44 Capabilities
Programming hints
You can program Page zone only if the telephone has Paging set
to Yes:
Auxiliary Ringer
This setting causes the Auxiliary Ringer (if installed) to ring when
the telephone rings. An Auxiliary Ringer is important in noisy
telephone might otherwise not be
environments where a
heard. Use the
display button to select the setting:
N (No) or Y (Yes).
Direct-Dial telephones
A telephone can be assigned to call a Direct-Dial telephone when
you dial a single digit. Use the
display button to select
and None.
.
the setting: Setl, Set2, Set3, Set4,
Programming hints
Each telephone can call only one Direct-Dial telephone, although
up to five Direct-Dial telephones can be designated in the
Direct-Dial section of Administration programming. Any number
of telephones can be assigned to call a particular Direct-Dial
telephone.
The digit you dial in order to get the Direct-Dial telephone to ring
can be programmed by your Customer Service representative.
Call Forward On Busy
Call Forward On Busy redirects an incoming call to another
telephone on your
system when you are busy on a call,
or when you have Do Not Disturb activated at your telephone.
Use the
button, the
display button, and the
dial pad to program the internal number of the telephone that
your calls are to be directed to.
Modular DR5 System Coordinator Guide
Capabilities 45
Programming hints
Call Forward on Busy programming is ignored in the following
situations:
If you are busy on a target line call, another call to that target
line is redirected to the Prime telephone for the trunk that
received the second target line call.
If Line Redirection is in effect, it takes precedence.
Call Forward No Answer
Call Forward No Answer lets you redirect an incoming call to
another telephone on your
system when the call is not
answered at your telephone.
Use the
button, the
display
the
dial pad to program the internal number of the telephone that
your calls are to be directed to.
Programming hints
Line Redirection takes precedence over Call Forward No
Answer.
Forward No Answer delay
If you assign another telephone to receive your calls, you can
also assign the number of times that the incoming call rings
before the call is forwarded. To estimate the delay time in
seconds, multiply the number of rings by six. Use the
display button to select the setting: 2, 3, 4, 6, or 10 rings.
Allow Redirect
Allow Redirect enables you to use the Line Redirection feature.
Use the
display button to select the setting: Y (Yes) or
N (No).
See the explanation of Line Redirection in the Telephone’
Features chapter for more information on redirecting lines.
Modular
System Coordinator Guide
46 Capabilities
Redirect ring
The Redirect ring setting causes a telephone to ring briefly (a
200 millisecond burst) when a call is redirected on one of its
lines. Each telephone with a ringing appearance of that line also
rings briefly for the redirected call if the Redirect ring setting for
them is ‘Y’ (the default). Use the
display button to select
the setting: Y (Yes) or N
A user enters the Line Redirection feature code to redirect calls.
See the explanation of Line Redirection in the Telephone
Features chapter for more information on redirecting lines.
Hotline
Hotline automatically calls a pre-assigned number when you lift
the receiver or press
at your telephone. Hotline has
three options: None, internal
), and external
Internal assigns an internal number.
External assigns an external number. If you select an external
number, you can also select the line on which the call is made:
the Prime line, an external line, or a line pool. You will have to
specify the Line Pool Access code for a line pool.
Use the
display button to select Hotline setting. If you
select
, use the
button, the
display
button, and the dial pad to program the internal number of the
telephone that Hotline calls are to be directed to.
If you select
, use the
button, the
display button, and the dial pad to program the external
telephone number that Hotline calls are to be directed to, and to
program the line Hotline calls are to be made on.
Programming hints
The telephone should be labeled to inform anyone using it that
Hotline is active.
A telephone’s Prime line, line pool access codes, and access to a
line pool can be programmed by your Customer Service
representative.
Modular DR5 System Coordinator Guide
Capabilities 47
Priority Call
This feature lets you call from your
telephone and
interrupt calls or override Do Not Disturb on another
telephone. Use the
display button to select the setting:
N (No) or Y (Yes).
Programming hints
Apply this feature only to telephones from which such
interruptions can be justified.
Line abilities
Line abilities programming applies dialing filters, remote access
dialing filters and remote access packages to lines.
Line filter
A Line filter is a collection of restrictions and exceptions defined
in a Dialing filter, and applied to an outgoing line: A Line filter on
an outgoing line may be used to limit the capabilities of that line
to carry calls made to specific area codes or destinations.
Use the
display button, and the dial pad to program the
Line filter. Filter 03 is the default Line filter.
Remote filter
A remote access dialing filter can control dialing on incoming
auto-answer trunks used for making tandem calls (that is, calling
into
to use one of its lines for placing calls). Employees
can be allowed to telephone into a
system on
auto-answer lines, and call out on a line designated for
long-distance calls to specific area codes.
Use the
display button, and the dial pad to program the
Remote filter. Filter 04 is the default Remote filter.
Remote package
Remote access packages control access to line pools and the
Remote Page capability, for calls on incoming auto-answer
trunks.
Modular DR5 System Coordinator Guide
48 Capabilities
display button, and the dial pad to program the
Use the
Remote Access package. Package 00 is the default Remote
package, which gives no access to line pools or to Remote page.
Class of Service (COS) passwords
Class of Service (COS) passwords permit controlled access to a
system’s resources by remote users. Class of Service
programming defines passwords, their associated dialing filters,
user filters and remote-user access packages.
A Class of Service can be associated with a telephone, a line or
a COS password. Class of Service determines whether a remote
user can or cannot access lines in line pools and remote paging.
It also determines the dialing capabilities that apply to outgoing
lines from line pools (in the case of remote users), or to internal
telephones and any lines used for external calls (in the case of
internal users).
The capabilities to which a remote user has access depend on:
the COS associated with the auto-answer trunk on which the
user is calling
a COS password, if entered.
Depending on the COS in effect, remote users may be able to
access all or some of the system’s resources available to remote
users. Typically, each user has a separate password. Several
users can share a password or one user can have several
passwords.
DN (if one has been programmed) allows a
Entry of a
remote user to change the COS applied for the duration of the
call.
COS passwords for internal users
Internal users have a Class of Service associated with their
telephones, in the sense that there are dialing filters associated
with telephones, as well as line pool assignments. Internal use of
a COS password affects only the telephone’s dialing capabilities.
Modular DR5 System Coordinator Guide
Capabilities 49
The ability to change the COS internally means that someone
using another person’s telephone can temporarily change the
restrictions that would normally be applied.
Password security
Class of Service passwords for a system should be
determined randomly, and should be changed on a regular
basis.
System users should memorize their COS passwords
instead of writing them down.
Employees’ COS passwords should be deleted when they
leave the company.
You can block tandem calls that would use expensive routes by
using Class of Service to restrict access to line pools, and you
can control the external destinations dialed through the use of
dialing filters.
You can use Class of Service to prevent remote access to line
pools and remote paging. Remote calls are then limited to target
lines in the system.
Groups of users can be restricted, or permitted, to access remote
paging through the Class of Service applied to their password.
Programming hints
A system can have a maximum of 100 six-digit COS
passwords (00 to 99).
You can copy the data from one COS password to another
display button in the
COS password number using the
same way that telephone and line data can be copied.
COS passwords must be unique.
Programming
passwords
Use the [Show] button, the
display button, and the
dial pad to program the six-digit sequences for each password.
Use the
display button to edit digit sequences you have
entered.
Modular DR5 System Coordinator Guide
50 Capabilities
User filter
The COS User filter replaces the telephone (set) filter, the line/set
filter or the remote filter, that would otherwise apply to a specific
Use the
button, the
display button, and the
dial pad to program the two-digit User filter. The default setting
t), means that any other filters in place (telephone (set)
filter, line/set filter, or remote filter) still apply.
Line filter
The COS Line filter replaces the line filter that would otherwise
apply to a specific call.
Use the
display button, and the dial pad to program the
two-digit Line filter. The default setting
t), means that any
Line filter already programmed still applies.
Remote package
The COS Remote package replaces the Remote Access
package that would otherwise apply to a specific call.
Use the
display button, and the dial pad to program the
Remote package. The default setting
t), means that any
Remote Access package already programmed still applies.
Modular DR5 System
Service Modes 51
Service Modes
Using Service Modes, you can control how the
system
responds to calls, depending on the time of day. Up to three
different Service Modes can be programmed, each with unique
ringing arrangements.
CODE
Password:
dial
2 . Names
3. Time
Time and
and date
date
4. Direct-Dial
Capabilities
6 . Service Modes
Control telephones
Name
7 . Password
8.
8.
Defaults
Defaults
9. Call Services
Setting
Trunk Answer
Extra-Dial
Ringing telephones
Aux ringer
Control telephones
Control telephones are assigned to each external line and are
used to control the Service Mode by allowing you to turn the
that line.
Service Mode ON or
Use the
button, the
-display button, and the
dial pad to program the internal number of the Control telephone
for each line.
Programming hints
Only the external lines programmed with a Control telephone can
be placed into a Service Mode.
Modular DR5 System Coordinator Guide
52
Service Modes
You can assign a Control telephone to more than one external
line, but a line cannot be assigned to more than one Control
telephone.
Only one Service Mode applies at any one time to all external
lines controlled by a given Control telephone.
The default Control telephone for all lines is 221.
Service Modes
The three Service Modes are programmed in the same way.
Service Mode Name
The Service Mode Name identifies the active Service Mode, and
is shown on the display of the Control telephone when the
Service Mode is turned ON.
Use the (Show] button, the
display button, and the
dial pad to program the Service Mode name. For information on
entering names, see the information in this chapter entitled
Entering names.
Programming hints
The default names of the three possible Service Modes are only
suggestions, and may be changed to any other name.
A Service Mode name can be one to seven characters.
Service Mode setting
The Service Mode setting controls how the Service Mode is
turned ON and OFF. Use the
display button to select
the setting: Manual, Automatic, or OFF.
Modular
System Coordinator Guide
Service Modes 53
Manual allows you to turn the Service Mode ON and OFF at any
time from a Control telephone.
Service Modes feature code
must be entered at the telephone to access this feature.
Automatic allows you to pre-assign a stop and start time during
which the Service Mode is active. You are still able to start and
stop the Service Mode by entering the Service Modes feature
code at a Control telephone. If you select this setting, you will
have to program start and stop times. See the section in this
chapter on Time and Date for information on programming times.
OFF prevents the Service Mode from being activated.
Programming hints
Overlapping times may be assigned. For example, if Service
Mode 1 is assigned from 9:00 am to 4:00 pm and Service
pm to
pm, then the start time
Mode 2 is assigned from
of the second Service Mode is treated as a stop time for the first
Service Mode. This is also true if two Service Modes have the
same start time but different stop times.
If one Service Mode starts and stops within.the times of another
Service Mode, the first service temporarily ends when the second
service starts. The first service then resumes when the second
service has ended.
Default stop and start times correspond to typical hours which
may be required for a night Service Mode.
Default Service Mode times
Service Mode
Start time
Service Mode 1: Night
23:00
Service Mode 2: Evening
17:oo
Stop time
23:00
Service Mode 3: Lunch
Modular
System Coordinator Guide
54 Service Modes
Trunk Answer
Trunk Answer allows you to answer, from any telephone, an
external call which is ringing at another telephone in your office.
This is useful if the other telephones have not been assigned the
same lines as the telephone you are using to answer the call.
You can change the Trunk Answer setting only if the Service
Mode is set to Manual or Automatic.
Use the
N (No).
display button to select the setting:
(Yes) or
Extra-Dial telephone
A telephone normally in service as a Direct-Dial telephone, can
be programmed in Service Modes to allow internal
the
Direct-Dial telephone to also ring at the Extra-Dial telephone.
Use the
display button and the dial pad to enter the
internal telephone number of the Extra-Dial telephone.
Programming hints
The Extra-dial telephone provides the option of assigning one
system for each
more Direct-Dial telephone in the
operational Service Mode.
Ringing
You can assign additional telephones to ring for incoming calls
on each external line, including target lines. Use the [Show]
button, the
display button and the dial pad to enter the
internal telephone number of the Ringing telephone for each line.
You can indicate whether the Auxiliary Ringer (if installed) also
rings. Use the
display button to select the setting:
Y (Yes) or N (No).
Programming hints
The default ringing telephone is 221. This means that all lines
ring at Control telephone 221, when Service Modes are
activated. A Ringing telephone can be assigned to more than
one Service Mode.
Modular DR5 System Coordinator Guide
Password 55
Password
The Administration password allows access to Administration
programming. This prevents unauthorized or unintentional
changes to settings. To ensure security, distribute the passwords
only to selected personnel, keep a record of your password in a
secure place, and change the password periodically.
The password is a one to six-digit number. The default
which is the same as
Administration password is
Use the
button, the
display button and the
pad to enter the new Administration password. Use the
display button accept the programmed password.
Programming hints
The password is easier to remember if the digits correspond to
the letters in a word.
If you forget the Administration password, you are not able to
access Administration programming. Call your Customer Service
representative to assign a new Administration password.
Modular
System Coordinator Guide
56 Log Defaults
Log Defaults
If you subscribe to Call Display services, external calls can be
tracked in a Call Log. Log Defaults programming customizes how
log space is allocated to telephones throughout the system.
6. Service Modes
Reset All Logs
Use the
button and the dial pad to enter the space
allocation for the Call Log at each telephone. Use the
display
button to accept the settings and end Administration
programming. The system automatically reallocates Log space.
Reallocation of Call Log space may destroy Call Log
data at telephones that lose space.
Modular DR5 System Coordinator Guide
Log Defaults 57
There are 600 Call Log spaces available in the system. There are
no spaces allocated by default. Changing the space allocation
using Log Defaults will define the log space available to all
telephones in the system. Unassigned log space is available in a
Log Pool, and can be re-allocated in Call Services programming.
Modular
System Coordinator Guide
58 Call Services
Call Services
If you subscribe to Call Display services, external calls are
identified on the display. Call Services programming allows you
to customize how this information is used.
ADMINISTRATIONCODE
8.
r
Defaults
Call Services
Auto Call Info
Telephone services
numbers
lines
Auto Call Info
Automatic Call Information allows you to specify which telephone
displays the Call Display information when a call is ringing on an
external line. (After the call is answered, Call Display information
is always shown at the telephone that answered the call.) Use
the.
button, the
display button and the dial pad to
enter the internal number of the telephone to display Call Display
information.
Note:
Modular
In order for a telephone to display the Call Display
information for calls on an external line, that telephone
must also be programmed to Ring for that line.
System Coordinator Guide
Call Services 59
Telephone (Set) Services
Telephone Services programming allows you to customize how
Call Display information is used at each telephone.
Voice Message
Logging telephone (set)
Logging telephone allows you to specify the telephone that
automatically logs Call Display information for calls on an
line. The line must appear on that telephone but it does
not have to be a ringing line. Use the SHOW button and the
display button to select the setting: N (No) or Y (Yes).
Show External Voice Message
If you subscribe to Voice Message services, you can access that
system. Show External Voice
service through your
Message controls the display of External Voice Message
indication for each line at each telephone. Use the
display button to select the setting: N (No) or Y (Yes).
Log Space
Log Space changes the number of items that can be stored in
the Call Log for each telephone. Use the
button, the
display button and the
display button to redistribute
the log space. There is no Log Space assigned by default.
Programming hints
Space must be available in the Log Pool before any space can
be added to a current Call Log space.
System-wide allocation of space is performed from Log Defaults
programming. If you are performing extensive changes, it may be
appropriate to use the Log Defaults programming mechanism
instead.
Log Password
Log Password allows you to clear any Call Log password
programmed with the Call Log feature. Use the
display
button to clear the programmed password.
Modular DR5 System Coordinator Guide
60 Call Services
First Display
Depending on the services you subscribe to, Call Display
information may contain up to three parts; the name of the caller,
the number of the caller, and the name of the line in your
system that the call is on. Use the
display button to
select the setting to be shown first for each telephone: Name,
Number or Line.
Programming hints
The Call Information feature is used to display and scroll through
all of the Call Display information; the caller name, number and
line number. See the Telephone features chapter for more
information.
You may see Unknown name or Unknown number on the
display if the information is not available from your telephone
company. You may see Private name or Private number on
the display if the caller blocks that information.
Voice Message. Center telephone numbers
If you subscribe to Voice Message services, you can access that
system. This setting specifies the
service through your
external telephone number that is automatically dialed by the
Message feature to retrieve voice messages. Use the
display button and the dial pad to enter the external telephone
number
Programming hints
The display does not show that external messages are waiting
unless the Show External Voice Message prompt is set to Yes.
Five Voice Message Center numbers can be programmed, but
most systems require only one.
Voice Message Center lines
If you subscribe to Voice Message services, you can specify
which Voice Message Center is used for each external line that
can receive Message Waiting indication. Use the
display button to select the setting: 2, 3, 4, 5, or N (None).
Modular DR5 System Coordinator Guide
Copying settings 61
Copying settings
Programmed settings for lines, telephones, and certain
Capabilities can be copied to other lines or telephones. If many
lines or telephones require the same settings, program one line
or telephone, and then copy those settings.
Line programming
Line programming can be copied for Line abilities in the
Capabilities section of Administration programming, and Ringing
telephones in the Service Modes section of Administration
programming.
Use the COPY display button and the dial pad to identify the
source and destination of the copied information.
Telephone programming
programming can be copied for Set Abilities in
the Capabilities section of Administration programming.
Use the
display button and the dial pad to identify the
source and destination of the copied information.
Capabilities programming
In addition to Line abilities and Set abilities,
programming can be copied for:
Capabilities
Dialing filters
Remote access packages
COS passwords
Use the COPY display button and the dial pad to identify the
source and destination of the copied information.
Modular DR5 System Coordinator Guide
62
Set Profile and Line Profile
Set Profile and Line Profile
Use Set Profile and Line Profile to review the settings
programmed in Configuration and Administration programming.
Set Profile and Line Profile allow you to browse through, but not
change, the programmed settings.
Set Profile allows you to verify settings for each
telephone. Line Profile allows you to verify settings for each
external line.
Using Set Profile and Line Profile
As many as four people in the
system can use Set Profile
or Line Profile at the same time. You may access Set Profile and
Line Profile while on a call at your telephone.
If someone is using Configuration or Administration
programming, you can still access Set Profile and Line Profile
from another
telephone. The latest’programming
changes can be seen as soon as they are made.
Set Profile and Line Profile can be used only from an M7310 or
M7324 Telephone.
A
Programming Overlay is not required to perform Set
Profile or Line Profile.
Modular DR5 System Coordinator Guide
Set Profile and Line Profile
63
Programming you can review
The following table shows the Configuration and Administration
programming headings that can be reviewed in Set Profile and
Line Profile.
Programming that can be reviewed
Set Profile
Line Profile
Set name
Line name
Line Access
Trunk data
(physical lines only)
Set abilities
Received number (target lines
Line data
Line abilities
Service Modes
The following table shows how line names and telephone names
appear on the display while you are using Set Profile and Line
Profile.
Telephone
name
221: 221
OR
221:
WHITE
Line name
OR
Line001 :
internal number:internal
number or name
(if programmed)
external line
number:external line
number or name
(if programmed)
Modular DR5 System Coordinator Guide
64 Set Profile and Line Profile
To begin Set Profile
From an M7310 or M7324 Telephone:
1. Press
which is the same as
The display shows Show set:
2.
Enter the internal number of the telephone to be reviewed.
OR
Press FIRST to review programming for the telephone with
the first internal number.
The display shows, for example,
or
221: WHITE, if that name was programmed for the
telephone.
To begin Line Profile
From an
1.
or M7324 Telephone:
Press
which is the same as
The display shows Show 1
2.
Enter the number of the line to be reviewed.
OR
Press FIRST to review programming for the first line
number.
The display shows, for example,
Line881 or
if that name was programmed for the line.
To exit Set Profile or Line Profile
1. Press
Modular DR5 System Coordinator Guide
Set Profile and Line Profile 65
Using Set Profile
Begin with 221: 221 or 221:
1.
WHITE.
To see the name for the next telephone, (or to return to
Show set: if this telephone is the telephone with the last
internal number), press NEXT.
OR
To see the name for the previous telephone (or to return to
if this telephone is the telephone with the first
Show set:
internal number), press
O R
To review settings for this telephone, press SHOW.
The display shows Line
2. To see programming for Line Access. press SHOW.
OR
To display the name of the telephone, as in step 1, press
OR
To review the next setting, press NEXT.
The display shows
3. To see programming for Set Abilities, press SHOW.
OR
To display Line Access, as in step 2, press
OR
To return to the name of the telephone. press NEXT.
Modular DR5 System Coordinator Guide
66 Set Profile and Line Profile
Using Line Profile
Begin with
1
or
To see the name for the next line, (or to return to
if this is the last line number), press
Show 1
To see the name for the previous line, (or to return to
if this is the first line number), press
Show 1
OR
To review other settings, press SHOW.
The display shows Trunk data.
2. To see programming for Trunk data, press SHOW.
OR
To display the name of the line, as in step 1, press
OR
To review the next setting, press NEXT.
The display shows Line data.
3. To see programming for line data, press SHOW.
OR
To display Trunk data, as in step 2, press
OR
To review the next setting, press NEXT.
The display shows Line abil
4. To see the programming for Line Abilities, press SHOW.
OR
To display Line data, as in step 3, press
OR
To review the next setting, press NEXT.
The display shows
Modes.
5. To see the programming for Service Modes, press SHOW.
OR
To display Line abil
as in step 4, press
4.
OR
To return to the name of the line, press NEXT.
Modular DR5 System Coordinator Guide
Programming reminders 67
Programming reminders
The Programming reminders are a record of programmable
settings which
users may need to know on a day-to-day
basis.
Fill out whatever sections are programmed and must be known. If
more space is required to record the information, first photocopy
the page before you begin. Not all of the programmable features
may be required information.
Programmable settings can be determined from a review of the
Modular
Programming Record and use of the Set
and Line Profile feature.
Distribute the Programming reminders to each desk that has a
telephone, or post them on the wall next to the
telephone.
Modular
System Coordinator Guide
68 Programming reminders
telephones
User name/location
I
I
Internal number
Page zone
- - - - - - -
-
- - - - - - -
-
Modular DR5 System Coordinator Guide
Prime
Prime Telephone operator
internal number
Lines answered at the Prime telephone
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Prime Telephone operator
Internal number
Lines answered at the Prime telephone
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Prime Telephone operator
Internal number
Lines answered at the Prime telephone
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Prime Telephone operator
internal number
Lines answered at the Prime telephone
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Central Answering Position
CAP operator
Internal number
- - - - - - -
- - - - - - -
I
Modular
System Coordinator Guide
70 Programming reminders
Page zones
Page zone
Location
1
Line Pools
Pool
Access code
A
-
-
-
-
B
-
-
-
-
C
-
-
-
-
D
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
I
l I
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
J
-
-
-
-
K
-
-
-
-
Use
I
l
F
- G-
-
- - - -
l
N
-
-
-
-
0
-
-
-
-
I
Miscellaneous programming
Direct-dial telephone
DN (used to change COS)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Direct-dial digit
Call Park Prefix digit
Dial first to make external calls
Modular DR5 System Coordinator Guide
I
Programming reminders
71
Call Pickup Groups
Pickup Group
Names of members of the group
Modular DR5 System Coordinator Guide
Programming reminders
Service Modes
Service Mode 1
Service Mode 2
Service Mode 3
Name
Name
Name
- - - - - - Start
Time
.
stop
Time
.
---
Start
Time
.
Start
Time
.
stop
Time
.
stop
Time
.
Control telephone
Control telephone
Control telephone
- - - - - - -
- - - - - - -
- - - - - - -
Ringing telephones
Ringing telephones
Ringing telephones
-
-
-
-
-
_
_
_
_
.
_
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
-
-
-
- - -
-
-
- - -
- - - - - - -
Extra-dial telephone
Extra-dial telephone
Extra-dial telephone
- - - - - - -
- - - - - - -
-
Modular DR5 System Coordinator Guide
-
-
-
-
-
-
telemanuals.com
Handle many calls at once
Answer buttons 154
Central Answering Position 164
Call Queuing 78
Hold 135, 154
Prime telephone 78 167
Answer a call
Answering the telephone 77
Call Information 91
Call Pickup 78, 104
Bring another person into
a telephone conversation
Conference 110
Group Listen 132
78, 133
Privacy 110
Have your calls answered at
another telephone
Call Forward 88
Line Redirection 142
Service Modes 162
Change your telephone defaults
Button Inquiry 129
Contrast Adjustment 116
Class of Service 115,173, 185
Customizing your telephone 116
Dialing Modes 117, 124
Do Not Disturb 78, 88, 128
Feature programming 122
Language Choice 118
Line appearance 174
Line buttons 119,155
Lines 173
Telephones 154
Prime line 175
Private lines 175
Ring Type 120
Ring Volume 121
Telephone Admin. Lock 121
Log your incoming calls
Autobumping 95
Call Log 92, 93
94
Make calls quickly without
having to dial the whole number
85
Hotline telephone 166
Last Number Redial 123
Messages 148
Speed Dial 168
Saved Number Redial 124
Make calls to numbers outside
your
system
Check the length of a call
Call Duration Timer 177
Show Time 177
Dialing 123
External line access code 123
Host System Signaling 137
Line Pools 124, 140, 175
Communicate within your office
Dialing 123
Direct-dial 123, 165
Page 158
Priority Call 160
Ring Again 123
Voice Call 187
Transfer a call to another person
Call Park 102
Camp 108
Transfer 108, 112, 178
External Transfer 178
Network Transfer 178
Modular
System Coordinator Guide
telemanuals.com
74 Using
features
Using
features
To use a
feature, enter the feature code and watch your
telephone display for instructions. Different displays come up at
different times, depending on how you invoke the feature and the
choices you make while using the feature. If you want more
information about a display, look it up in the Displays section of
each feature listing.
Note that some features work only in certain circumstances. For
example, to use Conference you must have two calls at your
telephone, one active and one on hold.
The displays shown in this book use a two-digit internal number,
which is the default for a non-expanded system. (An expanded
system has a 3-digit internal number default.)
.
One-line and two-line displays
All
telephones have LCD displays that give you
information about your calls and guide you through
features. The M7100 and M7208 Telephones have a one-line
display. The M7310 and M7324 Telephones have a two-line
display. The second line of a two-line display shows the functions
of the three buttons directly below it. If you have a telephone with
a two-line display, you can use these display buttons. Some
display buttons, such as TRRNSFER and
are simply
shortcuts. if you have a telephone with a one-line display, these
shortcuts are not available. Other display buttons, such as
and SHOW, perform essential functions. If your telephone has a
one-line display, you can use the following buttons in place of
these display buttons:
OK
QUIT
[Hold]
UIEW
BKSP
Modular DR5 System Coordinator Guide
telemanuals.com
Using
features
75
All displays listed in this book are shown as they appear on the
two-line display, except those that appear only on telephones
with a one-line display. If you are using a telephone with a
one-line display, ignore both the second line of the display shown
in this book, and the instructions for using display buttons.
Common feature displays
You may see the following displays when you use a feature.
Someone is using Configuration or
Administration programming. You
cannot use programming features. Try
again later.
You have taken more
15 seconds
to press a button in response to a
display.
id
I
You have entered an invalid feature
code.
Not avail able
You have tried to use feature that is
not available in the present set-up of
your
system.
‘Set, 1
You cannot use the feature you have
chosen because your telephone is
locked. See Telephone Administration
Lock in Customizing your telephone.
Dialing and Answering the telephone
Many
features require you to dial telephone numbers.
The displays associated with dialing are listed in the Dialing
section. if you see a display that is not listed with the feature you
are using, look for it in the Dialing section. All the displays that
appear when you are receiving a call are listed in the Answering
the telephone section.
Modular DR5 System Coordinator Guide
telemanuals.com
76 Using
features
One button access
You can program most
feature codes onto telephone
memory buttons so that you can use the feature by pressing a
single button. See the procedures in the Feature programming
section.
Whenever the instructions tell you to enter a feature code, you
can do so either by pressing the buttons shown in the feature
description or by pressing a memory button on which the feature
code has been programmed. You can also enter a telephone
number by pressing an
button, rather than entering it
manually.
Canceling a feature
Some features change the way your telephone works. To make
your telephone work normally again you must cancel the feature.
then q and the feature
To cancel a feature, press
code. For example, to cancel Call Forward, which you activate by
pressing [Feature]
press [Feature]
If a feature code is programmed onto a memory button, you may
be able to cancel the feature by pressing the memory button
while the feature is active.
If you change your mind in the middle of using a feature, you can
back out by pressing [Feature] or
Be aware that pressing
disconnects any active or held call.
Telephone
Because the M7100 Telephone does not have any line buttons it
sometimes works slightly differently from other
telephones. Where other telephones may require you to select a
line button to answer a call, on the M7100 Telephone you simply
pick up the receiver. Where other telephones require you to
select a line button to take a call off hold, you press [Hold] on
the
Telephone. The
Telephone cannot have a
button. You will find special instructions for the M7100
Telephone in some feature descriptions.
Modular
System Coordinator Guide
telemanuals.com
Answering the telephone 77
Answering the telephone
A n s w e r i n g
Your
telephone can receive many different types of calls.
Your telephone’s display tells you what type of
you are
receiving. The usual way to answer a call is to pick up the
receiver, but there are several other possible methods,
depending on how your system is set up and the type of call that
is ringing.
Callback
When you direct a call you have answered to another telephone,
the system monitors the call to make sure someone answers it. If
no one answers a call within a programmable length of time, the
system directs it back to you. Callback generates a variety of
displays. Most occur after a programmable delay and are listed in
this section. Some occur immediately, if the telephone to which
you are directing a call is out of service or otherwise unavailable.
These are listed with the descriptions of the features in which
they occur.
Delayed Ring Transfer (DRT)
If no one answers a call within a programmable length of time,
the system transfers the call to the Prime telephone.
Call Display information
If you have subscribed to Call Display services from your local
telephone company, one line of information about an external
caller is displayed after you answer. If your telephone has been
programmed to receive Call Display information automatically,
that information is shown before you answer. Depending on the
setting in Administration Programming and the external
information available, either the caller’s name or telephone
number is displayed.
When you transfer an external call to another
user, this
information is displayed on the recipient‘s telephone.
Modular
System Coordinator Guide
78 Answering the telephone
There will be a delay between the time your telephone rings and
when Call Display information is available. If you answer a call
before the Call Display information arrives, that information is not
available for the call.
Related features
Call Pickup
Call Pickup lets you use’your telephone to answer a call that is
ringing at someone else’s telephone.
Call Queuing
Call Queuing allows you to choose the call with the highest
priority when you have more than one call ringing at your
telephone.
Do Not Disturb
[Feature)
(5
If you do not wish to receive calls, turn on Do Not Disturb.
Handsfree/Mute
You can answer calls without picking up the receiver using
Handsfree/Mute.
Prime telephone
A Prime telephone receives calls that go unanswered at other
telephones. For more information, see Special telephones.
Retrieving a Parked Call
You can retrieve a parked call at any telephone in the system.
Call Deny
If you do not wish to receive voice calls, turn on Voice Call Deny.
Modular DR5 System Coordinator Guide
Answering the telephone 79
What line indicators mean
on and off
for equal lengths of
time
There is an incoming call on the line.
You have placed a call on hold.
and off
more quickly
on for
longer than off
Someone else has put a call on hold
on that line.
not flashing
You are connected to the call on that
line or the line is in use elsewhere.
Off
The line is free.
Rings you may hear
A double beep every
ten seconds
A call has been camped to your
telephone.
A long single ring
There is an external call on the line for
you.
A shorter double ring
There is an internal call on the line for
you or a call is being transferred to
you.
A brief single ring
A call is being redirected on one of
your redirected lines. You cannot
answer this call. See Line Redirection.
Three beeps
descending in tone
You are receiving a priority call.
Modular DR5 System
Guide
80 Answering the telephone
Displays
You will see one or more of the following displays when.you
receive a call on your telephone and while you are answering
that call. See Messages for a full explanation of the Messages
feature. See Dialing for a full explanation of Ring Again.
This indicates a long distance call.
(May be available with Call Display
Services.)
You are connected to an internal call.
to transfer
the call.
You can press
Either you are receiving an internal
call from telephone 02 forwarded by
telephone 221 or you have an Answer
button for telephone 221 and an .
internal call from 02 is ringing on 221.
221 call in9
You are receiving a call from
telephone 221.
You have received a Ring Again offer
for a call to an internal telephone. To
call the number again, press
or
the flashing internal line button. On the
M7100 Telephone, just lift the
receiver. Otherwise, press
or wait
30 seconds for the Ring Again offer to
expire. For an explanation of Ring
Again, see Dialing.
The person to whom you camped the
call did not answer it. The call has
come back to you. Press the
button or the line button to
reconnect to the call.
Line001
You are connected to an external call.
to transfer
the call.
You can press
The call on line 001 is being
transferred to you by someone else in
system.
your
Modular
System Coordinator Guide
Answering the telephone 81
waiting
A camped call is waiting. Press the
line button or use Call Queuing to
answer the call. If you have an M7100
Telephone, press
Either you are receiving an external
call forwarded from telephone 221 or
you have an Answer button for
telephone 221 and an external call is
ringing on that telephone.
calls waiting
.
You tried to use Call Queuing but no
call was ringing at your telephone.
There is no call ringing at your
telephone. If you have a flashing line
button but your telephone is not
ringing, you must press the line button
to answer the call on that line.
Hot in service
The telephone to which you have
directed a call is not in service or is
otherwise unavailable. The call is
returned to your telephone.
Nobody answered the call you parked.
The call has come back to you.
UP
You have used the Call Queuing
feature without picking up the receiver.
Auto Handsfree has not been
assigned to your telephone. You must
use the receiver or
to
answer a ringing or camped call.
Modular DR5 System Coordinator Guide
82 Answering the telephone
You are receiving a Priority Call. If you
are on another call, inform the person
you are speaking to that the call is
about to be put on hold. Press the
flashing line indicator of the Priority
Call or wait till the call connects
automatically (in eight seconds).
The Priority Call goes through when
you hear the next beep.
Your active call is placed on Exclusive
Hold. It will be reconnected
automatically when the priority call
ends (unless you transfer the Priority
Call, in which case you must press the
line button of your original call to
reconnect).
To reject a Priority Call, use DND
B
L
O or C
press K
.
/Release a call
1
NO
You have no free line buttons on
which to receive a call. Release one of
your current calls and try again to
answer the incoming call.
You have received a Ring Again offer
for a line pool. To use the line pool,
press
or the flashing internal line
button. On the M7100 Telephone, just
lift the receiver. Otherwise, press
or wait 30 seconds for the Ring Again
offer to expire. For an explanation of
Ring Again, see Dialing.
Prime telephone displays
If yours is a Prime telephone, you may see the following displays:
The person at telephone 221 has
forwarded a call to you using Do Not
Disturb.
Modular DR5 System Coordinator Guide
Answering the telephone 83
transfer
The system has transferred a call to
you from a telephone in Do Not
Disturb mode.
I
Li
Nobody answered this call so the
system transferred it to you.
call back
Someone has camped, parked or
transferred a call on line 001, but no
one has answered it. Press the
button or the line button to
connect to the call.
to
There is no telephone that can receive
a call on line 001 so the System has
transferred it to you.
The call coming in on line 015 was
intended for target line 087. Line 087
is busy so the call has come to you.
Notes
There are three indications of an incoming call: ringing, a line
button flashing, and a message on the display. You will not
necessarily receive all three indications for any particular call.
You may have a line that has been set up not to ring at your
telephone. If so, you will see only a flashing line button. If there is
no button free for a camped call to appear, you will get a special
ring and a message on your display, but no line button will flash.
If someone makes a voice call to you, you will hear a beep
followed by their voice. There are many possible combinations,
depending on how your system is set up. See Lines in the
System features section for more information on the use of lines.
There are many ways to answer a call. Many of them depend on
settings in Administration programming. Depending on various
settings and the type of call you are receiving, you may be able
to answer a call by: picking up the receiver, picking up the
receiver and pressing a line button, pressing
pressing
and pressing a line button, pressing a line button, or
simply speaking.
Modular DR5 System Coordinator Guide
84 Answering the telephone
If you receive a Priority Call and your telephone has no free
cannot transfer the call or do anything
internal line buttons,
else with it, except release it.
On M7100 Telephones, you may answer a second call by
pressing
Your active call is put on hold and you are
connected to the waiting call. You can have no more than two
calls at a time.
Modular
System Coordinator Guide
85
You can program memory buttons for one-touch dialing of
internal or external telephone numbers.
External
1. Press
2.
Select the button you want to program. This is not necessary
for the
Telephone.
3.
If you want this autodialer to use a particular line or line pool,
select that line or line pool button. You can only select a line
pool button on the M7100 Telephone.
4.
Enter the number.
5.
Press
or [Hold].
Internal
1.
Press
2.
Select the button you want to program. This is not necessary
for the
Telephone.
3.
Enter the number.
Displays
You will see some of the following displays while programming
an
button. See Dialing for displays that may occur while
button.
using an
Continue to enter digits until the
number is complete. Press
or
to erase an incorrect
digit. Press
or [Hold] when
you are finished.
full
The memory allotted to
numbers in your
system is full.
Modular DR5 System Coordinator Guide
86
While programming External Autodial,
you pressed
or
before
entering any digits. This erases the
button.
Enter the number you wish to program
exactly as you would if you were
dialing it yourself.
ease
d or
I
You cannot program an
button while you are on a call. Finish
your call or place it on hold before
button.
programming an
Enter the internal telephone number
you wish to program.
Press a button
WIT
and
Press the memory button you want to
program.
This display pertains only to the
M7208 Telephone. Enter the number
you want to program onto the button,
then press [Hold]. You may
include a line or line pool selection in
sequence by selecting the
an
line before entering any digits.
Enter the number you want to program
onto the button, then press
or
You may include a line or line
pool selection in an
sequence
by selecting the line before entering
any digits.
The number is stored on the button.
Notes
If the power to your
system is off for more than three
days,
numbers may be lost from the memory.
Modular
System Coordinator Guide
87
numbers must be programmed onto memory buttons.
They can not be programmed onto line buttons, the
Handsfree/Mute button, or Answer buttons.
You can program Host System Signaling codes as part of a
button. See Host System
number on an External
Signaling.
If you do not include a line selection in an autodialer, the call will
use your Prime line, if you have one. If you select a line before
pressing the
button, any line selection programmed onto
the button will be ignored.
You can copy the telephone number from a Last Number Redial
button.
button or Saved Number Redial button onto an
Simply enter the Last Number Redial feature code or Saved
feature asks you
Number Redial feature code when the
to enter a number.
Modular DR5 System Coordinator Guide
88 Call Forward
Call Forward
[Feature)
Forward your calls
You can have all your calls forwarded to another telephone in the
system.
1.
Press
2.
Enter the number of the internal telephone to which you
want your calls forwarded.
Forwarding remains in effect until you enter the Cancel Call
Forward feature code.
Cancel Call Forward
You can start to receive calls again.
1.
Press
Call Forward on Busy
Call Forward on Busy redirects calls to another telephone when
you are busy with a call. The System Coordinator sets up Call
Forward on Busy in Administration programming.
Call Forward (No Answer)
Call Forward (No Answer) forwards unanswered calls to another
telephone. The System Coordinator sets up Call Forward (No
Answer) in Administration programming.
Call Forward Override
You can call someone and ask them to stop forwarding their calls
to you.
1.
Dial that person’s number and ask them to cancel call
forwarding. Your call will ring at that person’s telephone
even though they are forwarding their calls.
Related features
Do Not Disturb
You can use the Do Not Disturb feature to forward your calls to
the Prime telephone.
Modular
System Coordinator Guide
Call Forward 89
Line
Note the differences between Line Redirection and Call Forward.
Call Forward forwards all calls that arrive at a particular
telephone to another telephone within the
system. Line
redirection redirects only the lines you specify, no matter which
telephones they appear on, to a telephone outside the
system.
Displays
You will see some of the following displays while forwarding your
calls. See Do Not Disturb for a full explanation of that feature.
See Answering the telephone for displays that occur when a
telephone receives a call forwarded by another telephone.
You cannot forward calls to the
number you have chosen. There are
several reasons why this can happen.
For instance, you cannot forward your
calls to a telephone that has been
forwarded to your telephone.
Forward denied
Forward
I
Dial the internal number or press the
button of the
Internal
telephone to which you want your calls
to be forwarded.
Your calls are being forwarded to
telephone 221. Press the
button or w h e n
y o u
want to stop forwarding your calls.
Not. in service
Two or more telephones are linked in
a forwarding chain, and one of them is
out of service or is being used to
program the system.
Notes
When a call is forwarded, it does not ring but its line indicator still
flashes on your telephone. You can answer the call by pressing
the button next to the flashing indicator.
Modular DR5 System Coordinator Guide
90 Call Forward
If the telephone to which you forwarded your calls does not have
the same external lines as your telephone, the forwarded calls
appear on internal line buttons.
Telephones that have Call Forward on Busy active can still
receive Priority calls. Call Forward on Busy does not forward
camped calls.
When Call Forward is active, all calls go to the call forward
destination, regardless of the Call Forward on Busy and Call
Forward no Answer settings.
If you are one of a group of people who regularly forward their
calls to one another, be aware that it is possible to set up forward
loops in which a call is forwarded from one telephone to another
in a circle, and is never answered anywhere.
Calls that are redirected by Line Redirection are not affected by
any of the Call Forward features.
Modular DR5 System Coordinator Guide
Call Information 91
Call Information
Call Information allows you to display information about incoming
calls. This information is more detailed than the Call Display
information you automatically receive. See the Answering the
telephone section in this chapter for details. For external calls,
you can display the caller’s name, telephone number, and the
line name. For an internal call, you can display the name of the
caller and their internal number. You can obtain information from
ringing, answered, or held calls.
Names and numbers for external callers are displayed only if you
have subscribed to Call Display services from your local
telephone company.
Display Call Information before or after answering
1.
To find out who is calling or to obtain information about your
current call, press
2.
If the call is an internal call, the caller’s name and the
internal number are displayed.
OR
If the call is an external call, Call Display information is
displayed according to how this feature was programmed in
Administration programming.
To
more information about an external call:
For a one-line display, press q
repeatedly to display more
information about the call.
For a two-line display, continue to press VIEW to display
more information about the call.
Display Call Information for a call on hold
1. To obtain information about your held call, press
2.
The display shows
3.
Select the line on hold.
Modular
a call.
System Coordinator Guide
92 Call Information
4.
If the call is an internal call, the caller’s name and internal
number are displayed.
OR
If the call is an external call, the caller’s information is
displayed.
To obtain more information about an external call:
For a one-line display, press I# repeatedly to display more
information about the call.
OR
For a two-line display, continue to press
to display
more information about the call.
Related features
Call Log
Call Log displays the same information as Call
along
with the date and time of the call, and the number of times the
caller called.
Displays
You would see this display if you were
call with a caller at
on an
(EXIT
You would see this display if you were
on an active long distance call with a
caller at 555-l 234.
‘Notes
Call Display information becomes available between the first and
second ring of an alerting call. If you answer before the Call
Display information is available on your display, and you press
[Feature]
you will only see the line number or line
name.
Modular DR5 System Coordinator Guide
Call Log 93
Call Log
Call Log creates a list of records of incoming external calls. The
log could contain the following information for each call:
l
sequence number in the Call Log,
name and number of caller,
indication if call was long distance,
indication if call was answered (and identification of who
answered it),
time and date of the call,
l
number of repeated calls from the same source, and
name of the line that the call came in on.
Call Log has many benefits. For example, you may find it helpful
to :
keep track of abandoned or unanswered calls,
call back a customer who was unable to reach anyone,
track patterns for your callers (for example volume of calls
and geographical location of calls),
record caller information quickly and accurately, and
l
build a personal telephone directory from log items.
Log space is assigned to each telephone. Since a log can
become full, Call Log has Autobump, which when set to ON,
allows new calls to be logged, while at the same time deleting old
entries.
Names and numbers for external callers are displayed only if you
have subscribed to Call Display services from your local
telephone company.
Modular
System Coordinator Guide
94 Call Log
Choose Logging Options
I”
You can select the type of calls that will be stored in your Call
1.
Press
2.
If the default has not changed, the display shows
If you want to log calls that were not answered,
press
or
OR
Press NEXT or q
3.
to display the next selection.
The display shows Unanswered
If you want to log
calls that were unanswered at your telephone but answered
elsewhere in the system, press or (Feature].
OR
Press NEXT
.
or
4.
to display the next selection.
The display shows Los 1
If you want to log all
calls, answered and not answered at the telephone, press
OR
Press NEXT or
5.
to display the next selection.
If you do not want
The display shows No
information to be automatically logged, press
or
[Feature) .
OR
Press NEXT or q
6.
Use
to return to the first selection.
To exit, press
(manually log a call)
If your calls are not automatically logged,
lets you manually
log call information when you are connected to an external call.
Being able to store information for your current call can be helpful
in many situations. For example, you may want to:
record a caller’s information without using paper and pencil,
record only selected calls that you personally choose, as
opposed to using Call Log automatically, and
l
quickly record caller information before a caller hangs up.
Modular DR5 System Coordinator Guide
Call Log 95
To manually log an external call:
1.
Press [Feature]
(3.
OR
Program this feature on a memory key (See the
Telephones section in this chapter.)
Use Autobumping
‘Since your log has a set number of entries that it can hold,
Autobumping is a feature that lets you tell
what to do
when your log becomes full. When Autobumping is ON, a new
log entry causes the first entry to be deleted. If Autobumping is
OFF, your
system will not log new calls when your log is
full.
1.
To turn Autobumping ON, press [Feature]
OR
To turn Autobumping OFF, press (Feature]
(5.
[Feature]
Enter Call Log
You can enter your Call Log to view stored information. The Log
may display special characters. These are described in detail in
the description of Displays, later in this section. To view your log:
1.
Press [Feature]
2.
The display shows the number of previously read items
the number of new, unread items (New) in the log.
(Old)
3.
To view old items, press
OR
To view new items, press,
or
or q
.
OR
To return to an item viewed when you last exited the log,
press RESUME or
DR5 System Coordinator Guide
96 Call Log
Navigate within Call Log
You can navigate within your Call Log to view a particular log
entry. You can also scroll within an entry itself.
1.
To scroll through an entry, press MORE or
OR
To view the next entry, press NEXT or q
.
OR
To go back to the previous entry, press
2.
To exit, press
Erase Log Items
It is necessary to routinely erase read log items to make space
for new items in your log.
1.
Navigate to the item you want to erase.
2.
Press
3.
To exit, press
or
If you accidentally erase an item, you can undo the erasure.
1.
Immediately after accidentally erasing an item, press UNDO
Or
2.
To exit, press
Call from Call Log
You may find it helpful to place calls from within your Call Log.
Each stored caller number may vary according to the information
associated with that particular call. If the caller number involves a
or PBX system, the first few digits may need to be
“trimmed” to make the caller number dialable. If the number that
you want to call is long distance or uses line pool access, digits
may need to be added to the beginning of the number.
Place a call
1.
Navigate to the log item for the number that you want to dial.
2.
Display the number and edit it if necessary to make it
(the instructions for adding or trimming digits follow).
3.
Press an external line or line pool button.
Modular DR5 System Coordinator Guide
Call Log 97
4.
Lift the receiver. This is not necessary if Handsfree is
programmed at your telephone.
5.
The displayed number is dialed.
Trim a number involving
or PBX
To trim the caller number:
1.
Press TRIM or
want to remove.
once for every digit that you
‘Add digits for long distance or line pool access
Add digits to the number by pressing the appropriate dial
1.
pad digits, just as you would do to dial.
2.
To remove digits you have added, press
or
once for every digit that you want to remove.
Optional Password
You have the option of accessing your Call Log through a
password. If you forget your password, there is a facility in
Administration programming to clear it (and then you could enter
a new password from your telephone).
Assign a password to your Call Log
Press
The displays shows
New
2.
Enter your four-digit password. The display shows
New:
3.
Re-enter your four-digit password. The display shows
Password changed, which confirms that your password has
been assigned.
Using your Password to enter Call Log
1.
Press
to enter Call Log.
2.
If you have programmed a password, Password:
appears.
3.
Enter your four-digit password.
Change your password
1.
Press
The display shows
d
Modular DR5 System Coordinator Guide
98 Call Log
Enter your old password. The display shows
2.
New
Enter your new four-digit password. The displays shows
3.
New:
Re-enter your password. The display shows
4.
Password changed, which confirms that your password has
been changed.
Delete an assigned password
After assigning a password to your Call Log, you may later
decide that you do not want to use a password at all.
1.
Press
The display shows
d
2.
Enter your old password. The display shows
.
New
Press
or [Hold]. The display shows
No
assigned, which confirms that your password has
been deleted.
3.
Related features
Call Information
The same Call Display information as in Call Log is displayed,
but it is not recorded in a log.
Displays
You will see some of the following displays as you use Call Log.
This is a Call Log item with its
sequence number. When the first digit
is underlined, it is a new item.
NEXT
SMITH
MORE
This indicates that the call was
answered.
This indicates a long distance call.
Modular
System Coordinator Guide
Call Log 99
NEXT
The “slash” symbol
indicates that
the displayed information for a call has
been truncated.
MORE
This is the repeat call
shown
along with time and date display. It
indicates the number of calls you have
received from the same caller.
O
The Autobumping feature is active.
N
The Autobumping feature is
deactivated.
One or more calls have been
autobumped.
There is one new item in the Call Log.
f o r
I
There are two or more new items in
the Call Log.
The call was successfully logged with
Cal 1 1
Your active call must be held or
released before entering Call Log.
I n
I
The external line is in use.
The item was erased from the Call
Log.
This display shows that this call was
answered at telephone 227.
This display shows that this call was
manually logged.
This display shows that this call was
not answered.
Your Call Log is empty.
Modular DR5 System Coordinator Guide
100 Call Log
is full
No additional calls can be logged until
you either turn Autobumping ON, or
you delete some items in your log.
This indicates that there are one or
more items in your Message Waiting
List, and there are one or more new
entries in your Call Log.
New calls begin
This appears before the first “New”
item when navigating from the “Old”
items to the “New”.
(No free 1
All lines in the pool are in use.
No information is available on the call.
No log space has been assigned to
the telephone.
There are no new calls in the Call Log.
No
d items
There are no old or “viewed” items in
the Call Log.
The resume item is no longer in the
Call Log due to Autobumping, repeat
call update, or log reallocation.
The caller’s name is private.
Private number
The
number is private.
On an
‘Telephone, the active
call must be released before entering
Call Log.
1: Unknown call
The caller’s name and number are
unknown.
1: Unknown
The caller’s name is unavailable.
Modular DR5 System Coordinator Guide
Call Log 1 0 1
1: Unknown number
The caller’s number is unavailable.
Notes
You may want to use the punch-out overlay, which is provided in
the Call Log Feature Card. This card is available in a separately
Display Button Cap Kit. Please contact your
Customer Service representative.
The long distance indicator, as well as the caller’s name and
number, may not be shown in the log, depending on the Call
Display services provided by your local telephone company.
For tips on programming Call Logs, see the Call
section.
Modular DR5 System Coordinator Guide
102
Call Park
Call Park
Park a call
You can suspend a call so that it can be retrieved from any
telephone in your system.
1.
2 .
Press
.
Use the Page feature to announce the retrieval code
displayed by your telephone.
Retrieving a parked call
1. Select an internal line.
OR
If you have an M7100 Telephone, pick up the receiver.
2.
Dial the call park retrieval code.
Displays
You will see some of these displays while parking a call. You
may see some of these displays while retrieving a parked call.
parked
The person you were talking to has
already parked your call. You cannot
park the same call.
You have attempted to park a call with
no active call on your telephone. If the
call you wish to park is on hold, you
must reconnect to it before you can
park it.
id number
You have entered an invalid retrieval
code.
There was no call on the retrieval
code you entered.
You have attempted to park a call, but
there are no calls at your telephone.
Modular DR5 System Coordinator Guide
Call Park 103
You have tried to park a conference
call. Split the conference and park the
calls separately. The person who
retrieves the calls can reconnect the
conference.
Record the code shown. Use Page
t
or press
o
announce the call and its retrieval
code.
All available retrieval codes are in use.
Transfer the call or take a message
instead.
Notes
When you park a call, the system assigns one
codes for
the retrieval of the call. These codes consist of the Call Park
prefix, which may be any digit from 0 to 9, and a two digit call
number between 01 and 09. For example, if the Call Park prefix
is 4, the first parked call is assigned Retrieve Park code 401.
Your Installer sets the Call Park prefix in Configuration
programming. If the Call Park Prefix is set to None, parking is
disabled.
Your installer also sets the Call Park Callback delay in
Configuration programming. External calls parked for longer than
the program delay are returned to your telephone.
Modular
System Coordinator Guide
104
Call Pickup
Call Pickup
You can pick up a call that is ringing at another telephone.
[Feature]
Directed Pickup
You can answer any telephone that is ringing in your
system
1.
Press [Feature]
2.
Enter the internal number of the ringing telephone.
Group Pickup
Your
system can be divided into as many as nine Pickup
groups. If you are a member of a pickup group, you can pick up a
call that is ringing at any telephone in your pickup group:
1.
Press
Trunk Answer
The Trunk Answer feature allows you to answer an external call
that is ringing at any other telephone in your office.
Trunk Answer works only with calls that are ringing on lines for
which a Service Mode is active and if Trunk Answer is ON in
Administration programming.
Displays
You may see some of these displays while using a Call Pickup
feature.
joined
You are already connected to the
telephone that made the call you are
trying to pick up. This can happen if
you are on a call to a co-worker, your
co-worker dials the number of a
telephone in your Pickup group, and
attempt to pick up that call.
Modular DR5 System Coordinator Guide
Call Pickup 105
Your telephone is not a member of a
free
You have tried to pick up a call when
you have no line button available.
(Pickup) There is no call that you can
pick up or the call that was ringing has
already been answered.
(Trunk Answer) The call that is ringing
is on a line that is not in a Service
Mode.
You have attempted to pick up a call
on someone else’s private line.
Enter the internal number of the
telephone that is ringing. (You may
use an Internal
button to do
this.)
If you decide not to answer a ringing
call once you have activated Directed
The call will
Pickup, press
continue to ring.
Notes
Call Pickup cannot be used on private lines. Group Pickup can
not be used to retrieve a camped call.
To use Directed Pickup, the telephone must be ringing. If, for
example, the auxiliary ringer is ringing, but the call is not ringing
at a telephone, the call cannot be answered using Directed
Pickup. It must be answered normally at a telephone that has a
flashing indicator for the call, or by using Trunk Answer.
If a call is ringing on an Answer button, you can use Directed
Pickup to answer the call by entering the internal number of any
member of the Answer group.
Modular DR5 System Coordinator Guide
106 Call Pickup
If there is more than one incoming call at a telephone in a pickup
group, a call ringing on the Prime line is answered first followed
by calls on external lines and, finally, calls on internal lines.
If there is more than one incoming call on lines in a Service
Mode, the Trunk Answer feature picks up the external call that
has been ringing the longest.
The System Coordinator can assign telephones to one of nine
Pickup groups in Administration programming.
Modular
System Coordinator Guide
Call Queuing 107
Call Queuing
When you have more than one call ringing at your telephone, you
can choose the call that has the highest priority.
1.
Press
2.
The system connects you to the call that has the highest
priority.
Notes
Call Queuing answers incoming calls before callback and
camped calls.
Call Queuing can be programmed onto a memory button.
Modular DR5 System Coordinator Guide
108
On
Camp a call
You can send an external call to another telephone, even if all its
lines are busy.
Press
1.
2 .
Dial the number of the telephone you want to camp the call
to.
Related features
Transfer
Camp On is a variation of the Transfer feature.
Displays
You will see some of the following prompts while Camping a call.
You tried to camp a call to a telephone
that already has a camped call. The
call has come back to you. Press the
button or the line button to
reconnect to the call. On the M7100
Telephone, just pick up the receiver.
The person to whom you redirected a
call has Do Not Disturb active on the
telephone. The call has come back to
you. Press the
button or
the line button to reconnect to the call.
On the M7100 Telephone, just pick up
the receiver.
denied
‘Camp to:
Modular
You have tried to camp an internal
call. You can only camp external calls.
Dial the number of the internal
telephone to which the call will be
sent.
System Coordinator Guide
Camp On 1 0 9
The telephone to which you camped a
call did not answer the call. The call
has come back to you. Press
or
button to
reconnect to the call. On the M7100
Telephone, just pick up the receiver.
221
/Line001 hung
UP
call
A call you camped has come back to
you, but the caller hung up before you
could reconnect.
You have no call to camp. If the call
you want to camp is on hold, take it off
hold and then camp it.
The telephone to which you have
camped a call is out of service or is
being used for Configuration or .
Administration programming. The call
has come back to you. Press
or the line button to
reconnect to the call. On the M7100
Telephone, just pick up the receiver,
Release a call
The line that the camped call is on is
in use or that line does not appear at
your telephone. Release the line or
release an internal line.
Notes
If you use Call Queuing to answer a camped call, external calls
are answered before the camped call.
Camped calls appear on a line button on the receiving telephone,
if one is available. If not, there is just a message on the display
and Camp tones.
Modular
System Coordinator Guide
110 Conference
Conference
[Feature]
Create a conference
You can talk to two people at once.
1.
Make sure you have two calls, one active and one on hold.
2.
Press (Feature]
3.
Take the held call off hold (this is automatic on the M7100
Telephone).
Conference using Privacy
Normally your calls are private; no one else can pick up your line
and join in your conversation. You can turn privacy off for a call
allowing another person with the same line to press the-line
button and join in your conversation, forming a conference.
1.
Press
2.
Tell the other person to press the line button and join your
conversation.
Disconnect one party
You can disconnect one party from a conference and continue
talking to the other.
1.
Press the line button of the call that you want to disconnect.
The call that you want to keep is automatically put on hold.
OR
For the
Telephone, press (Feature]
which
again if
places one party on hold. Press
necessary, to put on hold the party that you want to keep.
The call is disconnected.
2.
Press
3.
To speak to the remaining party, press the line button of the
held call, or for the
Telephone, press [Hold].
Modular DR5 System Coordinator Guide
Conference 111
Independently hold two calls
For all
telephones except- the
Telephone, you can
put the two people on hold independently so that they cannot talk
to each other.
1.
Press the line button of one person. The other person is
automatically put on hold.
2.
Press [Hold]. The second person is put on hold.
You can reestablish the conference.
1.
Take one call off hold.
2.
Enter the Conference feature code.
3.
Take the other call off hold.
Put a conference on hold
You can put a conference on hold, allowing the other two people
to continue speaking to each other.
1.
Press [Hold]. The display shows
d.
You can reconnect to the conference.
1.
Press either of the held line buttons, or for the M7100
Telephone, press [Hold). You are reconnected.
Split a conference
You can talk with one person while the other person is on hold.
Press the line button of the person you want to speak to.
The other person is automatically put on hold.
OR
For the
Telephone, press
the first party on hold. Press
switch parties.
which puts
again if necessary to
You can reestablish the conference.
1.
Press [Feature]
2.
Take the held call off hold. This is not necessary for the
Telephone.
Modular
System Coordinator Guide
112
Conference
Related features
Unsupervised Conference
You can disconnect yourself from the conference and leave the
other two people talking by pressing ((Feature]
However,
if both of the other people are outside the system, there are
some restrictions: At least one of the outside callers must have
called you and that call must be on a disconnect supervised line.
Displays
You will see some of these displays while using the Conference
feature.
You are trying to add a fourth party to
your conference call, or to join two
conferences together. Release
call from the conference before adding
another, or keep the two conferences
separate.
Privacy control cannot be used on
internal or conference calls.
You have put a conference call on
hold.
You have tried to make a conference
call, but your system is already
handling its maximum number of
conference calls.
You are on a conference with the two
lines or telephones shown. You can
drop out of the conference and leave
the other two parties connected
(Unsupervised Conference) by
pressing
or entering the
Transfer feature code.
Make calls first
You have tried to set up a conference
call, without having made the calls that
are to be connected. Make both calls
first.
Modular DR5 System Coordinator Guide
Conference 113
/Make call first
You have tried to use Privacy Control
when you are not on a call.
You have tried to set ‘up a conference
call while connected to only one caller.
Put your first call on hold, make a
second call, and enter the Conference
feature code again.
You have put a conference call on
hold from your
Telephone,
then tried to get another line. Your
Telephone can handle only
two lines at a time, and your
conference call is using both of them.
Press
d 1
You have activated the Conference
feature with one call active and
another on hold. Press the line of the
call on hold to bring that person into
the conference.
Notes
Only the person who established the conference can process the
conference in any of the ways just described.
The Conference feature supports only three people.
If you are using an M7100 Telephone:
.
Your conference is connected as soon as you enter the
Conference feature code. There is no need to take the
second call off hold.
To split a conference, press
(3. Then, press
to change from one caller to the other.
You cannot independently hold two calls.
You cannot join an existing two-party call to establish a
Privacy conference although you can use the Privacy
feature for calls at your telephone.
Modular DR5 System Coordinator Guide
114 Conference
When a third person joins a conversation on a line that has
privacy turned OFF, the call becomes a conference. All the rules
applicable to a conference apply except that there is only
one-line in use, instead of the normal two. This means that you
cannot split a conference set up using Privacy.
In certain situations, you may experience lower volume levels
when using the Conference feature with two external calls.
Modular
System Coordinator Guide
COS Password 115
COS Password
Change your Class of Service
A Class of Service password is a six digit code that lets you
from your current Class of Service to one that lets you dial
numbers prohibited by your current Class of Service.
1.
Press [Feature]
2.
Enter your COS password.
Displays
You will see the first of these displays when entering a COS
password, you may also see the second.
(Blank display) Enter your password. It
will not be shown on the display.
id
You have entered a password that is
not programmed into your system.
Notes
If you use your
system from outside the office, you may
have to enter a Class of Service password to gain access to the
system. Class of Service passwords can give you access to
features not available with the regular Class of Service. See
Using
remotely.
You must enter a Class of Service password each time you wish
to make a call using a Class of Service not normally available on
your line or telephone.
allows up to 100 Class of Service Passwords.’
The System Coordinator defines Class of Service passwords in
Administration programming.
Modular DR5 System Coordinator Guide
116
Customizing your telephone
Customizing your telephone
You can change the way a telephone works in several ways.
Some of the following features are assigned to telephones in
Administration programming. You can turn other features ON and
OFF at individual telephones.
Automatic Handsfree
Automatic Handsfree lets you make or answer a call without
having to pick up the receiver or press the
button. The
telephone’s internal microphone and speaker turn on
automatically when you make or answer a call.
The System Coordinator assigns Automatic Handsfree capability
to a telephone in Administration programming. Full Handsfree
capability must be assigned to a telephone before Automatic
Handsfree capability can be assigned to it. This is also done in
Administration programming.
This feature is not available on M7100 Telephones.
Contrast Adjustment
You can set the contrast level of your telephone display.
1.
Press
2.
Choose the contrast level you like best. The number of
telephone
contrast levels available varies from one
to another.
This is the display you will
.
in Contrast adjustment.
Press a number for the contrast level
you want or press Up or DOWN. Press
or
to set the new
contrast level.
Modular
System Coordinator Guide
Customizing your telephone 117
Dialing Modes
You can set the dialing mode of your telephone.
1.
Press [Feature-]
2.
Choose the dialing mode you want.
supports three dialing modes; Automatic Dial, Pre-Dial,
and Standard Dial. All three modes support on-hook dialing.
(On-hook dialing means dialing a call without picking up the
receiver.) The special features of the Automatic and Pre-Dial
modes are available only when you dial on-hook.
The Dialing Modes feature code cannot be programmed onto a
memory button.
Standard Dial
In Standard Dial mode, you make a call by selecting a line and
dialing the number. If you have a Prime line, it is selected
automatically when you lift the receiver or press
Standard Dial does not support on-hook dialing on an M7100
Telephone. If you have an
Telephone, use the Automatic
Dial or Pre-Dial feature for on-hook dialing.
Automatic Dial
If you have a Prime line assigned to your telephone, Automatic
Dial allows you to dial a number without selecting a line. Your
Prime line is selected as soon as you start dialing a number.
Automatic Dial does not work if your Prime line is in use.
Telephones connected to an Analog Terminal Adapter
cannot use Automatic Dialing.
Pre-Dial
Pre-Dial allows you to enter a telephone number, check it, then
change it before actually making the call. The call is not dialed
until you select a line or line pool, or pick up the receiver.
Modular
System Coordinator Guide
118 Customizing your telephone
You can pre-dial both external and internal numbers. You must,
however, select the correct type of line (external or internal) for
the type of number you have entered.
If all the lines on your telephone are busy, you will not be able to
enter a telephone number.
If your telephone starts ringing while you are pre-dialing a
number, you can stop the ringing by turning on Do Not Disturb
([Feature]
This does not affect numbers you are
entering.
This is the display you will see when selecting a Dial mode.
dial
The current dial mode is shown. Press
or NEXT until the dial mode you
want appears. Press
or
to select the displayed dial mode. If
Automatic Dial is not available it is
because you have no Prime line.
Language Choice
English
You can select English as the language of your telephone
display.
1.
Press
[Feature)
Alternate Language
You can select the alternate language as the language of your
telephone display.
1.
Press [Feature]
Each
system supports English and one alternate
language.
systems are available with either French or
Spanish as the alternate language. Button caps are available in
both alternate languages.
You can select either English or the alternate language at each
telephone. When your system is first installed, all telephones will
use English.
Modular DR5 System Coordinator Guide
Customizing your telephone 119
You can program a memory button for one-touch switching
between languages. Program
onto the
button. Pressing the button will switch you back and forth
between English and the alternate language.
(2 cannot be programmed onto a memory
button.
One of the following displays will appear when you enter a
language choice feature code.
Telephone display messages will be in
Telephone display messages will be in
display messages will-be in
Move Line buttons
You can move external lines to different buttons on your
telephone. You can use this feature to arrange your lines in the
way that makes the most sense to you.
1.
Press
2.
Press the button you want to move the line from.
3.
Press the button you want to move the line to.
You will see some of these displays while moving lines.
id location/
You have tried to move a line to a
button that cannot be used as a line
button, such as a Handsfree/Mute
button, or an Answer button.
Press the button of the line you want
to move. Press Q U I T or
when you have finished moving lines.
Modular
System Coordinator Guide
120 Customizing your telephone
Press the button you want to move the
line to. Neither of the buttons is
erased. The lines, or the line and
feature,, simply switch places.
The button you are trying to move is
not a line button. If you are trying to
switch a line and a feature, move the
line to the feature button and not vice
versa.
Pulse/Tone Dialing
Each external line is set to either pulse or tone dialing. Pulse
dialing is the traditional method of dialing used by rotary dial or
push button single-line teiephones. Tone dialing allows
telephones to communicate with other devices such as .
answering machines. Tone dialing is required to access the
features that PBX systems may offer or to use another
system remotely. (For more information, see the section Using
remotely).
Your Installer sets your lines to pulse or tone dialing in
Configuration programming.
To switch from pulse to tone dialing
If your external lines are programmed for pulse dialing, you can
switch your telephone temporarily to tone dialing.
1.
Press q while on an active line. Once you hang up, your
telephone returns to pulse dialing.
Ring Type
[Feature]
You can choose one of four distinctive rings for your telephone.
This makes it easier to identify your telephone in an open office.
1.
Press
Customizing your telephone
121
This is the display you will see when choosing a ring type.
Press
or NEXT. You
hear the selected ring for two
seconds. Repeat until you hear the
ring you prefer, then press
or OK
- -
Ring Volume
You can set the volume at which your telephone rings.
Press
2.
Press
The telephone will ring.
to adjust the volume.
This is the display you will see while setting Ring volume.
Press either side of the volume bar
to adjust the volume.
Telephone Administration Lock
Telephone Administration Lock limits the ways in which you can
customize your telephone. There are three types of Telephone
Administration Lock: Full, Partial, and None.
Full Administration Lock lets you change the contrast of your
telephone’s display, use Ring Type, Ring Volume and Button
Inquiry, and control the volume of your speaker.
Partial Administration Lock allows you to forward your calls, turn
on Do Not Disturb and Service Modes, and use the Background
Music, Send Message, Ring Again, Privacy, and Trunk Answer
features.
None (No Administration Lock) allows you to access all features
that are programmed for your telephone. The System;:
Coordinator assigns Administration Lock to each telephone in
Administration programming.
Modular DR5 System Coordinator Guide
122 Customizing your telephone
Telephone Administration Lock does not affect call handling
features.
Related features
You can program your telephone’s memory buttons to dial
feature.
frequently used numbers with the
Feature programming
[Feature)
You can program feature codes onto your telephone’s memory
buttons using the Feature programming feature.
Speed Dial programming
I”]
You can program personal speed dial numbers onto speed dial
codes 71 to 94 using the Personal Speed Dial programming
feature.
Modular
System Coordinator Guide
Dialing 123
Dialing
One of the most important features of your telephone system is
the ability to dial telephone numbers. Many features require you
to dial telephone numbers. The displays associated with dialing
are listed here.
Direct-dial
You can dial a Direct-dial telephone with a single digit. The
Direct-dial telephone is usually in a central location, such as a
receptionist’s or secretary’s desk. It is usually a Prime telephone
and a Central Answering Position (CAP).
External line access code
The external line access code is the number you dial to get an.
external line. You will need to use an external line access code if
your Prime line is an internal line. The code will connect you to a
line pool through your internal line.
If your Prime line is an external line, or if you select an external
line on your telephone, you will not need an external line access
code. You will always need an external line access code on an
Telephone.
Your Installer assigns the external line access code in
Configuration programming.
Last Number Redial
You can redial the last external number you‘ dialed.
1.
Press [Feature]
Ring Again
If you can’t get through to someone on your
system
because their telephone is busy or there is no answer, you can
have the
system tell you when they hang up or next use
their phone.
Press
before you hang up.
Modular DR5 System Coordinator Guide
124 Dialing
You can also use Ring Again to tell you when a busy line pool
becomes available.
Using Ring Again cancels any previous Ring Again requests at
your telephone.
[Feature]
Cancel Ring Again
You can cancel a ring again request by entering the Cancel Ring
Again feature code.
Saved Number Redial
You can save the number of the external call you are on
(providing you dialed the call) so that you can call it again later.
1.
Press
while you are still on the call.
You can dial a saved number.
1.
Press
when you are not on a call.
Related features
The
feature lets you program telephone numbers onto
memory buttons for one-touch dialing.
Dialing modes
supports three different methods of dialing. They are
described in the Customizing your telephone section under the
heading Dialing Modes.
Line Pools
Line pools give you access to many external lines.
Priority Call
If you get a busy signal when you call someone in your office,
you can interrupt them using Priority Call.
Speed Dial
The Speed Dial feature lets you dial programmed numbers by
entering speed dial codes.
Modular
System Coordinator Guide
Dialing’/ 125
Displays
You will see some of these displays while selecting lines and
dialing telephone numbers and in response to the numbers you
dial.
You are dialing using Pre-Dial. To
erase an incorrect digit, press
or
When the number is
complete, select a line or lift the
receiver.
The telephone you have called has no
internal lines available. You may press
to use the Ring Again or
Message features or press PRIORITY
to make a Priority Call.
221
PRIORITY
This prompt remains on your
as long as you are on a call you have
dialed. You may transfer the call by
pressing
Your telephone is already connected
to the telephone you are trying to call.
Check your active line buttons, and
return to that call.
LRTER
Wait for the telephone to be
answered, or press
to use the
Ring Again or Messages features.
Wait for the telephone to be
answered. If no one answers, you may
press
to use the Ring Again or
Messages features, or press
PRIORITY to make a Priority Call.
/Can’t
You cannot use Ring Again on your
current call. You can only use Ring
Again while you have a busy signal on
an internal call or line pool request or
while an internal call is ringing.
Modular DR5 System Coordinator Guide
.
126
Dialing
disturb
use: 221
id
number
Line denied
The telephone you are calling is in Do
to
Not Disturb mode. Press
use the Ring Again or Messages
features, or press
to make
a Priority Call.
The line you have chosen is in use at
another telephone. Use a different
line, or wait until the line is free.
You have entered a number that does
not exist.
You have attempted to use someone
else’s private line.
The line you have chosen is in use.
Try another. If the line remains in use
and never seems to clear, it may be
hung. See Lines in the System
Features section for information on
hung lines.
Enter the digits of the number you
want to dial.
You have tried to make or receive a
call when no line button was available.
last.
You have not dialed an external
telephone number since the last
power interruption or system reset.
Either you have no Prime line or your
Prime line is busy. Select a line
manually before dialing.
No number saved
You have tried to save the number of
an incoming call. You can only save
numbers that you have dialed
yourself.
You have tried to use Saved Number
Redial, but have not first saved a
telephone
The Saved
Number Redial memory is empty.
Modular DR5 System Coordinator Guide
Dialing 127
in service
You have entered the number of a
telephone that is not in service.
The telephone you have called is on
another call. Press
to use the
Ring Again or Message features.
Restricted call
The call you are trying to make is not
allowed for your Class of Service.
Make your call on a line or telephone
that is not restricted, or use a Class of
Service password to bypass the
restriction.
Press
to use Ring Again. Press
if you prefer to send a message.
See Message and Ring Again.
a 1
Either you have no Prime line, or-the
Prime line is in use, or the line
programmed onto an Autodialer,
Speed Dialer, or Hotline is in use.
Select a line and dial again.
Press
to send a message. See
Messages.
You have dialed your own number.
Notes
The maximum number of digits that Last Number Redial or
Saved Number Redial records is 24.
You can copy the telephone number from a Last Number Redial
or Saved Number Redial button onto an
button. Simply
enter the Last Number Redial or Saved Number Redial feature
code when the
feature asks you to enter a number.
Each telephone can save only one number at a time with Saved
Number Redial, not one number for each line.
Modular
System Coordinator Guide
128 Do Not Disturb
Do Not Disturb
Do Not Disturb
You can stop calls from ringing at your telephone.
1.
Press
Only Priority Calls will ring at your telephone. A line button will
flash when you receive a call, but the call will not ring..
You can refuse to answer a particular call (including a Priority
Call).
1.
Press [Feature]
while your telephone is ringing.
Cancel Do Not Disturb
You can cancel Do Not Disturb.
1.
Press
Displays
not.
Your telephone is in Do Not Disturb
cancel Do Not Disturb.
mode.
Your telephone is receiving calls
normally.
Notes
If you use Do Not Disturb while an external call is ringing, the call
will be forwarded to the Prime telephone. It may also be
answered by anyone whose telephone shares the line it is on.
Once you turn Do Not Disturb on, calls will be forwarded to the
Prime telephone only if there is no other telephone on which the
line appears. (The Delayed Ring Transfer feature transfers all
unanswered calls to the Prime telephone after a specified time.)
Modular DR5 System Coordinator Guide
Feature Programming 129
Feature
Programming.
Program a button
You can program a feature code onto a memory button.
1.
Press
2.
For all telephones other than the M7100 Telephone, select
the button you want to program.
3.
Enter the feature code you want to program onto the button.
Erase a button
You can erase a memory button.
q
1.
Press
feature code.
2.
For all telephones other than the M7100 Telephone, select
the button you want to erase.,
3.
Erase the button by pressing
You cannot erase Answer,
. This is actually the External
or
Intercom, or line
buttons.
Button inquiry
You can check the function of any line, Intercom, or memory
button on your
telephone.
1.
Press [Feature]
2.
For all telephones other than the M7100 Telephone, press
the button you want to know about.
3.
Read the display.
When you are labeling or replacing a button cap, activate Button
Inquiry so that you won’t accidentally activate a feature.
Modular DR5 System Coordinator Guide
130 Feature Programming
Displays
You will see some of the following displays while programming,
erasing, or checking buttons. A variety of displays appear in
Button Inquiry. See the display
name> for information
applicable to these displays.
Press
to move either right or left,
or press
or
to view a
number that is too long to fit on the
display. Press
or
when
you are finished.
The name of the feature assigned to a
button is displayed when you press
the button. SHOW appears when there
is more information available. Press
SHOW for additional information.
If you are checking a Speed Dial
button, enter the two-digit Speed Dial
code that you want to check.
(Enter
I
To erase a button, press [Hold].
While entering a feature code you can
press [Feature] or QUIT to quit
programming or
to clear out
the characters you have entered. The
system will accept the entry as soon
as you enter a valid feature code.
Press
and enter the feature
code you want to program onto the
button. Invalid codes cannot be
entered.
Feature moved
You have programmed a button with a
feature that was already programmed
onto another button. The feature has
moved to the button you just
programmed. Its original button is
blank.
You cannot program an autodialer or
feature button while you are on a call.
Modular
System Coordinator Guide
Feature Programming 131
Press the button you want to check.
Press
or EXIT when you
are finished.
and HOLD
To erase a button, press
To erase a button, press
c
a
l
l
s
or
You have tried to use Button Inquiry
while you were on a call or had calls
on hold.
Notes
When this book tells you to enter a feature code, you can do so
by pressing a memory button programmed with that feature code.
in some cases, pressing the button a second time cancels the
feature.
On the M7100 Telephone, Button inquiry shows your internal
number followed by the function assigned to your single memory
button.
Any memory button not programmed as an external or internal
line, target line, Answer button, or Handsfree/Mute button, is
available for programming features.
The following feature codes cannot be programmed onto a
memory button: Long Tones and any code beginning with
except Language Choice and Contrast Adjustment.
Modular
System Coordinator Guide
132 Group Listen
Group Listen
Group Listen
You can let people in your office listen in on a call.
Press
You will hear the caller’s voice
through your telephone’s speaker.
l
2.
Continue to speak to the caller through the telephone
receiver. The caller will not hear people in your office.
Cancel Group Listen
You can cancel Group Listen for the current call.
1.
Press
Group Listen is canceled automatically when you hang up the
Group Listen call.
Displays
You may see one of these displays with Group Listen.
You have tried to use Group Listen
when you are not on a call.
You have tried to use Group Listen
without picking up the receiver.
Notes
Keep the receiver away from the speaker, or you may hear
feedback. The higher the volume, the more the feedback. Press
the
button to prevent feedback when hanging up.
You can switch a Group Listen call to Handsfree by pressing
To switch back to Group Listen, enter the Group
Listen feature code again.
Modular DR5 System Coordinator Guide
Handsfree/Mute 133
Make calls without lifting the receiver
You can make calls without lifting the receiver. However, you
must have a Prime line assigned to your telephone.
1.
Press
The telephone’s internal microphone and
speaker are automatically turned on.
2.
Dial your call.
3.
Speak normally.
Answer calls without lifting the receiver
You can answer calls without lifting the receiver.
1.
When your telephone rings, press
The
telephone’s internal microphone and speaker are
automatically turned on if you have a Prime line assigned to
your telephone.
2.
Speak normally.
Mute Handsfree
You can switch off the telephone microphone so that you can
speak privately to someone in your office while you are on a
handsfree call.
1.
Press
The microphone is turned off.
You can turn the microphone back on again and continue your
handsfree call.
1.
Press
Regular call to Handsfree
You can turn any regular call into a handsfree call.
1.
Press
a.nd hang up the receiver.
Handsfree to regular call
You can turn a handsfree call into a regular call.
1
Lift.the receiver.
Modular
System Coordinator Guide
134 Handsfree/Mute
Notes
The indicator next to
is solid when you are in
Handsfree mode. It flashes when you mute the microphone.
ln open-concept environments, use the receiver or a headset
when Handsfree communication is not necessary, or when you
need privacy during a call. Always tell the person you are
speaking that you are using Handsfree, and let them know
who else is listening to the conversation.
Direct your voice toward the telephone. The closer you are to the
telephone, the easier it is for the microphone to transmit your
voice clearly to your listener.
Wait for your caller to finish speaking before you speak. The
microphone and speaker cannot both be on at once. Your caller’s
voice may be cut off if you both speak at the same time. Noises
such as a tapping pencil could
enough to turn on your
microphone and cut off your caller’s speech.
To prevent a possible echo, keep the area around your
telephone free of paper and other objects that might screen your
microphone. Turning down the microphone’s volume (using
also prevents echo.
Place the telephone so that any unavoidable local noise (such as
an air conditioner) is behind it. This limits the amount of
disruptive background noise.
A Handsfree button is assigned to a telephone by the System
Coordinator in Administration programming.
The Handsfree/Mute feature is not available on M7100
Telephones.
Modular DR5 System Coordinator Guide
Hold 135
Hold
1
Put a call on hold
You can temporarily suspend a call.
1.
Press [Hold].
When a call is on hold, its indicator flashes on all telephones that
have access to the line. The call can be retrieved from any of
these telephones.
Retrieve a held call
You can connect to a call on hold.
1.
Press the flashing line button of the held call.
Automatic Hold
You can switch from one call to another.
1.
Press the line button of the caller you want to speak to. Your
current caller is put on hold automatically.
Listen
Hold
If you have been put on hold, you can hang up the receiver while
you wait for the other person to return.
Press [Hold].
2.
Hang up the receiver.
3.
Press the line button of the call. You may hear indications
from the far end that you are on hold (for example, tones or
music).
4.
When the person you were talking to returns you will hear
them through your telephone speaker. Lift the receiver and
talk.
Modular
System Coordinator Guide
136 Hold
Exclusive Hold
You can put a call on Exclusive Hold so that it can be retrieved
only at your telephone.
1.
Press [Feature]
or
The line
appears busy on all other telephones, and the
cannot be
picked up by anyone else in the office.
Music/Tones/Silence on Hold
External callers can hear either music, periodic tone, or silence
while they are on hold. In order for your caller to hear music, your
company must have installed a music source.
WARNING
In accordance with U.S. copyright law, a license may be
required from the American Society of Composers,
Authors and Publishers, or a similar organization, if radio
or TV broadcasts are transmitted through the Music on
Hold feature of this telecommunication system.
Northern Telecom Inc. hereby disclaims any liability
arising out of the failure to obtain such a license.
Your Installer sets this feature to music, tones, or silence in
Configuration programming.
Notes
On the
Telephone,
alternates between two
lines; one active, one on hold. The M7100 Telephone cannot
retrieve a call placed on hold by another telephone.
If the Automatic Handsfree feature has been assigned to your
telephone, use the Handsfree/Mute feature instead of Listen on
Hold.
Modular DR5 System Coordinator Guide
Host System Signaling 137
Host System Signaling
You can access Host systems, such as Private Branch
by using Host System Signaling
Exchanges (PBX) from
features (also known as End-to-End Signaling). These features
either send a special signal to the host system or allow you to
program delays required by host systems onto external
buttons or Speed Dial codes.
Host system’ signaling codes
Link
If your
system is connected to a Private Branch
Exchange (PBX), you can use a Link signal to access special
features.
The Link signal can also be included as part of a longer stored
sequence on an External
button or in a Speed Dial
uses two of the 24 spaces in a dialing
code. The Link symbol
sequence.
The Pause feature enters a 1.5 second delay in a dialing
sequence on an external line. This is often required for signaling
remote devices, such as answering machines, or when reaching
through to PBX features or Host systems.
You can obtain a Pause with one button press if you program the
feature code onto a memory button. More than one Pause can
be programmed onto an External
button.
The Pause symbol
sequence.
For Pulse Dialing,
sequence.
uses one of the 24 spaces in a dialing
inserts a 1.5 second pause into the dialing
Modular
System Coordinator Guide
138 Host System Signaling
Programmed Release
The Programmed Release feature performs the function of the
button in a programmed dialing sequence. When the system
encounters Programmed Release in a programmed dialing
sequence, it stops dialing and hangs up the call. The
takes up two of the 24 spaces
Programmed Release symbol
in programmed dialing sequence.
Run/Stop
Run/Stop inserts a break point into a sequence of dialed
numbers or characters used for automatic dialing. This’may be
necessary when you are connecting to a PBX or similar Host
system.
For example, you may call a company with an automated
attendant that instructs you to dial the internal number you need.
You can program the company number, a Run/Stop, then the
internal number on one External
button. Press the
autodialer once to dial the company number. When you hear the
automated attendant, press the autodialer again to dial the
internal number.
The Run/Stop symbol (S) uses one of the 24 spaces in an
or Speed Dial sequence.
External
Timed Release
The Timed Release feature inserts a 1.5
pause into a
sequence. You can use it in a dialing sequence for accessing a
remote system, such as a PBX. You can also dial it if you wish to
release a call from your line but keep the line for another call.
You will return to dial tone.
The Timed Release symbol
takes up two of the spaces in a
programmed dialing sequence.
Modular
System Coordinator Guide
Host System Signaling
139
Displays
You may see this display while entering Host System Signaling
codes.
You have entered a code that can only
be used in a programmed
or
Speed Dial sequence, not on a call
you dial directly. Programmed
Release and Run/Stop are for use in
programmed dialing sequences only.
Notes
If your external telephone lines are programmed for Pulse
Dialing, you can temporarily switch to Tone Dialing by pressing
.
q after selecting the line. Tone Dialing lets your
telephone communicate with devices and services that respond
to tone signals, such as automatic switchboards, and fax or
answering machines.
Modular DR5 System Coordinator Guide
140 Line Pools
Line Pools
[Feature)
Use a line pool
A line pool is a group of external lines that can be shared by
many telephones. You can use a line in a line pool to make an
external call.
1.
If you have a free internal line, dial a line pool access code
on an internal line. (You do not need the Line Pool feature
code.) If you have no free internal line, press
and then a line pool access code.
Everyone in the office should have a list of the line pool access
codes for the line pools their telephones can use.
Displays
You may see some of the following displays while using a line
pool. For displays associated with dialing telephone numbers,
see the Dialing section.
Enter a line pool access code.
i n
id
Line in
Access to the line pool you requested
is denied in Configuration
programming.
You have entered an invalid line pool
access code.
The line chosen by the system for
your line pool request became active
before connecting with your call. Retry
the line pool request.
There is no free button on which the
line pool line can appear.
free 1
You have tried to access your line
pool, but there are no lines in the line
pool or all the lines are busy. Use Ring
Again or call again later.
Modular DR5 System Coordinator Guide
Line Pools 1 4 1
Notes
You do not usually need to enter the Line Pool feature code to
use a line pool. Simply dial the line pool access code on an
internal line. If you have no free internal lines, you will need to
use the feature code to get a line pool. You will also need it to
program access to a specific line pool onto
button.
You can program a button to access a line pool by programming
the Line Pool feature code and a line pool access code onto a
When
memory button in Feature programming
all the lines in a line pool are busy, the indicator for the Line Pool
button turns on. The indicator turns off when a line becomes
available.
Your
system can have 15 line pools, and a telephone
can be programmed to access any number of them.
You can use a line pool only to make external calls.
If no lines are available in the line pool, you can use Ring Again
at the busy tone. You will be notified when a line in the line pool
becomes available. See Ring Again.
Your Installer gives telephones access to line pools in
Configuration programming. Each line pool is assigned a line
pool access code Configuration programming.
Modular
System Coordinator Guide
142
Line Redirection
Line Redirection
Redirect a line
Line Redirection lets you send your external calls to a telephone
outside the office. You may choose to redirect all your external
lines or only some of them.
1.
Press
2.
Select the outgoing line to be used for redirected calls.
3.
Enter the number to which calls will be redirected.
4.
Select the lines to be redirected.
---
Cancel Line Redirection
You can cancel Line Redirection.
Press
2.
Select the lines for which redirection is to be canceled.
Related features
Call forward
Note the differences between Line Redirection and Call Forward.
Call Forward forwards all calls that arrive at a particular
telephone to another telephone within the
system. Line
redirection redirects only the lines you specify, no matter which
telephones they appear on, to a telephone outside the
system. Line Redirection takes precedence over Call Forward.
Displays while redirecting lines
You will see some of the following displays while programming
Line Redirection. The displays you see while canceling
redirection are listed after this chart. See the Dialing section for
displays that occur while entering telephone numbers.
Continue entering digits. Press BKSP
or
to delete incorrect
digits. Press
or
when
you are finished.
Modular DR5 System Coordinator Guide
Line Redirection 143
denied
You cannot perform line redirection on
an
Telephone.
i n
Line Redirection is not allowed on
your telephone. To allow Line
Redirection, the Allow Redirect
parameter must be set to
Enter the telephone number to which
you wish to redirect calls using one of
the following methods:
l
l
l
In use: 221
Press an External
button.
Enter an external telephone
number of no more than 24 digits.
Then, press
or
Press
or
if, the line
you have chosen as the outgoing
line is a private network line that
does not require you to dial digits.
You have tried to program redirection
while someone else is programming
redirection. Only one person can
program line redirection at a time.
The line you are trying to use for
redirecting calls is for incoming calls
only. Choose an outgoing line.
Press
or the
button to begin
or
to
redirection. Press
cancel a previous redirection.
You have one external line on your
telephone, but you need a second line
to perform line redirection. Redirect
your external line using a tine
as
the outgoing line.
line
You are attempting to redirect a
and the line you have chosen is
outgoing line you have selected
destination. You cannot redirect
to itself. Select another line.
Modular
line
the
as a
a line
System Coordinator Guide
144
Line Redirection
Enter a valid line pool access code.
This message appears when you have
successfully redirected a line or
successfully canceled redirection of a
line.
You have attempted to redirect a line,
but someone else has already
redirected that line. You may press
OVERRIDE or
to override the
previous redirection and redirect the
line as you wish.
call
The destination you have chosen for
line redirection is restricted.
Select the line that will be used to
redirect calls out of the system, using
one of the following methods:
l
l
l
l
QUIT
Press an external line button.
Press an internal line button and
dial a line pool access code.
Press a line pool memory button.
Press an External
button.
Press the lines that are to be
redirected. To deselect a line, press it
again. You may press
to redirect
all your lines.
1
RLL
Continue to press the lines that are to
be redirected. Press
or
when you are finished.
line
The line you are attempting to redirect
cannot be redirected because the
hardware does not support redirection.
Modular DR5 System Coordinator Guide
Line Redirection 145
Displays while canceling redirection
You will see the following displays while canceling Line
Redirection.
This line is redirected by someone
else. Press
or
to cancel
redirection of
line.
Press the lines that are no longer to
be redirected. The lines light up as
you press them. Once you cancel
redirection for a line you cannot
restore it by pressing the line again.
to cancel
You may press
redirection for all your lines. When you
are finished, press
or
Continue to press the lines that are no
longer to be redirected. Press
or
(Hold] when you are finished.
Notes
You can answer the telephone if it rings while you are in the
middle of programming Line Redirection, but none of the
call handling features will be available until the feature times out.
feature to process the call, you must
If you need to use a
quit Line Redirection programming by pressing the
button Do not press
or you will disconnect the call you
are trying to process.
While you are programming Line Redirection you will not receive
any indication of calls that do not actually ring at your telephone.
The system does not check that the number you give for Line
Redirection is a valid one. If you redirect to an invalid number,
redirection will fail. Using an Autodialer to enter the redirection
number helps avoid this possibility. An Autodialer used for line
redirection must have a specific line programmed onto it.
Modular DR5 System Coordinator Guide
146 Line Redirection
If you use the
button to redirect all your lines, it is important
that you wait until all the lines on your telephone light up before
pressing
or
If you press
or
before
all the lines light up, those lines not lit will not be redirected.
Be aware of the consequences of redirecting your lines. If you
redirect your target line to your home, for instance, and someone
calls you from home, they will get a busy signal when the system
tries to call the telephone they are using. Companies with offices
in different time zones should avoid situations in which the lines
from the eastern office are redirected to the west and those from
the west are redirected to the east. This could result in a costly
long distance redirection loop.
The system can be set up so that redirected calls give a brief ring
on telephones in the
system as they are redirected.
These calls cannot be answered within the system until you
cancel redirection.
The line chosen for redirecting calls on other lines can still be.
used normally when it is not busy on a redirected call. To avoid
redirection failing because the chosen line is in use, choose a
line pool with several lines in it.
In certain situations, callers may experience lower volume levels
when you use Selective Line Redirection to an external location.
Modular DR5 System Coordinator Guide
Long Tones 147
Long Tones
Use long tones
The Long Tones feature lets you control the length of a tone so
that you can signal devices such as fax or answering machines
which require tones longer than the standard 120 milliseconds.
1.
While on a call, press
2.
Press the dial pad buttons to produce the appropriate tones.
Each tone will sound for as long as you hold down the
button.
Displays
You will see some of the following displays while using Long
Tones.
At the appropriate time, press any dial
pad button. Hold each button down for
as long as necessary. You can cancel
Long Tones by pressing
or
[Hold
/Make call
You have tried to use Long Tones
when you are not on a call.
The person you are calling has
pressed
long tones.
canceling your
Notes
Long Tones can be used on any call except a conference call.
system to activate a
You can use internal lines of the
in
device connected to an Analog Terminal Adapter
another area of your office; or external lines to access devices
outside the
system.
Modular DR5 System Coordinator Guide
148 Messages
Messages
The Messages feature allows you to leave a message on the
telephone, and lets you know if you
display of another
have any messages waiting. The Messages feature uses a
Message Waiting List to keep a record of your internal messages
and your (external) voice mail messages (if you subscribe to a
Voice Message service with visual Message Waiting Indication).
From your Message Waiting List, you can:
view your messages,
call back the internal caller who left a message,
l
.
erase an internal message,
call your Voice Message Center that left a message(s), and,
clear a message sent by your Voice Message Center (the
message still remains at the Center until it is erased there).
[Feature] q
Send a message
You can leave a message on the display of another telephone in
your
system.
1.
Press
2.
A one-line display shows
to:
OR
A two-line display shows M e s s a g e 1 ist. Press
display Message t o :
3.
to
Enter the internal number that is to receive your message.
OR
Press an internal
4.
button.
Your recipient’s display identifies that the message has
arrived.
Show your sent messages
On a telephone with a two-line display, you can show and scan
the messages you have sent.
1.
Press [Feature]
The display shows Message 1 ist.
Modular DR5 System Coordinator Guide
Messages 149
2.
Press SHOW to display your first sent message.
Cancel a sent message
You can cancel a message that you have sent to someone.
1.
Press [Feature]
f
oThe display shows
r Cancel
2.
Enter the internal number for the message that you want to
cancel.
:
Notification of message(s)
If another user in your
system or your Voice Message
Center has sent you a message, your display reads
for YOU or
for YOU . If you also have
items in your Call Log, your display reads Messages Cal
Enter your Message Waiting List
To enter your Message Waiting List:
1.
Press [Feature]
The display shows the first item.
Navigate through your Message Waiting List
To navigate forward through your list, press NEXT or
navigate backward, press
To
Call from your Message Waiting List
From your Message Waiting List, you can call the person (or your
Voice Message Service) who sent the message. First, you may
want to view your messages and decide if you want to reply to
them.
1. Press (Feature]
2. Press NEXT or
The display shows the first message.
to scroll through the list of messages.
3. To call a particular number, press
or q
. The telephone
number that is dialed to access your Voice Message Center is
programmed in Administration programming. This telephone
or q
.
number is dialed automatically when you press
If you wish to use a line other than the programmed line, exit
from the Message Waiting List and dial the Voice Message
Center telephone number using normal dialing methods.
Modular
System Coordinator Guide
150 Messages
Remove items from your List
You can erase an internal message or clear a message you have
received from your Voice Message Center. When you clear this
message from your Message Waiting List, it still exists at your
Voice Message Center until you erase it there. To erase a voice
message, refer to your Voice Message Center documentation.
1.
From an idle telephone, press t o
e r a s e
or clear the first message (either an internal message or a
message from your Voice Message Center).
OR
From within your Message Waiting List, press
or
or
for the item that you want to remove.
Related
Call Log
The status display for the Message Waiting List shares the same
display with the Call Log status display.
Displays
You will see some of the following displays while sending
messages.
When reviewing the messages you
have sent, press NEXT to view the
next message or
to erase the
message on the display.
This is the Message Waiting List
display for internal messages. Press
NEXT to see the next message. Press
to reply to the message. Press
to erase the message.
Can’t send,
You have tried to send a message to a
Analog Terminal Adapter. The
Analog Terminal Adapter does
not have a display so it cannot show a
message.
You have entered an invalid number
when attempting to cancel a message.
Modular DR5 System Coordinator Guide
Messages 151
Dial the internal number to which you
sent the message you wish to cancel.
You have cleared an external
message from your Message Waiting
List. The message itself still exists in
your Voice Message Center until you
erase it there.
NEXT
You have erased an internal message.
This message does not pertain to
M7100 Telephones. If you try to
access your Message Waiting List
while on an active call, ‘this display
advises you to hold or release the
present call.
or release
You are trying to call from your
Message Waiting List. The line that
you are trying to use is being used by
user.
the identified
use: 221
This is the Message Waiting List
display. For that particular voice
message, it tells you the line the calf
came in on, and the name of that line.
Message denied
I
You have tried to send a message to
an invalid internal number or to a
telephone that is out of service.
You have a one item in your Message
Waiting List, and you have no new
entries in your Call Log. Press
‘to
review the message.
The
display button appears only
if you have outstanding messages.
Press
to review or erase
messages you have sent. Press
to send a new message.
Message
Enter the internal number of the
telephone to which you would like to
send a message.
Modular DR5 System Coordinator Guide
152
Messages
Messages & Calls
This indicates that there is more than
one item in your Message Waiting
List, and there are one or more new
entries in the Call Log.
You have more than one item in your
Message Waiting List, and you have
no new entries in your Call Log. Press
to review the messages.
You have no line button free with
which to reply to a message.
No
messages
No number stored
You don’t have any messages to
cancel or there are no messages to
scan through.
There has been no number.
programmed for the Voice Message
Center. To program the number, see
the Programming chapter.
If you have an M7100 Telephone, this
is displayed when you try to reply to a
message while on an active call. You
must release your call before entering
your Message Waiting List.
eir list full
I
You are trying to send a message to a
telephone whose message waiting list
is full.
You have tried to send a message but
your telephone’s list of sent messages
is full. Cancel one of the messages
you have sent, if possible, or wait until
you have received a reply to one of
those messages.
Notes
You can send up to four messages to different telephones,
including your Voice Message Center. If your telephone is a
Direct-dial telephone or a Central Answering Position, you can
send messages to 30 telephones.
Modular DR5 System Coordinator Guide
Messages
153
You can receive up to four messages from different telephones,
including your Voice Message Center. The single message from
your Voice Message Center may pertain to several voice
messages.
Any message can be canceled either by the person who sent it
or by the person who received it.
If your reply to a message is forwarded or is answered at another
telephone using the Call Pickup feature, the message remains on
your telephone until you cancel it or successfully contact the
telephone that sent the message.
Modular
System Coordinator Guide
154
Telephones
Telephones
This section covers the basic features of your
and optional equipment that may be attached to it.
telephone
Buttons
, Feature button
You use the Feature button to invoke
Using
features section.
features. See the
Hold button
You use the Hold button to put calls on hold. See the Hold
display button on
section. it is also used in place of the
telephones with one-line displays.
Memory buttons
Memory buttons are the buttons with indicators on the M7208,
and M7324 Telephones, and the dual buttons without
indicators on the
Telephone. There is also a single
memory button, without an indicator, on the M7100 Telephone.
Memory buttons can be used for any of the following buttons,
except that lines and Answer buttons must appear on buttons
with indicators.
Answer buttons
You can use an Answer button to monitor calls on another
person’s telephone. All calls to the monitored telephone appear
on the Answer button. Such calls may also ring at the telephone
with the Answer button, depending on how the system is
configured. Answer buttons are most useful for a secretary who
monitors incoming calls for one or several managers.
If more than one call is ringing at the manager’s telephone, the
first call appears on the secretary’s Answer button. Any
subsequent calls appear on Intercom buttons if they are
available.
Modular
System Coordinator Guide
Telephones 155
More than one secretary may have an Answer button for a single
manager. This allows two or more secretaries to handle calls for
a busy manager.
Similarly, one person can handle calls for up to four other people,
using separate Answer buttons for each person.
A secretary’s telephone should have a memory button with an
button for the
indicator programmed as the Internal
manager’s telephone. This allows the secretary to call the
manager and to deal efficiently with incoming calls.
You cannot make calls using Answer buttons.
buttons
buttons let you dial numbers by pressing a single button.
See the
section.
Line buttons
You have one line button for each line assigned to your
telephone. You press the line button to select the line you want to
answer or use to make a call. Having several line buttons allows
‘you immediate access to more than one line so you can handle
and monitor calls easily. The M7100 Telephone does not have
line buttons and can have a maximum of two lines. You can
switch between its two lines, one active and one on hold, by
pressing [ H o l d ] .
Programmed Feature Buttons
Programmed feature buttons allow you to invoke
features
by pressing a single button. See the Feature Programming
section.
Release button
Pressing
ends a call. You do not have to p’ut the receiver
down.
also ends feature programming.
While you are on a call, do not press
to end a feature you
are using (such as Show Message). If you do, you will disconnect
the call. Use
instead.
Modular
System Coordinator Guide
156
Telephones
Volume Bar
The Volume Bar controls the volume of the receiver, telephone
ring, Handsfree speaker, headset and Background Music. Press
either end of the volume bar
to adjust the volume.
Headset
A headset lets you keep both hands free while you are on a call
without others overhearing your telephone conversations.
If you plug a headset into your telephone while you are on a call,
your telephone’s microphone and speaker (or your receiver if you
are on a regular call) are turned off and your headset microphone
and earpiece are turned on.
You must have the
feature assigned to your
telephone if you wish to use a headset.
While you are using the headset, the receiver and the switch in
the telephone cradle do not work.
A headset cannot be used on an M7100 Telephone.
Using a headset
While on a call using the headset, press
headset on and off.
to turn your
To answer a call, press
To adjust the volume, press the appropriate side of the volume
bar
To change to a Handsfree call while you are on a call using your
headset, unplug your headset. Your telephone’s microphone and
speaker turn on and the call becomes a Handsfree call. (It is a
good idea to put the call on hold while you do this.)
Modular DR5 System Coordinator Guide
Telephones 157
You may see this prompt when you try to use a headset.
You are attempting to use a headset,
but Handsfree/Mute is not
are not
for your telephone. If you
a headset, you have
accidentally plugged your telephone
receiver into the headset outlet on the
bottom of the telephone.
Hearing Aid Compatibility
The receivers on all
telephones are compatible with
hearing aids as defined in the FCC rules, Part 68, section
68.316.
Note:
Not all hearing aids are optimized for
telephone.
a
Wall Mounting
Most
telephones can be mounted on a wall. Contact the
Installer or Service Representative if you wish to have any
telephones in your system wall-mounted.
Modular
System Coordinator Guide
158 Page
Page
Make a page announcement
You can make announcements over the
q
1.
Press [Feature]
2.
Choose a page type.
3.
If necessary, choose a zone.
4.
Make your announcement.
5.
Press
system.
.
Page types are :
through the telephone speakers (Internal Page)
through an external speaker (External Page)
El
both Internal and External (Combined Page)
Paging shortcuts
Instead of entering the Page feature code followed by the page
type, you can enter the following shortcut codes.
internal
and zone (0 to 6)
(Feature]
External
Combined
(code 2 has no zones)
and zone (0 to 6)
Related features
Voice Call
You can make an announcement to one person by placing a
voice call to their telephone.
Displays
You will see some of these displays while making a Page
announcement.
in
Your telephone has not been
programmed to allow paging.
Modular DR5 System Coordinator Guide
Page 159
zone:
Enter the desired zone number (O-6)
or press
to page to all zones. (0
equals all zones.)
You have entered a page zone code
that is not between 0 and 6.
Select the type
pressing:
or SETS
or
q or BOTH
timeout
of page you want by
Internal Page
External Page
Combined Page
The time allotted for paging has
expired.
The prompt appears while you are
paging and shows the page zone you
have chosen. Press [Feature) or
when you are finished paging.
A page is already being made in the
page zone you have requested.
Notes
Page zone 0 equals all zones.
When making an announcement using External Page or
Combined Page, the Long Tones feature is automatically
activated for the external paging system only. This allows you to
control optional equipment with the Long Tones feature.
telephone can be assigned access to Paging and is
Each
assigned to one of six page zones, or to none, in Administration
programming.
Make sure that everyone who needs to make page
announcements has a list showing which telephones are in which
page zones.
Modular DR5 System Coordinator Guide
160 Priority Call
Priority Call
If you get a busy signal when you call someone in your office,
you can interrupt them. Use this feature for urgent calls only.
1.
Press [Feature]
2.
Wait for a connection, then speak.
A person who receives a Priority Call while on another call has
eight seconds to accept or reject the call. If the person does
nothing, the Priority Call feature puts the active call on Exclusive
Hold and connects your call.
Displays
You will see some of these displays while making a Pridrity Call.
blocked
in
call first
You tried to place a Priority Call to
another
telephone. The
person you called has blocked your
call. Try to call later.
You have tried to make a Priority Call,
but this feature has not been assigned
to your telephone.
You have attempted to use the Priority
Call feature with no ringing or busy
tone on the line. Use Priority Call only
when you hear ringing or a busy
signal.
The party you are calling has eight
seconds to decide whether to accept
or reject you? Priority Call.
denied
Modular
The telephone you are calling is
already in a Priority Call or is unable to
receive Priority Calls.
System Coordinator Guide’
Priority Call 161
Notes
You can make a Priority Call only while your telephone display
shows one of the following prompts:
If Call Forward is active at the telephone you are trying to reach,
your call will be forwarded.
If the telephone receiving the Priority Call is in a conference call,
the other two parties are automatically put on hold when the
Priority Call is accepted.
The System Coordinator gives a telephone permission to make
Priority Calls in Administration programming.
Modular
System Coordinator Guide
162
Service Modes
Service Modes
[Feature]
Switch to a service mode
You can use Service Modes to make your
system
behave differently at different times of day. For instance, all
incoming external calls can be directed to a security guard’s
telephone during the night, or calls to one receptionist can be
directed to another receptionist during lunch.
1.
Press
on a Control telephone. (See Special
telephones for information on Control telephones.)
2.
Select the service mode you want.
Cancel Service Modes
You can return to normal operation or cancel the manual override
of an automatic mode. You cannot cancel an automatic mode.
1.
Press [Feature]
Displays
You will see some of the following displays when selecting a
service mode.
The name of the current service mode
(“Night Service”, in this case) is
displayed. Press
or NEXT to see
other service mode options. Press
or
to select the desired
mode.
You are trying to activate a service
mode from-a telephone that is not a
Control telephone or Direct-dial
telephone, or else all service modes
are disabled in Administration
programming.
Modular DR5 System Coordinator Guide
Service Modes 163
Notes
A service mode allows you to change which lines ring at which
telephone, to activate or deactivate the auxiliary ringer for certain
lines, and to have Direct-dial calls ring at the Extra-dial
telephone. Service modes can be programmed to begin
automatically at certain times or they can be turned on and off at
the Control telephone. The System Coordinator sets up service
modes in Administration programming.
Automatic service modes are indicated by an asterisk (*) before
the name of the service mode on the display. You can neither
manually activate nor cancel automatic service modes, although
you can override them with manual modes.
The Control telephone can override automatic service modes at
any time by entering the Service Modes feature code
and selecting a different service mode; this
([Feature)
override will remain in effect until it is canceled by means of
[Feature]
Note that if you selected a service mode with
the next automatic service mode will come into
an asterisk
effect at the programmed time.
Direct-dial calls to a Direct-dial telephone will ring at the Extra-dial
telephone (designated in Administration programming) only when
the Service Modes feature code
[a
is entered at
that Direct-dial telephone. Note that only the Extra-dial telephone
will be activated, not the actual service mode (unless that
Direct-dial telephone is also a Control telephone).
provides three service modes named “Night”, “Lunch”,
and “Evening”. You can change these names to suit yourself. In
addition, there is normal service when no service modes are
active.
Modular DR5 System Coordinator Guide
164 Special Telephones
Special Telephones
You can assign several special functions to the telephones in
system. Except where noted, you do not need
your
special hardware. A special function is assigned to a telephone
either by your Installer in Configuration programming or by the
System Coordinator in Administration programming.
Alarm telephone
An Alarm telephone is a
telephone with a two-line display
or M7324 Telephones) that your Installer has assigned
to display Norstar’s system alarm codes, should they occur.
If an alarm message appears on the Alarm telephone’s display,
follow these instructions:
1.
Record the alarm number.
2.
Press TINE and record the time displayed.
3.
Call your Installer or Service Representative and report the
alarm code.
4.
After speaking to your Installer or Service Representative,
press
This is an example of an alarm display.
Report this alarm and the time it
occurred to your Installer or service
representative.
Central Answering Position
A Central Answering Position (CAP) ‘is a
Telephone that
has defined as a CAP in
Configuration programming. You can connect one or two
Special Telephones 1 6 5
The CAP module displays the busy/not busy status of the
telephones in your system by using the triangular indicators
beside internal Autodial, Programmed Feature or line buttons. A
CAP-can support 120 external lines.
You can send up to 30 messages from a CAP.
For more information, see the
User Card.
Central Answering Position
Control telephone
The Control telephone lets you place the external lines for which
it has responsibility into and out of Service Modes. See Service
Modes.
Direct-dial telephone
You can dial a Direct-dial telephone with a single digit. The
Direct-dial telephone is usually in a central location, such as a
receptionist’s or secretary’s desk. It is usually a Prime telephone
and a Central Answering Position (CAP).
There may be up to five Direct-dial telephones in your system,
but each telephone in the system is assigned to a single
Direct-dial telephone. There is a single Direct-dial digit for the
whole system that lets each telephone call its assigned
Direct-dial telephone.
Each
Direct-dial telephone can send up to 30 messages
and each can invoke Service Modes to activate the Extra-dial
telephone.
Your Installer sets up Direct-dial telephones in Configuration
programming. The System Coordinator assigns telephones to
Direct-dial telephones in Administration programming.
Modular DR5 System Coordinator Guide
166 Special Telephones
Emergency telephone
The Emergency telephone is a single-line telephone (not a
telephone) that functions independently of the
system. You can use the Emergency telephone
system is not working.
Emergency Transfer/Power Failure Cut-through provides basic
telephone service on external line 001 through an Emergency
telephone if the power fails or if a system error occurs.
The Emergency telephone is usually located near the Key
Service Unit (KSU). Each KSU can support two Emergency
telephones, and each Trunk Module can support one additional
Emergency telephone.
Extra-dial telephone
In Service Modes, a second telephone can be assigned to ring
on calls made to a Direct-dial telephone. There may be one
Extra-dial telephone for each Direct-dial telephone, and it may be
a different telephone in each Service Mode.
Hotline telephone
You can call a programmed internal or external telephone
number simply by picking up the receiver of the Hotline telephone
(or by pressing
A Hotline telephone can be set up to dial an operator or an
emergency number. You should put a notice by the Hotline
telephone to let people know which number will be dialed when
they lift the receiver.
If the Hotline telephone is set up to dial an external number using
the Prime line, there must be an external Prime line assigned to
the telephone. if not, the Hotline call will fail.
The System Coordinator sets up the Hotline telephone, the
telephone number it dials, and the line on which that number is
dialed, in Administration programming.
Modular
System Coordinator Guide
Special Telephones
167
To bypass a Hotline
Press a line button, or use the Pre-Dial or Automatic Dial feature
before you pick up the receiver or press
The following displays may occur at a Hotline telephone.
The line assigned to the Hotline is in
use. Make the call using normal
methods or wait until the Hotline line is
free.
The Hotline has been set up to dial an
external number on a Prime line but
the Hotline telephone does not have a
Prime line. This must be corrected in
Configuration or Administration
programming.
The Hotline has been set up to dial an
external number on a Prime line but
the Hotline telephone has an internal
Prime line and no access to line pools.
This must be corrected in
Configuration or Administration
programming.
This message may also appear if the
line pool assigned to the telephone is
busy.
Prime telephone
Each line in a
system can
a telephone assigned to
it as a Prime telephone. Calls not answered at their normal
destinations are transferred to the Prime telephone. The Prime
telephone is usually the telephone on the receptionist’s desk and
it is often the Control telephone and a Central Answering Position
as well. A Prime telephone is assigned to a line in Configuration
programming.
See the Answering the telephone section for the displays that
may occur at a Prime telephone.
Modular
System Coordinator Guide
168 Speed Dial
Speed Dial
Make a Speed Dial call
You can quickly dial external telephone numbers that have been
programmed onto Speed Dial codes.
q
1.
Press
.
2.
Enter the appropriate two-digit Speed Dial code.
supports two types of Speed Dial codes, Personal and
System. System Speed Dial codes are from 01 to 70. The
System Administrator can assign numbers to System Speed Dial
codes for the entire system in Administration programming.
Personal Speed Dial codes are from 71 to 94 and may have
different numbers assigned to them on each telephone. Users
can program their own Personal Speed Dial numbers.
Program Personal Speed Dial
You can add or change a Personal Speed Dial number on your
telephone.
1.
Press
2.
Enter the code that you want to associate with a telephone
number.
3.
If you want to include a line selection for this number, select
the line or line pool. For the M7100 Telephone, you can
select a line only.
4.
Enter the number you want to program.
5.
Press
or [Hold].
Modular DR5 System Coordinator Guide
Speed Dial 169
Displays
You will see some of these prompts while using or programming
Speed Dial.
Continue entering the number you
wish to program. You can change the
number by pressing the left side of the
volume bar or by pressing
When you are finished, press
or
You have tried to program a Personal
Speed Dial number while someone
else on the system is in Configuration
or Administration programming.
You have tried to enter a new
Personal Speed Dial Number, but the
memory for these numbers in your
system is full.
full
Enter a two-digit code between 71 and
94 for the personal speed dial number
you want to program.
Enter code:
Enter the telephone number you wish
to program exactly as you would if you
were dialing it normally. When you are
finished, press
or
You have entered a code outside the
code range (01-94).
Line in use
I
No number stored
The line associated with the speed
dial number you are trying to use is
busy.
There is no number stored on the
Speed Dial code you have dialed.
Modular DR5 System Coordinator Guide
170 Speed Dial
If you want to program a line or line
pool selection for this Speed Dial,
select the line or line pool.
Otherwise, enter the telephone
number you wish to program exactly
as you would if you were dialing it
normally. When you are finished,
press
and HOLD
If you want to program a line or line
poolselection for this Speed Dial,
select the line or line pool.
Otherwise, enter the telephone
number you wish to program exactly
as you would if you were dialing it
normally. When you are finished,
press
or
/Select a 1
dial>
I
There is no line associated with the
speed dial number you are trying to
use. Select a free external line or line
pool and enter the Speed Dial feature
code again.
Enter a two-digit Speed Dial code
(01-94). You must enter the zero for
codes 01 to 09.
Notes
There is no difference between using Personal Speed Dial and
using System Speed Dial. They differ only in how you program
them.
Speed Dial numbers may include line choices and Host System
Signaling codes.
Speed Dial numbers are subject to the same Class of Service as
regularly dialed numbers. System Speed Dial numbers can be
programmed to bypass dialing restrictions.
Modular
System Coordinator Guide
Speed Dial 171
Normally, Speed Dial numbers are shown on the display while
they are being dialed. System Speed Dial numbers may be
programmed to show a Speed Dial name instead of the number,
keeping the actual number confidential.
Modular
System Coordinator Guide
172 System features
System features
The following features are available for the entire
system.
Accidental Disconnect Protection
If you accidentally drop the receiver back into the telephone
cradle while answering a call, you can quickly retrieve the call.
1.
Pick up the receiver again or press
connected to your call.
You are
Automatic telephone relocation
If Automatic telephone relocation is enabled, you can move your
jack to another without it losing any
telephone from one
of its custom programming. Your Installer enables Automatic
telephone relocation in Configuration programming.
Background Music
You can listen to music through your telephone speaker.
1.
Press [Feature]
WARNING
In accordance with U.S. copyright law, a license may be
required from the American Society of Composers,
Authors and Publishers or a similar organization if radio
or TV broadcasts are transmitted through the
Background Music feature of this telecommunication
system.
Northern Telecom Inc. hereby disclaims any liability
arising out of the failure to obtain such a license.
The music stops automatically if you make or answer a call.
Your Installer makes this feature available to all telephones in
Configuration programming. You will need to supply a music
source, such as a radio, attached to your KSU.
Modular
System Coordinator Guide
System features 173
Cancel Background Music
You can cancel Background Music.
1.
Press
.
Class of Service
The Class of Service for a call consists of all the
features
and lines available to you for that call. This is determined by the
features assigned to the telephone in Administration
programming, including all Dialing Filters and Remote Access
Packages.
Users who need to dial numbers not permitted by the Class of
Service of the line or telephone that they are using, can switch to
a different Class of Service by entering a Class of Service
features
Password. Remote users can change the set of
available to them by entering the
DN followed by a Class of
Service password.
Internal numbers
Each telephone in the
system has its own internal
number. The length of internal numbers in your system may be
from 2 to 7 digits for a non-expanded system or 3 to 7 digits for
an expanded system. All numbers in your system are the same
length. Your Installer sets the length of internal numbers (also
called the DN length) in Configuration programming.
To find out your internal number, use the Button Inquiry feature
on an internal line button. On the M7100
Telephone, Button inquiry shows your internal number followed
by the function assigned to your single memory button.
Lines
The following features and characteristics are associated with the
use of lines.
Modular
System Coordinator Guide
174 System features
Disconnect Supervision
When Disconnect Supervision is assigned to a line, the
system monitors it to detect if an external caller hangs up. This
allows the system to release the line for other uses. Your Installer
assigns disconnect supervision to lines in Configuration
programming. Disconnect supervision can be turned on and off
only on Loop start trunks. E&M and DID trunks are always
disconnect supervised.
Line appearance
Any of the lines in your system may appear at any of your
telephones. Your Installer assigns lines to telephones in
Configuration programming.
Usually, only the lines that are appropriate for a particular person
appear at that person’s telephone. When a line is assigned to a
telephone it is automatically given a line button on that
telephone, if a button is available. The M7100 Telephone has no
line buttons for its lines.
Normally, you cannot answer a call that is ringing on a line that
does not appear on your telephone. To pick up such a call, use
Call Pickup, Call Park, or Transfer.
Hung lines
A line that has been redirected using Line Redirection may
remain busy after a call is over. If this happens, the outgoing line
for the redirection will also remain busy. These are hung lines
and you must clear them.
A line indicator that has been solid for long time is the only real
indication that a line is hung. However, the solid line indicator
may also indicate a genuine call in progress. Make reasonably
sure that the line is indeed hung before clearing it or you may cut
off a real conversation.
Modular
System Coordinator Guide
System features 1 7 5
Y o u can clear a hung line only at the telephone that was used to
redirect the line.
1.
Press
redirect the line.
at the telephone that was used to
2.
Press the button of the redirected line.
3.
Press S H O W or
4.
Press D R O P or q
. The hung line is cleared.
Clearing the redirected line clears the outgoing line for the
redirection as well.
Line Pools
A line pool allows each telephone access to external lines from a
group (or “pool“) of external lines. You can access such lines by
pressing an Intercom button and entering a line pool access code
or by pressing a memory button programmed with the line pool
feature code.
Private lines
A Private line is exclusive to a particular telephone. Calls that are
put on hold or left unanswered on a Private line cannot be picked
up at any telephone except the Prime telephone.
Prime line
Your telephone can be programmed to select an internal or
external line or a line pool automatically whenever you lift the
This is your Prime line.
receiver or press
Ringing Line Preference
Each telephone the
system can be programmed to ring
or remain silent for incoming calls on any external lines that
appear on the telephone.
Modular DR5 System Coordinator Guide.
176 System features
For example, a telephone may have buttons assigned for lines 1
to 3, but have only lines 1 and 2 programmed to ring. An
incoming call on any of the three lines causes a line button
indicator to flash, and the telephone can be used to answer the
call. This is especially useful for people who monitor other
telephone lines, but want only their own lines to actually ring.
If a telephone has an external line as a Prime line, that line is
usually made to ring.
Target line
A target line is used to route a call dialed with a particular number
to a particular telephone or group of telephones. A target line can
be used for incoming calls only. A single trunk may provide
connections to several different target lines. This allows each
person or department in the office to have their own number
without having as many trunks on the system as there are people
in the office.
Overflow Call Routing
If a call comes in for a target line that is busy,
routes the
call to the Prime telephone for that target line. If there is no Prime
telephone assigned to the target line or if a call cannot be
directed to a target line, the call will go to the Prime telephone for
the incoming trunk.
System Speed Dial
Speed Dial codes 01 to 70 are the same for the entire system.
See the Speed Dial section for details.
Modular DR5 System Coordinator Guide
Time features 177
Time features
The Time features let you check the present time and how long
you have spent on a call.
Call Duration Timer
You can see how long you spent on your last call or how long
you have been on your present call.
1.
Press
2.
Read the display.
Show Time
You can see the present date and time while you are on a call.
1.
Press
2.
Read the display.
Displays
One of the following displays will occur when you use a Time
feature.
You have not made a call since your
telephone’s clock was last reset.
The display shows the last call you
made, or the current call, and the total
elapsed time in minutes and seconds.
9 9: 54
The display shows the present time.
Modular DR5 System Coordinator Guide
178 Transfer
Transfer
Transfer a call
You can transfer a call to a telephone in your
within the
network, or external to
system,
1.
Make a call, answer a call or take a call off hold.
2.
Press
3.
To transfer within
system: dial an internal
button.
telephone number or press an Internal
(or [Transfer] if programmed).
press a
To transfer within the network or external to
line button and dial the number to which you want to transfer
the call, or press an External
button.
4.
Announce the call after the called party answers. If you do
not want to announce the call, complete the transfer as
follows.
5.
Press
or
or a programmed Call Queuing button if
you wish to answer another call.
6.
The call is immediately transferred.
When transferring an external call to an external number,
note the following restrictions: at least one of the external
calls must have been an incoming call, and that call must
be on a disconnect supervised line.
Unsupervised Conference
You can use the’ Unsupervised Conference feature to connect
yourself and two other people, then drop out of the conference
leaving the other two to talk to each other. If both parties are
external, certain restrictions apply. See Notes at the end of this
section.
1.
Establish a Conference call as described in Conference.
2.
Press
If you are unable to establish an unsupervised conference, you
can put the conference on hold. See the Conference section.
Modular
System Coordinator Guide
Transfer 179
Transfer using Hold
Transfer using Hold can only be used to transfer an external call
to another telephone that has a button for the line that the
external call is on.
Call the person you want to transfer the call to and tell them there
is a call on hold for them. Do not enter the Transfer feature
code. To accept the call, your co-worker presses the line button
with the flashing indicator.
An M7100 Telephone can transfer a call using Hold but it cannot
receive a call transferred in this way.
Displays
You will see some of the following displays while transferring
calls.
221
CRNCL RETRY
The person to whom you tried to
transfer a call is on another call. Press
RETRY to enter a new internal number.
On the M7100 Telephone, you will
automatically be returned to the
Transf
to: prompt.
Cal 1 transferred
Transient message to indicate that the
transfer was successfully completed.
The
to whom you tried to
transfer an external call has Do Not
Disturb active on their telephone.
Press
or the flashing line
button to reconnect to the call. On the
M7100 Telephone, lift the receiver.
The person to whom you tried to
transfer an internal call has Do Not
Disturb active on their telephone.
Press
or the flashing line
button to reconnect to the call. On the
Telephone, enter the transfer
cancellation code
to reconnect to the call.
Modular
System Coordinator Guide
180
Transfer
The internal caller you were trying to
transfer hung up before the transfer
was complete.
id number
An invalid DN has been entered, or
the transfer feature has been invoked
before the complete DN has been
entered.
The person to whom you tried to
transfer a call did not answer. Press
or the flashing line button
to reconnect to the call. On the M7100
Telephone, lift the receiver.
Press RETRY if, after talking to the
person at extension 221, you decide
to transfer the call to someone else.
Press
or JOIN to transfer the call
from telephone 221 to 222.
The external caller you were trying to
transfer has hung up before the
transfer was complete.
Press JOIN to transfer the call on line
001 to, telephone 221. Press RETRY if,
after talking to the person at extension
221, you decide to transfer the call to
someone else.
You have tried to use the Transfer
feature when you have no call to
transfer.
The telephone to which you are trying
to transfer a call is out of service.
You cannot transfer the call because
of telephone or line restrictions.
Once you have invoked the transfer
feature you must complete the transfer
actions before you can access a new
feature, answer another alerting call or
select an outgoing line.
Modular DR5 System Coordinator Guide
Transfer 181
Your transfer cannot be completed for
o n e
o f
r e a s o n s :
t h e s e
l
l
l
All the internal resources needed to
perform a transfer are in use. Try
again later.
You have tried to transfer an
external call to another external
party. Some restrictions apply. See
Notes at the end of this section.
An Unsupervised Conference is not
possible for your call. See Notes at
the end of this section.
Press
if you entered the wrong
internal number or if the person you
are transferring the call to is
unavailable.
Notes
If an external call is transferred to a busy telephone, or not
answered after a few rings, the call automatically rings you back
and the display indicates that the telephone was busy or that no
one answered.
You can establish an Unsupervised Conference whether the
other two people are inside or outside the
system.
However, if both of the other people are outside the system there
are some restrictions: at least one of the outside callers must
have called you and that call must be on a disconnect supervised
line.
When transferring an external call to an external number, note
the following restrictions: at least one of the external calls must
have been an incoming call, and that call must be on a
disconnect supervised line.
In certain situations, you may experience lower volume levels
when using external Transfer and unsupervised Conference with
two external calls.
Modular
System Coordinator Guide
182 Using
Using
remotely
remotely
You can use the lines, and some of the features, of a
system from outside that system. You can do this over the public
telephone network when you are away from the office, or you can
call into a
system in another office from your own
system over a private network.
The exact facilities available to you through Remote Access will
vary depending on how your system is set up. The
features that can be made available to remote users are: access
to lines, access to line pools, and remote paging.
Examples
A salesman who spends most of his time on the road needs to
make long distance calls to the European office. Your
system has a leased line to Europe with reduced transatlantic
charges. You provide that salesman with a Class of Service
password that gives access to the transatlantic line. The
salesman can then telephone into the
system-from a
client’s site, enter his Class of Service password, and use the
leased transatlantic line to make his calls.
The manager of one of your branch offices also needs to talk to
the European office. She uses a private network line between her
branch office and the head off ice to access the head office’s
system and use its transatlantic lines.
Accessing
remotely
Over the public network
You can use
remotely over the public telephone network.
1.
Dial the
system’s remote access number.
2.
If you hear a stuttered dial tone, enter a COS password.
3.
Wait for the system dial tone.
Modular DR5 System Coordinator Guide
Using
remotely 183
Over a private network
You can access
remotely using a private network line.
1.
Select the private network line or the line pool that contains
private network lines.
2.
Dial the number, if any, needed to access the remote
system.
3.
If you hear a stuttered dial tone, enter a COS password.
4.
Wait for system dial tone.
Using
remotely
Once connected to a remote system you can do any one of the
following:
l
l
enter the
DN followed by a COS password to change
your Class of Service.
dial the number of someone on the remote
system.
dial a line pool access code and make an external call.
enter a Page feature code (60 through 63). Use
instead
when entering the feature codes. See Page.
of
Modular DR5 System Coordinator Guide
184
Using
remotely
Tones you may hear
Busy tone
The number you dialed on the
system is busy. Your call will be
disconnected after five seconds.
system
dial tone
You may:
enter the
DN followed by a COS
password to change your Class of
Service.
l
dial the number of someone on the
remote
system.
l
dial a line pool access code and make
an external call.
l
enter a Page feature code (60 through
63) using
instead of
See Page.
l
Fast busy tone
You have done one of the following:
l
l
l
l
Stuttered dial tone
Modular
entered an incorrect COS password.
Your call will be disconnected after
five seconds.
taken too long while entering a COS
password. Your call will be
disconnected after five seconds.
tried to use a line pool or feature not
permitted by your Class of Service.
You will hear system dial tone again
after five seconds.
dialed a number in the
system
which does not exist. Your call will be
disconnected after five seconds.
Enter your COS password on the dial pad
of your telephone.
System Coordinator Guide
Using
Controlling access to your
remotely 185
system
It is important that you maintain the security of your
system by limiting access to authorized users and limiting those
users to just those features they need. Remember that a remote
user can make long distance calls that will be charged to your
company and can make page announcements in your office.
Direct Inward System Access
You can control access to your
system with Direct Inward
System Access (DISA). If you set up the trunk used for remote
access for auto-answer with DISA, callers will hear a stuttered
dial tone and must enter a Class of Service password before they
are allowed into the system. Access to your
system from
the public telephone network should always be controlled with
DISA.
If you are setting up access to your system from another
system over a private network, you may not need DISA. If you
set up your E&M trunk to answer without DISA, callers from
remote
systems will receive system dial tone
immediately.
Your
facility has a number (the
DN) which an external
caller can dial when they hear system dial tone to activate
and enter a Class of Service password to change to a different.
Class of Service.
Class of Service
You can control which feature a remote user can access through
the Class of Service for the call. The Class of Service of a
Remote Access call is determined either by the Class of Service
or by the
password entered when the system answers with
Class of Service associated with the trunk when the system
answers without DISA.
After having accessed the system, a remote user can change the
Class of Service for the call by dialing the
DN followed by a
Class of Service password.
Modular
System Coordinator Guide
186 Using
remotely
Maintaining security
To maintain the security of your system, the following practices
are recommended:
Warn anyone to whom you give the remote access number
to keep it confidential.
Change Class of Service passwords
l
Warn anyone to whom you give a Class of Service
password to remember it and not to write it down.
Remove the Class of Service password of anyone who
leaves your company.
Notes
To use the system remotely, the telephone you are using to call
the system must use tone dialing.
Remote Access is possible only on DID and E&M trunks, and
set to auto-answer.
Loop start trunks
If the Loop start trunk used for Remote Access is set to
mode, auto-answer will not function and the caller
will hear ringing instead of a stuttered or the system dial tone.
system to
remotely into another
If you use one
system, you can use the available features of the remote
system by pressing
followed by the feature code. If
you will invoke the features of the local
you press
system, not the remote one.
Your Installer sets
to be
with or without
DISA, in Configuration programming.
are set in
Configuration programming. The System Coordinator sets up
Classes of Service and Class of Service passwords in
Administration programming.
In certain situations, you may experience lower volume levels
when using
or using
remotely.
Modular DR5 System Coordinator Guide
Voice Call 187
Voice Call
Make a voice call
You can make an announcement or
conversation
through the speaker of another telephone in the system.
1.
Press
Mute Voice Call tones
When a Voice Call begins at your telephone, you hear a beep
every 15 seconds as a reminder that the microphone is on. You
can stop it beeping.
1.
Pick up the receiver or press
Handsfree Answerback
If Handsfree Answerback is assigned to your telephone, you can
respond to a Voice Call without touching the telephone.
1.
When someone makes a Voice Call to you, simply start
talking. Your telephone’s microphone picks up your voice.
Your telephone will beep periodically to remind you the
microphone is on. You can stop it beeping.
1.
Pick up the receiver or press
Voice Call Deny
You can prevent your telephone from receiving Voice Calls.
1.
Press
. Voice Calls will ring like regular
internal calls. Your other calls will proceed normally.
Cancel Voice Call Deny
You can cancel Voice Call Deny.
1.
Press [Feature]
Modular DR5 System Coordinator Guide
188
Voice Call
Displays
You will see some of these displays while making a Voice Call.
call
Dial the internal number or press the
button of the person
internal
to whom you want to speak.
The line is open for you to speak.
The telephone receiving the call
cannot accept Voice Calls for one of
the following reasons: it is active or
ringing with another call; it is in Call
Forward mode; it is in Do Not Disturb
mode; it has Voice Call Deny turned
on; it is not a
telephone.
Your call proceeds automatically as a
regular ringing call.
Notes
Once you have answered a Voice Call, you can put it on hold,
transfer it, or otherwise treat it as a normal call.
When you have Handsfree Answerback assigned to your
telephone, and you are using an on-hook Dialing Mode, the
microphone and speaker are both activated for external calls.
The System Coordinator assigns Handsfree Answerback to a
telephone in Administration programming. You can not assign
Handsfree Answerback capability to the
Telephone.
Modular
System Coordinator Guide
Modular DR5 Telephone Feature Card
Using a
1 . Press
189
and enter the desired feature code on the dial pad.
OR
feature
a
feature on a
memory
button
Autobumping
Press the programmed memory button.
2. Follow the display messages.
Note: On M7310 and M7324 Telephones, some features are also available on the display
buttons.
From an idle telephone, or with your calls on hold, press
2. Press the memory button that you want to program. (This step is not required on the
M7100 Telephone.) See your telephone user card for the location of the memory
buttons.
3. Enter
code you want to program.
Allows the oldest log entry to be deleted from a full Call Log when
a new item is logged, so that the new log entry can be stored. For
more information, see Call Log.
Cancel
Background
Music
Button Inquiry
Call Log
Password
Class of
Service
Contrast
Adiustment
Dialing Modes
Do Not Disturb
Language
Choice
Allows you to listen to music (provided by your office) through
your telephone speaker when you are not on a call.
Cancel
Checks what is programmed on any button. Use this feature when
labelina memorv buttons.
Programs a password for your Call Log. To remove the password,
see your System Coordinator.
Overrides the Class of Service on a telephone to allow you to
make a call from that telephone. The Class of Service determines
which numbers you can dial. Switch from one Class of Service to
another using this feature code and a password provided by your
System Coordinator.
Adjusts the contrast of your telephone display. Press
through
(depending on your telephone).
Changes the on-hook Dialing Modes. The three Dialing Modes are:
‘Automatic Dial: If you have a Prime line, dial a telephone number
without pressing a line button. A line is selected automatically.
Pre-Dial: Dial a telephone number. Edit it by pressing BKSP or
the left side of
Press a line button to
Standard Dial: Press a line button, then dial a telephone number.
Prevents incoming calls from ringing at your telephone.
Cancel
Selects the English language for the telephone display.
Selects the alternate language for the telephone display.
(Feature]
Modular DR5 System Coordinator Guide
190
Modular DR5 Telephone Feature Card
Changes the position of a line button. Remember to switch the
button caps after the line button is moved. Lines cannot be moved
to positions occupied by
or
buttons.
Moving Line
Buttons
type of calls that will be automatically stored in your
Call Log
Programming
memory
buttons
(Feature
External Autodial: Stores a line (optional) and an external
telephone number onto a memory button for one-button access
to that number.
internal Autodial: Stores an internal telephone number onto a
memory button for one-button access to that telephone number.
Program Features: Stores a feature onto a memory button for
one-button access to that feature.
or
cannot be programmed.
Programming a feature button:
1. Press .
(For M7100 Telephones, go
3.)
2. Press the memory button you want to program.
3. Enter the feature code of the feature you want to program.
4. If you entered the Line Pool feature code in step 3, enter the access code for a line pool.
Ring Type
Volume
Selects a distinctive ring to help differentiate between your
telephone and others nearby. Enter the feature code and press
or
through
to select the new Ring Type. Press
or
to store the new ring.
Makes your telephone ring so you can adjust the volume, even
while you are on a call.
Run/Stop
When using the External
programming feature, inserts a
break point between two-or more numbers stored on a memory
button. Press the memory button once to dial the first number; a
second time to dial the second number, and so on.
Speed Dial
Personal: Programs a telephone number into a Personal Speed
Dial code (from 71 to 94).
Programming a
Speed Dial code:
1. Press
to enter Personal Speed Dial codes.
2. Enter a two-digit code (from 71 to 94).
3. To program a line as part of the Speed Dial code, press a line button or a line pool
button.
,
4. Enter the telephone number to be assigned to that code. Telephone numbers cannot
exceed 24 digits.
5. Press
or
to finish programming.
Voice Call
Deny
Prevents your telephone from receiving Voice Calls, permits only
ordinary ringing calls.
Cancel
Modular DR5 System Coordinator Guide
Modular DR5 Telephone Feature Card 1 9 1
Link
Generates a Link signal (also called flash or recall) on an active
line to access other systems or carriers.
Long Tones
Permits communication with devices (such as fax or answering
machines) on an active line that use longer tone signals. The tone
lasts as long as a dial pad button is held down, and only for the
current call.
sequence, inserts a
When programmed in an External
delay in a number being dialed.
For Pulse and Tone Dialing
For Pulse Dialing only
Pause
Programmed
Release
When programmed at the end of an External
performs the same function as
Generates a longer Link signal (1.5 seconds) on an active line.
Use this feature when you want to release a call on your line but
retain the use of the line for another call.
Timed
Release
Calling
from
outside the
office
sequence,
You can use your
system even when you are not in the office to make calls or use
the paging feature. You may be required to enter a Class of Service password to get onto
the system. Your Class of Service determines which features you can
which
numbers you can dial.
Ask your System Coordinator for details on your Classes of Service and Class of
Service passwords.
Connecting to
system:
1. Dial the remote access number provided by your System Coordinator.
2. If you hear a stuttered dial tone, enter a 6 digit COS password.
3. When you hear a steady dial tone, you are connected to the
system. You can do
one of the following:
Change your Class of Service by dialing the
DN and entering a Class of
Service password.
Dial the number of someone in the office.
Enter a line pool access code to use external lines in a line pool.
Enter a Page feature code
through
and the appropriate
zone number to page someone in the office. See the Page feature on this card
for more information on the Page feature.
Modular DR5 System Coordinator Guide
192 Modular DR5 Telephone Feature Card
Briefly displays the length of your current call. If your telephone is
idle, the length of your most recent call is displayed.
Call Duration
Timer
Call Log
Opens your Call Log to view stored caller information. The Call
Log displays use special characters.
A new item in the Call Log is underlined.
Answered calls are identified.
Long distance calls are identified.
The disolaved information has been truncated.
Note: Names and numbers for external callers are displayed only if you have subscribed to
Call Display services from your local telephone company.
Calling from your Calf Log:
Navigate to the appropriate log item, and display the number.
2. Edit the number, if required. The leading digits may need to be trimmed, or digits may
need to be added for Long Distance or line pool access. See your System Coordinator.
3. Press a line button.
4. Lift the receiver.
Reply to Message: Review your list of external and internal
display messages, and return calls.
Message
Cancel [Feature]
Send Message: Leave a message on a co-worker’s telephone
display to call you back.
Cancel
Page
Service Modes
q
Allows you to make announcements through either the internal or
external speakers, or both. Enter the feature code, the page code
(1 for internal, 2 for external, or 3 for both), and the zone (0 to 6).
External: Allows you to make announcements through your
off ice’s loudspeaker system (if connected).
Allows you to make announcements through
telephone speakers and your office’s
both your
loudspeaker system. Enter the feature code, and the zone (0 to 6).
Internal (Zone): Allows you to make announcements, through the
telephone speakers, to a group of
telephones.
the zone (0 to 6). 0 pages all zones.
Enter the feature
Activates one of up to three different telephone answering
options, eliminating the need to forward all your calls. Only an
assigned Control Telephone can turn ON Service Modes. See your
System Coordinator.
Cancel
Show Time
Briefly displays the date and the time.
Modular DR5 System Coordinator Guide
.
Modular DR5 Telephone Feature Card
Sends your calls to another telephone in your
system.
Cancel
Camp-On: Re-routes a call to another telephone even if all its lines
are busy.
Line Redirection: Redirects one or more lines on your telephone
so that calls coming in on the line(s) are directed to one or more
locations outside the
system.
Cancel
Call Forward
fl
Call
Information
Call Park
193
d
y ispI ays the name, number and line name of a ringing or
held call. Press
or
repeatedly to cycle through the
three displays of information.
Note: Names and numbers for external callers are displayed only if you have subscribed to
Call Display services from your local telephone company.
Automatically puts a call on hold so that it can be retrieved from
any telephone in your
system. The display-shows a
retrieval code.
Call Park Retrieval:
to
Answers a parked call from any telephone in
0
your
system by
and dialing the
retrieval code. On the
Telephone, dial just the retrieval
code. The retrieval code is made up of a programmable Call Park
prefix (0 to followed by a call number (01 to 09).
Conference
Setting up a three-person call:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Make or answer the first call.
Put the first call on hold.
Make or answer the second call.
Press
(or press
if programmed).
Press the line button of the first held call. (This step is not required on the M7100
Telephone.)
a
speak privately to one of the callers, or to drop one call and stay
connected to another, or to hold both parties as separate calls, you must first split the
conference.
1. Press the line. button for one of the calls. The other call is put on hold. To re-establish
the conference, press
Removing yourself
the conference temporarily:
Press (Hold]; the other two callers can still speak to each other.
Removing
the conference permanently:
1. Press
(or
if programmed). The
parties remain
connected.
Note: Some external lines may not support this type of transfer if two external parties are
involved.
Modular
System Coordinator Guide
194
Modular DR5 Telephone Feature Card
Do Not Disturb
Blocks an alerting Priority Call on your telephone.
Exclusive Hold
Temporarily suspends an external call and prevents other
telephones from picking it up.
Exclusive Hold Retrieval: Press
of the held call.
(Press
on. the
Telephone.)
Group
Listening
Allows you to use both the receiver and your speaker at the same
time while you are on a call. If you experience feedback, turn the
volume down, and before hanging up, press
Cancel
information for the current active call in your
Privacy
Transfer
Names and numbers for external callers are displayed only if you have subscribed to
Call Display services from your local telephone company.
When Privacy is ON, other
users with the same line are
prevented from joining your current external call. If Privacy is
OFF, other
users with the same line can join in on your
code a
external call by pressing that line button. Enter
second time to restore the original setting.
Sends a call to another telephone in your
system, over a
network or outside your
system.
Using
1. Make or answer a call.
2. Press
(or
if programmed).
3. Dial an internal telephone number, or press
button.
4. If you wish, you can announce the call, after the called party answers.
5. Press
or
The call is immediately transferred.
Transfer within
network or external
Make or answer a call.
2. Press [Feature)
(or (Transfer] if programmed).
3. Select a line and dial the telephone number that you wish to transfer the call to.
4. If you wish, you can announce the call after the called party answers.
5. Press
or
The call is im’mediately transferred.
You can also do an external transfer using Unsupervised Conference:
Make or answer a call.
2. Call the person to whom you wish to transfer the call.
3. Establish a conference with the two parties.
4. Drop out of the conference using the Unsupervised Conference feature.
Note: If an external call is transferred to a busy internal line, or not answered after a few
rings, the call automatically rings you back and the display indicates that the line was
busy or that no one answered.
Modular DR5 System Coordinator Guide
Modular
Call Pickup.
Telephone Feature Card
195
Directed Pickup: Answers a selected telephone in your system.
Group Pickup: Answers a call that is ringing at another telephone
in the same pickup group. The external call that has been ringing
longest is answered first.
Trunk Answer: Answers an external call that is ringing on a line
that has been placed into Service Modes from any telephone in
the
system. This feature does not work on private lines.
Answers a call when several calls arrive at the same time. The
external call that has been rinaina lonaest is answered first.
Last Number
Redial
Automatically redials the last external telephone number that you
dialed. This feature is available on the [Last] memory button
on most teleohones.
Line Pools
Telephones can share several external lines for making outgoing
calls without requiring each telephone to have a button for every
line.
Using a Line Pool:
1. Press
and dial the Line Pool access code for one of the Line Pools assigned
to your telephone, or press
(if programmed).
2. If you are using a line pool which connects you to the public network, dial the telephone
number of the person you want to call.
If you are using a line pool that automatically connects you to another
system,
from outside the office.
see Using
If you are using a line pool which automatically connects you to a system other than
follow the procedure for using that system. Ask your System Coordinator if you
need help.
Priority Call
Ring Again
Note: See your System Coordinator for your Line Pool access code.
Interrupts a call at another telephone, or overrides Do Not Disturb
Svstem Coordinator.
at a teleohone. See
When another telephone or Line Pool within the
system is
busy, Ring Again signals you to call back when the telephone or
Line Pool becomes available.
Cancel
Saved Number
Redial
When you are active on a call, this feature stores the external
telephone number of a call you have dialed. When you are not
active on a call, this feature redials the number previously stored.
Speed Dial
Dials the number stored for a Speed Dial code. After entering the
feature code, enter the two-digit Speed Dial code (01 to 94) for
the number YOU want.
Begin a conversation through the speaker of another telephone
without first making the other telephone ring. To answer a Voice
Call, pick up the receiver, or press
Voice Call
Modular DR5 System Coordinator Guide
196 Prime Telephone User Card
What is a Prime
Telephone?
A Prime Telephone can be any Meridian
telephone that has been
assigned to provide a backup answering service for incoming external calls.
An external call rings at a Prime Telephone when the call is not answered at
any other telephones with that call’s line appearance.
A Prime Telephone can be any one of the following:
l any
telephone
l
an M7310 telephone with a Busy Lamp Field (BLF)
l
an M7324 telephone with Central Answering Position (CAP) module.
Your role in
operating a Prime
Telephone
As the assigned Prime Tejephone operator, you are responsible for
answering unanswered external calls. You are alerted to these calls when
your telephone display shows you a descriptive message, the line
indicator flashes, and the call rings.
After answering a call, you may take a message or redirect the call to another
telephone.
Who assigns the
external lines for my
Prime Telephone?
Check with your System Coordinator to determine which external lines have
been assigned for backup answering and which of those lines ring at your
Prime Telephone. To help you do your job well, this person should provide a
list of names and numbers associated with each
telephone and
external line, and a list of System Speed Dial names and numbers. This
person can also tell you which features have been assigned to your telephone.
There may be more than one Prime Telephone operator in your
system. If this is the case, then each Prime Telephone operator is responsible
for a particular group of assigned lines when providing a backup answering
service. Let the appropriate people within your backup answering group know
that you are now providing a service for them.
Meridian and
are trademarks of Northern Telecom.
Modular DR5 System Coordinator Guide
Prime Telephone User Card 197
When do I answer
a call?
You answer a call if:
someone within
calls you. You hear the
internal ring (two
quick rings followed by a longer pause), and an indicator flashes beside
one of your telephone’s intercom buttons.
an external call comes directly to your Prime Telephone. You hear the
familiar external telephone ring, and an indicator flashes beside one of
your telephone’s external line buttons.
a call is redirected to your Prime Telephone from somewhere else within the
system. You hear an internal ring, an external ring, or the Camp-On
tone (two quick beeps), and you see a message on the display of your
telephone.
Note: You do not answer the call if your Prime Telephone does not ring.
How do I answer
a call?
If you want a line to be automatically selected:
1. Pick up the receiver or press
assigned).
O R
If you want to manually answer a line:
1. Press the line or intercom button with a slow flashing indicator
2. Pick up the receiver if you want the. handsfree microphone OFF.
Note: A fast flashing indicator
Handling more
one call at once
.
shows that a line is on hold.
When you have
than one call arriving at your telephone, the Call
Queuing feature allows you to answer each of the waiting calls by
automatically selecting’the next call for you.
Use Call Queuing when you are on a call and a new call alerts you by ringing
at your telephone, or by sending Call Queuing tones.
1. Pick up the receiver to answer the first call.
2. Press
or the Call Queuing button if programmed.
The call you were on is automatically put on hold.
3. To return to a previous call:
Press the external line button of the call on hold.
4. Continue to answer incoming calls.
5. Press
when you are finished with the call you are on.
Modular
System Coordinator Guide
198 Prime Telephone User Card
Redirecting calls
using display
messages
The display messages which appear on your Prime Telephone for redirected
calls should help you to understand why those calls were passed to
your Prime Telephone. This information is useful when you need to decide
what to do with the call once it has been answered.
The following table lists some example display messages that could appear on
a Prime Telephone when you receive redirected calls:
Held
Karen holds a call for too long.
J O H N DND
The call you transferred is returned to you
because the telephone is in Do Not
Disturb mode.
DRT L i n e 0 2 5
Delayed Ring Transfer redirects an
unanswered call on line 025.
Line012 to
A call on line 012 cannot ring elsewhere.
A call on line 010 was forwarded or
routed to Janet, but was not answered.
L i n e 0 0 3 c a l l back
A transferred, camped, or parked call on
line 003 was returned to the originator
using the Callback feature, but was not
answered.
The Held Line Reminder message
d
1 is repeated periodically after
the first message
d
appears. This message is accompanied
by the same tone used with the Camp-On feature (two quick beeps).
Modular DR5 System Coordinator Guide
Prime Telephone User Card 199
Your
You have just answered a call for someone else. What do you do next?
You can:
Transfer the call to another telephone within your
network, or outside
the
system.
OR
Camp the call on another
telephone.
OR
Announce the call to the office, asking that someone take the call.
OR
Take a message.
Transferring the
active call
To a telephone
system:
Check whether the telephone to which you want to transfer is already busy:
Is there an indicator beside the Internal
button for the other
telephone?
If you have a BLF, is the indicator ON for the other telephone?
If you have a CAP module, is the indicator ON for the other
telephone?
To transfer a call:
1. Make or answer a call.
2. Enter the transfer feature code.
3. Dial an internal telephone number or press an
button.
4. If you wish, you can announce the call after the called party answers.
5. Press
or JOIN.
6. The call is immediately transferred.
To a telephone within the
network or external to
Use the above procedure, substituting the following for step 3:
3. Press a line button and dial the number that you wish to transfer the call
to.
You can also do an external transfer using Unsupervised Conference:
1. Make or answer a call.
2. Call the person to whom you wish to transfer the call.
3. Establish a conference with the two parties.
4. Drop out of the conference using the Unsupervised Conference feature.
Some external lines may not support an unsupervised conference call.
In this case, you may’put the conference on hold, allowing the other
two parties to continue talking to each other.
Do not use the
button to create an unsupervised conference.
Although it will create an unsupervised conference with internal parties,
it will not work in a conference with two external
Modular DR5 System Coordinator Guide
200
Prime Telephone User Card
Camping the call
If the
telephone you want to transfer the call to is busy on another
call, you may want to camp the call on that telephone. The person receiving
the camped call will hear Camp-On tones (two quick beeps).
1. Press
or the Camp-On button (if programmed).
2. Dial the internal number of the other telephone or
Internal
button if programmed.
Announcing
the active call
You are trying to pass calls you have answered to co-workers who are not at
their telephones. Using the Page feature, you can announce the calls over the
telephones, an external loudspeaker, or both. A co-worker hearing an
announcement can answer the call from the nearest
telephone.
If
want your co-worker take the
a specific
telephone:
1. Place the call on hold.
2. Using the Page feature, announce the call and the location of the telephone
to which you will transfer the call.
3. Transfer the call to the appropriate
telephone.
OR
Camp the call on the appropriate
telephone.
4. Replace your receiver.
If
want
to take the
on a specific line:
1. Place the call on hold.
2. Use the Page feature to announce the call and its line number.
3. Replace the receiver.
Your co-worker can now go to the nearest
telephone that has that
line, select the line, and lift the receiver.
you
to take the
any
telephone:
1. Use the Call Park feature to place the call on hold. Your telephone shows a
three-digit Call Park Retrieval code on the display.
2. Use the Page feature to announce the call and the Call Park Retrieval code.
3. Replace your receiver.
Your co-worker can now retrieve the call from any other
telephone
by lifting the receiver and dialing the three-digit code.
Note: Remember that callback (the call is redirected back to your Prime
Telephone) occurs if your transferred, parked, or camped call goes
unanswered.
Modular
System Coordinator Guide
Prime Telephone User Card 201
informing your
co-workers about
their calls
Use the Send Message feature to notify co-workers that they should call you
for information.
If the person you are trying to call is on another line, or their telephone has Do
Not Disturb ON, a display message shows you that their telephone is busy. If
the person you are trying to call does not answer, a display message informs
you that there is no reply. In each case, you can use the Ring Again feature.
The Ring Again feature is a method of ensuring that you immediately know
when there is a change in the use of the other telephone. You can then try
again to place a call.
Working with other
features
Some of the many
which
provides may be particularly
useful to you. Some of these features, however, are only available if assigned
during Configuration or Administration programming. Speak to your System
Coordinator to determine which features you can use, and to obtain details on
how to use them.
Answer Group: You can immediately answer and monitor a specific group of
telephones, for example, your managers’, using Answer buttons.
Automatic Handsfree: If programmed, you can use the Handsfree
microphone and speaker for all your calls.
Call Pickup Directed: Anyone in the office can answer a call ringing at any
other
telephone by dialing that telephone’s internal number.
Call Pickup Group: Any member of a specified group can answer an external
or internal call ringing at another telephone within that specified group.
Direct-Dial Telephone: If your Prime Telephone is administered as a
Dial telephone, anyone assigned to your Direct Dial telephone can quickly
contact you by dialing an assigned single-digit number.
Hotline: A
telephone may be programmed to automatically dial your
Prime Telephone as soon as its receiver has been lifted.
Multiple Prime Telephones: There may be a requirement for more than one
Prime Telephone to provide backup answering.
Page Zone: If you do not want to disturb the entire office with an
announcement, you can direct the page to a choice of smaller areas.
Priority Call: If you have answered an urgent call for-someone who is busy
on another line, you can interrupt the person with this feature.
Modular DR5 System Coordinator Guide
202
Prime Telephone User Card
If an external call comes to you, and no remaining external line buttons are
available, the indicator for that call will appear next to any available
intercom buttons on your telephone.
Some unique
situations
If your Prime Telephone receives a callback call, you will hear the internal
telephone ring instead of the familiar external telephone ring.
The Held Line Reminder or the Delayed Ring Transfer feature is not available
unless assigned during Configuration programming.
If you are using all of your external line buttons and intercom buttons, you
can still receive a camped call (you will hear two quick beeps).
If your Prime Telephone is an
you can monitor the busy/not
busy status of other
telephones. Check for the presence or absence
of indicators beside the Internal
buttons for the other telephones.
Where to get help
To learn more about
and its features, the System Coordinator can
documents:
provide you with the following
The Meridian
Telephone User Cards show you how to:
make an external call
make an internal call
put a call on hold
use
program memory buttons.
The Meridian
features.
Feature Card lists the feature codes and describes the
The Meridian
Busy Lamp field (BLF) User Card describes how to use
the Busy Lamp Field.
The Meridian
Central Answering Position (CAP) User Card describes
how to use Central Answering Position modules.
Modular
System Coordinator Guide
User Card 203
Release button
cancels active calls.
Display
shows the time, date, call information and guides you
while using
features.
Memory button
is programmable to store a feature or to
automatically dial internal or external
number.
Dial pad
Feature button
starts or ends a feature.
Volume control
Hold button
Button inquiry
Confirm that your memory button has the correct snap-on cap by checking its
programming.
1. Release all calls and open lines with dial tone.
2. Press
3. Read the display.
4. Press
when finished.
Adjusting display
contrast
1. Press [Feature]
.
2. Press to
for the level you want.
Selecting a ring type
and volume
1. Press
2. Press
q ,a or to hear the different types of rings.
3. While the telephone is ringing, press
to adjust the volume.
louder
4. Press
to store the ring.
Adjusting receiver or
telephone speaker
volume
1. Press
Meridian and
when using the receiver or the speaker.
softer
louder
are trademarks of Northern Telecom.
Modular
System Coordinator Guide
204
User ‘Card
Internal calls
1. Pick up the receiver.
2. Dial the internal number.
External calls
1. Pick up the receiver.
2. Dial
(or your system’s external line access code).
3. Dial the external telephone number.
internal numbers and the external access code are supplied by your
System Coordinator.
Making and
answering a second
call
The M7100 telephone allows you to have two calls active at the same time.
By using
you can switch between calls.
To answer a second
1. Press
to put the first call on hold.
The second call automatically comes onto the line.
To hold a call and make a second call
1. Press
to put the first call on hold.
2. Dial the telephone number for the second call.
To
to the
call
1. Press
again to return to the first call on hold.
The second call is automatically put on hold.
To hold a call
1. Press
.
2. Press
again to return to the call on hold.
Check the display for confirmation or additional information.
Modular DR5 System Coordinator Guide
User Card 205
The memory button can store a
telephone number or feature
code to give you one touch
dialing or feature activation. You
can change the memory button
by programming it with a new
number or feature code.
About the
memory button
Memory button
Press
Programming
memory buttons
to check the memory button.
External
1. If you are on a call or an open line with dial tone, press (Hold]
2. Press
3. Dial the external number.
4. Press
to store the number.
5. Label your new button.
1. If you are on a call or an open line with dial tone, press
2. Press
3. Dial the internal number.
4. Label your new button.
Features
If you are on a call. or an open line with dial tone, press
2. Press [Feature
.
3. Press
and the feature code.
4. Label your new button.
Erasing memory buttons
If you are on a call or an open line with dial tone, press
or
2. Press
3. Press
to erase the button.
Modular
System Coordinator Guide
206 M7208 User Card
Display
shows the time, date, call information and guides you
while using
features.
Indicators
appear beside active lines and features.
Feature button
starts
a feature.
Release button
cancels active calls.
Hold button
Dial
pad
Volume control
Memory and line buttons
are buttons with indicators for one
touch dialing, feature operation or line
access.
Button Inquiry
Confirm that your memory and line buttons have the correct snap-on caps by
checking their programming.
Release all calls and open lines with dial tone.
2. Press
3. Press the button you want to check.
4. Read the display.
5. Press
when finished.
Adjusting display
contrast
1. Press
2. Press a number on the dial pad for the contrast level you want, the higher
the number the higher the contrast level.
Selecting a Ring
Type and volume
level
1. Press
.
2. Press
to hear the different types of rings.
3. While the telephone is ringing, press
to adjust the volume.
4. Press
to store the ring.
louder
Adjusting receiver or
telephone speaker
volume
Meridian and
when using the receiver or the speaker.
softer
louder
are trademarks of Northern Telecom.
Modular DR5 System Coordinator Guide
M7208 User Card
About line buttons
207
systems can have different types of line buttons. Match the line
buttons on your telephone with the ones below for instructions on how to use
them.
Internal calls using Intercom buttons
Pick up the receiver.
2. If appears beside an Intercom
button, then dial.
OR
Press an Intercom button without
then dial.
External calls using numbered Line
buttons
1. Pick up the receiver.
2. When appears beside a
numbered Line button, then dial.
OR
Press a numbered Line button
without
then dial.
Internal numbers are supplied by your System Coordinator.
Internal calls using extension
buttons
1. Pick up the receiver.
2. When appears beside an
extension button, then dial.
calls using extension
buttons
1. Pick up the receiver.
2. When appears beside the
extension button, dial
(or your system’s external line
access code) and the number.
Holding Calls
1. Press
,
flashes beside the line on hold.
2. Press the line button with the flashing to return to the call.
Check the display confirmation or additional information.
Automatic hold
Calls are put on hold automatically when you switch from one line to another.
This button operates the telephone’s built-in microphone and speaker in place
of the receiver. Your System Coordinator can program Handsfree to your
telephone.
Making calls
1.
instead of picking up the receiver.
between Handsiree and handsef
1.
and replace the handset to switch to Handsfree.
2. Pick up the receiver to switch back.
Using Mute
208
M7208 User Card
Memory buttons are the buttons
with indicators other than line or
Handsfree buttons. Memory
buttons store telephone numbers
or feature codes to give you one
dialing or feature activation.
You can change what a memory
button does by just programming
it with a new number or feature.
You cannot program a line or
Handsfree button.
About memory
q
Programming
memory buttons
to check a memory or line button.
External autodiai
1. If you are on a call or an open
dial tone, press
2. Press
3. Press a memory button.
4. Dial the external number.
5. Press (Hold] to store the number.
6. Label your new button.
or
autodiai
1. If you are on a call or an open line with dial tone, press (Hold] or
2. Press
3. Press a memory button.
4. Dial the internal number.
5. Label your new button.
features
1. If you are on a call or an open line with dial tone, press [Hold] or
2. Press
3. Press a memorv button.
4. Press
and the feature code.
5. Label your new button.
Erasing memory buttons
1. If you are on a call or an open line with dial tone, press [Hold] or
2. Press
3. Press the memory button you want to erase.
4. Press [Hold] to erase the button.
Modular DR5 System Coordinator Guide
.
.
Shift button.
for using the top function of a dual-memory button.
The lower line of the display is reserved for display button instructions.
Dual-memory buttons
store any two features and/or
numbers.
buttons
Feature button
starts or cancels a feature.
Release button
cancels active calls.
Hold button
Dial pad
Memory and line buttons
are buttons with indicators for
one touch dialing, feature
operation or line access.
Volume control
Indicators
appear beside active lines and features.
Using display
buttons
Display buttons changewith each feature you use.
The labels for display buttons appear in capital
letters directly above them on the second line of
the display. A display button with an “OK” label
above it is represented as OK in this card.
Button inquiry
Confirm that your memory and line buttons have the correct snap-on caps by
checking their programming.
1. Release all calls or open lines with dial tone.
2. Press
3. Press the button(s) you want to check and read the display.
4. Press
when finished.
Adjusting display
contrast
1. Press
2. Press UJ or DOWN for the level you want.
3. Press
when finished.
Selecting a ring type
and volume level
1. Press
2. Press
or
to hear the different types of rings.
to adjust the volume.
3. While the telephone is ringing, press
4. Press
to store the ring.
louder
softer
Meridian and
Contrast level 2
OOWN
UP
OK
are trademarks of Northern Telecom.
Modular DR5 System Coordinator Guide
210
User Card
About line buttons
calls using
1. Pick up the receiver.
2. If appears beside an Intercom
button, then dial.
OR
Press an Intercom button without
then dial.
I
1
systems can have different types of line buttons. Match the line
buttons on your telephone with the ones below for instructions on how to use
them.
I
External calls using numbered Line
buttons
1. Pick up the receiver.
2. When appears beside a
numbered Line button, then dial.
Press a numbered Line button
without
then dial.
Note: Internal numbers are supplied by your System Coordinator.
Internal calls using extension
buttons
1. Pick up the receiver.
2. When appears beside an
extension button, then dial.
External calls using extension
buttons
1. Pick up the receiver.
2. When appears beside the
extension button, then dial
(or your system’s external line
access code) and the number.
Holding Calls
1. Press The
flashes
.
beside the line on hold.
2. Press the line button with the flashing to return to the call.
Check the display for confirmation or additional information.
Automatic hold
Calls are put on hold automatically when you switch from one line to another.
This button operates the telephone’s built-in microphone and speaker in place
of the receiver. Your System Coordinator can program Handsfree to your
telephone.
Making calls
1. Press
instead of picking up the receiver.
Switching between Handsiree and handset
1. Press
and replace the handset to switch to Handsfree.
2. Pick up the receiver to switch back.
Using Mute
1. Press
2. Press
Dialing without
lifting the handset
Modular
to turn the microphone OFF.
again to turn the microphone ON.
1.
line button without then dial your call.
2. When answered, pick up the receiver, or press
3. If the call is not answered, or the line is busy, press
System Coordinator Guide
User Card 211
There are two types of memory
buttons: single-memory and
memory. Memory buttons store
telephone numbers or feature
codes to give you one touch
dialing or feature activation.
About memory
buttons
Shill
Dual-memory buttons
To use the bottom function, press
the dual-memory button.
To use the top function, press the
shift button, then press the
memory button.
Single-memory buttons
Single-memory
are the
buttons with indicators other than
line or Handsfree buttons.
Remember: Press
Programming
memory buttons
to check a memory or line button.
External
If you are on a call or an open linewith dial tone, press
or
2. Press
3. Press a memory button.
4. Dial the external number.
5. Press OK to store the number.
6. Label your new button.
Internal
1. If you are on a call or an open line
with dial tone, press
or
2. Press
.
3. Press a memory button.
4. Dial the internal number.
5. Label your new button.
Features
1. If you are on a call. or an open line
with dial tone, press
or
2. Press
.
3. Press a memory button.
4. Press
and the feature
code.
5. Label your new button.
Erasing memory buttons
1. If you are on a call or an open line
with dial tone, press
or
.
2. Press
3. Press the memory button you
want to erase.
to erase the button.
4. Press
Modular
System Coordinator
212 M7324 User Card
Memory and line buttons
buttons with indicators for one touch dialing, feature operation or
line access.
are
line of the display is reserved for display
button instructions.
cancels active calls.
appear beside active lines and features.
Using display
b u t t o n s
Display buttons change with each feature you
use. The labels for display buttons appear in
capital letters directly above them on the
second line of the display. A display button
with an “OK” label above it is represented as
OK in this card. .
Button inquiry
Confirm that your memory and line buttons have the correct snap-on caps by
checking their programming.
1. Release all calls or open lines with dial tone.
2. Press
.
3. Press the button(s) you want to check and read the display.
4. Press
when finished.
Adjusting display
contrast
Press
2. Press
3. Press
Selecting a ring type
and volume level
1. Press
2. Press
,
or to hear the different types of rings.
3. While the telephone is ringing, press
to adjust the volume.
to store the ring.
4. Press
louder
Meridian and
DOWN
UP
.
or DOWN for the level you want.
when finished.
are trademarks of Northern Telecom.
Modular DR5 System Coordinator Guide
M7324 User Card 213
About line buttons
[ L i n e )
systems can have different types of line buttons. Match the line
buttons on your telephone with the ones below for instructions on how to use
them.
Internal
using intercom buttons
1. Pick up the receiver.
2. If appears beside an Intercom
button, then dial.
OR
Press an Intercom button without
then dial. .
External
using numbered Line
buttons
1. Pick up the receiver.
2. When appears beside a
numbered Line button, then dial.
OR
Press a numbered Line button
without then dial.
Internal numbers are supplied by your system coordinator.
internal
using extension
buttons
1. Pick up the receiver.
2. When appears beside an
extension button, then dial.
External
using extension
buttons
1. Pick up the receiver.
2. When appears beside the
extension button, then dial (or
your system’s external line access
code) and the number.
Holding
1. Press The
flashes beside the line on hold.
2. Press the line
the flashing to return to the call.
Check the display for confirmation or additional information.
Automatic hold
Calls are put on hold automatically when you switch from one line to another.
This button operates the telephone’s built-in microphone and speaker in place
of the receiver. Your System Coordinator can program Handsfree to your
telephone.
.
Making
1. Press
instead of picking up the receiver.
between Handsfree and handset
1. Press
and replace the handset to switch to Handsfree.
2. Pick up the receiver to switch back.
Using Mute
1. Press
2. Press
Dialing without
lifting the handset
to turn the microphone OFF.
again to turn the microphone ON.
1. Press a line button without then dial your call.
2. When answered, pick up the receiver, or press
3. If the call is not answered, or the line is busy, press
Modular DR5 System Coordinator Guide
214 M7324 User Card
Memory buttons are the buttons
with indicators other than line or
Handsfree buttons. Memory
buttons store telephone numbers
or feature codes to give you one
touch dialing or feature activation.
You can change what a memory
button does by just programming
it with a new number or feature.
About
buttons
If you have programmed a
memory button with an internal
number the indicator comes on
when the number is busy.
Press
Programming
memory buttons
to check a memory or line button.
1. If you are on a call or an open line with dial tone,
2. Press
3. Press a memory button.
4. Dial the external number.
5. Press
to store the number.
6. Label your new button.
Internal
1. If you are on a call or an open line
2. Press
3. Press a memory button.
4. Dial the internal number.
5. Label your new button.
dial tone, press
Features
1. If you are on a call or an open line with dial tone, press
2. Press
3. Press a memory button.
4. Press
and the feature code.
5. Label your new button.
memory buttons
1. If you are on a call or an open line with dial tone, press
2. Press
.
3. Press the memory button you want to erase.
4. Piess
to erase the button.
Modular
System Coordinator Guide
or
or
or
or
Allow Redirect: A sub-heading
in Administration programming
that allows you to set whether
Line Redirection can be used
from that telephone.
A
Access code: A sequence of
characters used to gain entry
into any type of
system
programming.
Analog Terminal Adapter
A device that permits the
connection of analog
telecommunication devices
such as FAX machines,
answering machines, and single
line telephones to the
system. Programmed defaults
are automatically
for the
assigned by the
system.
Administration: A program that
lets one person in your office
(the System Coordinator) assign
and maintain certain settings on
the
system.
Administration access code:
A code required to access
Administration programming.
You may be asked for an
Administration password.
Answer button: A telephone
button with an indicator that is
used to monitor another
telephone. The Answer button
indicates incoming calls
destined for the other
telephone. Someone working at
a telephone with Answer
buttons (a receptionist, for
example) can receive all ringing
and visual indication of
incoming calls for other
telephones, and answer those
calls when necessary.
One telephone can have up to
four Answer buttons. An Answer
button is automatically assigned
to a telephone when that
telephone is assigned an
Answer DN.
Administration password: A
one- to six-digit password that
prevents unauthorized access
to Administration programming.
The Administration password
can be assigned and changed
in Administration programming.
Alarm code: A number that
appears on the Alarm
telephone’s display, informing
you that
has detected
a fault in the system.
Alarm telephone (Alarm set):
A telephone that is designated
to receive reports of
system problems. This function
is usually assigned to a Prime
telephone, but this can be
changed ‘in Configuration
programming.
Modular
System Coordinator Guide
telemanuals.com
216 Glossary
Answer DN: A Directory
Number (DN) of a telephone
that is monitored by an Answer
button. Up to four Answer
can be assigned to a telephone
by the Customer Service
representative.
Automatic Handsfree: A
feature that automatically
activates Handsfree operation
when you make or answer a
call. Automatic Handsfree is
assigned in Administration
programming.
Autobumping: A setting that
what the system
does with new Call Log items
when your Call Log is full. When
Autobumping is ON, a new log
entry causes the oldest entry to
be deleted. If Autobumping is
OFF, your
system does
not log calls when your log is
full.
Automatic Hold: A feature that
automatically places an active
call on hold when you select
another line. Automatic Hold is
programmed by your Customer
Service representative.
button: A memory
button that, if programmed,
provides one-touch dialing of
external or internal numbers..
options: A feature that
allows you to select the type of
calls that are stored in your Call
Log. You can choose to log
calls that were not answered by
anyone within the system, to log
calls that were unanswered at
this telephone but answered
elsewhere in the system, to log
all calls answered and not
answered at this telephone, or
to not have calls automatically
logged.
Automatic Dial: A feature that
allows you to dial without having
to pick up the receiver or select
a line. You must have a Prime
line to use Automatic Dial.
Automatic Privacy: See
Privacy.
Automatic Telephone
Relocation: A feature that lets a
telephone retain its personal
and system programming when
it is plugged into a different
modular jack. Automatic
telephone relocation is enabled
by your Customer Service
representative.
Auxiliary ringer: A separate
external telephone ringer or bell
that can be programmed to ring
when a line or a telephone
rings. An auxiliary ringer may be
programmed to ring only when
the system is in a particular
service mode. Programming of
an auxiliary ringer is done in
Administration programming
after the feature’has been
enabled by your Customer
Service representative.
Modular DR5 System Coordinator Guide
telemanuals.com
Glossary 217
B
C
Background Music: A feature
that lets you hear music from
the speaker of your
telephone. It is available only if
a music source has been
attached to the KSU and the
feature has been enabled by
your Customer Service
representative.
Call Forward: A feature that
forwards all the calls arriving at
your telephone to another
telephone in your
system. To have calls forwarded
outside the system, use Line
Redirection.
Call Forward No Answer: A
feature that forwards all calls
arriving at your telephone to
another designated telephone in
your
system after a
specific number of rings. Call
Forward No Answer is assigned
in Administration programming.
Busy Lamp Field
A
device with a liquid crystal
display (LCD) panel of
indicators that shows the status
of up to 24 telephones in the
system. The
shows
a telephone as busy if it is
active on a call, has Do Not
Disturb turned ON, or is being
used for programming. The BLF
attaches to the
Telephone.
Call Forward On Busy: A
feature that forwards all calls at
your telephone to another
designated telephone if your
telephone is busy. This feature
is assigned in Administration
programming.
Button caps: Interchangeable
plastic caps that fit over the
telephones.
buttons of
They are used to indicate the
features programmed onto each
programmable memory button.
Button caps are either
pre-printed or have clear
windows that allow you to label
the buttons.
Call Forward Override:
A feature that allows you to call
someone and ask them to stop
forwarding their calls to you.
Call Information: A feature that
allows you to display
information about incoming
calls. For external calls, you can
display the caller’s name,
telephone number and the line
name. For an internal call, you
can display the name of the
caller and their internal number.
You can obtain information
about ringing, answered, or held
calls.
Button Inquiry: A feature that
allows you to check the function
of each programmable button
on your
telephone.
Bypass Restrictions: A setting
that allows you to override any
Call Restrictions applied to
specific System Speed Dial
numbers. Bypass Restrictions
can be turned on in
Administration programming.
Modular
System Coordinator Guide
telemanuals.com
218 Glossary
Call Log: A feature that
accesses a record of incoming
calls. The log could contain the
following information for each
call: sequence number in the
Call Log, name and number of
caller, long distance indication,
indication if the call was
answered, time and date of the
call, number of repeated calls
from the same source, and
name of the line that the call
came in on. See Autobumping,
options, Enter Call Log,
and
for further information.
Call Park: A feature that allows
you to place a call on hold so
that someone can retrieve it
from any other telephone in the
system by selecting an
internal line and entering a
retrieval code. The retrieval
code appears on the display of
your telephone when you park
the call. You can park up to nine
calls on the system at one time.
Call Park Callback: See
Callback.
Call Park prefix: The first digit
of the retrieval code of a parked
call. This digit cannot conflict
with the first digit
any existing
Line Pool access codes,
the Direct-dial digit, or the
external line access code. The
default Call Park prefix digit is
“1”. It may be set to none, in
which case Call Park is
disabled. Call Park prefix is
assigned by your Customer
Service representative.
Modular
Call Pickup Directed: A feature
that lets you answer a call
telephone
ringing at any
by entering the internal number
of that telephone before taking
the call. Call Pickup Directed is
activated by your Customer
Service representative.
Call Pickup Group: See Pickup
Group.
Call Queuing: A feature that
allows you to answer calls in
order of priority if you have
several calls waiting at your
telephone. Priority is given to
external incoming calls, followed
by callback and camped calls.
Callback: A feature that returns
parked, camped or transferred
calls to your telephone if they
are not answered at another
telephone. How long the system
will wait before Callback occurs
is set by your Customer Service
representative.
Camp-On: A feature that lets
you re-route a call to a
telephone even if all the lines on
that telephone are busy. To
answer a camped call, use Call
Queuing or select a line if the
camped call appears on your
telephone. Priority is given to
queued calls over camped calls.
Camp timeout: The length of a
delay before a camped call is
returned to the telephone that
camped the call. This delay is
set by your Customer Service
representative.
System Coordinator Guide
telemanuals.com
Glossary 219
Capabilities: A section heading
in Administration programming,
that covers the dialing filters,
remote access packages, set
abilities, and line abilities that
can be assigned to
lines, telephones, or Class of
Service passwords.
Central Answering Position
(CAP): An M7324 Telephone
that has been designated a
CAP by your Customer Service
representative. The CAP
provides backup answering and
can be used to monitor the
telephones within a
system. One or two CAP
modules can be attached to a
CAP to increase the number of
lines it can handle.
Central Answering Position
(CAP) module: A module
connected to an M7324
Telephone that provides 48
additional buttons that can be
used as
buttons or
Feature buttons. A maximum of
two CAP modules can be
connected to a single M7324
Telephone.
Class of Service (COS):
A set of
features and
lines available to the user for a
call. The Class of Service for a
call is determined by the Dialing
Filters and Remote Access
Packages assigned to the
telephone in Administration
programming. The Class of
Service for a call can be
changed by entering a six-digit
Class of Service password.
(Internal users cannot change
their access to features with a
COS password, only their
dialing filters.) Class of Service
and Class of Service passwords
are assigned in
programming. See Remote
Access.
Class of Service password: A
six-digit code that lets you
switch from your current Class
of Service to one that lets you
dial numbers prohibited by your
current Class of Service.
Conference: A feature that
allows you to establish a
three-person call at your
telephone.
Conference using privacy: A
feature that allows you to turn
privacy OFF for a call allowing
another’person with the same
line to press the line button and
join in your conversation,
forming a conference. Normally
your calls are private; no one
else can pick up your line and
join in.
Contrast Adjustment: A
feature that allows you to set
the contrast level of your
telephone display.
Modular DR5 System Coordinator
telemanuals.com
220 Glossary
Control telephone: A
telephone that can place the
lines for which it has
responsibility in or out of a
Service Mode. A telephone is
programmed as a Control
telephone and has lines
assigned to it in Administration
programming.
COS: See Class of Service.
Cursor: A short horizontal line
that appears on the
telephone display to indicate
that characters can be entered
using the dial pad.
D
Data Communications
Interface (DCI): A
device that lets you attach an
RS-232 data device to your
system.
Data terminal: A device, such
as a modem, that can be used
to transfer data instead of sound
over a telephone network. You
cannot use
programming to set up such
devices. See the documentation
that accompanies the device.
Date: See Show Time or Time
and Date.
Defaults: The settings for all
features when the
system is first installed. Settings
are changed from their defaults
Administration programming
and by your Customer Service
representative. In this manual,
default settings are shown in
bold text.
Modular
Delayed Ring Transfer (DRT)
to Prime: A feature that
transfers an unanswered call on
an external line to the Prime
Telephone associated with that
line after a specified number of
rings. This feature is activated
by your Customer Service
representative.
Dial mode: The dialing mode of
a line can be either Tone or
pulse. Pulse is traditionally used
by rotary dial telephones. Tone
is also referred to as dual-tone
multi frequency (DTMF) tones.
Dial mode can be programmed
by your Customer Service
representative.
Dialing filter: A feature that
prevents certain telephone
numbers from being dialed
through a combination of
restrictions and exceptions.
Dialing filters can be applied to
lines (line filters, remote filters),
to telephones (set filters), to
specific lines on a telephone
(line/set filters), and to Class of
Service passwords (user filters,
remote filters). The
Modular system can handle up
to 100 dialing filters.
Direct Inward System Access
(DISA): A feature that lets
remote users dial directly into
the
system and use
features. Callers hear
stuttered dial tone and are
required to enter a Class of
Service password to gain
access to the system. See
Remote Access.
System Coordinator Guide
Glossary 221
Direct-dial: A feature that lets
you dial a designated telephone
in your
system with a
single
many as five
Direct-dial telephones can be
established. Each telephone in
the system is assigned to one
Direct-dial telephone. There is a
single, system wide digit for
calling the assigned Direct-dial
telephone of any telephone.
Direct-dial telephones are
established in Administration
programming. Telephones are
assigned to a Direct-dial
telephone in Administration
programming.
DN: A received number
assigned to the
Direct
Inward System Access facility. If
a caller dials a number that is
assigned to the
DN, the
caller hears stuttered dial tone
and must enter a Class of
Service Password. Once the
password is accepted, the caller
hears system dial tone and can
use Remote Access features.
See Remote Access.
Direct-dial number: A digit
used system wide to call a
Direct-dial telephone. The digit
is programmed by your
Customer Service
representative.
Display button: One of three
buttons located directly beneath
the display on
and
M7324 Telephones. During
feature operation or
programming, some or all of
these buttons may be used to
provide further options. If an
option is available, it is shown in
the bottom line of the two-line
display, directly above the
corresponding display button.
Display buttons are represented
in this manual as underlined
capitals, e.g.
Display: A liquid crystal display
(LCD) on the
telephone
that guides you through feature
operation and programming.
Directed Pickup: See Call
Pickup Directed.
Directory Number (DN): A
unique number that is
automatically assigned to each
telephone or data terminal. The
DN, also referred to as an
internal number, is often used to
identify a telephone when
settings are assigned during
programming. Default DN
assignments start at 21 in a
two-digit (non-expanded)
system and 221 in a three-digit
(expanded) system.
Display digits: A sub-heading
in Administration programming
that allows you set whether an
assigned name or the actual
number is displayed when
someone uses a system speed
dial code.
DISA: See Direct Inward
System Access.
DN: See Directory Number.
Modular
System Coordinator Guide
222 Glossary
DRT delay: The number of
rings before a Delayed Ring
Transfer occurs. This is
assigned by your Customer
Service representative.
DRT to Prime: See Delayed
Ring Transfer to Prime.
E
Emergency Telephone: A
single-line telephone (also
referred to as a
telephone) that becomes active
when there is no power to the
Key Service Unit.
Event message: An item stored
in the system log and displayed
during a Maintenance session.
Event messages record a
variety of events and activities
in the
system.
Exceptions: A component of a
Dialing filter. Exceptions are
numbers you can dial even if
they are forbidden by a more
general Restriction. See
Restrictions.
Expanded system: A
system with an Expansion
Cartridge.
Expansion Cartridge: A
cartridge which connects Trunk
modules and Expansion
modules to the Key Service
Unit.
External Call Forward: See
Line Redirection.
External code: The number
you dial to get an external line.
The default is 9, but this can be
changed by your Customer
Service representative. You do
not always need an external
code. It is primarily to support
the
Telephone and
single-line telephones using an
Analog Terminal Adapter
External line: A line on your
telephone used for
making calls to destinations
outside the
system.
External music source: See
Music source.
External paging: A feature you
can use to make voice
announcements over an
externally-mounted loudspeaker
connected to the Key Service
Unit. The external speaker is
not a
component and
must be supplied by the
customer.
Extra-dial telephone: A
heading in Administration
programming that allows you to
assign an extra Direct-dial
telephone when a service mode
is active. You can have one
Extra-dial telephone for each of
the three service modes.
External call: A call to a
destination outside the
system.
Modular
System Coordinator Guide
Glossary
F
Feature button: A button that
activates many
features
when it is pressed and followed
by a Feature code. The Feature
button is also used to exit a
feature.
Feature Cartridge: A
replaceable cartridge containing
features. The
the
Feature Cartridge, a
combination of a Data Cartridge
and a Software Cartridge, is
inserted into the Key Service
Unit.
Feature code: A number that is
used to activate a particular
feature.
Forward: See Call Forward.
Forward delay: The number of
rings before an unanswered call
is forwarded to another
telephone when the Call
Forward No Answer feature is
ON. Forward delay is assigned
in Administration programming.
Forward No Answer: See Call
Forward No Answer.
Full Handsfree: See
Handsfree.
G
Group Listening: A feature that
allows you to have others in
your office hear a caller through
your phone’s speaker. The
caller hears you only when you
speak into the receiver and
cannot hear other people in the
office.
H
Handsfree: A feature you can
use to make calls without using
the telephone receiver. Full
Handsfree is activated in
Administration programming.
When it is activated, a
button is
automatically assigned to the
telephone.
Handsfree (HF) Answerback:
A feature that automatically
turns ON the microphone at a
telephone receiving a Voice Call
so that the person receiving the
call can respond without lifting
the receiver. Handsfree
Answerback is activated in
Administration programming.
Forward On Busy: See Call
On Busy.
button: See
Handsf ree.
Full
(on idle line): A
feature that, when activated,
puts a line on hold when you
select an available line and then
do something that selects
another line. Full
is
activated by your Customer
Service representative.
Headset: A head-mounted or
ear-mounted telephone receiver
that is used instead of the
hand-held receiver. Headsets
are not
components and
must be supplied by the
customer.
Modular DR5 System Coordinator Guide
224 Glossary
Held (Line) Reminder: An
indication that an external call
has been placed on hold for a
certain period of time. Your
telephone rings and
displays the message
d
1. The Held Line
Reminder feature and Remind
delay are programmed by your
Customer Service
representative.
HF Answerback: See
Handsfree Answerback.
Hold button: A button used to
suspend calls so that the person
using the telephone can perform
another task without
disconnecting the caller.
Hookswitch Flash: See Link
time.
Host System Signaling: (Also
referred to as End-to-End
Signaling.)
telephones
can access a remote system or
dial a number on an alternate
carrier by means of Host feature
activation, such as Link, Pause
and Run/Stop.
Hotline: A feature that
automatically calls a
pre-assigned number when the
telephone’s receiver is lifted or
the
button is
pressed. A Hotline number can
be an internal or external
number. Hotline is programmed
in Administration programming.
Installer: A person who installs
the
equipment, and
performs System Startup and
certain programming actions.
The Installer or the System
Coordinator can program
Administration settings.
Intercom button: A button that
provides access to internal lines
used for calls within a
system and access to external
lines through a Line Pool or
external code. A telephone may
be assigned zero to eight
Intercom buttons. This is done
by the Customer Service
representative.
Intercom keys: See Intercom
button.
Internal line: A line on your
telephone dedicated to making
calls to destinations inside your
system. An internal line
may still connect you with an
external caller if you use it to
access a line pool or to pick up
a call using
call
handling features such as Call
Park or Call Pickup Directed.
Internal number: A number
(also referred to as a Directory
Number or DN) that identifies a
telephone or device.
Internal user: A person using a
telephone within a
Not-star system.
An abbreviation of Intercom
button.
Modular
System Coordinator Guide
Glossary 225
K
Key Service Unit (KSU): The
central hardware component in
the
system. The KSU
has its own processor and
memory, and provides a
physical point of connection for
the various types of devices,
telephones, and expansion
modules used in
The
KSU can function on its own as
a basic system (with 24
telephones and 8 external
lines), or with the addition of a
Trunk Module (TM) that
supports more external lines, or
a Station Module (SM) that
supports more
telephones.
L
Line: The complete path of a
voice or data connection
between one telephone (or
other device) and another.
Line abilities: The heading in
Administration programming
under which you assign Line
Filters, Remote Filters, and
Remote Access Packages to
lines.
Line filter: See Dialing filter.
Line names: The sub-heading
in Administration programming
that allows you to assign names
to external lines.
Line number: A number that
identifies an external line. The
total number of lines depends
on how many Trunk Modules
are installed.
Line Pool: A group of lines
used for making external calls.
Line Pools provide an efficient
way of giving a telephone
access to external lines without
taking up many line buttons. A
line is assigned to be a member
of a Line Pool by your Customer
Service representative.
Line Pool access code: A
number that identifies a Line
Pool. Line Pool access codes
are assigned by your Customer
Service representative.
Line Profile: A feature you can
use to review the settings .
programmed to lines by the
Customer Service
representative and by
Administration programming.
The settings cannot be changed
with this feature. Line profile is
available only on
and
M7324 Telephones.
Line Redirection: A feature
that allows you to redirect all
calls on an incoming line to a
destination outside the
system. Once a line is
redirected it cannot be
answered within the
system. The system may be set
up to give a brief ring when a
call comes in on a redirected
line. This feature differs from
Call Forward in two ways. It
redirects only external calls (not
internal calls) and it redirects
calls to destinations outside the
system. Call forward redirects
calls only to destinations inside
the
system. See Call
Forward and Redirect Ring.
System Coordinator Guide
226 Glossary
Link time: A specific time delay
that allows access to PBX
features through a
system. Link time is also
referred to as a “Hookswitch
Flash” or “Recall”. Link time is
assigned by your Customer
Service representative.
M7900 Telephone: A telephone
with a touch-screen display that
replaces the display and
memory buttons of other
telephones. It provides
simplified access to
Features and an interface to
computer driven applications.
A feature that allows you
‘to manually log call information
when you are connected to a
call.
Maintenance: .A type of
programming you can use to
diagnose and repair problems in
the
system.
Maintenance requires no
programmable settings.
M
M7100 Telephone: A telephone
that has a one-line display and
one programmable memory
button without an indicator.
M7208 Telephone: A telephone
that has a one-line display and
eight programmable memory
buttons with indicators.
M7310 Telephone: A telephone
that has a two-line display, three
display buttons, 10
programmable memory buttons
with indicators, and 12
dual-memory programmable
buttons without indicators. An
Telephone can be
equipped with a
Field.
M7324 Telephone: A telephone
with a two-line display, three
display buttons, and 24
programmable memory buttons
with indicators. An M7324
Telephone can be equipped
with a CAP module.
Modular
Memory buttons: The buttons
that can be programmed to dial
frequently used features or
numbers automatically. See
M7100, M7208, M7310, M7324
and M7900 Telephone entries
for their exact memory button
configurations.
Message: A feature that allows
you to indicate to another
internal user that you would like
them to call you.
Music source: A radio or other
source of music that can be
connected to the Key Service
Unit to provide music for the
Music on Hold and Background
Music features. A music source
is not part of the
system
and must be supplied by the
customer.
System Coordinator Guide
Glossary
N
P
Names: A feature that allows
you to assign System Speed
Dial numbers, external lines,
telephones, and Service Modes
in Administration programming.
You can use up to sixteen
characters to name a System
Speed Dial number, and seven
characters to name a telephone,
line, or Service Mode. If a Name
has not been assigned, the line
number or DN appears on the
display instead of a Name.
Page: A feature you can use to
make announcements over the
system. You can
choose Internal Page
(announce over the telephone
speakers), External Page
(announce over an
externally-mounted,
customer-supplied
loudspeaker), or both Internal
and External Page.
Page Zone: An area in the
office that receives internal
Page announcements
independently of the rest of the
office. Each Page Zone is
identified by a number.
Telephones are assigned to
Page Zones in Administration
programming.
Night Service: See Service
Modes.
Programming
Overlay: A paper template that
is placed over the top four
memory buttons with indicators
on the M7310 or M7324
Telephone during programming.
The overlay labels indicate the
special’function that each of the
four buttons takes on during
programming.
Park prefix: See Call park
prefix.
Park timeout: A delay before
an unanswered parked call
returns to the telephone that
parked it. Park timeout is set by
your Customer Service
representative. See Call Park.
0
On hold: A setting that controls
whether external callers hear
music, periodic tones, or silence
when they are-placed on hold.
This setting is programmed by
your Customer Service
representative.
Password: A specific sequence
of digits that you enter to gain
access to
programming,
to override dialing restrictions,
or to use Remote Access with
DISA. Passwords are also
required for System Startup and
Administration programming.
See
of Service password.
Overlay: See
Programming Overlay.
A character that inserts
a
delay in a dialing
sequence on an external line.
Modular
System Coordinator Guide
228 Glossary
Personal Speed Dial: A
two-digit code (71-94) that can
be programmed to dial external
telephone numbers. Personal
Speed Dial numbers are
programmed
each
telephone, and can be used
only at the telephone on which
they are programmed.
Pickup Group: A
of
telephones. A telephone can be
placed into one of nine Call
Pickup Groups. A call ringing at
a telephone within a Pickup
Group can be picked up at any
other telephone within the same
Pickup Group. A telephone is
assigned to a Pickup Group in
Administration programming.
Pool: See Line Pool.
Pre-dial: A feature that allows
you to enter a number and
check it on your telephone
display before it is actually
dialed. If the number is
incorrect, you can edit it. The
number is dialed only when you
pick up the receiver or select a
line.
Prime line: A line on your
telephone that is automatically
selected when you lift the
receiver, press the
Handsfree/Mute button or use
an external dialing feature. A
Prime line is assigned to a
telephone by your Customer
Service representative.
Modular
Prime telephone (Prime set):
A telephone that provides
backup answering for incoming
calls on external lines. The
Prime telephone for a line will
ring for any unanswered calls
on that line. A Prime telephone
is assigned to a line by your
Customer Service
representative.
Priority Call: A feature you can
use to make a Voice call to a
telephone that is idle, busy or
has Do Not Disturb activated.
This feature is enabled for a
telephone in Administration
programming.
Privacy: A feature that
determines whether a
user may select a line in use at
another telephone and join an
established call. Privacy is set
by your Customer Service
representative, but can be
turned ON and OFF by users
during individual calls.
Private line: See Private to.
Private network: A telephone
network consisting of owned or
leased telephone lines used to
connect different offices of an
organization independently of
the public network.
Private to: A line assigned to
one telephone as a Private line
by your Customer Service
representative. The line cannot
appear on any other telephone,
except the Prime telephone for
that line. Private lines cannot be
placed into Line Pools.
System Coordinator Guide
Glossary 229
Programming: A series of
procedures that set the way the
system works.
Programming includes
system-wide settings and
individual telephone and line
settings.
Remind delay: A feature that
causes a telephone to beep and
display the message
d call when a call has
been on hold for a
programmable period of time.
This period is the Remind delay,
and is programmed by your
Customer Service
representative.
Programming Overlay: See
Programming Overlay.
Remote access: The ability to
dial into a
system from
outside the system and make
use of selected
features. The lines, features,
and dialing capabilities available
to a remote user are determined
by the Class of Service. If the
remote access line is answered
with DISA, the user must enter
a Class of Service password to
gain access to the
system’s features.
Programming reminder: A
chart on which you can record
some commonly-used settings
from Administration
programming to keep the
system’s records
up-to-date.
Public line: An external line
that can be assigned to any
telephone and to many
telephones. A line is assigned
as Public by your Customer
Service representative.
Remote access dial filter: See
Remote filter.
Public network: The regular
telephone network that
connects most homes and
businesses.
Remote access package: A
sub-heading in Administration
programming that allows you
set
to Paging and
Line Pools for remote users.
R
Recall: See Link time.
Receiver: The handset of a
telephone.
Remote capability: A subset of
features that is available
to users connected through
Remote Access.
Redirect ring: A sub-heading in
Administration programming
that allows you to set whether a
line that has been redirected
through Line Redirection gives a
short ring on those telephones
on which the line appears.
Remote filter: A Dialing filter
applied to a line in order to
control which digits can be
dialed during an incoming
remote access call. It is the
equivalent of a Telephone filter
for a remote user.
Modular
System Coordinator Guide
230 Glossary
Remote paging: A feature that
allows remote users to use the
paging feature. Access
to this feature is governed by
the Class of Service for the call.
See Remote Access and Class
of Service.
Remote User: A person who
calls into a
system from
a telephone outside that system
and uses
features or
lines. See Remote Access.
Restrictions: A component of a
Dialing filter. Restrictions are
numbers you cannot dial when
that Dialing filter is in effect. See
Exceptions.
Ringing: A programming
function done by your Customer
Service representative that
assigns a line to ring or not ring
at a telephone. If a line has
been assigned as “No ring”, an
incoming call is shown only by a
flashing indicator.
Ringing Telephone (Ringing
Set): A telephone that has been
assigned to ring when a line has
been placed into a Service
Mode. Ringing Telephones are
assigned in Administration
programming.
Rls button: A button that ends
a call in the same way that
hanging up the receiver does. It
may also be used to end
Startup, Administration
programming, Maintenance
sessions and feature
operations.
Run/Stop: A character that
creates a breakpoint in a
programmed external dialing
sequence. When you press a
programmed key, the system
dials the number up to the
Run/Stop. When you press it
again, the system dials the
digits following the Run/Stop.
S
SAPS: See Station Auxiliary
Power Supply.
Selective line redirection: See
Line Redirection
Service Modes: A feature that
provides special ringing and
telephone access after normal
office hours, or when there are
few people available to answer
calls. Certain features become
active when one or more lines
are placed into a Service Mode.
Service Modes settings are
assigned in Administration
Set: A telephone.
Set ability: A sub-heading in
Administration programming
under which set filters, line/set
filters; and a variety of system
features are assigned to
individual telephones.
Modular DR5 System Coordinator Guide
Glossary
231
Show Time: A feature that
allows you see the current date
and time on the
telephone display while you are
on a call.
Set Copy: A heading is
Configuration programming that
allows you to copy
programmable settings from
one telephone to another of the
same type. Set Copy provides
two options: duplicating System
Data and User Data, or
duplicating System Data only.
Set Copy does not provide the
same copy capability as the
display button, which is
more selective of the settings
that can be duplicated:
Station: An individual telephone
or other
device.
Station Auxiliary Power
Supply (SAPS): A device which
provides power to a
telephone that is connected
more than 305 m (1000 ft) and
less than 760 m (2500 ft) from
the Key Service Unit, or to a
CAP module.
Set filter: See Dialing filter.
Set Names: A sub-heading in
Supervised line: A line for
which disconnect supervision is
enabled. If an external caller
hangs up, the
system
detects the disconnection and
hangs up its line also.
Administration programming
that allows you to assign Names
of up to seven characters to
telephones.
Profile: A feature you can
use to review the settings that
have been programmed by your
Customer Service
representative and by yourself
in Administration programming.
The settings cannot be changed
with this feature. Set Profile is
available only on the
and M7324 Telephones.
System Coordinator: A person
responsible for customizing the
system through
Administration programming
and for helping co-workers use
the
system.
System Data: An option in the
Set Copy function. System Data
refers to the system settings
that apply to all telephones and
lines. System Data consists of
the programmable settings from
System Startup and
Administration programming. It
also includes the setting
programmed by your Customer
Service representative.
Set Relocation: See Automatic
Telephone Relocation.
Shift button: A small triangular
button beside the dual-memory
buttons on the upper half of the
Telephone. Press the
shift button to store or access
features on the top half of the
dual-memory buttons.
Modular
System Coordinator Guide
232
Glossary
System Speed Dial: In
Administration programming, a
heading under which you can
assign up to 70 numbers as
System Speed Dial numbers.
TCM line (Time Compression
Multiplexing line): A two-wire
digital station loop joining the
cross-connect at the Key
Service Unit to a telephone.
System Speed Dial Code: A
two-digit code (01 to 70) that
can be programmed to dial a
telephone number up to 24
digits long. System Speed Dial
codes are programmed for the
entire
system in
Administration programming.
Telephone lock (Set lock): A
feature that allows you to limit
the number of features that may
be used or programmed at a
telephone. Full telephone lock
allows very few changes or
features, Partial telephone lock
allows some changes and
features, and No telephone lock
allows any change to be made
and any feature to be used.
Telephone lock is assigned in
Administration programming.
System Speed Dial Name: A
sub-heading in Administration
programming under which you
can assign a name to a System
Speed Dial number.
System Startup: A procedure
that initializes the system
programming to defaults. When
a
system is first installed
and powered up, System
Startup must be performed
before any programming can be
done.
T
Tandem call: A call established
when a remote user dials into
the
system
uses
the system to place an outgoing
call. The combination of the
incoming and outgoing calls
forms a tandem call. See
Remote Access.
Time and Date: A display
description. The current Time
and Date appear on the display
of idle
telephones. The
Time and Date can be changed
in Administration programming.
Transfer: A feature that lets you
redirect a call to another
telephone in your
system, over a network or
outside your
system.
There
four types of
Transfer; Transfer using Hold,
Transfer with Announcement,
Transfer without
Announcement, and transfer
using Unsupervised
Conference.
Target line: A line dedicated to
receiving calls from outside the
system.
Modular
System Coordinator Guide
Glossary 233
Transfer Callback: A feature
that returns a transferred call if it
is not answered after a specific
number of rings. The number of
rings is programmed by your
Customer Service
representative. Transfer
Callback does not apply to calls
transferred externally.
Trunk: A physical connection
between the
system
and the outside world using
-either the public telephone
system or a private network.
User Data: An option in the Set
Copy feature. User Data refers
to the personal settings that are
unique to an individual
telephone, and are not
programmed by the Customer
Service representative or
Administration programming.
User Data is programmed at
each telephone. These settings,
for example, include Personal
Speed Dial and the assignment
of programmable memory
buttons.
User Filter: See Dialing filter.
Trunk Answer: A feature you
can use to answer a call on any
line that has an active Service
Mode, even if that line does not
appear on your telephone.
Trunk Answer is activated in
Administration programming.
U
Unsupervised line: A line for
which disconnect supervision is
disabled. If an external caller
hangs up, the
system
does not detect the
disconnection and does not
hang up its line. See Disconnect
Supervision.
Voice Call: A feature you can
use to make an announcement
or begin a conversation through
the speaker of another
telephone in the
system. The telephone you call
does not ring. Instead, the
person you call hears a beep
and then your voice. Their
telephone beeps periodically to
remind them that their
microphone is open.
Modular DR5 System Coordinator Guide
234 Glossary
Modular
System Coordinator Guide
A
full
Access Code
External line 123
denied
Conference 112
Speed dial 169
Accidental Disconnect
Protection 172
Administration
Dialing filters 35
Direct-Dial 34
Names 28
Overview 16
Programming reminders 67
Service Modes 51
Alarm telephone
description 164
Allow Redirect 45, 143
Programming 45
Call Pickup 105
Dialing 125
Parked
Call Park 102
Alternate Language 118
Answer buttons 105,154
Answerback 43
Long tones 147
Autobumping 95
155
Buttons 155
Feature description 85
Host System Signaling 87
losing data after power
failure 86
85
Speed dial 169
Voice Message
logging set 59
Automatic Call information 58
Automatic Dial 117
Automatic Handsfree 116
programming 43
Automatic telephone relocation
172
Auxiliary Ringer
programming 44 .
Service Modes 54
B
Background Music 172
Blocking calls 49
Button
86
Button Inquiry
Feature description 129
Buttons
Answer 154
155
Erasing programming 129
Feature 154, 155
H o l d 1 5 4
indicators 79
Line 155
Memory 154
Programmed 155
Release 155
Volume 155
Modular DR5 System Coordinator Guide
telemanuals.com
236 Index
C
Cal 1 bl
Priority call 160
Call Display Information 3, 77
first display 59
Call Display services 3
Call Forward
Feature description 88
No Answer
On Busy
Override 88
Call Identification 56, 58, 59
Call Information
Feature description 91
Call Log 6
Autobumping 95
call from 96
clearing passwords 59
defaults 56
displays 98
erase items 96
Feature description 93
Log Space 59
Logging Options 93
94
navigate 96
optional password 97
reset all Logs 56
Call Park 78
displays 102
Feature description 102
Call Pickup 78
Assigning groups 106
displays 104
Feature description 104
Priority of alerting calls 106
Call Pickup (group)
programming 43
Call Queuing
Feature description 107
priorities 107
Callback 77
Calls
Incoming 83
denied
Camp on 108
Camp On
Call Queuing 109
displays 108
Feature description IO8
ringing 79
Can’t
Dialing 125
Can’t send
Message 150
Cancel
Feature 76
Cancel
i ed
Message 150
Cancel for
Message 151
CAP module 164
Capabilities
Dialing filters 35
Line filters 50
Remote filters 50
User filter 50
Class of Service 173,185
Class of Service passwords
copying data 49
for internal Users 48
Line filter 50
number of 49
Remote package 50
Security 48
User filter 50
with
DN 48
Conference
displays 112
Modular DR5 System Coordinator Guide
telemanuals.com
Index 237
Feature description 110
on
telephone 113
Transferring 112
with Privacy 110
Conference 112
Configuration 173
Contrast Adjustment 116
Control telephone 165
assigning to lines 51
line programming 61
telephone programming 61
COS Line filters (See Line
filters (COS))
COS Password
Changing 115
displays 5
Feature description 115
Customizing
13, 16
Customizing the telephone
Contrast Adjustment 116
Dialing modes 117
Handsfree 116
Language 118
Moving line buttons 119
Pulse/Tone Dialing 120
ring type 120
ring volume 121
D
Delayed Ring Transfer 77
Denied in
Call Pickup 105
Priority call 160
Service modes 162
Dialing
direct dial 123
displays 125
Pulse or Tone 120
Dialing filters
deleting 38
Programming 35
Dialing Modes
Automatic 117
Pre-Dial 117
Standard 117
Direct-dial telephone 165
Directed Pickup
Feature description 104
Directory Numbers 173
description 185
Disconnect protection 172
Disconnect Supervision 174
Displays
One-line 74
Prime telephone 83
Two-line 74
Do Not Disturb 78, 82, 88, 179
Feature description 128
E
Emergency calls
Priority call 160
Emergency telephone 166
Enter code
Speed dial 169
Page 159
Exclusive hold 136
Feature description 136
Extension numbers (See
Directory Numbers)
External call
ringing 79
External line Access Code 123
External lines
Line/telephone filter 41
Modular DR5 System Coordinator Guide
telemanuals.com
238 Index
Extra-dial telephone 166
additional Direct-Dial 54
F
Feature
Programming 129
Feature Buttons 154,155
Features
Cancelling 76
Overview 74
Restrictions 42
Filters
Line 47
Line with COS 50
Line/telephone 41
Remote Access dialing 47
User 50
Feature description 133
Headset
Answering a call 156
Full Handsfree 42
Operating 156
Hold
Listen on hold 135
Music, Tones or Silence 136
on M7100 telephone 136
Hold Button 154
Hold description 135
Hold or release
Call forward 89
Forwarding (See Call Forward)
Call Forward No Answer 45
Call Forward On Busy 44
Full Handsfree
programming 42
Feature programming 130
Host System Signaling 137
Link 137
Pause
137
.
Programmed Release 137
Run/Stop 138
Timed Release 138
Hotline
Programming 46
Hotline telephone 166
Hung lines
releasing 174
G
I
Forward denied
call first
Call Park 102
Group Listen
Feature description 132
Group Pickup
Feature description 104
H
Handsfree
Answerback 43
Automatic 43
Etiquette 134
Full Handsfree 42
78
Line redirection 143
Indicators 79
Internal call
ringing 79
Internal numbers (See
Directory Numbers)
id
Page 159
L
Language choice 118
Last Number Redial
Feature description 123
Modular DR5 System Coordinator Guide
telemanuals.com
Index 239
Line Abilities
Line Filter 47
Remote Filter 47
Remote Package 47
Line Buttons 155
moving 119
Listen on Hold 135
94
Long Tones
Feature description 147
Line denied
Telephone
Conferencing 113
display buttons 74
Hold 84, 136
selecting lines 76
User Card 203
M7208 Telephone
display buttons 74
User Card 206
M7310 Telephone .
display buttons
overlay 20
User Card 209
M7324 Telephone
display buttons
overlay 20
User Card 212
M
Call Pickup 105
Line filter
defaults 47
Line filters (COS)
defaults 50
Programming 50
Line in
Hotline 167
Line Pools 175
Feature description 140
Hotline 46
preventing access 49
Ring Again 141
System Speed Dial 26
Line Profile 62
Line Redirection 89
Allow Redirect 45
Call forward No Answer 45
Feature description 142
Redirect Ring 46
System Speed Dial 26
Line Supervision 173
Line/telephone filters
number of 41
Lines
Line Pools 175
Prime 175
Private 175
Ringing preference 175
Target 176
Hung lines 174
Link 137
Feature description 137
Make call first
Camp on 109
group Listen 132
Make calls first
Conference 112
Memory buttons 154
Programming 129
denied
Message 151
Message Waiting 11
Messages
Answering 148
displays 150
Erasing 148
Feature description 148
Sending 148
Music on Hold 136
Modular
System Coordinator Guide
telemanuals.com
240 Index
N
0
Name
System Speed Dial 27
Names
entering letters 23
Length 28
Programming 28
Valid characters 28
On-hook dialing 117
Need
Headset 157
Service modes 162
No
1
Line redirection 143
P
timeout
Page 159
Paging
Feature description 158
preventing access 49
zones 43,158
Paging
Call Pickup 105
Dialing 126
Message 152
No calls waiting
Answering the telephone 8
No last number
Last number redial 126
No 1
Answering the telephone 8
Dialing 126
Hotline 167
No 1
use
Line redirection 143
No number saved
Saved Number rediall26
Page 159
Park
Call Park 103
Park
Not in
Call forward 89
Camp on 109
Numbers
entering 22
viewing 22
full
Call Park 103
Password
Administration 55
Pause
Feature description 137
Personal Speed Dial 168
Pick
UP
receiver
Queuing 81
Pickup
Call Pickup programming 43
Pickup denied
Call Pickup 105
No saved number
Saved Number redial 126
No voice call
Voice Call 188
denied’
Pool code
Line redirection 143
Pre-Dial 117
Prime Line 175
Hotline 46
Prime telephone 78, 167
Priority Call
Feature description 160
ring 79
Modular DR5 System Coordinator Guide
Index 241
Priority denied
Priority call 160
Privacy
Creating a conference 10
Private lines 175
Call pickup 43, 105
Q
Queuing
priorities 107
R
221
and HOLD 131
Programmed Release
Feature description 137
Programming
Allow Redirect 45
Automatic Handsfree 43
Auxiliary Ringer 44
Call Forward No Answer 45
Call Forward On Busy 44
Call Pickup (group) 43
Capabilities 35
COS Line filter 50
Features 129
Full Handsfree 42
Handsfree Answerback 43
Hotline 46
Names 28
Page Zone 43
preparing for 14
purpose 13
Redirect Ring 46
reminders 67
Remote Packages 47
Service mode
Service Modes 51
name 52
Telephone filter
41
15
Trunk Answer 54
using display buttons 21
Programming Record
Pulse dialing 120
Modular
Line redirection 144
Redirect Ring 79
Programming 46
Release a
Answering the telephone 82
Release button 155
Relocating
telephones 172
Remote Access .
Over a private Network 182
Over a public Network 182
Security 185
Tones 184
Using
183
Remote Access dialing filter 47
Remote Access Packages
COS passwords 39
defaults 39
number of 39
Programming 35,
Restricted call
Dialing 127
Line redirection 144
Restrictions
for External Users 35, 36
for Internal Users 35, 36
number of 37
Ring Again
Feature description 123
Ring type 121
System Coordinator Guide
242 Index
Ringing
Changing the ring 120
On/Off for lines 175
Service Modes 54
Volume 121
Run/Stop
Feature description 138
Saved Number Redial
Feature description 124
Service Modes 51
Auxiliary Ringer 54
cancelling 162
Control telephone 51, 162
Default start and stop times
53
Extra-dial telephone 54, 166
Feature description 162
ON and OFF 52
Programming 51
Ringing 54
Trunk Answer 54
Set Profile 62
Signaling
Host System 137
Speaker
Paging 158
Telephone 43
Speed Dial
Class of Service 170
displays 169
Feature description 168
Personal programming
Standard Dial 117
Supervision 174
System Speed Dial
bypassing restrictions 27
changing name 27
T
Target lines 176
Call Forward On Busy 44
Telephone
Administration lock 121
Alarm 164
buttons 154
Control 165
Customizing 116
Direct-Dial 34, 44, 165
Emergency 166
Extra-Dial 166
Hotline 166
Names 28
Prime 78,167
relocating 172
Telephone Abilities
Allow Redirect 45
Automatic Handsfree 43
Auxiliary Ringer 44
Call Forward No Answer 45
Call Forward On Busy 44
Call Pickup (group) 43
Direct-Dial Telephones 44
Full Handsfree 42
Handsfree Answerback 43
Hotline 46
Line/telephone filter 41
Priority Call 47
Redirect Ring 46
Telephone User Cards 15
Their list full
Message 152
Time
display 177
Feature description 177
Timed Release
Feature description 138
Modular DR5 System Coordinator Guide
index 243
Tones
at Remote Access 184
dialing 120
Long 147
Tones
Upgrading
Class of Service passwords
49
denied
Long Tones 147
Transfer
displays 179
external 178
Feature description 178
using Call Queuing 178
using conference 178
using Hold 179
with announcement 178
Transfer denied
Transfer 181
Trunk Answer
Feature description 104
programming 54
U
Voice Call 158
deny 187
Feature description 187
Handsfree Answerback 43,
187
muting tones 187
Voice Call Deny 78
Voice Message Center
lines 60
telephone numbers 60
Volume
Button 155
Y
Your 1 ist full
1
Message 152
Line redirection 144
Modular DR5 System Coordinator Guide
Index
Modular
System Coordinator Guide
Modular
Programming
Record
Note: This Programming
is to be used with
Technical Training Course.
the
Sales Representative:
Customer/Company:
Telephone:
Address:
-
Issue Date:
-
Telephone:
Billing Number:
Installer:
System Coordinator:
Installation Date:
N o t e s :
Enter the quantity into the
(leave
if none).
Expansion Cartridge, 2-Port
I
I
M7310
Expansion Cartridge, 6-Port
M7324
with Busy Lamp Field (BLF)
Trunk Cartridge
I
I
M7324 with Central Answering Position (CAP) Module(s)
Trunk Module
Analog Terminal Adapter
Station Module
for single line phone
Analog Terminal Adapter
I
External Paging Equipment
Music Source
Emergency Telephone(s)
Station Auxiliary Power Supply
Headset
I
. Reset Memory?
Press
you reset the
I
Radio Frequency (RF) Filter Kit
I
be erased and reset
system defaults
end of System Stamp.
Line 1 and Line 2 are assigned to each telephone.
c l
Hybrid
l
Shoulder Rest
select one of
Square
PBX
all programming
I
Each telephone is assigned to a different line until no more lines remain.
Line 1 is assigned to each telephone and all telephones have access to Line Pool 1.
c l
All defaults given in
No line is assigned to any telephone, and all telephones have access to Line Pool
Programming Record shown in
correspond
settings for
default Square Template.
Enter the number of the line to be programmed. A line number must
be two digits in length. A one digit line number requires a leading
zero (examples: Line
, or Line
Line #
Choose one of the following:
Public
Check box if line can be assigned to any set.
Private to
Enter the
Pool (1 to 9)
Enter the number of the Line Pool to which this line will belong.
Pulse
of the set to which the line will be Private.
Choose the method of dialing for this line.
Tone
No
Will the outgoing line, on which no digits have yet been dialed, be
automatically placed on hold when another line is selected?
Yes
(maximum of 7 characters)
-
-
-
-
-
-
Assign a Name (optional) to the line (maximum of 7 characters). Use
the
to enter the characters (example-
-
Restriction Index number
(maximum of 30 numbers)
Enter the Restriction Index number(s) (if any) to be applied.
Refer to page 10 for the
Options are 1 to 30 (example:
Restriction Index numbers which have been assigned Restrictions.
Override Index number
(maximum of 10 numbers)
Enter the Override Index
(if any) to be applied.
Refer to page 10 for the
Options are 1 to 10 (example:
Override Index numbers which have been assigned Overrides.
Enter the DN of the Night Control Set for this line, or None.
(DN default is
Enter the DN of the Night
Yes
No
l
Will this line activate an Auxiliary Ringer when Night Service is ON?
I
I
Use the Copy Record to record the line settings to be copied
the
display button.
L
i
n
e
Line
Line
Line
Public
Private to
Pool (1 to 9)
Pulse
Tone
Yes
No
No
Yes
(DN default is
(maximum of 7 characters)
Restriction Index number
(maximum of 30 numbers)
Override Index number
(maximum of 10 numbers)
(DN default is
Yes
No
- - i i - - -
_ _ _ _ _ _ _
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Enter the
of the set to be programmed.
are
or 4 digits in
length in effect (example: Set
length, depending on the
Enter the set model (example:
Q
Set #
Model
Default is assignment of Lines 1 and 2 -both
on set
Ring
Enter the Line Numbers which are assigned to th:s set and will Ring
(example:
O-1 1).
No ring
Enter the Line Numbers which are assigned to this set and will not Ring
(example:
A maximum of four
may be assigned to one set.
Enter the Answer Group
(if any) which
No ring
Enter the Answer Group
(if any) which will not Ring at this set.
(defauit is No Line Pool)
Enter the Line Pool numbers that are accessible by this set
are NO (none), or 1 to 9 .
(example: 1.2.5
(default is
Enter the number of Intercom keys for this set. Options are 0 to 8.
Ring
intercom keys)
None
Line #
Pool #
is
also Ring at this set.
one of the
Check the box if there is no Prime Line.
If the Prime Line is an outside line, enter the Line number.
If the Prime Line is a Line Pool, enter the Line Pool number.
Check the box if the
Line is an intercom (WC).
(maximum of 7 characters)
Assign a Name (optional) to the set (maximum of 7 characters). Use
Restriction Index number
(maximum of 30 numbers)
Enter the Restriction Index number(s) (if any) to be applied.
Options are 1 to 30
Refer to page 10 for the
Restriction Index numbers which have been
Restrictions.
Override Index number
(maximum of 10 numbers)
Enter the Override Index number(s) (if any) to be applied.
Options are 1 to 10 (example:
Refer to page 10 for the
Override Index numbers which have been assigned Overrides.
Full handsf ree
Choose if the set is to have Full Handsfree capability.
HF Answerback
Choose if the set is to have Handsfree
Pickup group (defautt is NO)
Enter one Pickup Group number. Options are No (none), or 1 to 9.
Page zone (default is 1)
Enter one Page Zone number. Options are No (none), or 1 to 8.
Aux. Ringer
Choose if the telephone will activate an installed Auxiliary Ringer.
Forward no answr
Enter the
Answerback capability.
(if any) of the set which will receive unanswered calls.
Enter the number of rings before the unanswered call is Forwarded
(if a Forward to
is assigned), Options are
and 10.
Priority call
Choose if the set is allowed to use the Priority Call feature.
Use the Copy Record to record the line settings to be copied
the
display button.
I
Set
Set
.
Model
Model
-
-
No ring
Ring
No ring
(default is No Line Pool)
(default is 2 intercom keys)
q
None
Line #
Pool
(maximum of 7 characters)
Restriction index number
(maximum of 30 numbers)
Override Index number
(maximum of 10 numbers)
Full handsfree
HF Answerback
N o
is NO)
(defauh is 1)
Aux. Ringer
N o
Forward no answr
Priority call
Yesq
q
Model
Held reminder
Remind delay
I
Choose if the Held Line Reminder feature is to be active.
Choose the number of seconds delay before Held Line Reminder
at a set.
DRT to prime
Choose if the Delayed Ring Transfer (to Prime Set) feature is to be active.
DRT delay (rings)
Choose the number of rings delay before a Delayed Ring Transfer. to Prime set.
Choose the number of rings at a set before Transfer Callback occurs.
Transf
callbk (rings)
Park timeout
I Choose the number of seconds before a Callback occurs on a Parked call.
hoose if the Background Music feature is to be active.
Dial-O set
Assign the
of the set which receives Dial-O calls, or None.
Alarm set
Assign the
of the set that receives Alarm messages, or None.
Link time (ms.)
Choose the Link time in milliseconds.
Set relocation
Choose if the Set Relocation feature is to be active.
Line pool
Assign the Line Pool codes for each desired Line Pool (Line Pool codes have no defaults)
(1 to 4 digits in length)
Installer pswd.
(Record the Installer Password in the Meridian
Modular Pocket
Change, if required, the six character Installer Password.
,
....
Individual
length
Individual
may be changed. All
Guide)
. . .. ... . . . . .
must be of the same length.
Assign the system-wide
length. Available
lengths are
or 4 digits for a
non-Expanded system, and 3 or 4 digiis for an Expanded system.
(Note: All calls are dropped if the
length is changed. All Administration and
Configuration programming is retained.)
4
set
Alarm set
300
400
q
Yes
(1
4 digits in length)
,
Line pool 1:
Line pool 4:
Line pool 7:
Line pool 2:
Line pool 5:
Line pool 8:
Line pool 3:
Line pool 6:
Line pool 9:
DN length
(Note: All calls ar8
if
DN length is
Configuration programming is retained.)
All Administration and
I
To begin General Administration:
. - - - - Press
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
. . . .. . . . . . . . ................
...................
Record the
I
.
. . . .
.I..
Password here (if assigned):
Maximum length of each Speed Dial code is 16 digits.
Record the Names to be assigned in the Set and Line Programming Records.
Assign the Time and Date as required.
Enter a Restriction for each Restriction Index number. Maximum length of each Restriction is 8 characters.
(The default Restrictions are shown and may be changed if desired)
__
l
l
,
assign Restrictions to lines on the Line Programming Record
assign Restrictions to sets on the Set Programming Record
Maximum length of each Override is 14 characters.
Enter an Override for each Override Index
(The default Overrides are shown and may be changed if desired)
1800
1555
assign Overrides to lines on the Line Programming Record
assign Overrides to sets on the Set Programming Record
Record the Permissions to be assigned in the Set Programming Record. The Permissions include:
l
l
l
Full Handsfree activation
HF (Handsfree) Answerback activation
Pickup Group assignment
Page Zone assignment
Auxiliary Ringer activation
. Forward No Answer (DN) assignment
Forward Delay assignment
Priority Call activation
l
l
l
Trunk answer
Night-O set (default
(Night
Night ring (Night
is
Night
(see Line Programming Record)
(see Line Programming Record)
(see Line Programming Record)
Set)
Night aux. ring (Night Auxiliary Ringer)
(Restriction Override Passwords
25
50
75
51
76
51
77
53
78
54
79
30
55
80
31
56
81
57
82
58
83
09
59
84
10
60
85
61
86
37
62
87
38
63
88
64
89
65
90
66
91
67
92
68
93
69
94 .
26
06
07
06
11
13
33
3
6
14
15
4
16
41
17
16
43
0
20
45
70
95
21
46
71
96
72
97
73
98
74
99
23
48
l
l
entering
programming:
prepare
list under
Set Copy” of any sets
you
duplicated
prepare
list under “line and Set Programming Copy” for any lines or sets
display button.
Source (set):
Source (line #j:
L i n e
D a t a
Copy to set:
Copy to line:
Line
Copy” menu
you
Source (set):
Copy to set:
Source (DN):
Copy to set:
Access
Restrictions
Restrictions
Overrides
Overrides
Night Service
Permissions
The
is a review of each of the main headings which are in the Programming Record and appear on the display during
programming. A checked box,
, beside a heading indicates that line, set, or system-wide settings can be programmed if
programming for that heading is selected.
q
Template
1. Line Data
A. Confiiguration
4.
5.
4. Restrictions
Overrides
6. Permissions
I
7. Night Service
6. Passwords
C. Set Copy
I
I
q

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project